Note - Rehavista

Transcription

Note - Rehavista

DV4/MT4
Comprehensive Help
DynaVox Series 4
DV4/MT4 Comprehensive Help
iii
Copyright
Copyright © 2004 DynaVox Systems LLC
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form, by any means (electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise)
without the prior written permission of the publisher.
Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrightable material and
information allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereafter granted, including without
limitation, material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen
such as screen displays, menus, etc.
Although every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this book, the publisher
assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions.
For information, write to:
DynaVox Systems LLC
2100 Wharton Street, Suite 400
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15203 USA
The European Authorized Representative is:
DynaVox Systems Ltd.
Sunrise Medical Building
High Street Wollaston
West Midlands DY8 4PS
England
Tel: 44 (0) 1384 446789
DynaVox® is a registered trademark of DynaVox Systems, LLC. DynaVox DV4 and DynaVox
MT4 are registered trademarks of DynaVox Systems LLC.
All other brand and product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
First Edition
Published July 2004
Printed in the United States of America
iv
DynaVox Systems LLC
Contents
PART I
COMMUNICATION
1 INTRODUCTION
About the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
What’s in the Box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Intended Use of This Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
DV4/MT4 Care and Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Device Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Carrying Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Transporting Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Where Do I Begin to Customize my Device? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Ways to Customize your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Adding Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Using Buttons to Control Appliances or Perform other Actions . . . . 1-9
Playing Around . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Sharing or Storing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Designing Your Own Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
About the Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Document Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
How to Obtain Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Please Register Your Purchase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Technical Support is Available to Help You . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
v
Contents
2 SIMPLE PAGE CREATION
Introduction to Page Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
The Message Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Introduction to Page Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Scroll Through the Viewports to Find a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Search for a Page by Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Use Page History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Use Existing Page Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
DynaVox Language Applications Page Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
8 Button Preschool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
8 Button Auditory Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
15 Button Auditory Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
12 Button Adult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
15 Button Teen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
30 Button Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
40 Button Conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Skeleton Page Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
DynaBooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Exploratory Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Medical Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Gateway Series 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Gateway 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Gateway 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Gateway 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Gateway 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Gateway 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Gateway Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Add Information with the User Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Using the Modify Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Use the Modify Button to Select a New Button Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Use the Modify Button to Add or Edit a Button Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Use the Modify Button to Add or Edit a Button’s Audio Cue . . . . . . . 2-42
Use the Modify Button to Add or Edit a Button’s Symbol. . . . . . . . . . 2-43
vi
DynaVox Systems LLC
Contents
Use the Modify Button to Add or Edit a Button’s Behaviors. . . . . . . .
Use the Modify Button to Change the Color of a Button’s
Background, Label or Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the Modify Button to Customize the Font in a Button’s Label. . .
Create New Pages with Quick Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select a Default Template for Quick Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Vocabulary to Buttons with Quick Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create New Pages with the Skeleton Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open a Skeleton Page Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize a Skeleton Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-45
2-47
2-48
2-49
2-50
2-52
2-54
2-54
2-56
3 ADVANCED PAGE CREATION
Use Page Edit Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
About the Pull-Down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Exit Page Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
About the Page Edit Tool Palette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Display the Tools Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Object Selector Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Label Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Button Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Message Window Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Predictor Button Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Box Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Spray Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Dock the Tools Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Remove Tools Palette Docking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Remove the Tool Palette in Page Edit Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Set Object Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Spray/Button Grid Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Grid Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Show Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
vii
Contents
Page and Popup Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Button Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Box and Divider Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbol Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab Control Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the Properties Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Button Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbol Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab Control Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Box Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Search Box Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Divider Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Label Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Area Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Popup Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hide the Properties Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create New Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Modify Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a New Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open an Existing Page or Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import a Page or Popup into the Page Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select a Color as the Background of a Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use a Picture as the Background of a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Open Page and Close Page Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make a Duplicate Page or Save Page Editing Changes under a
New Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Page Editing Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export a Page or Popup from Page Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Modify Popups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a New Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select a New Popup Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select a New Popup Border Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select a New Text Color for the Popup Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
3-35
3-40
3-46
3-49
3-51
3-53
3-56
3-60
3-61
3-61
3-62
3-63
3-64
3-66
3-66
3-67
3-68
3-68
3-70
3-71
3-73
3-73
3-74
3-75
3-77
3-78
3-80
3-82
3-83
3-84
3-85
3-86
3-87
3-88
3-89
DynaVox Systems LLC
Contents
Select New Font Styles for the Popup Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Add or Edit Text for the Popup Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
Choose an On Page Jump Setting for a Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Select a Color as the Background of a Popup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
Use a Picture as the Background of a Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Select Open Page and Close Page Behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Create and Modify Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
Save a Page or Popup as a Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
Open a Copy of a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
Create and Modify Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
Draw a Single Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
Draw a Grid of Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
Swap Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
Fill Buttons from Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
Fill Buttons from Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
Pour the Contents of a Page or Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
Change the Shape of a Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
Change the Color of a Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Customize a Button Border (Color and Width) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
Add a Behavior to a Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
Add a Behavior to a Group of Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
Add an Audio Cue to a Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
Create Active Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
Create an Active Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123
Create and Modify Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126
Create a New Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126
Change the Color of a Label Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127
Change the Color of Label Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
Change the Alignment of Label Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129
Add Text to a Label Property/Change the Text in a Label Property 3130
Customize the Font in a Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
Create and Modify Active Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
Create a New Active Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
Change the Color of an Active Label Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
Change the Color of the Text in an Active Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137
ix
Contents
Change the Alignment of Text in an Active Label . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize the Font in an Active Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Active Label Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Modify Symbol Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw a Symbol Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Color of a Symbol Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize the Way a Symbol is Displayed in a Symbol Property
Change the Symbol in a Symbol Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Message Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a New Message Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize the Behavior of a Message Window . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Modify Tab Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw a Set of Tab Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust the Height of Tab Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust the Number of Tab Panes in a Set of Tab Controls . . . . .
Change the Color of a Tab Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Swap Two Tab Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Tab Control Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Modify Search Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a New Search Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Color of a Search Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Local Search to a Search Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add an Audio Cue to a Search Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Behaviors of Buttons in a Search Box . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Layout Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cut and Paste an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy and Paste an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select all the Items on a Page or Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Undo a Change in Page Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redo a Change in Page Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lay Out Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alphabetize Selected Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Button Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear Button Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x
3-138
3-139
3-140
3-141
3-142
3-144
3-145
3-146
3-147
3-148
3-149
3-150
3-151
3-152
3-153
3-154
3-154
3-155
3-156
3-157
3-158
3-158
3-161
3-162
3-164
3-164
3-164
3-165
3-166
3-167
3-167
3-168
3-168
3-168
3-169
3-170
DynaVox Systems LLC
Contents
Use the Layout Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display a Background Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remove the Background Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activate the Snap to Grid Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivate the Snap to Grid Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Align Objects on a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Objects on a Page or Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bring an Item to the Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send an Item to the Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Move an Object on a Page or Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resize an Object and its Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resize an Object without Changing the Size of its Contents . . .
Organize Page Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Modify Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Color of a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select a New Box Style (Labeled or Unlabeled) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Box Border / Change the Color of a Box Border. . . . . .
Change the Color of Label Text in a Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize the Label Font in a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Text in a Box Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Dividers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Draw a Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Color of a Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust the Width of a Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Buttons with a Group Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Scanning Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit the Page Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-170
3-171
3-171
3-172
3-172
3-172
3-173
3-175
3-176
3-177
3-177
3-178
3-179
3-181
3-181
3-182
3-183
3-184
3-184
3-185
3-186
3-187
3-188
3-188
3-189
3-190
3-190
3-191
3-193
3-195
4 DV4/MT4 ADVANCED FEATURES
Rate Enhancement Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prediction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Context Prediction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Abbreviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
xi
Contents
About Prediction Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Create Prediction Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Define and Use Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Create an Abbreviation Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Delete an Abbreviation Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Edit an Abbreviation Expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Export an Abbreviation Expansion to the User Files Folder . . . . . 4-13
Export an Abbreviation Expansion to a USB Storage Device or
Secondary Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Share an Abbreviation Expansion with a Windows Computer . . . 4-17
Share an Abbreviation Expansion with a Macintosh Computer. . . 4-17
Import an Abbreviation Expansion from the User Files Folder . . . 4-18
Import an Abbreviation Expansion with a USB Storage Device or
Second Data Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Import an Abbreviation Expansion from a Windows Computer . . . 4-21
Import an Abbreviation Expansion from a Macintosh Computer . . 4-21
Activate the Abbreviation Expansions Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Create and Use Dictionary Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Create a New Dictionary Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Delete a Dictionary Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Edit a Dictionary Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Export a Dictionary Entry to the User Files Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Export a Dictionary Entry to a USB Storage Device or Secondary
Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Share a Dictionary Entry with a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Share a Dictionary Entry with a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Import a Dictionary Entry from the User Files Folder . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Import a Dictionary Entry with a USB Storage Device or
Second Data Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Import a Dictionary Entry from a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Import a Dictionary Entry from a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Learn Vocabulary from a Text File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Find an Item in the Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
View All the Dictionary Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
View Only the User Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Add a Concept Tag to a Dictionary Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
xii
DynaVox Systems LLC
Contents
Find Files, Pages, and Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Find Files Using the File Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Create a New Folder in the File Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Share Exported Files with a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Share Exported Files with a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Import a File from a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Import a File from a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Copy a Picture File onto a USB Storage Device or
Secondary Data Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Share a Picture File with a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Share a Picture File with a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Import a Picture File with a USB Storage Device or
Import a Picture File from a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Import a Picture File from a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Find Pages Using the Page Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Delete a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Copy a Page and Paste the Copy in a New Location . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Cut a Page and Paste it in a New Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Create a New Folder in the Page Browser Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Create a Package in the User Files Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Create a Package with a USB Storage Device or
Share a Package with a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Share a Package with a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Import a Package from the User Files Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Import a Package with a USB Storage Device or Secondary Data Card
4-87
Import a Package from a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Import a Package from a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Export a Page, Popup or Template to the User Files Folder . . . . . 4-90
Export a Page, Popup or Template to a USB Storage Device or
Share a Page, Popup or Template with a Windows Computer . . . 4-95
Share a Page, Popup or Template with a Macintosh Computer . . 4-96
Import a Page, Popup or Template from the User Files Folder . . . 4-96
xiii
Contents
Import a Page, Popup or Template with a USB Storage Device . . 4-99
Import a Page, Popup or Template from a Windows Computer . 4-101
Import a Page, Popup or Template from a Macintosh Computer 4-102
Create and Modify Symbols and Symbol Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Create a New Symbol Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
Add a Copy of a Symbol to a New Symbol Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Delete a Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Customize a Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Save a Picture as a Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Export a Symbol to the User Files Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Export a Symbol to a USB Storage Device or Secondary Storage Card
4-119
Share a Symbol with a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Share a Symbol with a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Import a Symbol from the User Files Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Import a Symbol with a USB Storage Device or Second Data Card . 4125
Import a Symbol from a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Import a Symbol from a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Record Sounds and Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Create and Modify Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Use the Note Palette to Create a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Use the Piano Keyboard to Create a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Sing a Song in the Song Editor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Add a Sing Behavior to a Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Edit a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Managing Song Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Delete a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Change the Title of a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Copy a Song File onto a USB Storage Device or Secondary Data Card
4-142
Share a Song File with a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Share a Song File with a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
Import a Song File with a USB Storage Device or Secondary Data Card
4-145
Import a Song File from a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
xiv
DynaVox Systems LLC
Contents
Import a Song File from a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Modify Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a New Sound File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add a Play a Sound Behavior to a Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a Sound File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play a Sound File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename a Sound File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Record Over a Sound File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View the Properties of a Sound File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy a Sound File onto a USB Storage Device or
Secondary Data Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Share a Sound File with a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Share a Sound File with a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import a Sound File with a USB Storage Device or
Secondary Data Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import a Sound File from a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import a Sound File from a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the Color Selector Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select a Color from the Color Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a Custom Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Behaviors to Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the Behavior Editor to Add a Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Behaviors: Add an Activate a Macro Behavior . . . . . .
Common Behaviors: Add a Go to Page Behavior . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Behaviors: Add a Go to Page & Search Behavior . . .
Common Behaviors: Add a Go to Sleep Behavior . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Behaviors: Add an Open Popup Exclusively Behavior
Common Behaviors: Add a Pause Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Behaviors: Add an Insert Text Behavior . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Behaviors: Add a Speak Text Behavior . . . . . . . . . . .
Program and Use Environmental Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Learn a New Infrared Remote Control Command . .
Delete an Infrared Remote Control Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename an Infrared Remote Control Command . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add an Infrared Remote Control Command to a Button . . . . . . .
4-148
4-148
4-150
4-151
4-153
4-154
4-154
4-155
4-156
4-157
4-159
4-160
4-160
4-162
4-163
4-164
4-164
4-167
4-167
4-170
4-173
4-175
4-176
4-177
4-181
4-182
4-183
4-184
4-185
4-186
4-188
4-190
4-191
4-191
xv
Contents
Add a New Infrared X-10 Command to a Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-193
Add a GEWA Jupiter Phone Command to a Button . . . . . . . . . . 4-196
Add a Tash Phone Command to a Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198
Use Queueing Behaviors to Build Multi-Step Commands . . . . . . 4-200
Use the MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-204
Create an MP3 Playlist and Add Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-207
Delete a Whole Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-208
Play MP3 Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-209
Edit a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-210
View Track Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-212
Copy an MP3 File onto a USB Storage Device or Secondary Data Card
4-213
Share an MP3 File with a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-215
Share an MP3 File with a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-215
Import an MP3 File with a USB Storage Device or Secondary Data Card
4-216
Import an MP3 File from a Windows Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-217
Import an MP3 File from a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-218
Use Macros to Automate Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-218
Create a New Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-220
Add an Activate a Macro Behavior to a Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-222
Edit a Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-224
Delete a Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-226
Export a Macro to the User Files Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-226
Export a Macro to a USB Storage Device or Secondary Storage Card
4-228
Share a Macro with a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-230
Share a Macro with a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-230
Import a Macro from the Exports Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-231
Import a Macro with a USB Storage Device or Second Data Card . . 4232
Import a Macro from a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-234
Import a Macro from a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-234
Create Personal Reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-234
Create a New Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-236
Delete a Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-239
xvi
DynaVox Systems LLC
Contents
Disable a Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable a Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit a Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Use User Setups Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save User Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load User Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print User Setups Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-240
4-241
4-242
4-242
4-245
4-245
4-246
PART II
CONFIGURATION
5 SYSTEM SETUP
Set Selection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Activate and Customize the Touch Enter Selection Method . . . . . . . . 5-4
Activate and Customize the Touch Exit Selection Method . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Activate and Customize the Scanning Selection Method . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Activate and Customize the Joystick Selection Method. . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Activate and Customize the Audio Touch Selection Method . . . . . . . 5-20
Activate and Customize the Mouse Pause Selection Method . . . . . . 5-22
Activate and Customize the Morse Code Selection Method . . . . . . . 5-25
Activate and Customize Audio Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Set DV4/MT4 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Adjust the Brightness Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Set Backlight Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Set Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Set Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Setting Up Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Modify Speech Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Voices, Volume, and Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Select and Customize a Voice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Choose a Speaker for Voice Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Change the Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Change the Speech Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Pronunciation Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Create a Pronunciation Exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
xvii
Contents
Delete a Pronunciation Exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Edit a Pronunciation Exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Export a Pronunciation Exception to the User Files Folder . . . . . . 5-54
Export a Pronunciation Exception to a USB Storage Device or
Share a Pronunciation Exception with a Windows Computer . . . . 5-58
Share a Pronunciation Exception with a Macintosh Computer . . . 5-58
Import a Pronunciation Exception from the User Files Folder . . . . 5-59
Import a Pronunciation Exception from a Windows Computer . . . 5-60
Import a Pronunciation Exception from a Macintosh Computer . . 5-61
Customize Screen Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Customize Windows and Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Customize the Menu Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Create Default Settings for the Message Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Customize Button Size and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Customize the Scanning Highlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Activate/Deactivate the Enhanced Button Click Feature . . . . . . . . 5-71
Select a Size for Search Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Select a Size for Scroll Buttons/Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Customize Title Bar Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Remove/Add the Modify Button in the Title Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Customize Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Select a Symbol Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Customize the Appearance of Categories in the Select a Symbol Menu
5-77
Activate/Deactivate the Symbol Animation Feature . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Protecting System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Set up Password Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Deactivate Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Change Your Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Activate/Deactivate the Menu Hold Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
6 HARDWARE
DV4/MT4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Data Storage Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Save Information to the Data Storage Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
xviii
DynaVox Systems LLC
Contents
Installing a Second Data Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Battery Information and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Check Available Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Calibrate the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Plug the Device In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Charge the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Replace the MT4 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Replace the DV4 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Using External Devices with the DV4/MT4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Use an External Switch to Turn on the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Customize the Behavior of the Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Use a Computer Keyboard with Your Series 4 Device . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Select a System Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
DV4/MT4 Reset Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Perform a Soft Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Perform a Power Button Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Perform a Hard Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Maintaining the Device’s RAM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Checking the Remaining Memory on a Data Storage Card. . . . . . . . 6-22
DV4/MT4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Perform System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Calibrate the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
7 BACKING UP, RESTORING, AND UPGRADING USER DATA
Backing Up and Restoring User Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Back Up User Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Back Up with a Removable USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Back Up to a Data Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Back Up to a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Back Up to a Macintosh Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Restore User Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Restore with a Removable USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Restore with a Data Storage Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Restore from a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Restore from a Macintosh Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Software Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
xix
Contents
Upgrade with a Removable USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrade with a Data Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrade with a Windows Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrade with a Macintosh Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-21
7-22
7-24
7-26
PART III
APPENDICES
A BEHAVIOR REFERENCE
B PAGE EDITING SOFTWARE FOR WINDOWS
Install Page Editing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Transfer Pages from Page Editing Software to a DV4/MT4 Device with a USB
Cable Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Transfer Pages from Page Editing Software to a DV4/MT4 Device with a USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
C USING DYNAVOX 3100 USER ENVIRONMENTS
Import a 3100 User to a Series 4 Device from a DynaVox 3100 or DynaMyte
3100 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Import a 3100 User to a Series 4 Device from DynaVox System Software C7
G GLOSSARY
I INDEX
xx
DynaVox Systems LLC
Communication
1: Introduction
2: Simple Page Creation
3: Advanced Page Creation
4: DV4/MT4 Advanced Features
Introduction
The DynaVox Series 4 device is a sophisticated augmentative
communication tool with a dynamic, touch screen display that allows
an individual to quickly select words or phrases which are then
spoken by the device.
The DV4 and MT4 contain a number of pre-programmed page sets
developed by a team of speech-language pathologists that feature
communication pages on a spectrum of topics. These pages make it
easy for communicators to initiate and hold conversations with
friends, family, education professionals, and clinicians.
Individuals can communicate using one of the built-in page sets, or
can create partly or completely new sequences of communication
pages. A variety of options exist for editing existing pages or for
creating new pages. With the built-in page sets, vocabulary can be
added to existing buttons. The Skeleton Pages are another option for
1-1
Chapter 1: Introduction
adding new vocabulary to the device. The built-in skeleton pages
provide a series of pre-linked, empty pages to which individuals can
add their desired vocabulary. The Quick Page feature, used with
provided templates, offers another easy way to add customized
vocabulary and eliminates the need to build pages from scratch. The
templates provided offer a variety of page layouts. Pages created
with templates can be combined with one another or with pages from
the pre-programmed page sets.
Finally, individuals may use either of two ways to create new pages
from scratch. DynaVox Series 4 editing software, provided with the
device, gives augmented communicators and their care teams a
convenient way to create new vocabulary on new pages with a
Windows®-based PC. Users without access to a PC may choose to
use the built-in Page Edit mode, similar to the PC-based editing
software, to create their own new pages with new vocabulary.
Individuals who want to increase the speed of their communication
can do so with one or more of the built-in rate enhancement features,
including abbreviation expansion, flexible abbreviation expansion,
and word, character and recency prediction.
The Series 4 provides a choice of several different voices ranging
from child to adult, both male and female. In addition, individuals also
have the option of recording words, phrases and sentences in their
own voices.
The device also includes a universal remote control module that
allows individuals to manage their environment using electronic
signals (including infrared, X-10, and phone commands). The internal
remote control can be used to operate televisions, CD and DVD
players, VCRs, Windows-based PCs and other common household
appliances and consumer electronics with infrared capabilities. Two
different sets of phone controls (GEWA Jupiter and Tash) enable
telephones to be dialed and answered using the device.
1-2
DynaVox Systems LLC
The DV4 and MT4 can also play sound recordings in .WAV and .MP3
format, and can display photos and other graphics files in digital
format.
The DV4/MT4 device is equipped with hardware interfaces that allow
a variety of external devices to be connected via the USB, switch,
serial, microphone, or speaker ports. To facilitate file sharing and
backing up of user data, the device can be connected to either a
Windows or Macintosh computer or to removable storage devices,
such as data storage cards, or a removable USB storage device
(flash storage).
Other settings control other user interface features, such as speaker
volume, screen brightness, date and time settings, the language in
which the menu is displayed, and which items appear on the header
of the touch screen.
The DV4 and MT4 can be tailored to the needs of an individual in
virtually any situation, since any one of a variety of selection methods
can be chosen to select buttons or other items on the screen. The
built-in selection methods include touch selection (an item is selected
when touched, or when touch is removed), switch selection (an item
is selected by activating a switch), Morse code (an item is selected by
entering a Morse code sequence), mouse pause (an item is selected
by pausing a mouse over it) and joystick selection (an item is
selected by movements of a joystick). Each selection method has a
variety of settings to further tailor it to individual needs.
1-3
About the Device
ABOUT THE DEVICE
This section describes the contents of the box containing your
DynaVox Series 4 device; outlines the intended use of the device;
and provides instructions for caring for, carrying and transporting your
device.
What’s in the Box?
Carefully remove your DynaVox Series 4 device and other items from
the box. Your DynaVox shipping box should contain the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2 Note:
Intended Use of This
Product
1-4
DV4 or MT4 communication device
DC power adapter/charger
Shoulder strap
Short handle strap
Registration card
Quick Start manual
Stylus for making touch screen selections
USB cable
PC Page Editing Software (Non-Speaking) on CD
Be sure to save the box and packing material. If you ever need to
send your device back to DynaVox Systems for repair, you’ll need
the box and packing material to ship it safely.
Your DynaVox Series 4 device is intended for everyday
communication situations. It should not be relied upon as a means of
DynaVox Systems LLC
About the Device
communicating emergency medical information. We recommend
having multiple ways to communicate information during a medical
emergency.
DV4/MT4 Care and
Handling
This section contains information on cleaning and caring for your
device, and on carrying and transporting it.
Device Care
To clean your DV4 or MT4, first turn the unit off and then wipe it
gently with a damp cloth or soft paper towel. You may dampen the
towel with a mild window cleaner to remove fingerprints, food
particles and dust.
Do not use tape or stickers on either the touch screen or the plastic
case, as they are difficult to remove and may damage the device
surface. Tape, stickers and other sticky materials can damage the
touch screen and interfere with the operation of the device.
Be sure to avoid getting your DV4 or MT4 wet. Never submerge it in
water (e.g., dishwater). If your unit accidentally gets wet, be sure to
shut it down and allow it to dry thoroughly. If after 24 hours you find
that the device seems to function normally, there is probably no
damage. If the device fails to function or behaves abnormally, contact
DynaVox Technical Support at 1-800-344-1778 for instructions. You
may need to ship the device to DynaVox Systems for repairs.
Be careful not to drop the unit. Such treatment is not recommended
and can shorten the life of your device.
Do not use a sharp object to make selections on the touch panel, as
this can cause damage. If you need to use a pointer to make
1-5
About the Device
selections, be sure it has a cushioned tip. Please use the stylus that
was shipped with your device.
under any circumstances, disassemble your DynaVox
! Caution: Never,
Series 4 communication device. Doing so for any reason will void
the warranty, and you will be responsible for the cost of any
required repairs.
Carrying Your Device
Your DV4 or MT4 was shipped with a short handle strap and a long
shoulder strap. Both Series 4 devices offer two sets of strap
attachment points on the back of the device.
To attach a strap to the device, follow these steps:
1. Remove the small split rings from the clips at the ends of the
carrying strap.
2. Choose two strap attachment points and thread a split ring onto
each one.
3. Clip each end of the carrying strap to a split ring at the strap
attachment points.
Transporting Your Device
If you use your DV4 or MT4 device while in a wheelchair, you should
have it properly mounted for both communication and transportation
purposes. Wheelchair mounting systems are available through
DynaVox Systems LLC.
A protective carrying case is also available for transporting your
device and its accessories. Consult the DynaVox website at
www.dynavoxsystems.com or your DynaVox Systems sales
consultant for more information.
1-6
DynaVox Systems LLC
Where Do I Begin to Customize my Device?
WHERE DO I BEGIN TO CUSTOMIZE MY DEVICE?
The communication pages in your DynaVox Series 4 device contain
buttons that allow you to select words or phrases to be spoken by the
device. Most individuals will want to customize their devices to a
greater or lesser extent, to make it easier to communicate the
information of interest to them or to help them perform other
activities. The Series 4 device contains a variety of tools for changing
the way your device functions.
All individuals will want to incorporate their own personal data into the
device, such as name, address, and other significant information.
The User Setup Wizard is a quick way of inputting this information into
the device.
Many users will want to make changes to the buttons on an existing
page, either to incorporate new vocabulary or perhaps to change the
button’s appearance, so a particular button is more noticeable. The
Modify Button tool is a simple way to change the characteristics of a
single button. The Modify Button tool can also change the way a
button functions. For example, instead of containing a vocabulary
word or phrase, a button can be used to perform various actions or
“behaviors”, ranging from turning on a television to controlling the
Series 4 device itself. You can find more information about these
behaviors later in this section.
Others may find the need to add one or more additional
communication pages to the device. The Quick Page feature is a tool
that creates a new page from a template. With this tool, you can
create a page that is similar in layout to other pages in the page set
you’ve selected. You may want to add a new page to include a
specialized group of vocabulary items to be used in a specific
situation. On the other hand, you may decide to add a new page that
performs a set of actions using some of the specialized behaviors
that buttons can perform. For example, a page could be created for
controlling televisions or other electronic appliances. Another page
might be used for controlling the Series 4 device itself, (i.e., turning
1-7
the speaker volume up and down; controlling the screen brightness,
or turning the device off). Some users may want to create a page for
controlling a computer that can be connected to the device through a
serial cable or accessed via Access IT; the buttons on this page could
be set up to send special keystrokes (e.g., Ctrl or Alt) or a mouse
movement.
Some individuals may even want to create their own complete page
sets, instead of, or in addition to, the built-in page sets. The Skeleton
Pages allow you to add vocabulary and actions to a sequence of
pages that already contain a standard number of buttons and that are
already linked together for ease of navigation. Skeleton page sets are
available with 8, 15, 30 and 40 buttons per page.
Finally, the Advanced Page Creation tools (see Chapter 3:
Advanced Page Creation) allow you to create completely new types
of pages either on your device or on a PC (see Appendix B: Page
Editing Software for Windows). With the advanced editing tools,
you can specify the arrangement of buttons on a page, the location of
the message window, and the colors and fonts used on the page and
on the buttons. You can even create a page without visible buttons,
using a photo or other graphics file, that will allow you to specify
“active areas” that will function like buttons. For example, a page with
a floor plan of a house, could allow you to control appliances in
specified rooms.
You may also use the Advanced Editing tools to create your own
templates for use with the Quick Page feature.
Ways to Customize
your Device
When you are ready to begin customizing your device, you will
probably want to change it in one of these ways:
• Adding vocabulary.
1-8
DynaVox Systems LLC
• Using buttons to control appliances or to perform other actions.
• Playing around by creating music, playing song files, setting up
personal reminders.
• Sharing files with another individual using the Series 4 Device or
storing files.
• Creating your own special style of pages.
Adding Vocabulary
You will want to add new vocabulary to your device as your needs
and interests change. Vocabulary and symbols can be added or
changed with one of these built-in tools:
• Personal information can be added with the User Setup Wizard
• Vocabulary on a button can be changed with the Modify Button
tool.
• A whole new page of vocabulary can be added with the Quick
Page tool.
• Vocabulary from another page set—for example, one of the
medical page sets, or a page given you by another individual—can
be added to your existing page set by linking those other pages to
one of your pages. To do this, add or change the destination of a
navigation button on one of your existing pages.
Using Buttons to Control Appliances or
Perform other Actions
You already know that the buttons on the device can be used to
speak vocabulary or to insert items into the Message Window. In
addition, other actions or “behaviors” can be added to the buttons on
your Series 4 device. Besides speaking or inserting vocabulary,
1-9
behaviors can perform many different types of actions, including
controlling televisions, performing calculator functions, answering a
telephone, or controlling a computer. (See Appendix A: Behavior
Reference for a complete list of the available behaviors.) You can
add these behaviors to buttons with one of these built-in tools:
• The Modify button will allow you to add or remove one or more
behaviors on an existing button.
• You can create a whole new page for buttons with behaviors by
using the Quick Page feature.
• You can use one of the built-in sets of skeleton page sets for
buttons with specialized behaviors.
• You can create one or more pages with a different layout from your
usual page set by using the Advanced Page Creation tools to
create a new template, then by using the Quick Page feature to
add the behaviors to the buttons. Or, if desired, you can also
simply create a new page with the desired behaviors in Page Edit
mode (see Chapter 3: Advanced Page Creation and Add
Behaviors to Buttons on page 4-170 for more information).
Chapter 4: DV4/MT4 Advanced Features also contains step-bystep instructions for setting up some of these types of behaviors on
your device’s buttons.
Playing Around
Your device has several built-in features that support fun activities
such as the following:
• Creating music and saving songs, using the built-in piano
keyboard.
• Playing the songs you create or music that already exists in .MP3
or .WAV files. You might use a removable USB storage device to
store music files, then play them back using buttons that you have
programmed to play the stored tunes.
1-10
DynaVox Systems LLC
• Setting up personal reminders that automatically appear to notify
you of a scheduled activity.
• Creating new symbols or modified symbols for use on the device
buttons.
You will find that you can most easily accomplish these activities by
exploring the device capabilities that are described in Chapter 4:
DV4/MT4 Advanced Features.
Sharing or Storing Files
Your Series 4 device has tools that allow you to share files with other
individuals who use a Series 4 device. You can give files to other
individuals by using the page and package export functions of the
device. You can also add files from other individuals to your device by
using the page and package import functions.You can export and
import files by connecting any of these items to your device:
•
•
•
•
Windows-based computer
Macintosh computer
Removable USB storage device
Data storage card.
Once your files have been exported to a removable USB storage
device or to a data storage card that is attached to your device, you
can temporarily loan the storage card or storage device to another
individual, who can then import the files from the card or device.
See Chapter 4: DV4/MT4 Advanced Features for detailed
information on importing and exporting files.
1-11
Designing Your Own Pages
You can design your own specialized pages with the Advanced Page
Creation tools that are built into your Series 4 device. Or, for
convenience, the page editing software may also be used on a
Windows-based computer. Using the page editing tools, either on the
device or on a PC, you can design pages with buttons and a
message window in any location desired.
Among the page features that you can control with the page edit
software are the following:
• Defining button sizes, shapes, colors, and labels,
• Creating dividers, tabs, search boxes, or other objects that may be
added to a page.
•
•
•
•
Placing pictures on a page or on buttons.
Positioning any of the objects at specific locations on a page.
Creating active areas on a picture that will act as button.
Designing templates to serve as the foundation for new pages
using the Quick Page feature.
See Chapter 3: Advanced Page Creation for instructions to use the
Page Edit mode/software. See Appendix B: Page Editing Software
for Windows, for more information on installing the software and on
transferring created pages to your device.
1-12
DynaVox Systems LLC
About the Documentation
ABOUT THE DOCUMENTATION
This guide is intended for individuals who will use the Series 4 for
communication or who will assist others in setting up and using the
device.
Many aspects of the DynaVox Series 4 device can be customized,
including both the pages used for communication and various
features of the user interface, such as speaker volume.
This document includes Chapter 2: Simple Page Creation to
provide a basic introduction to adding pages to an existing page set.
Later chapters provide more detailed discussions of the device’s
features and numerous step-by-step procedures for customizing
those features to meet the needs and preferences of individuals who
will be using the device.
Appendixes provide reference materials that are used to customize
the device’s features.
Document
Organization
Before using this document, take some time to become familiar with
its contents, as shown in the following table and then described in
more detail.
1
Chapter
Contents
Introduction
Overview of this document; information
about unpacking, caring for and
carrying the device; and how to get
help on using the device.
1-13
1-14
Chapter
Contents
2
Simple Page Creation
A description of page features and
page navigation; descriptions of
provided page sets; and some simple
ways to change an existing page or
create a new page.
3
Advanced Page
Creation
Detailed instructions for using the Page
Edit tools and for ways to change
existing or create new pages, popups,
and all page attributes.
4
DV4/MT4 Advanced
Features
Detailed instructions for finding files
and other data; importing and exporting
sounds and other data; recording
sounds and songs; and adding and
modifying behaviors.
5
System Setup
Detailed instructions for customizing
the user interface, including selection
methods.
6
Hardware
Detailed information on the device’s
hardware components and on system
maintenance.
7
Backing Up, Restoring,
and Upgrading User
Data
Detailed instructions for backing up and
restoring user-created data and for
performing software upgrades.
A
Behavior Reference
Descriptions of the more than 175
unique behaviors, grouped into 12
different categories.
B
Page Editing Software
for Windows
A description of the provided software
that will enable you to create and edit
communication pages on your
Windows computer instead of on the
DV4/MT4 device
C
Using DynaVox 3100
User Environments
A method for importing existing
Dynavox 3100 information to a
Dynavox Series 4 device.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Chapter
Contents
G
Glossary
Alphabetical list of terminology for this
device.
I
Index
Alphabetical list of topics in this guide.
Use the information in Chapter 2: Simple Page Creation to learn the
following:
• The basic attributes of pages, the ways to navigate from page to
page, and what each of the provided page sets includes.
• Instructions for modifying existing pages.
• Instructions for creating single pages using the Quick Page
feature, or for creating a series of linked pages using the skeleton
page feature.
If you are new to creating pages, start with this chapter.
Refer to Chapter 3: Advanced Page Creation to use the page edit
tools to create new pages completely from scratch. Using the tools in
this chapter, you can customize almost any aspect of page
appearance or behavior:
• The design of the page itself (including the use of photos or other
graphics on the page).
• The location of buttons or the Message Window.
• Any of the characteristics of buttons (color, size, labels, symbols,
etc.)
• The behaviors that are assigned to a button (see Appendix A:
Behavior Reference for a complete list of behaviors).
In Chapter 3, you will also find detailed instructions for the following
activities:
• Use the Page Edit tools and Tool Palette; set object preferences
and use the Properties Menu.
1-15
• Create new pages and modify existing pages, including popups,
templates, and the following items on a page: buttons, labels,
symbols, message window, tab controls and search boxes.
• Perform basic page layout tasks, including page edit functions
(cut, copy, delete, paste, undo and redo); laying out buttons; and
positioning objects on a page.
Refer to Chapter 4: DV4/MT4 Advanced Features to select and use
tools of various types, such as the following:
• Rate enhancement tools to help an individual communicate more
easily by making it quicker to select words or phrases through word
or context prediction, flexible abbreviation and abbreviation
expansion.
• Tools for locating files or pages and for sharing, importing and
exporting these items using a computer or removable storage
device.
• Tools for creating and modifying symbol sets or for creating or
changing symbols.
• Tools for recording sounds or songs, including the use of the piano
keyboard to create a song.
• Tools for creating customized colors.
• Tools for adding various types of behaviors to buttons, including
macros, page navigation, or inserting text in the Message Window
or speaking text (see Appendix A: Behavior Reference for a
complete list of behaviors).
• Tools for controlling external devices through the following types
of commands: infrared, infrared X-10, GEWA Jupiter phone, or
Tash phone. Also, how to queue commands to perform a number
of tasks in sequence.
•
•
•
•
1-16
Techniques for using the built-in MP3 player.
Ways to use macros to automate tasks.
Methods for creating and using personal reminders.
Tools for saving user setup information, so that multiple users may
use a single device.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Refer to Chapter 5: System Setup for detailed instructions for the
following:
• Choosing and refining the method used to select items on a page
(the selection method);
• Customizing the user interface preferences (e.g., brightness,
backlight timeout, date and time settings) and for enabling data
logging, if desired.
• Using speech controls to select a voice, choose the speaker and
volume, change the speech rate, and use pronunciation
exceptions to tailor the device’s speech output to the needs and
preferences of the individual using the device.
• Customizing elements of the screen such menu colors, the
Message Window, the button size and other button features, the
contents of the title bar and the appearance of the symbols used
on the buttons.
• Protecting the defined system settings through the use of a
password or through the Menu Hold feature.
Refer to Chapter 6: Hardware for detailed information on each of the
following:
• Hardware features of the device, including the location of ports.
• Use and installation of the data storage cards
• Procedures for using the battery, including checking available
power; calibrating, charging or replacing the battery; and
instructions for plugging the device into a power source.
• Instructions for using external devices with the DV4/MT4, including
an external power switch, options for the built-in power switch, a
computer keyboard or a system keyboard.
• Reset and other memory-related procedures, such as maintaining
the device’s RAM memory or checking the available memory on a
data storage card.
• System maintenance to improve the device’s speed or accuracy by
eliminating unnecessary memory links or by calibrating the touch
screen.
1-17
Refer to Chapter 7: Backing Up, Restoring, and Upgrading User
Data for detailed instructions for backing up and restoring user data
or performing software upgrades, using either a Windows or
Macintosh computer or a removable storage device.
Refer to Appendix A: Behavior Reference for detailed information
on the various types of behaviors that may be added to the buttons of
the DV4/MT4 device, including behaviors to allow the device to:
• Function as a calculator.
• Perform common behaviors, such as navigating to a page or
deleting information from the Message Window.
• Perform computer-access functions, such as sending a keypress
or mouse movement.
• Display information on or access to system features, such as the
concept browser, the interface features menu, the macro editor, or
the MP3 player.
• Perform environmental control commands, such as IR, IR X-10,
GEWA Jupiter or Tash phone commands.
• Perform commands to control the use of the system keyboard,
such as Alt Key, Caps Lock Key, or Shift Key functions.
• Perform miscellaneous DV4/MT4 device control functions, such as
editing a page, learning vocabulary, or playing a sound.
• Perform navigation functions within the Message Window.
• Perform operations within the Message Window, such as adding
prefixes or suffixes, changing a font, copying, or deleting.
• Perform page navigation functions.
• Performing speech functions, such as changing a voice, or
speaking various specified items (labels, Message Window
contents, etc.)
• Changing various system settings, such as autocapitalize, context
prediction, or mouse pause.
Refer to Appendix B: Page Editing Software for Windows for
information on using the provided DynaVox Series 4 page editing
1-18
DynaVox Systems LLC
software for Windows computers. This non-speaking version of the
DynaVox Series 4 software will enable you to create and edit
communication pages on your Windows computer instead of on the
DV4/MT4 device. These pages can then be easily shared with a
Series 4 device.
Refer to Appendix C: Using DynaVox 3100 User Environments if
you have created many customized pages and popups for a DynaVox
3100 or DynaMyte 3100. Your new DV4/MT4 allows you to import this
information from the 3100 devices so that you can continue using
your customized pages on the new device.
Document
Conventions
This guide uses a few conventions to make it easier for readers to
quickly grasp the information contained here. These include the
following:
• Step-by-step instructions. This document provides numbered sets
of instructions that describe ways to customize your device.
• Names of objects on the screen. Each time a labeled item on the
touch screen is described or mentioned, its name is shown in
italics. Here is an example:
The Modify Button menu will open.
• Names of items to be selected. Each time you are instructed to
select a named item on the touch screen, its name is given in bold.
Here is an example:
Select the Speaker Output menu.
1-19
How to Obtain Help
HOW TO OBTAIN HELP
To assure that you get any assistance you may need, you should be
sure to register your device, as described in this section. If you need
assistance with using the DynaVox Series 4 device, help is available
either through the company website or through DynaVox Technical
Support, both of which are described in this section.
Please Register Your
Purchase
Please fill out and return the registration card that was shipped with
your device. This registration card makes it easier for DynaVox
Systems to help you. Without this information, we can’t know who
uses our devices, or who should receive newsletters, software
updates or other product information.
Each Series 4 device has a serial number sticker on the bottom of the
unit directly below the support leg. Be sure to write the serial number
on your registration card before you mail it. Also, take time now to put
the serial number in a place where it will be handy if you must contact
someone from DynaVox Systems, either to check on an order for
your product or to talk with someone in Technical Support.
Technical Support is
Available to Help You
1-20
DynaVox Systems LLC wants you to be successful with your DV4 or
MT4. To help you, we’ve added frequently requested product
information, including troubleshooting tips and programming advice,
to our company website. To access this information, simply log on to
www.dynavoxsystems.com, select 24/7 Support.
DynaVox Systems LLC
How to Obtain Help
Our website also features detailed information about our technical
support services. If you are unable to find the answers you need on
our website, the Technical Support Center can be reached at 1-800344-1778. Training and programming assistance, as well as technical
troubleshooting support, are available Monday through Friday, from
8:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m. Eastern Standard Time. If you call outside
these hours, you may leave a message on our voice mail system, and
a technical support representative will call you back during normal
business hours. If you purchased your device outside the United
States and Canada, please call the helpline number for your local
DynaVox distributor.
If you call Technical Support, please have your DV4 or MT4 device
and its serial number at hand so that we can talk through whatever
problem you may be experiencing.
You may also contact DynaVox Systems’ Technical Support team by
sending an email to [email protected]. Please include
your device’s serial number in all correspondence.
1-21
Simple Page Creation
This chapter is designed to present a basic introduction to the
communication tools that are part of your new DynaVox Series 4
device. The chapter begins with a basic overview of communication
pages and their components. It then introduces the Page Navigator
menu as a tool for moving from page to page.
Communicating with page sets is also discussed in this chapter. The
DynaVox Series 4 software offers the DynaVox Language
Applications and Gateway Series 4, two unique series of page sets
that are designed to let individual communicators start using the
device right away. Each individual page set is described in this
chapter.
The last feature of this chapter is page creation. The DynaVox Series
4 software offers several simple tools that can be used to quickly and
easily customize the information that is available on your
communication pages. Step-by-step instructions for working with
these page creation methods are included in the second half of this
section.
2-1
Chapter 2: Simple Page Creation
Introduction to Page Attributes
INTRODUCTION TO PAGE ATTRIBUTES
Pages and popups provide the foundation for communication with a
DV4 or MT4 device. A page is a collection of buttons that represent
words, phrases, sentences, behaviors or navigational links to other
pages (or popups). A page covers the entire touch screen below the
title bar.
A popup is a mini-page that is displayed on top of a full size page. A
popup usually contains a group of buttons that are related to a
specific topic or activity.
While buttons are the most prominent visible components of both
pages and popups, a page or popup can include other attributes,
including active areas, active labels, boxes, dividers, search boxes
and tab controls. All of these features are defined in the advanced
page editing section of this documentation. Buttons and the
behaviors that make buttons perform specific tasks are discussed in
the remainder of this section. This section also defines the Message
Window, another prominent aspect of many pages and popups.
Buttons
2-2
A button is a graphic object on a page or popup that can be selected
with a touch, a mouse click or other input device. Buttons are the
most prominent visible components of DynaVox communication
pages. Some buttons contain vocabulary and provide the building
blocks of communicative messages. Other buttons can be used to
send special commands or to navigate between pages and popups.
Most buttons usually feature a label and a symbol to illustrate the
information that is programmed into the button. The actions that take
place when a button is selected are determined by behaviors that are
programmed into each button.
DynaVox Systems LLC
There are several types of buttons, each with a specific function:
Symbol Buttons
This basic button is usually a square button that features a symbol
and a label. It can be used for communication (with an Insert
Label/Insert Text or Speak Label/Insert Text behavior) or as a
command button. Many behaviors can be assigned to a symbol
button, including the commands to activate a macro or perform an
infrared command.
Go To Buttons
This type of button includes a behavior from the Page Navigation
category of behaviors. Go To buttons are used to navigate from one
communication page or popup to another. These buttons are usually
shaped like folders.
Predictor
Buttons
Predictor buttons are found on keyboard pages or popups. As you
use the keyboard buttons to compose a message, the DynaVox
Series 4 prediction feature anticipates your word choices and
displays various options for quick selection. These word choices are
displayed in predictor buttons.
Character
Predictor
Buttons
Character Predictor buttons are found on keyboard pages or popups.
These buttons will use the letters you select on the keyboard page to
predict and present letters that you may want to select next.
Recency
Buttons
Recency buttons are found on keyboard pages or popups that feature
predictor buttons. As you are typing, recency buttons predict only the
words and phrases that you have used recently.
The Message Window
A rectangular area on a page or popup where a text or symbol
message can be composed, the Message Window is a common
component of communication pages and popups. When the Message
Window is selected, the DV4/MT4 device will speak the message it
contains. The size and location of the Message Window may vary,
but moving from page to page will not delete or alter its contents.
2-3
Behaviors
A behavior is an action that is added to a button to give the button a
function. Without a behavior, a button will do nothing when it is
selected. Because of this, each button must have at least one
behavior. Several behaviors assigned to one button will make the
button perform more than one action when it is selected.
DynaVox Series 4 software offers more than 175 unique behaviors.
These behaviors are divided into behavior categories that group
behaviors with similar purposes. The individual behaviors within
these behavior categories are defined in a chart in Appendix A.
Some of the behaviors occur very frequently. For example, most
symbol buttons feature one of four behaviors: Insert Label, Insert
Text, Speak Label or Speak Text. These are the four primary
behaviors for communicating vocabulary from symbol buttons.
BEHAVIOR EDITOR (COMMON BEHAVIORS)
2-4
DynaVox Systems LLC
Each of these behaviors will cause a symbol button to communicate
information in a unique way:
Insert Label
If an Insert Label behavior is assigned to a button, the button’s label
will be sent to the Message Window when the button is selected. The
label will not be spoken until the Message Window is selected. This
behavior allows you to string together labels from multiple buttons to
create a unique message in the Message Window. When the
Message Window is selected, the device will speak the message.
Insert Text
If an Insert Text behavior is assigned to a button, the button’s text
message will be sent to the Message Window when the button is
selected. The text will not be spoken until the Message Window is
selected. This behavior allows you to use text from more than one
button to create a unique message in the Message Window. When
the Message Window is selected, the device will speak the whole
message.
Remember that the button’s text may not be the same as its label.
Text is not a visible part of a button when you are looking at an active
communication page. The label is often representative of longer text.
For example, a button may have Hobbies as a label. The actual text
of the button could be “Swimming and watching movies are my
hobbies.” This text is added to the Message Window when the Insert
Text behavior is assigned to the button.
Speak Label
When you select a symbol button that has a Speak Label behavior
assigned to it, the device will immediately speak the button’s label.
The label will not be sent to the Message Window.
Speak Text
The Speak Text behavior will cause the device to automatically speak
a button’s text message when the button is selected. This text, which
is added when the Speak Text behavior is programmed into the
button, will not be sent to the Message Window. This behavior
enables you to automatically speak lengthy messages without taking
time to compose them in the Message Window.
Be sure to keep these four behaviors in mind when you begin to
explore the pages that are available in your new device. When you
select a symbol button, note whether the device automatically speaks
the button content. If the content is sent to the Message Window but
is not spoken immediately, simply select the Message Window to
prompt the device to speak.
2-5
Introduction to Page Navigation
INTRODUCTION TO PAGE NAVIGATION
Before you begin to explore the page sets that have been provided
with your Series 4 software, it will be helpful to understand how to
move from one page to another. This section offers a description of
the Page Navigator menu and a set of step-by-step instructions for
using this menu to move from page to page.
Open the Page Navigator menu and look at the tools it provides. To
find this menu, follow these steps:
1. Select the pull-down menu button in the title bar at the top of the
touch screen.
2. Select Setup in the main pull-down menu. The Setup menu will
open.
3. Select Page Navigator in the second pull-down menu. The Page
Navigator menu will open.
PAGE NAVIGATOR MENU
2-6
DynaVox Systems LLC
The Page Navigator menu features the following options:
Left Viewport
The left viewport in this menu contains a list
of the page sets. Each page set is displayed
as an individual folder. When a page set
folder is selected, the right viewport will fill
with a list of the pages and popups that are
stored within the folder. Some of the folders
in the left viewport feature an expansion box
beside their names. This small box will
contain either a plus sign (+) or a minus sign
(-). When the expansion box contains a plus
sign, the folder can be expanded to display
smaller folders. Select the expansion box to
see what the folder contains. For example,
the <toplevel> folder has an expansion box
beside its name because it holds all the
individual page sets. If the expansion box
beside the <toplevel> folder features a plus
sign, no other folders will be visible. If you
select the expansion box, the plus sign will
become a minus sign and the folder will
expand to display all the folders it contains.
Right Viewport
When a folder is selected in the left
viewport, the right viewport will fill with a list
of the pages and popups (and other folders,
if any) that are contained in the selected
folder.
Search Text Box
Use the Search feature to look for a page or
popup by name.
Page History
Viewport
Use this viewport to quickly find pages that
you have recently opened. The Page
History viewport lists the pages you have
opened in the order in which they were
opened. The page that is currently open will
be first in the list. The previous page will be
listed below the current page, and so on.
Popups are not displayed in the Page
History viewport.
2-7
Pull-Down Menu
The unnamed pull-down menu in the lower
right corner of the menu enables each
individual to specify what type of page files
are displayed in the Page Navigator menu
viewports. This pull-down menu has three
options: Popups Only, Pages Only and All.
OK/Cancel
Buttons
Select the OK button to open the page or
popup that is selected in the right viewport.
Select the Cancel button to close the menu
without opening a new page.
There are three ways to find a page or popup in the Page Navigator
menu. You can scroll through the viewports to find the page or popup.
You can also use the Search feature to quickly locate a specific page
by name. Lastly, you can use the Page History viewport to find a
recently opened page or popup. Step-by-step instructions for these
three methods are included here.
Scroll Through the Viewports to Find a Page
Open the Page Navigator menu (page 2-6) and look through the
viewports for a page or popup.
To do this, follow these steps:
1. Select the up and down scroll buttons beside the left viewport to
look through the available page set folders. You may need to
select the expansion box beside the <toplevel> folder to see all the
folders.
2. Select a page set folder in the left viewport. When a folder is
selected, the right viewport will fill with a list of the pages and
popups that are included in the chosen page set.
3. Select the scroll buttons beside the right viewport to look through
the list of pages.
2-8
DynaVox Systems LLC
4. Select the name of the page you want to open.
5. Select the OK button to close the Page Navigator menu.
The page you selected in the right viewport will open when the
menu closes.
Search for a Page by Name
Open the Page Navigator menu (page 2-6) and use the Search
feature to open page or popup.
1. Select the Search text box. A system keyboard popup will open.
2. Use the system keyboard to enter the name of a page.
3. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup. The
page name you entered will be highlighted in the right viewport of
the Page Navigator menu.
The page you selected in the right viewport will open when the
menu closes.
Use Page History
Open the Page Navigator menu (page 2-6) and use the Page History
viewport to open page or popup.
2-9
1. Select the up and down scroll buttons beside the Page History
viewport to look through the pages that have been opened
recently.
2 Note:
Remember that popups are not displayed in this viewport.
2. Select the name of a page in the Page History viewport.
The page you selected will open when the menu closes.
2-10
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Existing Page Sets
USE EXISTING PAGE SETS
The DynaVox Language Applications and Gateway Series 4 page
sets are a unique feature of DynaVox Series 4 software. Your DV4 or
MT4 device offers 17 different pre-programmed page sets, each one
exclusively designed to meet the cognitive, developmental and
conversational needs of a specific group of individuals. The page sets
have been created to provide useful, appropriate vocabulary and a
reliable page navigation system to individuals who use the Series 4
devices to communicate in their day-to-day lives.
Pre-programmed page sets should be used as a starting point for
device customization. A page set provides the individual who is using
the device with a platform from which to begin communicating. To be
really effective, these pages should be enhanced with personal
information and information about the people the individual talks to or
about. Vocabulary words and phrases that are used often by the
individual should also be added to the pages. The DynaVox
Language Application page sets feature many blank buttons to make
it easy to add original information.
The rest of this section features brief descriptions of the DynaVox
Language Applications page sets. While you are reading the page set
overviews, be sure to use your device to explore the individual pages.
Once you have chosen the page set that best suits your
communication needs, continue to read about quick ways to add your
own personal information to these pages using the User Setup
Wizard, the Modify button, Quick Page and the skeleton pages.
DynaVox Language
Applications Page Sets
This section provides a brief overview of each page set that is
included in the DynaVox Language Applications, including a
description of the pages’ organization and vocabulary content. These
2-11
summaries also include a brief description of the population for whom
the page set was designed.
8 Button Preschool
The 8 Button Preschool page set contains simple, interactive
communication pages for young children. Each page offers eight
large buttons with communicative content. These pages are designed
for beginning communicators who may require some assistance with
page navigation. This page set uses a standard master page
navigation strategy. The vocabulary in this page set is a combination
of full sentences, phrases and words. A simple alphabetic keyboard
is also included.
8 BUTTON PRESCHOOL MASTER PAGE
2-12
DynaVox Systems LLC
8 Button Auditory Scanning
This page set is designed for individuals who access the device
through the auditory scanning selection method. The vocabulary in
these pages is based according to activities and categories.
Vocabulary that will be used frequently and emergency information
are both positioned high in the scan cycle, enhancing the accessibility
of this information. This vocabulary is presented as full sentences
and phrases. The vocabulary addresses communication needs within
the home, school and community. Navigation is based on the use of a
master page with eight buttons that represent broad categories.
These buttons link to popups and pages that provide additional
activity-specific vocabulary. Many blank buttons are available for
vocabulary customization.
8 BUTTON AUDITORY SCANNING MASTER PAGE
2-13
15 Button Auditory Scanning
This page set is also designed for individuals who access their DV4
or MT4 devices through the auditory scanning selection method. The
vocabulary in these pages is based on both activities and categories.
Items that will be needed frequently and emergency information is
positioned high in the scan cycle to make it easy to access. The
vocabulary in this page set is presented as full sentences and
phrases, and is designed to address communication needs within the
home, school and community. This page set also provides a core
phrase vocabulary that allows each communicator to build novel
messages. Navigation is based on the use of a master page with
fifteen buttons that represent broad categories. These buttons link to
popups and pages that provide additional activity-specific vocabulary.
Many blank buttons are available for vocabulary customization.
15 BUTTON AUDITORY SCANNING MASTER PAGE
2-14
DynaVox Systems LLC
12 Button Adult
This page set was designed to provide adults with basic vocabulary
for conversation during everyday activities. The master page/chapter
master navigational strategy can be used to access pages of
category-based words, phrases and sentences. The vocabulary is
designed to encourage the initiation of dialog and conversational
participation in social, personal and work-related environments. At
the top of many pages in this set are four buttons that provide
immediate access to important vocabulary such as “hello,” “help,”
“please wait” and the current time and date. The 12 Button Adult
page set also contains environmental control pages that can be easily
programmed to work with the DynaVox Series 4 environmental
control features for the operation of appliances like TVs and
computers, providing convenience at home and at work.
12 BUTTON ADULT MASTER PAGE
2-15
15 Button Teen
This 15 Button Teen page set is made for adolescents and young
adults. The pages in this set offer age-appropriate vocabulary that is
associated with common teen experiences. Each page contains 15
buttons with vocabulary that is applicable to a specific activity or
environment. This vocabulary is symbol-based and does not require
literacy skills, although it would also be useful to individuals who have
basic literacy skills. In addition to communicative content, these
pages also contain environmental control features and basic
computer access tools. This page set uses a standard master page
navigation strategy. Many buttons have been left blank for quick and
easy customization.
15 BUTTON TEEN MASTER PAGE
2-16
DynaVox Systems LLC
30 Button Child
This page set has been designed for elementary school-age children.
These 30-button pages contain activity- based and/or category-based
vocabulary for use in conversations at home, at school and in the
community. The pages in this set also include some introductory
single-word vocabulary to support the development of message
building skills, and a phonemic keyboard to encourage children to
sound out words. This page set uses a standard master page
navigation strategy, and has extensive school-based vocabulary.
Additional pages within this set focus on the development of math
and word skills. Sample social scripts are included to provide the
individual who is using the device with typical sentences and phrases
for a variety of social interactions.
30 BUTTON CHILD MASTER PAGE
2-17
40 Button Conversation
The 40 Button Conversation page set is designed for adolescents
and adults with acquired communication impairments. This is a textbased page set that presumes a high degree of literacy. Vocabulary is
presented as complete sentences, phrases and single words. The
page set also features a QWERTY keyboard with word prediction and
page editing capabilities. The 40 Button Conversation page set
fosters independence at home and at work by including
environmental control pages that can be easily programmed for
computers. The navigational strategy is based on tab panes. There
are three main pages, each with six tab panes of activity- and
category-based vocabulary for conversation in the home and in the
community.
These tab panes link to popups with supplementary vocabulary. Many
blank buttons are available for quick and easy customization.
The vocabulary featured in the 40 Button Conversation page set is
based in part on the work of David R. Beukelman, Ph.D.
2-18
DynaVox Systems LLC
40 BUTTON CONVERSATION MASTER PAGE
Skeleton Page Set
The Skeleton Pages set provide a platform for adding your own
unique pages to the DynaVox Language Applications page sets. The
skeleton pages are a series of blank pages and popups that can be
modified to suit the needs of an individual DynaVox user. Each
skeleton page set is a comprehensive group of pages and popups
that are already linked together, providing a consistent navigational
strategy. Skeleton pages are like templates in that they provide a
platform for pages of uniquely customized vocabulary. The page and
buttons have already been created, organized and assigned
appropriate characteristics and behaviors. The only remaining task is
assigning vocabulary to the buttons. Unlike templates, which must be
copied and saved as pages before being customized, the DynaVox
2-19
skeleton pages will be permanently changed when customized
vocabulary is added.
SKELETON PAGE SETS
DynaBooks
DynaBooks are not intended for use as a comprehensive
communication page set. These pages offer literacy activities at
varying levels of complexity. Link these pages to an individual’s
communication page set to encourage participation in reading
activities and the development of literacy skills.
2-20
DynaVox Systems LLC
DYNABOOKS
Exploratory Pages
The Exploratory Pages provide an informal opportunity to explore the
features of the DynaVox Series 4 devices. The Access, Leisure and
Language activities allow individuals to experiment with page layout
styles and try different access methods. This type of experimentation
is a good way to learn about the features that are most efficient for an
individual’s linguistic abilities. The various activities are presented on
2-21
a master page with six tab panes. Each pane offers buttons that link
to the activity pages.
EXPLORATORY PAGES
2 Note:
The Exploratory Pages are not intended as a communication page
set or as a formal evaluation tool, but as an informal observation of
physical access abilities and communication skills.
Medical Pages
The Medical Pages do not make up a comprehensive page set.
These pages offer vocabulary for discussing medical needs and
communicating during a hospital stay. The vocabulary, which reflects
a wide range of complexity, is organized as full sentences and
phrases. It is presented on pages, popups or tab panes that link to
2-22
DynaVox Systems LLC
additional popups. The Medical pages also feature a QWERTY
keyboard with word prediction for novel message generation. The
pages in the Medical page set offer various page layouts; the desired
layout can be linked to an individual’s primary communication page
set.
MEDICAL PAGES
Gateway Series 4
DV4 and MT4 devices also offer Gateway Series 4©, a
developmentally-based series of page sets designed for DynaVox by
Joan Bruno, Ph.D., CCC-SLP. The Gateway page sets accommodate
the fundamental communication needs of young users as well as the
complex communication needs of competent adult communicators.
Consistency in the design of all the page sets ensures that a user can
seamlessly move from a basic page set to the next level of
complexity while maintaining his or her communicative competence.
2-23
Each Gateway page set includes a “core” single word vocabulary that
enables an individual to converse about a range of topics. Gateway
page sets also feature activity-based pages to promote efficient
communication within focused activities.
This section provides a brief description of each individual Gateway
Series 4 page set and an overview of its intended user population.
GATEWAY SERIES 4 PAGE SETS
Gateway 12
Gateway 12 is designed for children, chronologically between two
and six years of age, whose receptive language performance is at the
18-24 month level. Gateway 12 is best suited for individuals who are
able to successfully access a 12-location button array and
developmentally ready to begin combining words to create multi-word
messages.
2-24
DynaVox Systems LLC
Gateway 12 includes a variety of topical page sets. Each set focuses
on a different activity or environment. In addition, each set provides a
core single word vocabulary that is intended for use in a focused
activity mediated by an adult communication partner.
GATEWAY 12 MASTER PAGE
Gateway 20
Gateway 20 targets two distinct user populations. The first includes
children, chronologically between two and 15 years of age, whose
receptive skills are at the 24-30 month level. These children may
demonstrate severe physical impairments, mild to moderate cognitive
limitations, and/or an oral apraxia. The second clinical population
includes children whose diagnosis falls within the PDD - Autistic
Spectrum. These children are chronologically between three and 10
years of age and typically use PECS with an “I want” sentence strip.
They can recognize symbols for nouns, verbs and some adjectives
2-25
and adverbs. Both of these user populations would be
communicating in messages of one or two words.
Gateway 20 includes a variety of features that are intended to
enhance language development opportunities and expand the size of
the core vocabulary. Sentence Development Links provide a
simplified method for creating a sentence. Selecting a verb
automatically opens a popup of associated “Things” that the child can
use to complete a message. “Describing” and “Colors/Shapes” links
are available on each of the associated “Thing” popups, providing
additional opportunities for a child to expand the complexity of his or
her sentences. The present progressive verb form (-ing) is modeled
on the verb page to promote spontaneous usage in later page sets.
In this page set, semantic Power Strips provide a set of grammatically
associated words (walk, run, jog and skip, for example) that offer
communicators opportunities for a greater diversity of expression. An
Opposite button on the Descriptive Words popup systematically
expands the available vocabulary. A set of five tab controls (About
Me, Time to Chat, Time to Learn, Time to Play, Time to Relax) can
2-26
DynaVox Systems LLC
help to increase a child’s opportunities for participating in dialogues
and educational or recreational activities.
Gateway 30
Gateway 30 is designed for adolescents and adults who demonstrate
limitations in cognitive-language performance. Candidates for
Gateway 30 communicate in single- or multiple-word utterances, and
typically do not use function words (e.g. the, this, with) or word
endings such as “-ing” or “ed” as a part of their spontaneous
message generation. The vocabulary within this page set is
functionally based and reflects many of the activities of daily living.
The main page of the Gateway 30 page set includes simple object
categories such as Foods, Household and Clothing. A set of five tab
controls is included. The About Me tab control can be customized to
2-27
include general information about the individual who is using
Gateway 30. The Talk to Friends tab control offers expressions that
can be used in social conversation. The Talk About Holidays tab
control enables the user to talk about his or her birthday and the
events that occur during the different months of the year. The Talking
in Town tab control provides general messages for communicating
within the community and the Time to Relax tab control offers a set of
functions that the user can operate to help control his or her
environment.
Gateway 40
Gateway 40 addresses the needs of children, chronologically aged
three to 12 years, whose receptive skills are at the 30-60 month level.
The expressive performance of these individuals would range from
use of two- or three-word telegraphic sentences to syntactically
2-28
DynaVox Systems LLC
correct sentences. This page set is ideal for individuals who have the
potential to learn to use word endings, articles and prepositions.
Spelling and reading should be among the educational goals of
Gateway 40 users.
Semantic Power Strips provide a set of grammatically associated
words (walk, run, jog and skip, for example) that offer communicators
opportunities for a greater diversity of expression. All forms of the
verb “to be” and frequently used object categories like Household and
Toys are easily accessible from the main page. An Opposite button
on the Descriptive Words popup systematically expands the available
vocabulary. Five tab controls (About Me, Time to Chat, Time to Learn,
Time to Play, Time to Relax) can help to increase a child’s
opportunities for participating in dialogues and educational or
recreational activities.
2-29
Gateway 60
The Gateway 60 page set is an excellent option for children and
adults whose receptive language skills have reached at least the four
year level. These individuals should be able to construct five- to sixword sentences that include articles, prepositions and pronouns.
Gateway 60 users should be using or learning to use the full range of
word morphology features. Ideal users would also benefit from
access to the spelling and word prediction features.
In this page set, Semantic Power Strips (sets of grammatically
associated words) are available for verbs and nouns. These power
strips make a greater diversity of expression easily available to the
user. The main page offers frequently used object categories like
Foods, Household and Hygiene.
The Gateway 60 page set offers a variety of vocabulary categories,
including Time Words, States, Capitals, Planets and World Places. An
Opposite button on the Descriptive Words page systematically
expands the available vocabulary. Five tab controls (About Me, Time
to Chat, Time to Learn, Time to Play, Time to Relax) can help to
increase a child’s opportunities for participating in dialogues and
educational or recreational activities.
2-30
DynaVox Systems LLC
Gateway Pro
Gateway Pro is designed for literate AAC users who can use direct
selection or scanning to work with at least 100 buttons on a page. A
typical Gateway Pro user would demonstrate fully developed
syntactical performance with word endings, articles and prepositions.
Spelling is also an important part of routine message generation.
The main page of Gateway Pro contains a QWERTY keyboard and
consistent access to the most frequently used English words. The
main page also includes a comprehensive selection of “Thing” words
and access to popups for People, Questions, Pronouns, Verbs,
Descriptive Words, Time Words and Places.
2-31
GATEWAY PRO MASTER PAGE
2-32
DynaVox Systems LLC
Add Information with the User Setup Wizard
ADD INFORMATION WITH THE USER SETUP WIZARD
The simplest way to create customized pages for your DynaVox
Series 4 device is to make use of the User Setup Wizard. This feature
is designed to work with active labels in the DynaVox Language
Applications page sets that were included in the Series 4 software.
Active labels are a unique version of the standard labels that can be
used to place text on buttons. Instead of being manually assigned
with a system keyboard, the text in an active label is automatically
filled in and maintained by the Series 4 software. For example, active
labels are often used for buttons that display the time and date. The
time and date buttons are given active labels and the Series 4
software automatically supplies the correct time and date. When
active labels are used in conjunction with the User Setup Wizard, you
enter your personal information into the User Setup Wizard one time.
Then the information is automatically added to any buttons with
active labels relating to personal information. For example, if you
enter the name and address of the individual who will be using the
device into the User Setup Wizard and then open a page with active
labels set to “name” and “address,” those labels will automatically be
filled with correct name and address.
Continue reading this section to learn about using the features of the
User Setup Wizard windows to add your personal information to your
DV4 or MT4 device.
Begin to explore this customization tool by opening the User Setup
Wizard:
touch screen.
2. Select Setup in the main pull-down menu.
3. Select Setup Menu in the second pull-down menu. The Setup
menu will open.
2-33
4. Select the User Setup Wizard button in the Setup menu. The main
window of the User Setup Wizard will open.
The User Setup Wizard presents a series of windows that ask for
specific information. The first window asks for the name, nickname
and email address of the person who will be using the device. When
a text box in one of these windows is selected, a system keyboard
popup will open to provide a way to add information to the text box.
After entering text, select the OK button to close the popup.
USER SETUP WIZARD
Navigation buttons are presented at the bottom of each User Setup
Wizard window:
Clear All
2-34
This button is presented only on the first
page of the User Setup Wizard. Select it to
delete all of the current User Setup Wizard
information. When you select the Clear All
button, a confirmation window will be
presented and you will be asked to confirm
that you want to clear your current settings.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Next
Select the Next button to move to the next
window in the User Setup Wizard.
Prev
Select the Prev button to go back to the
previous window in the User Setup Wizard.
Finish
The Finish button should be selected when
you have completed all the pages in the
User Setup Wizard. When this button is
selected, a User Setup Wizard Confirmation
Page window will be presented. Use this
window to review your information. Select
the Edit button to make changes and
choose the Save button to save the
information.
Cancel
Selecting the Cancel button will close the
User Setup Wizard without saving any
changes or new information.
As you continue to work through the User Setup Wizard, you will be
able to add the following information to the DynaVox Series 4
software:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Your name (first, middle and last)
Your nickname
Your email address
Your age
Your birthday
Your hobbies
Your address (primary and secondary)
Your phone number (primary and secondary)
The name of the facility where you live or receive therapy
Your parents’ names
Your spouse’s name
The names of your sisters or brothers
The names of your children
2-35
• The names of your pets
• The name of your school or employer
After you have added your personal information (information specific
to the individual who will be using the DV4 or MT4 device) to the User
Setup Wizard, you will be presented with a review of the available
selection methods. Use the scroll buttons on the right side of the gray
viewport to scroll through the selection method descriptions. Think
about the selection method you will be using. The next window will
ask you to choose the page set you would like to use. To select a
page set, choose from the options featured in the Page Set pull-down
menu. Select the Page Set pull-down menu to see all the menu’s
options. When you select one option, the menu will close and display
only the option you selected. Try selecting the Show Me button to see
a sample page from the page set you have selected.
Once you have added your information to the User Setup Wizard,
select the Finish button. You will be presented with a confirmation
page that lists all of your setup data. You may opt to select the Edit
button and make changes. Selecting the Save button will preserve
your data and close the User Setup Wizard and open the page set
you just selected. Once these steps are completed, the DynaVox
Series 4 software will use the personal information stored in the User
Setup Wizard to automatically customize any page with active labels
for user information.
2-36
DynaVox Systems LLC
Using the Modify Button
USING THE MODIFY BUTTON
The Modify button is another quick way to customize a
communication page or popup. The DynaVox Series 4 software offers
the Modify button as a simple way to define the characteristics and
properties of a single selected button. The Modify button is the
square, green button beside the pull-down menu button in the title bar
at the top of the touch screen. Selecting the Modify button and then
selecting a button will open a Modify Button menu with a number of
tools:
MODIFY BUTTON MENU
2-37
2-38
Button Type
Use the Button Type pull-down menu if you
want to redefine the kind of button that has
been selected. This pull-down menu offers
six choices: Symbol, Folder, Flat, Predictor,
Character Predictor and Recency.
Label
The Label text box can be used either to
add a new label to a button or to edit an
existing one.
Audio Cues
Audio cues are words or phrases that are
spoken by the device to identify items on the
touch screen for an individual who uses
auditory feedback to make selections. Audio
cues can be used with selection methods
like scanning, joystick and audio touch. You
can use the Audio Cue text box in the
Modify Button menu to add an audio cue to
a button or to edit a cue that has already
been assigned.
Symbol
Selecting the Symbol button in the Modify
Button menu will open the Select a Symbol
menu. With this menu you can add a new
symbol to your selected button or change
the symbol that is already there.
Behaviors
Behaviors are actions that you want a
button to perform when the button is
selected. For example, you may want to
program a button so that when that button is
selected, it will automatically insert a
message into the Message Window, speak
the message and then clear the Message
Window. This series of actions can be set
with behaviors. Selecting the Behaviors
button in the Modify Button menu will open a
Behavior Editor menu that can be used to
add a new behavior to the selected button
or to make changes to the behaviors that
are already assigned to the button.
DynaVox Systems LLC
2 Note:
Refer to the Behaviors chart in Appendix A to learn more about the
various behaviors and their applications.
Clear
Select the Clear button to remove any label,
audio cue, symbol or behavior that has been
added to the button.
Button Color
Select the Button Color button to open a
Color Selector menu that can be used to
select a new color for the button’s
background. The Button Color button will
always display the color that is currently
selected.
Border Color
Selecting the Border Color button will also
open the Color Selector menu. This button
can be used to choose a new color for the
button’s border. The Border Color button
always displays the current border color
selection.
Label Color
Select the Label Color button to open a
Color Selector menu that can be used to
select a new color for the text in the button’s
label. The Label Color button will always
display the color that is currently selected
for the label text.
Label Font
Select the Label Font button to open a
Select Font menu that can be used to
customize the font that is being used in the
button’s label. The Font button always
displays the current font settings.
The remainder of this section offers step-by-step instructions for
using the Modify Button menu features to customize a button on a
communication page or popup.
2-39
Use the Modify Button to Select a New
Button Type
Follow these steps to use the Modify button to customizing a button
by changing its type:
1. Select the green Modify button in the title bar at the top of the touch
screen. The button will turn red after it is selected.
2. Select the button that you want to change. The Modify Button
menu (page 2-37) will open.
3. Select the Button Type pull-down menu. The pull-down menu will
expand to display six button type options:
2-40
Symbol
A basic symbol button usually features both
a symbol and a label. It can be used for
communication (with an Insert Label/Insert
Text or Speak Label/Insert Text behavior) or
as a command button. Many behaviors can
be assigned to a symbol button, including
the commands to activate a macro or
perform an infrared command.
Folder
A folder button is shaped like a file folder
with a tab in the top left corner. This button
shape is typically used to indicate that a
button features a Go To behavior and can
be used for page navigation.
Flat
A flat button is a symbol button that has a
monochromatic border with no beveled
edge.
Predictor
A predictor button displays words, phrases
and sentences that are predicted by the
DynaVox rate enhancement features.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Character
Predictor
A character predictor button can be used
with (or instead of) a keyboard page by
individuals who use the scanning selection
method. When a letter is selected, the
character prediction button will predict the
next logical letter selection.
Recency
Recency buttons are similar to predictor
buttons. The words and phrases that are
displayed in recency buttons are predicted
according to frequency of use.
4. Select the button type you want to use. The pull-down menu will
close and display only the chosen option.
5. Select the OK button to close the Modify Button menu.
The button will now reflect the new button type.
Use the Modify Button to Add or Edit a
Button Label
Follow the steps below to add a new label to a button. These steps
can also be used to edit a button label that already exists.
3. Select the Label text box. A system keyboard popup will open.
4. Use the system keyboard to enter new label text.
new label will appear in the Label text box in the Modify Button
menu.
2-41
6. If the button already has a symbol assigned to it, the existing
symbol will not be changed. Continue with step 7.
If the button does not have a symbol and the label you entered is
not associated with a symbol, no symbol will be added to the
button. Continue with step 7.
If the button does not have a symbol and the label has one
associated symbol, the symbol will automatically be added to the
button. The symbol will be displayed beside the Symbol button in
the Modify Button menu. Continue with step 7.
If the button does not have a symbol and the label has more than
one associated symbol, a Select a Symbol menu will open.
Complete the rest of this step.
a. Select the symbol you want to use from the choices in the Select
a Symbol menu viewport.
b. Select the OK button to close the Select a Symbol menu. The
symbol you selected will be displayed beside the Symbol button
in the Modify Button menu. Continue with step 7.
The button you selected will now feature a new label and, if
applicable, a new symbol. If you want to change a symbol that was
automatically added to the button, refer to Use the Modify Button
to Add or Edit a Button’s Symbol on page 2-43.
Button’s Audio Cue
Follow the steps below to add a new audio cue to a button. If the
button already has an audio cue, these steps can also be used to edit
the existing audio cue text.
2-42
DynaVox Systems LLC
3. Select the Audio Cue text box. A system keyboard popup will
open.
4. Use the system keyboard to enter new label text.
new audio cue will appear in the Audio Cue text box in the Modify
Button menu.
The new audio cue is now part of the selected button.
Button’s Symbol
Follow these steps to choose a new symbol for a button:
3. Select the Symbol button. A Select a Symbol menu will open.
The left viewport in this menu contains a list of the available
symbol categories, called concepts. These concepts contain
symbols that are related to a theme. Each concept is displayed as
an individual folder with an expansion box to the left of its name.
This small box will contain either a plus sign (+) or a minus sign (–
). When the expansion box contains a plus sign, the concept folder
can be expanded to display smaller folders and individual
concepts (these have a circular button to the left of their names).
Select the expansion box to see what the folder contains. When a
2-43
concept or a concept folder is selected, the right viewport will fill
with a list of the individual symbols that it contains.
You may scroll through these viewports to find the symbol you
want to use, or you may use the Search feature to quickly locate a
specific symbol by name. If you want to use the Search feature,
continue with step 4. If you want to scroll through the viewports,
continue with step 5.
4. To search for a symbol by name, select the Search text box (a
system keyboard popup will open) and then complete the rest of
this step.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the name of the symbol.
b. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard. All the
symbols that are associated with the name you entered will be
displayed in the viewport on the right side of the Select a
Symbol menu. Continue with step 6.
5. To scroll through the viewports, use the up and down scroll buttons
beside the left viewport to find the concept folder where the symbol
is stored. Complete the rest of this step.
a. Select the folder name. If you want to see a smaller list of
symbols, you may select the expansion box beside the folder
name. The folder will expand to display a number of smaller
categories. Select the name of the category that includes the
symbol you are looking for. The right viewport will fill with the
names of the symbols that are stored in the selected concept or
concept folder.
b. Use the scroll buttons beside the right viewport in the Select a
Symbol menu to find the symbol you are looking for.
6. Select the symbol in the right viewport.
7. Select the OK button to close the Select a Symbol menu. The
symbol you chose will be displayed beside the Symbol button in
the Modify Button menu.
2-44
DynaVox Systems LLC
The new symbol will be immediately added to the selected button.
If there is no label on the button, the label that corresponds to the
symbol will also be added. If you want to change this label, refer to
Use the Modify Button to Add or Edit a Button Label on
page 2-41.
Button’s Behaviors
Follow these steps to add a behavior to a button, or to change the
behaviors that have already been assigned.
3. Select the Behaviors button. A Behavior Editor menu will open.
4. Select the Behaviors pull-down menu. The menu will expand to
display a list of the available behavior categories.
2 Note:
Refer to the Behaviors chart in Appendix A: Behavior Reference
to learn more about the various behaviors and their applications.
5. Select a behavior category from the pull-down menu. The viewport
in the Behaviors group box will display the names of the individual
behaviors within the selected category.
6. Select a single behavior from the viewport.
7. Select the Add button. If the device requires no other additional
information to complete the behavior, the selected behavior will be
immediately added to the Steps viewport.
2-45
If the selected behavior requires additional information, such as
text, the name of a sound file or the name of a page, a window will
appear to request this information. Use the window that is
presented to supply the required information and then select the
OK button to return to the Behavior Editor menu.
2 Note:
To see step-by-step instructions for adding frequently used
behaviors, see Add Behaviors to Buttons on page 4-170.
8. If you want to add another behavior to the Steps viewport, repeat
steps 4 through 7.
9. If you want to edit, remove or rearrange any of the behaviors that
have been added to the button, select the behavior in the Steps
viewport and then select one of the following buttons:
Move Up
The selected behavior will exchange
positions with the behavior above it in the
viewport list.
Edit
If the behavior includes additional
information such as text, a sound file or a
page name, a menu will open to provide the
tools for editing this information.
Delete
The selected behavior will be permanently
removed from the viewport list.
Move Down
positions with the behavior below it in the
viewport list.
10. When you have finished adding behaviors to the Steps viewport,
select the OK button to close the Behavior Editor menu. The
selected behaviors are now displayed beside the Behaviors button
in the Modify Button menu.
The button will now initiate the new behavior when it is selected.
2-46
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use the Modify Button to Change the Color
of a Button’s Background, Label or Border
The same basic steps can be used to select a new color for three
parts of one button: the background, the font and the border.
To select a new color for any of these areas, follow these steps:
3. Select the Button Color button, the Border Color button or the
Label Color button. Each of these selections will open the Color
Selector menu (page 4-165).
4. To choose from a palette of available colors, select the Swatches
tab control or the My Swatches tab control (colors will be available
on this tab pane only if you have saved custom colors). The
selected tab pane will display a palette of available colors.
5. Select the color you want to use. The display square on the right
side of the Color Selector menu will fill with the selected color.
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the button, refer to Create a
Custom Color on page 4-167.
6. Select the OK button to close the Color Selector menu. In the
Modify Button menu, the button you selected (Button Color, Border
Color or Label Color) will fill with the color you chose.
The new color will be added to the selected part of the button.
2-47
Use the Modify Button to Customize the
Font in a Button’s Label
Follow these steps to change the style of the font that is used in a
button’s label.
3. Select the Label Font button. The Select Font menu will open.
4. If you want to change the label font, select the Font pull-down
menu and then select one of the font options: Arial, Courier New,
Symbol, Tahoma and Times New Roman.
5. If you want to change the font size, select the Size pull-down menu
and then select one of the size options: 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 14, 18, 20,
24, 26, 28, 36, 48 and 72.
6. If you want the font to be bold, select the Bold check box.
7. If you want the font to be in italics, select the Italic check box.
8. Look at the Example box to see a sample of the font styles you
have chosen. If necessary, repeat steps 3 through 7 to make
additional changes to the font settings.
9. Select the OK button to close the Select Font menu. In the Modify
Button menu, the new font settings will be displayed in the Label
Font button.
The new font styles will be immediately applied to the label text in
the selected button.
2-48
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages with Quick Page
CREATE NEW PAGES WITH QUICK PAGE
If you want to add your own original pages to the page set you have
selected, the Quick Page feature provides an easy, efficient way to
add vocabulary and symbols to pages that are created from
templates. In addition to being an efficient page creation tool, Quick
Page also promotes consistency in page layout and navigation
strategies. This consistency makes it easy to move from one page to
another while you are using your DV4 or MT4 to communicate. The
templates used in the Quick Page feature are based on the layouts of
the DynaVox Language Applications page sets and skeleton page
sets that are available on your device. This allows you to build
customized pages from templates that match the page set you are
using.
2 Note:
Using Quick Page to make changes to a selected template does
not permanently change the template. Quick Page creates a new
page by using a copy of the template.
A default template for Quick Page can be set in the Interface
Features menu (page 5-62). If a default template is not specified
before the Quick Page feature is launched, you will be asked to
choose a template when you open Quick Page. Once a template is
chosen, the Quick Page feature guides you through the process of
adding vocabulary words to buttons on a copy of the template page. If
symbols are associated with the vocabulary you choose, they will be
automatically added to the buttons. Template buttons may be preprogrammed with behaviors that will make sure the buttons perform
specific actions when they are selected.
selecting a template and using the Quick Page feature to create a
new page from a template copy.
2-49
Select a Default Template for Quick Page
Before using Quick Page to create new pages, you should first follow
these steps to select a default template:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4. Select the Interface Features button. The Interface Features
(page 5-62) menu will open.
5. Select the Quick Page Template check box. A Select Template
menu will open.
SELECT TEMPLATE MENU
2-50
DynaVox Systems LLC
The left viewport in this menu contains a list of the page sets. Each
page set is displayed as an individual folder. When a page set
folder is selected, the right viewport will fill with a list of the
templates that have been created for use with the page set. When
the Select a Template menu opens, the page set that you are
currently using will be selected and the templates in the right
viewport are intended to be used with the set of pages that is open
on your device.
6. In the right viewport, select the name of the template you want to
use.
2 Note:
If you want to select a template from another page set, use the
scroll buttons beside the left viewport to look through the available
page set folders. Select the folder for the page set you want to use
and then select a template from the right viewport.
7. Select the OK button to close the Select Template menu. The
Quick Page Template check box will now display the name of the
template you selected.
8. Select the OK button to close the Interface Features menu.
9. Select the OK button to close the Setup menu.
Once these steps have been completed, the template you chose will
be selected as the default template for Quick Page. These steps will
not need to be repeated unless you want to choose a new default.
You can now continue using Quick Page to customize a page that is a
copy of the template you chose.
2-51
Add Vocabulary to Buttons with Quick Page
To add vocabulary and symbols with Quick Page, use the following
steps:
touch screen.
2. Select Page Editing in the main pull-down menu.
3. Select Quick Page in the second pull-down menu. A system
keyboard popup will open.
4. Use the system keyboard to type in a name for your new page.
5. Select the OK button to close the keyboard popup. A new copy of
your default template will open and an Enter Label window will be
presented.
6. Select the text box in the Enter Label window to access a system
keyboard popup.
2 Note:
You do not have to fill in every button. Select the Skip to Next
button in the Enter Label window if you want to skip one button and
then continue adding labels and symbols to the others. If you want
to stop adding content after a few buttons, select the Stop Asking
button in the Enter Label window. The remaining buttons will be
presented without symbols or labels.
7. Use the system keyboard to type in a label for the first button.
new label will be added to the first button on the template.
If the label you entered has one associated symbol, the symbol will
automatically be added to the button with the new label. Another
Enter Label window will be presented if there is another button to
fill and you can repeat steps 6 through 8.
If the label you entered is not associated with a symbol, only the
label will be added to the button. Another Enter Label window will
2-52
DynaVox Systems LLC
be presented if there is another button to fill and you can repeat
steps 6 through 8.
If the label you entered is associated with more than one symbol,
a Select a Symbol menu will open and you should continue with
step 9.
9. The viewport in the Select a Symbol menu will display all the
symbols that are associated with the label you entered. Select the
symbol you want to use and then select the OK button to close the
menu. Another Enter Label window will be presented if there is
another button to fill and you can repeat steps 6 through 8.
When you have finished adding labels and symbols, the page will
be automatically saved under the name you assigned to it. You
may now use your new page to communicate.
2 Note:
If you have used the Quick Page feature to create a new page, be
sure to save the new information directly to your device’s Flash
storage card.
2-53
Create New Pages with the Skeleton Pages
CREATE NEW PAGES WITH THE SKELETON PAGES
If the DynaVox Language Applications page sets cannot be
customized to suit your needs, you may want to use the DynaVox
Series 4 skeleton pages to create your own unique page set. The
skeleton pages are a series of blank pages and popups that can be
modified to suit the needs of an individual DynaVox user. Each
skeleton page set is a comprehensive group of pages and popups
that are already linked together, providing a consistent navigational
strategy. Skeleton pages are like templates in that they provide a
platform for pages of uniquely customized vocabulary. The pages and
buttons have already been created, organized and assigned a
navigational strategy. The only remaining task is assigning
vocabulary and behaviors to the buttons. Unlike templates, which
must be copied and saved as pages before being customized, the
DynaVox skeleton pages will be permanently changed when
customized vocabulary is added.
This section offers step-by-step instructions for choosing and
customizing a skeleton page.
Open a Skeleton Page Set
All the skeleton page sets can be easily customized with the
vocabulary you want to use. Once you have selected the page set
you want to use, you will only need to add labels, symbols and
behaviors before you can start using the pages to communicate.
Begin by opening the skeleton page set you want to use:
touch screen.
open.
2-54
DynaVox Systems LLC
3. Select Page Navigator in the second pull-down menu. The Page
Navigator menu (page 2-6) will open.
The left viewport in this menu contains a list of the page sets. Each
page set is displayed as an individual folder. When a page set
folder is selected, the right viewport will fill with a list of the pages
and popups that are stored within the folder. Some of the folders
in the left viewport feature an expansion box beside their names.
This small box will contain either a plus sign (+) or a minus sign (–
). When the expansion box contains a plus sign, the folder can be
expanded to display smaller folders. Select the expansion box to
see what the folder contains. For example, the <toplevel> folder
has an expansion box beside its name because it holds all the
individual page sets. If the expansion box beside the <toplevel>
folder features a plus sign, no other folders will be visible. If you
select the expansion box, the plus sign will become a minus sign
and the folder will expand to display all the folders it contains.
When a folder is selected in the left viewport, the right viewport will
fill with a list of the pages and popups (and other folders, if any)
that are contained in the selected folder.
4. Select the down arrow button to the right of the left viewport to
scroll down until you see the Skeleton Page Sets folder.
5. Select the expansion box beside the Skeleton Page Sets folder to
view all the skeleton page sets.
6. Select the folder for the skeleton page set you want to use. The
right viewport will display the names of all the pages in the chosen
set.
7. In the right viewport, select the name of the skeleton page you
want to use.
2-55
If you are using a skeleton page set to create your own page set,
be sure to start by customizing the main (master) page of the page
set. The main pages of the skeleton page set are as follows:
Page Set
Master Page
15 Button (Skeleton) Page Set
15 button master
15 Button Tab (Skeleton) Page Set
15 button tab skeleton
30 master
40 Button Symbol (Skeleton) Page Set
40SymMaster
40 Button Tab (Skeleton) Page Set
40 tab page 01
8 master
8. Select the OK button to close the Page Navigator menu and open
the selected page.
Customize a Skeleton Page
When the main page of your chosen skeleton page set opens, you
can start customizing the skeleton pages by following these steps
(these steps do not require the use of the advanced editing tools):
2 Note:
Skeleton pages are not template copies. Remember that saving
changes to the skeleton pages will permanently alter the original
skeleton pages.
1. Select the green Modify button. Once selected, the button will turn
red.
2. Select the first button you want to customize. A Modify Button
2-56
DynaVox Systems LLC
3. Use the options in the Modify Button menu to customize the
selected button. Refer to the Modify Button step-by-steps earlier in
this document to learn more about using the Modify Button menu
options.
4. When the button has been customized, select the OK button to
save changes and close the Modify Button menu. Selecting the OK
button will permanently save your changes to the skeleton page.
5. Continue to fill buttons by selecting the Modify button and then
using the features of the Modify Button menu.
2 Note:
If you have added custom information to a skeleton page, be sure
to save the new information directly to your device’s Flash storage
card.
2-57
Advanced Page Creation
The DynaVox Series 4 advanced editing tools are available in
addition to customization tools like the User Setup Wizard, the Modify
button, the skeleton pages and Quick Page. These advanced editing
features provide a page creation option for individuals who want to
create original communication pages without relying on the use of
pre-programmed pages and templates.
When the advanced editing tools are in use, your DV4 or MT4 device
will be in page edit mode. Page edit mode can be used only for
creating and editing communication pages and popups. Your device’s
speech engine will be temporarily suspended and the contents of the
Message Window will be hidden. If any text was displayed in the
Message Window when the page editor was opened, it will be
restored when the page editor is closed.
3-1
Chapter 3: Advanced Page Creation
To access the DynaVox Series 4 advanced page editing features:
touch screen.
2. Select Page Editing in the main pull-down menu.
3. Select Page Editor in the second pull-down menu.
The page editor is now active and four important features are
available:
• The Pull-Down Menus
The pull-down menus for the page editor are accessed with the
arrow-shaped button in the title bar at the top of the touch screen.
These menus provide access to a variety of options for
customizing the many components of communication pages and
popups.
• The Preferences Menu
The Preferences menu can be opened through the main pull-down
menu. It provides tools for the creation of default settings for
communication pages and popups, as well as all the components
that can be added to a page (buttons, symbols, tab controls, etc.).
Once you have defined your preferences in this menu, every new
page that you create will be automatically organized according to
the settings you created.
• The Tools Palette
The Tools palette is an expandable menu of icons. Each icon
represents one tool. This palette provides all the tools for page
creation and editing.
• The Properties Menu
The Properties menu provides options for customizing the
attributes of a selected page or page element. Its options are
similar to those in the Preferences menu, but unlike the default
settings in the Preferences menu, the settings in the Properties
menu affect only the object that is currently being customized.
3-2
DynaVox Systems LLC
These four features can be used together to create new pages, edit
existing pages and set default settings for future pages. This section
explains the various tools and options that are offered by these
feature, and includes step-by-step instructions for using these menus
to create and customize communication pages.
3-3
Use Page Edit Tools
USE PAGE EDIT TOOLS
The DV4/MT4 device provides four features that can be used
individually or in combination to create new pages, edit existing
pages, or set defaults for future pages. These features include the
following:
•
•
•
•
The Pull-Down Menu
The Tools Palette
The Preferences Menu
The Properties Menu
Each of these features are described in the following sections.
About the Pull-Down
Menu
When the system is in page edit mode, the selections available in the
pull-down menu are used to create new pages or popups, open
existing pages or popups, save pages, manipulate page objects, align
page objects, and set preferences for the page edit controls to be
visible and active.
To access the pull-down menu, complete the following steps:
1. Select the arrow-shaped button in the title bar at the top of the
screen. The menu opens showing the top level options. A small
arrow displayed next to the option’s title indicates that a secondary
menu of functions is available.
2. Select an option from the menu.
3-4
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
The top level options in the pull-down menu for the Series 4 page
editor include:
File
Includes commands to create new pages or popups, open existing
pages or templates, save pages or templates, and import or export
pages.
Edit
Includes standard editing commands such as undo/redo, cut, copy,
paste, and select all.
Objects
Includes commands to create and organize buttons, organize and
customize labels, and to position objects on a page.
View
Identifies commands to control the operation of page edit mode
including whether or not to use grid lines, whether to show the
Properties menu and Tool Palette, and whether the Tool Palette
should be a floating window or docked in the Page Editor window title
bar.
Complete explanations for each of these menu options follow.
File
Selecting the File option in the main pull-down menu opens a
secondary pull-down menu with eight options that are related to
communication page and popup files:
New Page
Select the New Page option to create a new communication page. A
system keyboard popup will appear, prompting you to enter a name
for the page you are creating. When the page has been named, a
completely blank page will open.
New Popup
Selecting the New Popup option will create a blank popup. When you
select this pull-down menu option, a system keyboard popup will
open. After you have entered a name, a completely blank popup will
open.
3-5
Use Page Edit Tools
Open Page
Select this option when you want to customize an existing page in the
page editor. The Select Page menu will be presented. The left
viewport in this menu displays the names of page directories. The
right viewport displays the names of individual pages. Use the Search
feature to locate a page by name, or use the arrow buttons beside
these viewports to scroll through the various options. Once the
selected page name is highlighted, select the OK button to close the
menu and open the selected page.
Open Template
Select this option to build a new page from a copy of a template that
was designed to compliment the DynaVox Language Applications
page sets. A system keyboard popup will prompt you to name the
new page. After the page is named, a Select Template menu
(page 2-50) will be presented. The left viewport in this menu displays
the names of page directories. The right viewport displays the names
of individual template pages. Use the Search feature to locate a
template by name, or use the arrow buttons beside these viewports to
scroll through the various options. Once the name of the selected
template is highlighted, select the OK button to close the menu and
open a new copy of the template.
Save
Selecting the Save option in the File pull-down menu automatically
saves any work you have done on the open page.
2 Note:
Save As
3-6
To prevent any loss of information in the event of a device failure,
you should also be sure to follow the steps in Back Up to a Data
Storage Card on page 7-4 when you exit the page editor after
making changes.
Selecting the Save As button allows you to save an open page under
a new name. This makes it easy to duplicate a page or to save a copy
of a changed page while leaving the original intact. When you select
this pull-down menu option, you may enter a new name by using the
system keyboard popup that is presented. The page with the original
name will remain unchanged unless you select the Save option in the
File pull-down menu.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
2 Note:
Save As
Template
2 Note:
Import/Export
To prevent any loss of information in the event of a device failure,
you should also be sure to follow the steps in Back Up to a Data
Storage Card on page 7-4 when you exit the page editor after
making changes.
The page editor can be used to create your own original templates for
pages or popups. Selecting the Save as Template option in the File
pull-down menu will open a system keyboard popup. Add a name for
your new template and select the OK button. Copies of the new
template file can now be used for page creation.
Remember that once you save a page or popup as a template, you
will be unable to make additional changes to that template.
When the Import/Export option in the File pull-down menu is chosen,
a smaller pull-down menu is presented. This third-level pull-down
menu offers two options:
3-7
Use Page Edit Tools
Import Page
Choose this option to import a page into the
page editor. When this option is selected,
Select Page File(s) menu will open. Be sure
to select the Show All Directories check box
if you are importing the page from an
outside source such as a USB storage
device or a secondary data card. The left
viewport in this menu displays the names of
directories. The right viewport displays the
names of individual pages. Use the Search
feature to locate a page by name, or use the
arrow buttons beside these viewports to
scroll through the various options. Once the
name of the selected page is highlighted,
select the OK button to close the menu and
open the selected page.
Export Page
Choose this option to export a page from
the page editor to the Exports folder in the
User Files directory of your DV4 or MT4
device. When this pull-down menu option is
selected, a copy of the open page will
automatically be saved to the Exports folder.
Edit
The second option in the main pull-down menu is Edit. Selecting Edit
will open a secondary pull-down menu with multiple options:
3-8
Undo
Select the Undo option in the Edit pull-down
menu to delete the last change you made to
the open page.
Redo
Selecting the Redo option will restore the
last change that was deleted with the Undo
button.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Cut
When the Cut option is chosen, a selected
object is removed from the screen and
stored on a hidden clipboard. The clipboard
object can then be placed (pasted) in a new
location.
Copy
Select the Copy option to make a duplicate
of a selected item. This copy is stored on a
hidden clipboard. The clipboard object can
then be placed (pasted) in a new location.
The original item will remain unchanged.
Paste
Select the Paste option to place on the open
page the last item that was cut or copied to
the clipboard. When the item appears on the
page, highlighted with handles (small white
boxes) on its border, a Move Selection box
with OK (a checkmark) and Cancel (a
slashed circle) buttons will appear in the title
bar at the top of the touch screen. To move
the pasted item into position, select one of
the handles on the item’s border and drag it
into place (maintain the selection while you
are moving the item). Once the item is
positioned correctly, select the OK button in
the Move Selection box. To exit the Move
Selection box without saving any changes
you made to the selected item, select the
Cancel button.
Delete
Selecting the Delete option will remove the
selected item from the page.
Select All
Chose the Select All option to automatically
select every item on the open page.
3-9
Use Page Edit Tools
Object
The third option in the main pull-down menu for the page editor is
Object. When Object is selected, the DynaVox Series 4 software will
present a secondary pull-down menu with eight options:
3-10
Buttons
Selecting the Buttons option opens a third-level pull-down menu that
features options for organizing and filling buttons on a page:
Swap
Selecting the Swap option in the Buttons pull-down menu will switch
the positions of two selected buttons.
Fill from Search
This option lets you search the vocabulary concepts to fill selected
buttons. Selecting the Fill from Search option will open an Edit
Search menu (page 3-65). In this menu, use the New button to add
vocabulary concepts to the Concepts viewport. Use the other tools in
the menu to further refine the details of your search and then select
the OK button.
Once the search has been defined, a Select Symbols menu will open.
The viewport of this menu will display all the available vocabulary and
symbols that apply to the search. Select symbols from the viewport to
fill the buttons on your page. A line of text below the viewport will
display the number of symbols that you have chosen and the number
of symbols that are needed to fill the selected buttons. Select the OK
button when you have finished picking symbols. The DynaVox Series
4 software will organize your selections alphabetically, by length or by
frequency, according to the setting in the Edit Search menu.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Fill from Text
With the Fill from Text option you can fill
selected buttons by adding your own text.
When this option is selected, an Enter Label
window will appear for the first selected
button. Enter a label and then select the OK
button to place the label in the first button. If
a symbol is associated with the label you
entered, it will automatically be added to the
button. If more than one symbol is brought
up, a Select a Symbol menu will allow you
to choose one symbol. Once the first button
is filled, an Enter Label window will open for
the next button. You may continue entering
labels, select the Skip to Next button to
leave one button empty or select the Stop
Asking button to stop entering labels.
Pour
This option makes it easy to pour the
contents of an existing page into a new
page. To begin using the Pour option, create
a new page with buttons into which you
want to pour information. Select the Pour
option and a Select a Page to Pour From
menu will be presented. The left viewport in
this menu displays the names of page
directories. Use the Search feature to locate
a page by name, or use the arrow buttons
beside these viewports to scroll through the
various options. Once the name of the
selected page is highlighted, select the OK
button to close the menu and the contents
of the selected page will be poured into the
selected buttons on the new page.
The DynaVox Series 4 software will pour the
contents of the first button on the pouring
page into the first selected button on the
page that is being edited. Pouring will
continue button for button until the new
page is filled up or all the buttons on the
pouring page have been filled.
3-11
Tab Controls
3-12
Use Page Edit Tools
Alphabetize
When you select the Alphabetize option in
this pull-down menu, the selected buttons
will automatically be sorted into alphabetical
order based on label text.
Change Type
The Change Type option lets you assign a
new button type to the selected button(s).
When Change Type is selected, a Button
Style menu opens. Select the appropriate
option (Symbol, Folder, Flat, Predictor,
Character Predictor or Recency) and any
selected buttons will change to reflect the
new selection.
Clear
Select this option to clear the contents of the
selected button(s).
Add Behaviors
Select this option to add one or more
behaviors to all the selected buttons on the
page. When the Add Behaviors option is
selected, the Behavior Editor (page 3-118)
will open. Use the Behaviors pull-down
menu to select a behavior category and
then select a single behavior from the left
viewport. Select the Add button to place the
selected behavior in the Steps viewport. You
will be prompted to supply any additional
information, if necessary. When you are
finished adding behaviors, select the OK
button to close the menu.
Tab Controls is the second option in the Buttons pull-down menu.
Choosing this option will access a small pull-down menu with two
options:
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Swap Panes
If you select the Swap Panes option in the
pull-down menu, the position of two
selected tab panes will be switched.
Insert Labels
Use this option to add label properties and
text to a tab control. If you want to add
labels to a set of tab controls, be sure to
select the whole tab control before choosing
the Insert Labels option in the pull-down
menu. When you select the Insert Labels
option, an Enter Label window will be
presented. Enter a label and then select the
OK button to place the label on the first tab.
An Enter Label window will open for the
second tab. You may continue entering
labels, select the Skip to Next button to
leave one tab empty or select the Stop
Asking button to stop entering labels.
Align
Align is the third option in the Object pull-down menu. When selected,
this option presents a third pull-down menu with options for adjusting
the position of object on a page or popup:
3-13
3-14
Use Page Edit Tools
Align Top
When the Align Top option is chosen, the
selected objects will be aligned so that the
topmost point of each object is at the same
vertical level on the page or popup. The
DynaVox Series 4 software will find the
point in the existing group that is highest on
the page or popup and then align the
selected objects along an unseen horizontal
line that extends from that point. The
objects will not be moved to the top of the
page or popup.
This option is only effective for items that
are arranged in a horizontal row. If this
option is used for items in a vertical column,
the lower items will be layered over the
object that is highest on the page or popup.
Align Left
When the Align Left option is chosen, the
selected objects will be aligned at their left
side. The DynaVox Series 4 software will
find the point in the existing group that is the
farthest left on the page or popup and then
align the selected objects along an unseen
vertical line that extends from that point.
The objects will not be moved to the left side
of the page or popup.
are arranged in a vertical column. If this
option is used for items in a horizontal row,
all the items will be layered over the object
that is the farthest to the left.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Align Right
When the Align Right option is chosen, the
selected objects will be aligned at their right
side. The DynaVox Series 4 software will
farthest right on the page or popup and then
The objects will not be moved to the right
side of the page or popup.
that is the farthest to the right.
Align Bottom
When the Align Bottom option is chosen, the
selected objects will be aligned so that the
lowest point of each object is at the same
vertical level on the page or popup. The
DynaVox Series 4 software will find the
point in the existing group that is lowest on
objects will not be moved to the bottom of
the page or popup.
object that is lowest on the page or popup.
Center Vertically
When the Center Vertically option is chosen,
the selected objects will be centered
between the top and bottom of the page or
popup.
Center
Horizontally
When the Center Horizontally option is
chosen, the selected objects will be
centered between the left and right sides of
the page or popup.
3-15
3-16
Use Page Edit Tools
Bring to Front
Items on a DynaVox Series 4 communication page or popup are
layered and can overlap. If the item you have selected is being
hidden by another item, select the Bring to Front option. This will
reposition the selected item on the top layer.
Send to Back
layered and can overlap. If the item you have selected is in front of
another item, select the Send to Back option. This will reposition the
selected item on the bottom layer.
Move
The Move option enables you to drag a selected object to into a new
position. When the Move option is chosen, the selected object will be
highlighted with handles (small white boxes) around its border and a
Move Selection box with OK (a checkmark) and Cancel (a slashed
circle) buttons will appear in the title bar at the top of the touch
screen. Select one of the handles on the border of the selected item
and drag the object into place (maintain the selection while you are
moving the item). When the object has been repositioned, select the
OK button in the Move Selection box. To close the Move Selection
box without saving any changes you made to the selected item,
select the Cancel button.
Resize
Use the Resize option to adjust the size of a selected object. This
feature works like the Move feature. When the Resize option is
chosen, the selected object will be highlighted with handles (small
white boxes) around its border and a Resize Selection box with OK (a
checkmark) and Cancel (a slashed circle) buttons will appear in the
title bar at the top of the page. Select one of the handles on the
border of the selected item and drag the object into a larger or
smaller size (maintain the selection while you are resizing the button).
To maintain the object’s proportion while resizing, use one of the
corner handles. Using the handles in the center of the top or bottom
border will resize the item vertically. The handles in the center of the
left or right border will resize the item horizontally.
When the object has been resized, select the OK button in the Resize
Selection box. Note that the Resize option will automatically resize
any property within the object you have changed. For example, if you
use the Resize option to resize a button with a label and a symbol,
the label and the symbol will be resized in proportion to the button.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Free Resize
The Free Resize option lets you adjust the size of an object without
affecting any properties within the object. When the Free Resize
option is chosen, the selected object will be highlighted with handles
(small white boxes) around its border and a Resize Selection box with
OK (a checkmark) and Cancel (a slashed circle) buttons will appear
in the title bar. Select one of the handles on the border of the selected
item and drag the object into a larger or smaller size (maintain the
selection while you are resizing the button). To maintain the object’s
proportion while resizing, use one of the corner handles. Using the
handles in the center of the top or bottom border will resize the item
vertically. The handles in the center of the left or right border will
resize the item horizontally.
When the object has been resized, select the OK button in the Resize
Selection box. Note that the Free Resize option does not affect the
size of any property within the object you have changed. For
example, if you use the Free Resize option to resize a button with a
label and a symbol, the button will be made larger or smaller but the
label and the symbol will remain unchanged.
Group Scanning
The group scanning feature in DynaVox series 4 software enables
individuals to develop their own customized scanning patterns.
Selecting the Group Scanning option will open a small, third-level
pull-down menu with two options for setting up group scanning for the
scanning selection method:
Clear Scan
Order
Select this option to erase the group
scanning order that has been established
for the open page or popup. A window will
open to inform you that the scan order has
been cleared. Select the OK button to close
this window.
3-17
Use Page Edit Tools
Set Scan Order
You can use this option to set a scan order
for items within a group or for several
groups on a page. When this option is
selected, a Select Items in Order box with
OK (a checkmark) and Cancel (a slashed
circle) buttons will appear in the title bar.
Select the items on the page in the order
you want them to be scanned. A small
number will be assigned to each selected
item. Once you have established your scan
order, select the OK button in the Select
Items in Order box to accept the new scan
order.
View
With the View option you can customize the appearance of the touch
screen when your device is in page edit mode. Selecting this option
presents a unique pull-down menu. Items in this third-level pull-down
are either active or inactive at all times. Active items are indicated by
a blue check mark. Select an item in the pull-down menu to add or
remove the active check mark. The options in the View pull-down
menu are:
3-18
Grid Lines
The activation of the Grid Lines option adds
a background grid to the open page or
popup. The grid is a layout tool that can help
you regulate the placement of objects. The
grid lines will not be seen when the page or
popup is not in edit mode.
Snap to Grid
When the Snap to Grid option is active, new
items on the page will automatically line up
with the background grid.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Properties
Select the Properties option if you want the
Properties menu (page 3-57) to be
displayed whenever the device is in page
edit mode.
Tool Palette
Select the Tool Palette option if you want
the Tools palette to be displayed whenever
the advanced editing tools are in use.
Dock Tools
When the Dock Tools option is selected, the
Tools palette will be minimized and placed
in the title bar at the top of the touch screen.
Preferences
The fifth option in the main pull-down menu for the page editor is
Preferences. Select this option to access the Preferences menu
(page 3-30).
Exit Page Editor
Exit Page Editor is the final option in the main pull-down menu for the
page editor. This option allows you to close the advanced editing
tools and resume using your DV4 or MT4 device to communicate.
You will be prompted to save any new changes when you exit the
page editor.
About the Page Edit
Tool Palette
The Tools palette is a key feature of the DynaVox Series 4 page
editor. It offers tools for creating all of the components of a
communication page or popup. When the Tools palette is presented
3-19
Use Page Edit Tools
on the touch screen, only seven tools are visible. To the right of each
tool is an arrow button. If the arrow button is selected, the tool will
expand to reveal additional tools that perform similar functions. The
following section explains the purpose of the all of the tools for
advanced page editing.
Display the Tools Palette
If the Tools palette is not displayed in the Series 4 page editor, you
can open it by following these steps:
touch screen.
2. Select View in the main pull-down menu.
3. Select Tool Palette in the second pull-down menu. A blue check
mark will appear next to the Tool Palette option.
3-20
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Object Selector Tool
n
The Object Selector tool
can be used to select single items or to
drag out an area for the selection of multiple items. In the Tools
palette, this tool can be expanded to reveal the following three tools:
o
Object Selector
Plus Tool
The Object Selector Plus tool can be used
to select multiple items on a page.
p
Object Selector
Minus Tool
The Object Selector Minus tool can be used
to deselect one item from a group of
selected items.
q
Magic Wand
Tool
Use the Magic Wand tool to select all of the
items on a page that are of the same type.
OBJECT SELECTOR TOOL
3-21
Use Page Edit Tools
Label Tool
n
The Label tool
enables you to add a text label to a page, popup,
tab control or button. The Label tool can be expanded to display the
following three tools:
o
Symbol Tool
Use the Symbol tool to add a picture symbol
to an object.
p
Divider Tool
Use the Divider tool to place a dividing line
between two objects.
q
Active Label
Tool
The Active Label tool enables you to create
labels with text that will be automatically
filled in and maintained by the DynaVox
Series 4 software.
LABEL TOOL
Button Tool
Use the basic Button tool to draw a blank button on a page or popup.
If your device’s default settings are being used, a button that is
created with this tool will have a label property but not a symbol
property. These properties can be changed in the Preferences menu
3-22
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
(page 3-41). In the Tools palette, the Button tool
to display the following similar tools:
n can be expanded
o
Symbol Button
Tool
The Symbol Button tool can be used to
create new buttons. If your device’s default
settings are being used, symbol buttons
have both label and symbol properties, and
an Insert Label behavior. These properties
can be changed in the Preferences menu.
p
Folder Button
Tool
The Folder Button tool can be used to
create folder-shaped buttons. If your
device’s default settings are being used,
folder buttons will include label and symbol
properties and a Go To Page behavior.
These properties can be changed in the
Preferences menu.
q
Button Grid Tool
Use the Button Grid tool to draw out a
uniform grid of buttons. The size of these
buttons and the horizontal/vertical spacing
between them is defined in the Preferences
menu.
BUTTON TOOL
3-23
Use Page Edit Tools
Message Window Tool
n
Use the Message Window tool
to place a Message Window on a
page or popup. In the Tools palette, the Message Window tool can be
expanded to reveal the Active Area tool.
o
Active Area Tool
The Active Area tool can be used to create
active areas on a page or popup. Active
areas are like buttons though they have no
borders or defining appearances. Selecting
an active area will activate any behaviors
that have been assigned to the area.
MESSAGE WINDOW TOOL
Predictor Button Tool
The Predictor Button tool can be used to add word prediction buttons
to a keyboard page or popup. As you use the keyboard buttons to
compose a message, the DynaVox Series 4 prediction feature
anticipates your word choices and displays various options for quick
selection. These word choices are displayed in predictor buttons.
3-24
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
n
can be expanded to
In the Tools palette, the Predictor Button tool
display the Character Predictor Button tool and the Recency Button
tool.
o
Character
Predictor Button
Tool
The Character Prediction tool enables you
to place character prediction buttons on a
keyboard page or popup. These buttons will
use the letters you select on the keyboard
page to predict and present letters that you
may want to select next.
p
Recency Button
Tool
The Recency Button tool is used to add
recency buttons to a keyboard page or
popup that also features predictor buttons.
As you are typing, recency buttons predict
only the words and phrases that you have
used recently.
PREDICTOR BUTTON TOOL
3-25
Use Page Edit Tools
Box Tool
n
Use the Box tool
to draw a box around objects on a page or
popup. This is most often done to visually define a group of items.
Expand the Box tool to find the Tab Control tool and the Search Box
tool.
o
Tab Control Tool
The Tab Control tool can be used to add tab
controls to a page or popups. Tab controls
appear at the top of a page and look like file
folder tabs. They allow you to create
multiple layers, called panes, on a page.
There can be between two and six tab
controls on one page.
p
Search Box Tool
Use the Search Box tool to add a search
box to a page or button. Criteria for the
related search can be defined in the search
box or in a button that will jump to the
search box and begin the search. Buttons
with this behavior can be placed on the
same page as the search box.
q
Group Box Tool
The Group Box tool is used to create groups
for a customized scanning pattern. Use the
Group Box tool to draw a box around groups
of items that should be scanned together.
Then use the Group Scanning option in the
page editor pull-down menu to assign a
scan pattern and select group scanning
features such as audio cues.
BOX TOOL
3-26
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Spray Tool
n
When the Spray tool
is active, you can spray out a grid of copies
of a selected object. In the Tools palette, you can expand this tool to
display the Paint Can tool and the Eyedropper tool.
o
&
p
Paint Can and
Eyedropper
Tools
The Paint Can and Eyedropper tools work
together to let you customize the coloring on
your pages and popups. Choose the
Eyedropper tool and then select an area on
the page that features the color you want to
use. A small area at the bottom of the Tools
palette will fill with the selected color.
Choose the Paint Can tool and then select
the area on the page that you want to fill
with the selected color. The new color will
be added immediately.
SPRAY TOOL
Dock the Tools Palette
When the Tools palette is docked, it is minimized and placed in the
title bar at the top of the touch screen. This places the Tools palette
out of the way, but not all of the tools are accessible until the palette
is taken out of docking.
If you want to dock the Tools palette, follow these steps:
touch screen.
3-27
Use Page Edit Tools
3. Select Dock Tools in the second pull-down menu. A blue check
mark will appear next to the Dock Tools option.
Remove Tools Palette Docking
Undocking the tools palette allows it to be moved anywhere on your
page.
If you want to take the Tools palette out of docking, follow these
steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Dock Tools in the second pull-down menu to remove the
blue check mark next to the option.
Remove the Tool Palette in Page Edit Mode
You can remove the tools palette from view.
If you do not want to see the Tools palette in the Series 4 page editor,
you can close it by following these steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Tool Palette in the second pull-down menu to remove the
3-28
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Set Object Preferences
2 Note:
The Preferences menu provides tools for the creation of default
settings for communication pages and popups, as well as all the
components that can be added to a page (buttons, symbols, tab
controls, etc.). Once you have defined your preferences in this menu,
every new page that you create will be automatically organized
according to the settings in this menu.
The settings in the Preferences menu only affect the creation of
new pages. Changes to the settings in the Preferences menu will
not affect pre-existing pages.
To open the Preferences menu in the DynaVox Series 4 page editor,
follow these steps:
touch screen.
2. Select Preferences in the main pull-down menu. The Preferences
Menu will open.
3-29
Use Page Edit Tools
OBJECT PREFERENCES
The left side of this menu features four check boxes and one pulldown menu:
3-30
Show Tool
Palette
The first available option in the Preferences menu is the Show Tool
Palette check box. If this check box is selected, the Tools palette will
automatically be displayed whenever the page editor is active. If this
check box is deselected, the Tools palette can still be displayed
through the pull-down menu.
Show Properties
Menu
Whenever this check box is selected, the Properties menu will
automatically be displayed when the page editor is active. If this
check box is deselected, the Properties menu can still be accessed
through the pull-down menu.
Default to Object
Selector
If the Default to Object Selector check box is chosen, the Object
Selector tool will automatically be selected after any other tool is
used. For example, after you use the Button tool to draw a new
button, the Object Selector tool will automatically become active
again.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Auto-Expand
Selection
Selecting the Auto-expand Selection check box allows you to hold
down a selection on one part of a button to select another part of the
same button. For example, if you select the symbol property in a
button and maintain this selection, the button behind the symbol will
become selected after a moment. If you continue to maintain the
selection, the page behind the button will be selected. This feature
helps you to select objects that may be more difficult to access.
Auto-Expand
Speed
The Auto-Expand Speed pull-down menu can be used to determine
the required hold-down time for the auto-expand selection feature.
The setting of this pull-down menu will determine how long the
selection of one object must be maintained before the object behind it
is selected by the auto-expand selection feature. Three options are
displayed when the Auto-Expand Speed pull-down menu is selected:
Quick, Medium and Slow. Select the option you want to use. The
selected option will be the only one displayed when the pull-down
menu is inactive.
On the right side of the Preferences menu are the Spray/Button Grid
Settings group box and the Grid Preferences group box.
Spray/Button Grid Settings
The Spray/Button Grid Settings group box in the top right corner of
the Preferences menu offers tools for defining automatic spacing for
new button grids:
Horz (Horizontal
Space)
Horizontal space refers to the number of pixels that will automatically
be placed between the buttons in a horizontal row of buttons. When
the Horz button is selected, a Grid Preferences window is presented.
Use the keypad in this window to enter a number. Select the OK
button to save the horizontal spacing preference or select the Cancel
button to close the Grid Preferences window without making any
changes.
3-31
3-32
Use Page Edit Tools
Vert (Vertical
Space)
Vertical space refers to the number of pixels that will automatically be
placed between the buttons in a vertical column of buttons. When the
Vert button is selected, a Grid Preferences window is presented. Use
the keypad in this window to enter a number. Select the OK button to
save the vertical spacing preference or select the Cancel button to
close the Grid Preferences window without making any changes.
Width
The Width button can be used to set a default width for buttons in a
new grid. When the Width button is selected, a Grid Preferences
window is presented. Use the keypad in this window to enter a
number of pixels. Select the OK button to save the width preference
or select the Cancel button to close the Grid Preferences window
without making any changes.
Height
The Height button can be used to create a default height setting for
buttons in a grid. When the Height button is selected, a Grid
Preferences window is presented. Use the keypad in this window to
enter a number of pixels. Select the OK button to save the height
preference or select the Cancel button to close the Grid Preferences
window without making any changes.
Open Grid
Settings
Selector
To see a sample button grid while you adjust the width, height and
horizontal/vertical spacing of buttons in a grid, select the Open Grid
Settings Selector button. This selection will open a Select Grid
Settings menu where a sample grid will display the actual size and
spacing of your current settings.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
SELECT GRID SETTINGS MENU
Two tab controls (Button Size and Space) offer sliders that you can
use make adjustments to your settings:
1. To use sliders to adjust the default size for buttons in a grid, select
the Button Size tab. Two sliders will be presented: Width and
Height.
a. To adjust the default width of buttons in a grid, select the round
slider thumb on the Width slider. Maintain the selection while
you move the slider thumb along the slider. Moving the thumb
toward the top of the slider will decrease the default width.
Moving the thumb to a lower place on the slider will increase the
default width. The sample grid to the right will automatically
resize itself to demonstrate the slider settings.
b. To adjust the default height of buttons in a grid, select the round
slider thumb on the Height slider. Maintain the selection while
you move the slider thumb along the slider. Moving the thumb
toward the top of the slider will decrease the default height.
Moving the thumb to a lower place on the slider will increase the
3-33
Use Page Edit Tools
default height. The sample grid to the right will automatically
2. To use sliders to adjust the default spacing for new button grids,
select the Space tab. Two sliders will be presented: Horz
(Horizontal Space) and Vert (Vertical Space).
a. To adjust the amount of space that will automatically be left
between buttons in a horizontal row, select the round slider
thumb on the Horz slider. Maintain the selection while you move
the slider thumb along the slider. Moving the thumb toward the
top of the slider will move the buttons closer together. Moving
the thumb to a lower place on the slider will place the buttons
farther apart. The sample grid to the right will automatically
b. To adjust the amount of space that will automatically be left
between buttons in a vertical column, select the round slider
thumb on the Vert slider. Maintain the selection while you move
the slider thumb along the slider. Moving the thumb toward the
top of the slider will move the buttons closer together. Moving
the thumb to a lower place on the slider will place the buttons
farther apart. The sample grid to the right will automatically
3. Select the OK button to save your adjustments and return to the
Preferences menu. Select the Cancel button to return to the
Preferences menu without saving your new settings.
Grid Preferences
The Preferences menu also offers tools for placing a background grid
on a page or popup that has been opened in the page editor. A grid
can help with alignment when you are placing or moving items on a
3-34
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
page. The Grid Preferences group box offers tools for setting your
default grid attributes:
Show Grid
When the Show Grid check box is selected, a grid will automatically
be placed on any page or popup that is opened in the page editor.
The grid is an editing tool only; it will not be seen on the page or
popup once the advanced editing tools have been closed.
Grid Resolution
The Grid Resolution pull-down menu allows you to choose the
spacing of the lines on your grid. The options in this menu are Very
Fine Grid, Fine Grid, Medium Grid, Coarse Grid and Very Coarse
Grid.
Snap to Grid
To make sure that all new buttons are automatically aligned to the
grid, select the Snap to Grid check box.
Show Bold
Gridlines
Selecting the Show Bold Gridlines check box will make the grid
easier to distinguish against the background of the page.
Show Object Properties
Additional menu options become available when you select the Show
Object Properties button in the lower left corner of the Preferences
menu. Selecting this button brings up an expanded menu of
preferences. These default features will provide basic formatting
rules for all new pages, popups or buttons. This expanded menu uses
tab controls to divide different feature categories: Pages, Buttons,
Label, Boxes/Dividers, Symbol and Tab Controls.
Page and Popup Preferences
If you want to view or change the default settings for pages and
popups, access the Preferences menu and then select the Show
Object Properties button. The options on the top level of the
3-35
Use Page Edit Tools
Preferences menu will be covered with a Default Properties group
box.
PAGE AND POPUP PREFERENCES
Select the Pages tab in this group box to access the following default
settings for new communication pages and popups:
Color
To define a standard background color for new pages and popups,
1. Select the Color button. A Color Selector menu with color palettes
will open (page 4-165).
2. Select a new color and then select the OK button to save it and
return to the other page default settings. Choosing the Cancel
button will close the Color Selector menu without saving a new
color choice.
3-36
Message
Window
Select the Message Window check box to specify whether new pages
should automatically include a Message Window.
Popup Defaults
The Popup Defaults group box has options that enable you to create
customized default preferences for popups.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Popup Style
This pull-down menu is the first option in the
Popup Defaults group box. It can be used to
specify whether all new popups should be
static boxes, moveable boxes or labeled
windows. Static boxes are popups that
cannot be moved. Moveable popups are
popups that can be moved to different areas
of the screen. Labeled windows are popups
that include a title bar at the top of the
popup window.
3-37
Use Page Edit Tools
Font
The Font button can be used to create
default settings for font in the title bar of
labeled popups. This button always displays
the current font settings.
When it is selected, a Select Font menu
opens and offers tools for customizing font
type, size and style:
1. Select the Font pull-down menu to view
all the available fonts. When it is not
open, the pull-down menu displays the
name of the currently selected font.
2. Select the Size pull-down menu to see
the available font sizes. When it is not
current font size.
3. Select the Bold check box to use bold
font as the default setting for popup titles.
4. Select the Italic check box to use
italicized font as the default setting for
popup titles.
The text in the Example box illustrates
5. Select the OK button to accept any
changes to the Select Font menu and
return to the Pages tab pane in the
Preferences menu. If the Cancel button
is selected, the Select Font menu will
close without saving any new settings.
Ask for Title
3-38
When the Ask for Title check box is
selected, the creation of a labeled window
popup will automatically bring up a text box
that can be used to enter the title of the
popup.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
2 Note:
The title that is featured in the labeled window of a popup does not
have to be the same as the popup name that is displayed in the
Page Browser menu.
Border Color
The Border Color button enables you to
define a standard color for popup borders.
Selecting this button opens a Color Selector
menu of color palettes. Select a new color
and then select the OK button to save it and
return to the other page default settings.
Choosing the Cancel button will close the
Color Selector menu without saving a new
color choice.
Text Color
Choosing the Text Color button also opens
a Color Selector button. The color palettes
that it presents can be used to define a
default color for text in the title bar of
labeled popups. Use the presented Color
Selector menu to choose a color. Then
select the OK button to save the color and
return to the previous menu. Choosing the
Cancel button will close the Color Selector
menu without saving a new color choice.
To close the Pages tab pane and return to the top level Preferences
menu, select the Hide Object Properties button at the bottom of the
menu. Selecting the OK button will close the Preferences menu
without returning to the top level. Any new settings will be
automatically saved. Select the Cancel button to close the
Preferences menu without saving any changes.
3-39
Use Page Edit Tools
Button Preferences
If you want to view or change the default settings for buttons, access
the Preferences menu (page 3-41) and then select the Show Object
Properties button. The options on the top level of the Preferences
menu will be covered with a Default Properties group box. Select the
Buttons tab in this group box to access the following default settings
for new buttons:
Button Type
The Button Type pull-down menu lets you create default settings for
four types of buttons: Plain, Symbol, Go To and Grid. Each time the
selection in this pull-down menu is changed, the items in the Button
Default Properties group box will change to reflect the default settings
for the selected button type. To maintain a consistent layout for
pages, the defaults for the various button types should be kept
similar. It is easier to access vocabulary on a page where different
types of buttons are the same size and feature labels that are in the
same position. Each type of button may have its own unique
behaviors.
The rest of the options on the Buttons tab pane in the Preferences
menu can be found in the Button Default Properties group box. The
settings in this group box should be defined individually for each type
of button that you will use. Remember to always check the Button
3-40
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Type pull-down menu setting before referencing or changing the
settings in this group box.
BUTTON PREFERENCES
The Button Default Properties group box offers the following options:
Button Label
Set the Button Label pull-down menu to specify whether labels
should be placed at the top or bottom of newly created buttons. You
may also use this pull-down menu to indicate that labels should not
be automatically placed on new buttons. If No Label is the selected
option for this pull-down menu, labels can still be added with the
Label tool in the Tools palette.
Color
Use the Color button to set a default color for new buttons. Choosing
the Color button also opens a Color Selector button full of color
palettes. Selecting the OK button will save the color you choose in
the Color Selector menu and then return you to the previous menu.
Choosing the Cancel button will close the Color Selector menu
without saving a new color choice.
3-41
3-42
Use Page Edit Tools
Symbol
Selecting the Symbol check box will ensure that a symbol property is
automatically added to all new buttons. If this check box is
deselected, a symbol will not automatically be added to a new button
but it can be placed on the button with the Symbol tool in the Tools
palette.
Style
The Style pull-down menu offers three choices for default button
style. Buttons can be beveled, folder-shaped or flat. To change the
button style setting, select the Style pull-down menu to reveal all
three choices. Select the style you want to use. The pull-down menu
will close again, displaying only the currently selected style.
Border Color
Use the Border Color button to set a default color for the borders of
new buttons. Choosing the Border Color button opens a Color
Selector menu with color palettes. Selecting a color option and then
the OK button will save the new color and return you to the
Preferences menu. Choosing the Cancel button will close the Color
Selector menu without saving a new color choice.
Border Width
Default button border width can be customized with the Border Width
pull-down menu. This pull-down menu offers seven choices: Very
Narrow, Narrower, Narrow, Medium, Wide, Wider and Very Wide. To
change the thickness of button borders, select the Border Width pulldown menu to reveal all the options. Select the thickness you want to
use. The pull-down menu will close again, displaying only the
currently selected border width.
Show Label
Properties
Select the Show Label Properties button to customize the default
settings for label text. When this button is selected, the Button Default
Properties group box will change to include a Label Font group box
that features default label font settings:
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Alignment
Use the Alignment pull-down menu to
create a customized default setting for the
alignment of label text. This pull-down menu
has three options: Left, Right and Center. To
change the alignment setting, select the
pull-down menu to display all three options.
When you select one option the menu will
close and display only the selected
alignment setting.
Color
Select the Color button to create a
customized default setting for the color of
label font. This selection will open a Color
Selector menu. Select a color option from
the color palettes in this menu and then
choose the OK button to save the new color
and return to the Preferences menu.
Choosing the Cancel button will close the
Color Selector menu without saving a new
color choice.
3-43
Use Page Edit Tools
Font
More font options are made available when
the Font button is selected. This button
displays the current font and font size
settings.
Selecting this button opens a Select Font
menu with tools for customizing font:
1. Select the Font pull-down menu to see
the available fonts. When it is not open,
the pull-down menu displays the name of
the currently selected font.
2. Select the Size pull-down menu to see
the available font sizes. When it is not
current font size.
3. Select the Bold check box to use bold
font as the default setting.
4. Select the Italic check box to use
italicized font as the default setting.
The text in the Example box illustrates
5. Select the OK button to accept any
changes to the Select Font menu and
return to the previous menu. If the
Cancel button is selected, the Select
Font menu will close without saving any
new settings.
OK
3-44
Select the OK button to accept the label font
settings and return to the standard Buttons
tab pane.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Label Color
2 Note:
To set a default label color, select the Label Color button. A Color
Selector menu (page 4-165) of color palettes will open. Select a new
color and then select the OK button to save it and return to the other
page default settings. Choosing the Cancel button will close the Color
If the color of the label property is a different color than the area
behind it, the rectangular label property will stand out against the
background. If you want the label to appear as if it is placed directly
on the background, it is a good practice to choose a transparent
label property.
Speak Label
When this check box is selected, the DynaVox Series 4 software will
automatically add a Speak Label behavior to every new button. This
behavior will cause your device to automatically speak the button
label (without sending text to the Message Window) when the button
is selected.
Speak Text
Select this check box to automatically add a Speak Text behavior to
all new buttons. You will be asked to compose a text message for
each new button. This text message can be much longer than the
button’s label. When a button is selected, the assigned text will be
spoken but not sent to the Message Window.
Insert Label
When the Insert Label check box is activated, the label text of a
button will be automatically sent to the Message Window when the
button is selected. The label text will not be spoken until the Message
Window is selected.
Go to Page
If this check box is selected, each new button will be automatically
assigned a Go to Page behavior. When a new button is created, you
will be asked to identify a page to which you want to link the button.
When the button is selected, you will be taken to the selected page.
Audio Cue
When the Audio Cue check box is selected, a cue for auditory
feedback will be automatically assigned to each new button. You will
be asked to supply audio cue text when the button is created.
3-45
Use Page Edit Tools
To close the Buttons tab pane and return to the top level Preferences
Label Preferences
If you want to view or change the default settings for text labels,
access the Preferences menu (page 3-30) and then select the Show
box.
LABEL PREFERENCES
3-46
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Select the Label tab in this group box to access the following default
settings for new text labels:
Color
Choose the Color button to set a default color for the new label
properties (the area that surrounds label text). When this button is
selected, a Color Selector menu (page 4-165) of color palettes will
open. Select a new color and then select the OK button to save it and
return to the other page default settings. Choosing the Cancel button
will close the Color Selector menu without saving a new color choice.
2 Note:
If the color of the label property is a different color than the area
behind it, the rectangular label property will stand out against the
background. If you want the label to appear as if it is placed directly
on the background, it is a good practice to choose a transparent
label property.
Text Color
Customize the default color for new label text by selecting the Text
Color button. This button also opens a Color Selector menu
(page 4-165). Select a new color and then select the OK button to
save it and return to the other page default settings. Choosing the
Cancel button will close the Color Selector menu without saving a
new color choice
Alignment
The Alignment pull-down menu allows you to specify a standard
position for new label text. This combo box offers three choices: Left,
Center and Right. To change the alignment setting, select the pulldown menu. All three options will be displayed. When you select one
option, the menu will close and display only the selected alignment
setting.
Font
The Font button can be used to create default settings for new label
font. This button displays the current font settings.
3-47
Use Page Edit Tools
When it is selected, a Select Font menu opens and offers tools for
customizing font type, size and style:
1. Select the Font pull-down menu to see the available fonts. When it
is not open, the pull-down menu displays the name of the currently
selected font.
2. Select the Size pull-down menu to see the available font sizes.
When it is not open, the pull-down menu displays the current font
size.
3. Select the Bold check box to use bold font as the default setting.
4. Select the Italic check box to use italicized font as the default
setting.
The text in the Example box illustrates the current font settings.
5. Select the OK button to accept any changes to the Select Font
menu and return to the previous menu. If the Cancel button is
selected, the Select Font menu will close without saving any new
settings.
Ask for Label
When the Ask for Label check box is selected, the DynaVox Series 4
software will automatically ask for label text when a new label is
created.
To close the Label tab pane and return to the top level Preferences
3-48
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Box and Divider Preferences
If you want to view or change the default settings for boxes and
dividers, access the Preferences menu (page 3-30) and then select
the Show Object Properties button. The options on the top level of the
box. Select the Boxes/Dividers tab in this group box. The
Boxes/Dividers tab pane is divided into a Boxes group box and a
Dividers group box.
BOX AND DIVIDER PREFERENCES
There are six default settings available in the Boxes group box:
Box Style
The Box Style pull-down menu lets you to specify whether new boxes
should be labeled or unlabeled. To change this setting, select the
pull-down menu. Both options will be displayed. When you select an
option, the menu will close and display only the selected setting.
3-49
Use Page Edit Tools
Color
Choose the Color button to set a default color for the new box. When
this button is selected, a Color Selector menu with color palettes will
open. Select a new color and then select the OK button to save it and
return to the other settings. Choosing the Cancel button will close the
Color Selector menu without saving a new color choice
Border Color
Choose the Border Color button to choose a color for new box
borders. When this button is selected, a Color Selector menu of color
palettes will open. Select a new color and then select the OK button
to save it and return to the other settings. Choosing the Cancel button
will close the Color Selector menu without saving a new color choice
Text Color
A default color for the text of the box label can be chosen through the
Text Color button. The selection of this button also opens Color
Selector menu. Use the color palettes to select a new color and then
select the OK button to save it and return to the other settings.
Choosing the Cancel button will close the Color Selector menu
without saving a new color choice
Font
The Font button can be used to create default settings for font in the
box label. This button displays the current font settings.
When it is selected, a Select Font menu opens and offers tools for
customizing font type, size and style.
selected font.
size.
setting.
menu and return to the previous menu. If the Cancel button is
3-50
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
settings.
Ask for Label
The final default setting for boxes is the Ask for Label check box. If
you activate this feature, the DynaVox Series 4 software will present
an Enter Label window whenever you draw a labeled box.
There are two default settings specifically for dividers in the Dividers
group box.
Width
Use the Width pull-down menu to set a default thickness for new
divider lines. This pull-down menu offers six settings: Very Small,
Small, Medium, Big, Bigger and Extra Large. To change this setting,
select the pull-down menu. All available options will be displayed.
When you select an option, the menu will close and display only the
selected setting.
Color
Choose the Color button to choose a default color for new dividers.
When this button is selected, a Color Selector menu of color palettes
will open. Select a new color and then select the OK button to save it
and return to the other default settings. Choosing the Cancel button
will close the Color Selector menu without saving a new color choice
To close the Boxes/Dividers tab pane, select the Hide Object
Properties button at the bottom of the menu. You will be returned to
the top level Preferences menu. Selecting the OK button will close
the Preferences menu without returning to the top level. Any new
settings will be automatically saved. Select the Cancel button to close
the Preferences menu without saving any changes.
Symbol Preferences
If you want to view or change the default settings for symbols, access
the Preferences menu (page 3-30) and then select the Show Object
3-51
Use Page Edit Tools
Properties button. The options on the top level of the Preferences
menu will be covered with a Default Properties group box.
SYMBOL PREFERENCES
Select the Symbol tab in this group box to access the following
default settings for new symbols:
Color
3-52
Choose the Color button to open a color palette and set a default
color for symbol properties. The symbol property is the area
surrounding the symbol. When the Color button is selected, a Color
Selector (page 4-165) menu of color palettes will open. Select a new
color and then select the OK button to save it and close the Color
Selector menu. Choosing the Cancel button will close the Color
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
2 Note:
If the color of the symbol property is a different color than the area
behind it, the square symbol property will stand out against the
background. If you want the symbol to appear as if it is placed
directly on the background, it is a good practice to choose a
transparent symbol property.
Ask for Symbol
Selecting the Ask for Symbol check box will ensure that you will
automatically be asked to choose a symbol whenever you create a
new symbol property.
Image Display
Style
The Image Display Style pull-down menu allows you to specify
whether symbols should be centered or scaled to fit the available
symbol property. To change this setting, select the pull-down menu.
Both options will be displayed. When you select an option, the menu
will close and display only the selected setting.
To close the Symbol tab pane, select the Hide Object Properties
button at the bottom of the menu. You will be returned to the top level
Preferences menu. Selecting the OK button will close the
Preferences menu without returning to the top level. Any new settings
will be automatically saved. Select the Cancel button to close the
Tab Control Preferences
If you want to view or change the default settings for tab controls
access the Preferences menu (page 3-30) and then select the Show
3-53
Use Page Edit Tools
box.
TAB CONTROL PREFERENCES
Select the Tab Controls tab in this group box to access the following
default settings for new tab controls:
3-54
Number of Tab
Panes
This first option allows you to choose how many tab panes will be
supplied when new tab controls are created. This combo box can be
set to automatically supply between two and six tabs. To change the
default number of tabs, select the pull-down menu. All the options will
be displayed. When you select an option, the menu will close and
display only the selected setting.
Tab Height
Use the Tab Height pull-down menu to set the default height for new
tab controls. Tab height can be set at a range of six different sizes:
Very Small, Small, Medium, Big, Bigger and Extra Large. To change
the tab height setting, select the pull-down menu. All the available
options will be displayed. When you select an option, the menu will
close and display only the selected setting.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Font
The Font button can be used to set default properties for new tab
labels.
Selecting the Font button will open a Select Font menu with options
for adjusting font type, size and style.
selected font.
size.
setting.
menu and return to the Preferences menu. If the Cancel button is
settings.
Color
All new tabs are automatically colored according to the setting of this
Color button. When this button is selected, a Color Selector menu of
color palettes (page 4-165) will open. Select a new color and then
select the OK button to save it and return to the tab control default
settings. Choosing the Cancel button will close the Color Selector
menu without saving a new color.
Autofill Tabs
The Autofill Tabs pull-down menu lets you specify that new tab
controls should be automatically filled with symbols or labels. Tab
controls can also be empty by default. If you opt to automatically fill
the tab controls, you will be asked to supply symbol choices or label
text when new tabs are created. When you select this pull-down
menu, all three available options will be displayed. When you select
an option, the menu will close and display only the selected setting.
3-55
Text Color
Use Page Edit Tools
Use the Text Color button to choose a new color for the text in tab
labels. Selecting the Text Color button will open a Color Selector
menu (page 4-165). Choose a new text color from the color palettes
offered by this menu and then select the OK button to close the Color
Selector menu. The OK button will save any new color choices. If the
Cancel button is selected, the Color Selector menu will close without
saving any new settings.
To close the Tab Controls tab pane, select the Hide Object Properties
button at the bottom of the menu. You will be returned to the top level
Preferences menu. Selecting the OK button will close the
Preferences menu without returning to the top level. Any new settings
will be automatically saved. Select the Cancel button to close the
About the Properties
Menu
3-56
The Properties menu is another key feature of page edit mode. This
menu offers tools for customizing the attributes of a selected item.
Because each selected item will be made up of different features, the
tools in the Properties menu will change to reflect the attributes of
each selected item. The options for each item in the Properties menu
are the same as the options for the same type of item in the Object
Properties section of the Preferences menu. The difference between
the two menus is that the settings in the Preferences menu provide
default settings for each new object of the same type, while the
options in the Properties menu can be used to customize only
selected items on a page that is open in the page editor. As an
example, you would use the Properties menu when you want to
customize one or two buttons on a communication page. You would
use the Preferences menu when you want to redefine the default
settings for all the new buttons you are going to make.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
If the Properties menu is not displayed in the Series 4 page editor,
you can open it by following these steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Properties in the second pull-down menu. A blue check
mark will appear next to the Properties option.
PROPERTIES MENU
The rest of this section defines the various options in the Properties
menu. While different options are available for each type of selected
object, it is important to remember that the first three rows of options
in the Properties menu are the same for every object that is selected:
n
Expand/
Minimize Menu
The small square button in the top right corner of the Properties menu
(immediately to the right of the Properties label) can be used to
expand or minimize the Properties menu. When the square button
contains a horizontal line, the menu is at its full size. When the button
contains a small square, the menu options will be hidden.
3-57
o
Move
Use Page Edit Tools
The first button in the Properties menu is the Move button.
To move an object on the page, complete the following steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool to select an item on the page or popup.
2. Then select the Move button. The Tools palette and the Properties
menu will be hidden and a highlighted border with handles (small
white boxes) will appear around the item you selected.
3. Select the one of the handles and, maintaining the selection, drag
the item to move it.
4. When the item is repositioned, select one of the two options in the
Move Selection box at the top of the touch screen to return to the
Properties menu. Selecting the round button with the check mark
inside it will accept and save the move, while selecting the round
button with the slashed circle will cancel the move.
p
Resize
The next available option is the Resize button. Selecting this button
will allow you to drag the selected item to a larger or smaller size.
Selecting the Resize button will hide the Tools palette and the
Properties menu until you resize the selected item and accept or
cancel the change.
To resize an item, complete the following steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool to select the item.
2. Then select the Resize button in the Properties menu. A
highlighted border with handles (small white boxes) will appear
around the selected item.
3. Select one of the handles on the outline of the object and maintain
the selection as you drag the item into a new size. To maintain the
object’s proportion while resizing, use one of the corner handles.
Using the handles in the center of the top or bottom border will
resize the item vertically. The handles in the center of the left or
right border will resize the item horizontally.
4. When the item is resized, select one of the two options in the
Resize Selection box at the top of the touch screen to return to the
Properties menu. Selecting the round button with the check mark
inside it will accept and save the new size, while selecting the
round button with the slashed circle will cancel the change.
3-58
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
q
Expand/
Minimize Menu
Options
The third option in the first row of the Properties menu is an arrow that
allows you to expand or minimize the first two rows of buttons in the
Properties menu. When these rows are minimized, they will be
hidden. Select the arrow button again to bring them into view.
r
Arrows
The four blue arrow buttons in the second row of the Properties menu
allow you to quickly move a selection highlight through the various
fields on the open page or popup.
The right and left arrow buttons can be used to move a highlight from
one object to another. For example, if you have selected one tab
control, selecting the right or left arrow button will move the highlight
to the next tab control.
The up and down arrow buttons can be used to expand a selection to
include a larger object, or to highlight a small object that is difficult to
select. If you want to select the small button label and can only select
the button, select the down arrow to move the highlight to the label. If
you have selected a label on a button and want to move the highlight
to select the button or the page behind the button, select the up arrow
to expand the selection.
s
Cut
When the Cut button in the Properties menu is chosen, a selected
object is removed from the screen and stored on a hidden clipboard.
The clipboard object can then be placed (pasted) in a new location.
t
Copy
Select the Copy button in the Properties menu to make a duplicate of
a selected item. This copy is stored on a hidden clipboard. The
clipboard object can then be placed (pasted) in a new location. The
original item will remain unchanged.
u
Paste
Select the Paste button in the Properties menu to place on the open
page the last item that was cut or copied to the clipboard. When the
item appears on the page, bordered with handles (small white boxes),
a Move Selection box with OK (a circle with a checkmark) and Cancel
(a slashed circle) buttons will appear in the title bar at the top of the
touch screen. To move the item into position, select one of the
handles on the item’s border and drag it into place (maintain the
selection while you are moving the item). Once the item is positioned
correctly, select the OK button in the Move Selection box. To exit the
Move Selection box without saving any changes you made to the
selected item, select the Cancel button.
3-59
Use Page Edit Tools
The remaining features in the Properties menu will change depending
on the item that is selected in the open page or popup. The
Properties menu will offer unique options for customizing selected
pages, popups, buttons, labels and symbols.
Button Properties
To see the button features of the Properties menu, activate the Object
Selector tool (page 3-21) and then select a button on the open page
or popup. When selected, the button will be outlined by a blue
highlight. Tools for customizing the basic components of the button
will be featured in the Properties menu:
3-60
Behaviors
Selecting the Behavior Editor button that is featured in the Properties
menu will open the Behavior Editor menu that enables you to add new
behaviors to the selected button or make changes to behaviors that
have already been assigned to the button.
Button Type
The Button Type pull-down menu and can be used to select a new
shape (Beveled, Folder or Flat) for the selected button.
Color
Select the Edit button in the Color group box to open a Color Selector
menu that can be used to select or create a new color for the button.
A small block beside the Edit button in the Color group box will
display the color of the selected button.
Audio Cue
The Properties menu offers an option to add an audio cue that can be
used as auditory feedback for the scanning, joystick and audio touch
selection methods. Select the Audio Cue button to access a system
keyboard window for entering audio cue text.
Border Color
Border color can be used to make a button stand out clearly against
its background. Select the Edit button in the Border Color group box
to open a Color Selector menu that can be used to select or create a
new color for the button border. A small block beside the Edit button
in the Border Color group box will display the color of the selected
border.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Border Width
Select the Border Width pull-down menu to display seven options for
the width of a button border: Very Narrow, Narrower, Narrow,
Medium, Wide, Wider and Very Wide.
Symbol Properties
To see the Properties menu options for customizing symbols, activate
the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) and then select a symbol
property on the open page or popup. When selected, the symbol
property will be outlined by a blue highlight. Tools for customizing the
basic components of the symbol property will be featured in the
Properties menu:
Color
menu that can be used to select or create a new color for the symbol.
display the color of the selected symbol.
Image Display
Style
You may use the Properties menu to customize the way a symbol is
displayed within a symbol property. Selecting the Image Display Style
pull-down menu will reveal two options: Scale to Fit and Center.
When the Scale to Fit option is selected, the symbol will be
proportionately enlarge until it fills the entire symbol property. When
the Center option is selected, a smaller symbol will be centered in the
middle of the symbol property.
Symbol
Select the Edit button in the Symbol Group box to open a Select a
Symbol menu and choose a new symbol.
Label Properties
To see the Properties menu options for customizing labels, activate
the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) and then select a label property
on the open page or popup. When selected, the label property will be
3-61
Use Page Edit Tools
outlined by a blue highlight. Tools for customizing the basic
components of the label property will be featured in the Properties
menu:
Color
menu (page 4-165) that can be used to select or create a new color
for the label property. A small block beside the Edit button in the
Color group box will display the selected color.
Text Color
for the font that is being used for the label text. A small block beside
the Edit button in the Color group box will display the selected color.
Alignment
Use this pull-down menu to specify whether label text should be
aligned to the left or right of the label property. You may also opt to
center the text.
Text
Select the button in the Text group box to access a system keyboard
popup for adding and editing label text. When text is added to a label,
the button in the Text group box will display the label text.
Font
Select the button in the Font group box to open a Select Font menu
that can be used to customize the font that is being used in the label.
The button in the Font group box will always display the current font
settings.
Tab Control Properties
To see the Properties menu options for customizing tab controls,
activate the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) and then select a set of
tab controls on the open page or popup. When selected, the tab
controls will be outlined by a blue highlight. Tools for customizing the
3-62
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
basic components of tab controls will be featured in the Properties
menu:
Color
This option is only available when a single tab is highlighted. Select
the Edit button in the Color group box to open a Color Selector menu
that can be used to select or create a new color for the tab pane. A
small block beside the Edit button in the Color group box will display
the selected color.
Tab Height
This option is available when a whole set of tab controls is
highlighted. Select the Tab Height pull-down menu to display seven
options for the size of the tab controls: Very Small, Small, Medium,
Big, Bigger and Extra Large.
Number of Tab
Panes
highlighted. Use this pull-down menu to increase or reduce the
number of tab panes in the tab control set. There can be between two
and six tab controls in each set.
Auditory Scan
Cue
highlighted. Select this button to access a system keyboard window
for entering an audio cue that can be used as auditory feedback for
the scanning, joystick and audio touch selection methods.
Box Properties
To see the Properties menu options for customizing boxes, activate
the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) and then select a box on the
open page or popup. When selected, the box will be outlined by a
blue highlight. Tools for customizing the basic components of the box
will be featured in the Properties menu:
Color
for the box. A small block beside the Edit button in the Color group
box will display the selected color.
3-63
Use Page Edit Tools
Box Style
Use this pull-down menu to specify whether the box should be
labeled or unlabeled.
Border Color
Select the Edit button in the Border Color group box to open a Color
Selector menu (page 4-165) that can be used to select or create a
new color for the border around the box. A small block beside the Edit
button in the Color group box will display the selected color.
Text Color
Select the Edit button in the Text Color group box to open a Color
Selector menu (page 4-165) that can be used to select or create a
new color for the text in the box’s label. A small block beside the Edit
button in the Color group box will display the selected color.
Font
that can be used to customize the font that is being used in the box
label. The button in the Font group box will always display the current
font settings.
Text
Select the button in the Text group box to access a system keyboard
popup for adding and editing text for the box label. The button in the
Text group box will display the current box label text.
Search Box Properties
To see the Properties menu options for customizing search boxes,
activate the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) and then select a search
box on the open page or popup. When selected, the search box will
be outlined by a blue highlight. Tools for customizing the basic
components of the search box will be featured in the Properties
menu:
Color
3-64
for the search box. A small block beside the Edit button in the Color
group box will display the selected color.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
Local Search
The contents of the buttons in a search box are usually defined by
search criteria that are assigned to a button (on another page) with a
Go to Page & Search behavior (Common Behaviors: Add a Go to
Page & Search Behavior on page 4-177). When this button is used
to open the page with the search box, the search box buttons are
automatically filled according to the search criteria. If the page with
the search box is opened without the use of a Go to Page & Search
behavior, the search box will not be able to fill with buttons unless a
local search is defined.
Select this button to open an Edit Search menu were criteria for the
local search can be defined.
EDIT SEARCH MENU
Behaviors
menu will open the Behavior Editor menu, allowing you to add new
behaviors to the buttons in the search box. The Behavior Editor menu
can also be used to make changes to behaviors that have already
been assigned to the search box buttons.
3-65
Auditory Scan
Cue
Use Page Edit Tools
Select this button to access a system keyboard window for entering
an audio cue that can be used as auditory feedback for the scanning,
joystick and audio touch selection methods.
Divider Properties
To see the Properties menu options for customizing dividers, activate
the Object Selector tool and then select a divider on the open page or
popup. When selected, the divider will be outlined by a blue highlight.
Tools for customizing the basic components of the divider will be
featured in the Properties menu:
Color
menu that can be used to select or create a new color for the divider.
display the selected color.
Width
Select the Width pull-down menu to display seven options for the
width of the divider line: Very Small, Small, Medium, Big, Bigger and
Extra Large.
Active Label Properties
To see the Properties menu options for customizing active labels,
activate the Object Selector tool and then select an active label on
the open page or popup. When selected, the active labels will be
outlined by a blue highlight. Tools for customizing the basic
3-66
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
components of the active label will be featured in the Properties
menu:
Color
menu that can be used to select or create a new color for the active
label. A small block beside the Edit button in the Color group box will
display the selected color.
Text Color
menu that can be used to select or create a new color for the text in
the active label. A small block beside the Edit button in the Color
group box will display the selected color.
Alignment
Use this pull-down menu to specify whether active label text should
be aligned to the left or right of the active label property. You may also
opt to center the text.
Font
that can be used to customize the font that is being used in the active
label. The button in the Font group box will always display the current
font settings.
Active Label
Type
Use this pull-down menu to specify the type of information that should
be supplied to the active label.
Active Area Properties
Active areas are like invisible buttons. They can feature behaviors,
but they have no visible characteristics. Because of this, the
Properties menu for active areas features only one option:
Behaviors
menu will open the Behavior Editor menu, allowing you to add new
behaviors to an active area. The Behavior Editor menu can also be
used to make changes to behaviors that have already been assigned
to the active area.
3-67
Use Page Edit Tools
Page Properties
To see the Properties menu options for customizing pages, activate
the Object Selector tool and then select the background of a page.
When selected, the page will be outlined by a blue highlight. Tools for
customizing the basic components of the page will be featured in the
Properties menu:
Color
menu that can be used to select or create a new color for the
background of the page. A small block beside the Edit button in the
Background
Mode
Use this pull-down menu to specify whether the page’s background
should be a solid color or a scaled, unscaled or tiled picture.
Background
Picture
If you have chosen to use a picture as the background of the page,
select this button to open a Select a Picture File menu. Use this menu
to choose the picture that will be featured in the background.
Open Page
Behaviors
Each page can be assigned behaviors that will be activated as soon
as the page is opened. Selecting the Behavior Editor button that is
featured in the Properties menu will open the Behavior Editor menu,
allowing you to add new behaviors for this feature. The Behavior
Editor menu can also be used to make changes to behaviors that
have already been chosen to work when the page is opened.
Close Page
Behaviors
as the page is closed. Selecting the Behavior Editor button that is
have already been chosen to work when the page is closed.
Popup Properties
To see the Properties menu options for customizing popups, activate
the Object Selector tool and then select the background of a popup.
3-68
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use Page Edit Tools
When selected, the popup will be outlined by a blue highlight. Tools
for customizing the basic components of the popup will be featured in
the Properties menu:
Popup Style
Use this pull-down menu to specify whether the popup should be a
static box, a moveable box or a labeled window.
Border Color
Select the Edit button in the Border Color group box to open a Color
Selector menu that can be used to select or create a new color for the
border that surrounds the popup. A small block beside the Edit button
in the Color group box will display the selected color.
Text Color
If the popup has a title, select the Edit button in the Text Color group
box to open a Color Selector menu that can be used to select or
create a new color for the text in the title. A small block beside the
Edit button in the Color group box will display the selected color.
Font
If the popup has a title, select the button in the Font group box to
open a Select Font menu that can be used to customize the font that
is being used in the title. The button in the Font group box will always
display the current font settings.
Text
If the popup has a title, select the button in the Text group box to
access a system keyboard popup for creating and editing the text for
the title. The button in the Text group box will always display the
current title text.
On Page Jump
Use this pull-down menu to specify how the popup should behave if
the Page Navigator menu is used to access a new page or popup
while the popup is open. The setting in this pull-down menu will also
affect the behavior of the popup if a button with a Go to Page
behavior is selected on a page that is visible behind the popup.
Color
menu that can be used to select or create a new color for the
background of the popup. A small block beside the Edit button in the
Background
Mode
Use this pull-down menu to specify whether the popup’s background
should be a solid color or a scaled, unscaled or tiled picture.
Background
Picture
If you have chosen to use a picture as the background of the popup,
select this button to open a Select a Picture File menu. Use this menu
to choose the picture that will be featured in the background.
3-69
Use Page Edit Tools
Open Page
Behaviors
Each popup can be assigned behaviors that will be activated as soon
as the popup is opened. Selecting the Behavior Editor button that is
have already been chosen to work when the popup is opened.
Close Page
Behaviors
as the popup is closed. Selecting the Behavior Editor button that is
have already been chosen to work when the popup is closed.
Hide the Properties Menu
You may prefer not to see the Properties menu in the Series 4 page
editor.
To hide the menu, follow these steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Properties in the second pull-down menu to remove the
3-70
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
CREATE NEW PAGES
The tools available in page edit mode provide you with great flexibility
in creating new pages and popups. The tools allow you to place
several kinds of objects on pages and customize them to facilitate
communication, navigation, and other functions. The objects a page
or popup may contain include the following:
Buttons
Selecting a button is the most common way the individual using a
page will cause an action to occur, such as speaking a word or
opening a different page.
Active Areas
Active areas are like buttons, but they are invisible. Active areas are
often used in conjunction with background pictures so that selecting
an area on the picture will cause an action to occur.
Labels
Labels are words placed on an object to help indicate the object’s
purpose. A label on a page might give a descriptive page title, while a
label on a button might indicate the button’s behavior.
Active Labels
Active labels are “smart” labels that display information controlled by
the device, such as the system date and time or battery charge, as
well as all the personal information entered in the User Setup Wizard,
such as name and address.
Symbols
Symbols are small pictures that help to visually indicate a word or
concept. Symbols are often placed on buttons to illustrate the
button’s purpose.
Message
Windows
A Message Window allows an individual to compose a message from
several selections of communication buttons. The words appear in
the Message Window, and the whole text is not spoken until the
Message Window is selected.
Tab Controls
Adding tab controls to a page allows access to more buttons or other
objects from a single page. A series of tabs appear along the top of
the tab control, and selecting a tab shows a new layer of buttons.
Search Boxes
Search boxes are used with the Go to Page and Search behavior.
The search box automatically fills with buttons based on search
criteria defined in the behavior.
3-71
Create New Pages
You can use any of these objects on pages or popups that you create.
When you create a new page or popup, you should think about how
the page will be used. Communication is often the focus of a page,
but you can also include buttons for other purposes, such as
navigation buttons to access existing pages or popups. (You may
also wish to add navigation buttons to existing pages that will access
your newly created page.)
Alternatively, an entire page may have a purpose other than
communication. You might create a remote control page with buttons
that have IR behaviors for controlling the television or other devices,
or a page to play your favorite songs. See Appendix A: Behavior
Reference for more information about the available behaviors.
When you create a new page or popup, you may start with a blank
page or you may use a template. Templates are pages that are
already designed and laid out with empty buttons. Your device
includes templates for the application page sets. You can use a
template to easily add a coordinating page into a page set. You can
also create your own template to create multiple pages based on your
own design.
If you decide to create a page from scratch, think about its design and
layout. Here are some questions you might ask:
• Should buttons have symbols, labels, or both? How large do the
buttons need to be?
• How many buttons are necessary? Should tab controls be used to
divide many buttons among several tabs?
• Should the page include a Message Window?
Once you have some idea of what the page should contain, you can
create the page and start placing objects on it. The following sections
describe all of the objects in detail and give step-by-step instructions
for creating them and customizing them to fit your needs. You may
also wish to see the sections Page Layout Basics on page 3-164,
which describes several tools to help you arrange objects on pages,
and Organize Page Objects on page 3-181, which provides
3-72
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
information on page objects such as boxes and dividers, which help
you visually organize a page.
Create and Modify
Pages
Building original communication pages in the page editor begins with
the creation of the basic page. A page covers the entire touch screen
below the title bar. Once it is created, it can be enhanced with
buttons, symbols, text, behavior, tab controls, search boxes, pictures
and other visual characteristics.
A new page is created with the New Page option in the pull-down
menu for the page editor. Its attributes are dependent on the default
settings that have been established on the Pages tab pane that is
available in the Default Properties group box (Show Object
Properties) of the Preferences menu (page 3-30). The default
settings in the Preferences menu affect the creation of each new
page in the Series 4 software.
The characteristics of a single page can also be modified in the
Properties menu (page 3-57) that is available in the page editor.
Unlike the Preferences menu default settings, the settings in the
Properties menu affect only the page that is currently open.
Create a New Page
You may want to begin to build a communication page by opening a
blank page.
touch screen.
3-73
Create New Pages
2. Select File in the main pull-down menu.
3. Select New Page in the second pull-down menu. A system
4. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new page.
5. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup. A blank
page will open in the page editor. The characteristics of this page
will depend on the default settings for pages in the Preferences
menu.
Open an Existing Page or Popup
If you want to use the page editing tools to change one of your
communication pages or popups, you must first open it in the page
editor.
To do this, follow the steps below:
touch screen.
3. Select Open Page in the second pull-down menu. A Select Page
menu will open.
To find a page or popup in the Select Page menu, you can use the
Search feature to locate a specific page name or you can use the
scroll buttons to look through the viewports. If you want to use the
Search feature, continue with step 4. If you want to scroll through
the viewports, continue with step 5.
4. To use the Search feature, select Search text box. A system
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the name of the page or
popup. Be sure to use the page’s exact name.
3-74
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
b. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup. The
page or popup name will be highlighted in the right viewport of
the Select Page menu, and you can continue with step 6.
beside the left viewport to find the page set folder in which the page
is stored.
a. Select the appropriate page set folder. The right viewport will fill
with the names of the pages and popups that are stored in the
selected page set.
b. Use the up and down scroll buttons beside the right viewport to
find the right page or popup name.
c. Select the name of the page or popup you want to open.
6. Select the OK button to close the Select Page menu. The page or
popup you chose will open in the page editor.
Import a Page or Popup into the Page Editor
The Import Page option in the page editing pull-down menu can be
used to bring a page or popup to the page editor directly from the
Exports folder inside the User Files folder on your device’s main data
storage card, or from a USB device or a second storage card. This
can be a time saving option if you are planning to make changes to a
page that you are importing from an outside source. The process of
importing a page is shortened because you can import the page
directly in the page editor instead of importing it into the Page
Browser menu and then opening it in the page editor.
2 Note:
If you are using a removable USB storage device, be sure that it is
plugged into the dual USB host port on the side of your DV4/MT4.
3-75
2 Note:
Create New Pages
If you are using a secondary data storage card, be sure that it is
correctly installed in your device. If you have not yet done this, see
Installing a Second Data Storage Card on page 6-8 before
proceeding with the steps below.
If you want to import a page or popup directly into the page editor,
follow these steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Import/Export in the second pull-down menu.
4. Select Import Page in the third pull-down menu. A Select Page
File(s) menu will open.
5. If you are importing a page from a secondary data card or a USB
device, select the Show All Directories check box.
6. In the left viewport, select the appropriate folder (or the expansion
box beside the appropriate folder):
• If the page is on the main data storage card, select the User
Files folder and then the Exports folder.
• If you are using a USB storage device, select UMS_FOLDER.
• If you are using a second data storage card, select Storage
Card2.
The right viewport will fill with a list of the files that are available in
the selected source.
7. In the right viewport, select the name of the page you want to
import.
8. Select the OK button to close the Select Page File(s) menu. A copy
of the page you chose will be imported and opened in the page
editor.
3-76
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
Select a Color as the Background of a Page
The default option (in the Preferences menu) for the background of a
page is a solid color.
If you want to select or create a new color for the background of a
page, or if you have been using a picture as the page’s background
and now want to revert to a color, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select the background
of the open page.
2. Make sure that the Color option is selected in the Background
Mode pull-down menu.
3. Select the Edit button in the Color group box. A Color Selector
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the page, refer to Create a
6. Select the OK button to close the Color Selector menu. The
background of the page will automatically fill with the color you
selected. In the Properties menu, a small box beside the Edit
button in the Color group box will also display the chosen color.
3-77
Create New Pages
Use a Picture as the Background of a Page
You can also opt to customize a communication page by using an
imported picture file as a background instead of a simply choosing a
color.
2 Note:
A picture that will be used in the background of a page or popup
must be stored in the Images folder on the device’s main data
storage card. If the picture is not stored on the device, the Series 4
software will be unable to find it when the page or popup is opened.
If you have not already imported and stored the picture you want to
use, begin with one of the following:
• Import a Picture File with a USB Storage Device or
Secondary Data Card on page 4-69
• Import a Picture File from a Windows Computer on
•
page 4-71
Import a Picture File from a Macintosh Computer on
page 4-71
If you want to select a picture for the background of the open page,
complete the following steps:
of the open page.
2. Select the Background Picture button in the Properties menu
(page 3-57). A Select a Picture File menu will open.
3. Select the Files of Type pull-down menu. The menu will expand
to display the available graphic file types: JPG, GIF, BMP and All
FIles.
4. Select the type of picture file you will be using. If you are unsure
what format to select, choose the All Files option. The pull-down
menu will close and display only the type of graphic file you
selected.
3-78
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
You may use the scroll buttons to look through the viewports for
the picture you want to use or you may search for the file by name.
If you want to scroll to the file, complete step 5. If you want to use
the Search feature, complete step 6.
5. To find the picture in the viewports, select Show All Directories
check box.
a. Select the expansion box beside the Storage Card folder in the
left viewport.
b. Select the Images folder. The right viewport will fill with a list of
available picture files.
c. Select the name of the picture in the right viewport. If necessary,
use the scroll buttons beside the viewport to look through all the
available options. Continue with step 7.
6. To use the Search feature, select the Search text box. A system
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the name of the picture file.
You do not have to use the file extension.
file name will be highlighted in the right viewport. Continue with
the next step.
7. Select the OK button to close the Select a Picture File menu. The
name of the picture file you selected will be displayed on the
Background Picture button.
8. Select the Background Mode pull-down menu in the Properties
menu (page 3-57). The menu will expand to display all the
available options, including three options for using a picture as a
background:
Unscaled
Picture
Selecting this option will add the picture to
the center of the page or popup
background. The picture will be displayed at
its original size.
3-79
Create New Pages
Scaled Picture
Selecting this option will alter the size of the
picture to make it fill the entire background
Tiled Picture
Selecting this option will fill the page or
popup background with small copies of the
selected picture.
9. Select one of the three picture options. The pull-down menu will
close and display only the selected option. The picture will now be
featured as the background of the page.
Select Open Page and Close Page
Behaviors
as the page is opened or closed. These behaviors are not set in the
Preferences menu as defaults for each new page, but are assigned
through the Properties menu to one selected page.
If you want your page to perform a specific behavior whenever it is
opened or closed, follow these steps:
of the open page.
2. If you want the page to activate a behavior when it is opened,
select the Behavior Editor button in the Open Page Behaviors
group box. If you want a behavior to be initiated when the page is
closed, select the Behavior Editor button in the Close Page
Behaviors group box. The selection of either button will open the
Behavior Editor menu (page 3-118).
3-80
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
3. Select the pull-down menu in the Behaviors group box. The menu
will expand to display a list of the available behavior categories.
2 Note:
For more information on the behavior categories, please refer to
Appendix A: Behavior Reference. This appendix also offers
information on the individual behaviors and their uses.
6. Select the Add button.
7. If the device requires no other additional information to complete
the behavior, the selected behavior will be added to the Steps
viewport and you may continue with step 8.
2 Note:
For more detailed steps on adding frequently used behaviors, see
Add Behaviors to Buttons on page 4-170.
steps 3 through 7.
3-81
Create New Pages
have been added to the page, select the behavior in the Steps
Move Up
viewport list.
Edit
Delete
Move Down
viewport list.
selected behaviors are now applied to the page.
Make a Duplicate Page or Save Page Editing
Changes under a New Name
The Save As option enables you to duplicate a communication page
or to save a copy of a changed page while leaving the original intact.
When you select this pull-down menu option, you may save changes
to a new page name. The page with the original name will remain
unchanged unless you select the Save option in the File pull-down
menu.
3-82
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
To create a duplicate of a page or save changes under a new name,
follow these steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Save As in the second pull-down menu. A system keyboard
popup will open.
4. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new page file.
5. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup. Any
new changes will be saved to the new file name. The new changes
will not be saved to the old file name.
2 Note:
Remember that the steps above will not save your work to your
device’s data storage card. To prevent any loss of information in
the event of a device failure, you should also be sure to follow the
steps in Back Up to a Data Storage Card on page 7-4 when you
exit the page editor after making changes.
Save Page Editing Work
You should be sure to periodically save your changes while you are
creating or customizing in the Series 4 page editor.
To save your work, follow these steps:
touch screen.
3-83
Create New Pages
3. Select Save in the second pull-down menu. Any new changes will
be saved to the existing file name.
2 Note:
Export a Page or Popup from Page Edit
Mode
You may want to use the Export Page option in the page editing pulldown menu if you are editing a page because you intend to share it.
Selecting this option will send a page or popup directly from the page
editor to the Exports folder inside the User Files folder on your
device’s main data storage card. From the Exports folder, the page
can be shared with a secondary data storage card, a removable USB
storage device or a computer.
2 Note:
2 Note:
3-84
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
If you want to export a page or popup directly from the page editor,
follow these steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Import/Export in the second pull-down menu.
4. Select Export Page in the third pull-down menu.
5. Select the OK button when the page has been successfully
exported. A copy of the page is now available in the Exports folder
inside the User Files folder on your device’s main data storage
card. Note that the page file has been assigned a file extension
(.epg).
Create and Modify
Popups
A popup is very similar to a page and is often described as a mini
page that is displayed on top of a full size page. A popup usually
contains a group of buttons that are related to a specific topic or
activity. A popup can also contain a mini Message Window.
The creation of a new popup is like the creation of a new page. Like a
page, a popup is created from an option in the pull-down menus for
the page editor. To create a new popup, choose the New Popup
option in the pull-down menu. The popup will be created according to
the default settings that have been established on the Pages tab
pane that is available in the Default Properties group box (Show
Object Properties) of the Preferences menu (page 3-30). The default
settings in the Preferences menu affect the creation of each new
popup in the Series 4 software.
The attributes of a single popup can also be modified in the
3-85
Create New Pages
Properties menu affect only the popup that is currently open.
Create a New Popup
You may wish to create a new popup to accompany one of your
communication pages.
If you want to create a new popup, follow these steps:
touch screen.
3. Select New Popup in the second pull-down menu. A system
4. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new popup.
5. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup.
6. If the Preferences menu is set to automatically ask for a popup title
(one that will be displayed on the popup), a system keyboard
popup will open and you should complete the rest of this step. If
the device is not set to ask for a popup title, no further steps are
necessary.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the text that should appear on
the popup as its title.
b. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup.
A blank popup will open in the page editor. The characteristics
of this popup will depend on the default settings for popups in
the Preferences menu.
3-86
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
Select a New Popup Style
You may choose any of three styles for a new popup,
To assign a new style to a selected popup, follow these steps:
of the popup.
2. Select the Popup Style pull-down menu in the Properties menu
(page 3-57). The menu will expand to display three popup styles:
Static Box
A static box popup has no title and cannot
be moved into a new area of the touch
screen.
Moveable Box
A moveable box popup can be moved
around on the touch screen. When this type
of popup is open, select the small box in the
lower right corner of its border and maintain
the selection as you drag the popup into a
new position.
Labeled Window
A labeled popup has a small title bar with a
title and buttons for minimizing and
maximizing the popup. A labeled popup can
be moved if you select the popup’s border
and then maintain the selection as you drag
the popup into a new position.
3. Select one of the available styles. The pull-down menu will close
and display only the chosen option. The new style will be
immediately applied to the popup.
3-87
Create New Pages
Select a New Popup Border Color
The color that is used for the color of a new popup’s border is
determined by the default settings in the Preferences menu
(page 3-36).
If you draw a popup, though, and want to use a border color that is
different than the default, you can do so by following these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select the border
around the popup.
2. Select the Edit button in the Border Color group box of the
Properties menu (page 3-57). A Color Selector menu (page 4-165)
will open.
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the popup border, refer to
Create a Custom Color on page 4-167.
5. Select the OK button to close the Color Selector menu. The border
of the selected popup will automatically fill with the color you
chose. In the Properties menu, a small box beside the Edit button
in the Color group box will also display the chosen color.
3-88
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
Select a New Text Color for the Popup Title
If the popup you are editing is a labeled window, it will include a title
at the top of the popup.
If you want to select or create a new color for this title, follow these
steps:
of the popup.
2. Select the Edit button in the Text Color group box of the Properties
menu (page 3-57). A Color Selector menu (page 4-165) will open.
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the text, refer to Create a
5. Select the OK button to close the Color Selector menu. The text in
the popup’s title will automatically fill with the color you chose. In
the Properties menu, a small box beside the Edit button in the
Color group box will also display the chosen color.
Select New Font Styles for the Popup Title
The font that is used in the title of a popup can be customized to
make it easier for an individual to see or to suit the design
preferences of an individual user. When a title is added to a popup, its
3-89
Create New Pages
text is displayed in a font that corresponds with the settings in the
Pages tab pane of the Preferences menu (page 3-36). Tools in the
Properties menu, however, can be used to add new font styles to a
selected title.
To adjust the font in the title of a popup, follow these steps:
of the popup
2. Select the button in Font group box of the Properties menu
(page 3-57). A Select Font menu will open.
3. If you want to change the font, select the Font pull-down menu and
then select one of the font options: Arial, Courier New, Symbol,
Tahoma and Times New Roman.
24, 26, 28, 36, 48 and 72.
7. Look at the Example group box to see a sample of the font styles
you have chosen. If necessary, repeat steps 2 through 6 to make
8. Select the OK button to close the Select Font menu. The new font
settings will be applied to the text in the popup’s title. In the
Properties menu, the button in the Font group box will display the
current font settings.
Add or Edit Text for the Popup Title
The Properties menu provides DV4/MT4 users with the option to add
a new title to a popup or to change the existing title.
3-90
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
of the popup.
2. Select the button in the Text group box in the Properties menu
(page 3-57). A system keyboard popup will open.
3. Use the system keyboard to enter the new text.
new title will be added to the selected popup. In the Properties
menu, the button in the Text group box will also display the edited
text.
Choose an On Page Jump Setting for a
Popup
When a popup is open on the DV4/MT4 touch screen, a larger
communication page is usually visible beneath the popup. It is
possible that buttons on this page can be selected instead of objects
on the popup. The Properties menu for popups provides the On Page
Jump pull-down menu to enable you to specify what should happen
to an open popup if a button with a Go to Page behavior is selected
on a page that is visible behind the popup. The setting of the On
Page Jump pull-down menu will also affect the popup’s behavior if
the Page Navigator (or Page Browser) menu is used to open another
page while the popup is open.
To select an On Page Jump setting for a popup, follow these steps:
of the open popup.
3-91
Create New Pages
2. Select the On Page Jump pull-down menu in the Properties menu
(page 3-57). The pull-down menu will expand to display three
available settings:
Keep Open
If the Page Navigator (or Page Browser)
menu or a button with a Go to Page
behavior is used to open another page, the
popup will remain open, active and on the
top layer of the touch screen.
Close
The popup will close if the Page Navigator
(or Page Browser) menu or a button with a
Go to Page behavior is used to open
another page.
Minimize
If the Page Navigator (or Page Browser)
menu or a button with a Go to Page
behavior is used to open another page, the
open popup will be minimized in the lower
left corner of the touch screen. When the
square button on the right side of the title
bar that displays the popup’s name is
selected, the popup will be opened again.
3. Select on of the available options. The pull-down menu will close
and display only the selected option. The behavior that you
selected will be immediately applied to the popup.
Select a Color as the Background of a
Popup
The default option (in the Preferences menu) for the background of a
popup is a solid color.
3-92
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
If you want to select or create a new color for the background of a
popup, or if you have been using a picture as the popup’s
background and now want to revert to a color, follow these steps:
of the open popup.
2. Make sure that the Color option is selected in the Background
Mode pull-down menu.
3. Select the Edit button in the Color group box. A Color Selector
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the popup, refer to Create a
background of the popup will automatically fill with the color you
3-93
Create New Pages
Use a Picture as the Background of a Popup
You can also opt to customize a popup by using an imported picture
file as a background instead of a simply choosing a color.
2 Note:
A picture that will be used in the background of a page or popup
must be stored in the Images folder on the device’s main data
storage card. If the picture is not stored on the device, the Series 4
software will be unable to find it when the page or popup is opened.
If you have not already imported and stored the picture you want to
use, begin with one of the following:
• Import a Picture File with a USB Storage Device or
•
•
Import a Picture File from a Windows Computer on
page 4-71
Import a Picture File from a Macintosh Computer on
page 4-71
If you want to select a picture for the background of the open popup,
complete the following steps:
of the open popup.
2. Select the Background Picture button in the Properties menu
(page 3-57). A Select a Picture File menu will open.
3. Select the Files of Type pull-down menu. The menu will expand
to display the available graphic file types: JPG, GIF, BMP and All
FIles.
4. Select the type of picture file you will be using. If you are unsure
what format to select, choose the All Files option. The pull-down
menu will close and display only the type of graphic file you
selected.
the picture you want to use or you may search for the file by name.
3-94
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
5. To find the picture in the viewports, select Show All Directories
check box.
a. Select the expansion box beside the Storage Card folder in the
left viewport.
b. Select the Images folder. The right viewport will fill with a list of
available picture files.
c. Select the name of the picture in the right viewport. If necessary,
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the name of the picture file.
You do not have to use the file extension.
the next step.
7. Select the OK button to close the Select a Picture File menu. The
name of the picture file you selected will be displayed on the
Background Picture button.
8. Select the Background Mode pull-down menu in the Properties
menu (page 3-57). The menu will expand to display all the
available options, including three options for using a picture as a
background:
Unscaled
Picture
Selecting this option will add the picture to
the center of the page or popup
background. The picture will be displayed at
its original size.
Scaled Picture
Selecting this option will alter the size of the
picture to make it fill the entire background
3-95
Create New Pages
Tiled Picture
Selecting this option will fill the page or
popup background with small copies of the
selected picture.
9. Select one of the three picture options. The pull-down menu will
close and display only the selected option. The picture will now be
featured as the background of the popup.
Select Open Page and Close Page
Behaviors
as the popup is opened or closed. These behaviors are not set in the
Preferences menu as defaults for all new popups, but are assigned
through the Properties menu for each individual popup.
If you want your popup to perform a specific behavior whenever it is
opened or closed, follow these steps:
of the open popup.
2. If you the popup to activate a behavior when it is opened, select
the Behavior Editor button in the Open Page Behaviors group
box. If you want a behavior to be initiated when the popup is
closed, select the Behavior Editor button in the Close Page
Behaviors group box. The selection of either button will open the
3-96
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
2 Note:
2 Note:
steps 3 through 7.
3-97
Create New Pages
have been added to the popup, select the behavior in the Steps
Move Up
viewport list.
Edit
Delete
Move Down
viewport list.
selected behaviors are now applied to the popup.
Create and Modify
Templates
3-98
The DynaVox Series 4 software provides templates as an easy,
efficient way to create original pages. Templates are pages and
popups that provide a pre-programmed layout of buttons that can be
filled with custom vocabulary. The Series 4 software offers many
templates that are based on the layouts of the DynaVox Language
Applications page sets. This allows you to build customized pages
from templates that match the page set you are using. You can also
use the advanced page editing features to build your own customized
templates.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
The basic attributes of each template are dependent on the default
settings that have been established for pages and popups on the
Pages tab pane (page 3-36) in the Default Properties group box
(Show Object Properties) of the Preferences menu. The
characteristics of a single template can be modified in the Properties
menu that is available in the page editor.
Save a Page or Popup as a Template
If you want to use one layout to create a series of pages or popups,
you can create your own template.
To create your own template, follow these steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Save as Template in the second pull-down menu. A system
4. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new template.
6. Select the OK button when the template has been successfully
saved.
2 Note:
Once a template has been saved, you will be unable to make
additional changes to that template.
3-99
2 Note:
Create New Pages
Open a Copy of a Template
You may also opt to create a page that is based on a template.
DynaVox Series 4 software offers templates that were designed to
work with the DynaVox Language Applications page sets. When you
follow these steps, you open a new copy of a template. Any changes
you make to the template copy are saved as a new page. The original
template remains unchanged and can be used again.
To open a copy of a template, follow these steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Open Template in the second pull-down menu. A system
4. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the page you will be
creating.
5. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup. A
Select Template menu (page 2-50) will open.
To find an item in the Select Template menu, you can use the
Search feature to locate a specific template name or you can use
the scroll buttons to look through the viewports. If you want to use
the Search feature, continue with the step 6. If you want to scroll
through the viewports, continue with step 7.
3-100
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the name of the template. Be
sure to use the template’s exact name.
template name will be highlighted in the right viewport of the
Select Template menu, and you can continue with step 8.
beside the left viewport to find the name of the page set that
contains the template.
with the names of the templates that are stored in the selected
page set.
find the right template name.
c. Select the name of the template you want to open.
8. Select the OK button to close the Select Template menu. A copy
of the chosen template will open.
Create and Modify
Buttons
with a touch, a mouse click or other input device. It may represent a
behavior, a word or even several sentences. A button may feature a
text label and/or a symbol, and can be programmed to enact specific
3-101
Create New Pages
behaviors when it is selected. There are several types of buttons,
each with a specific function:
Button Type
Button Function
Symbol
This basic button usually features a symbol and a label. It can be
used for communication (with an Insert Label/Insert Text or Speak
Label/Insert Text behavior) or as a command button. Many behaviors
can be assigned to a symbol button, including the commands to
activate a macro or perform an infrared command.
Go To
category. Go To buttons are used to move from one communication
page or popup to another.
Predictor
This type of button displays words, phrases and sentences that are
predicted by the DynaVox rate enhancement features.
Character
Predictor
This type of button can be used with (or instead of) a keyboard page
by individuals who use the scanning selection method. When a letter
is selected, the character prediction button will predict the next logical
letter selection.
Recency
This type of button is similar to a predictor button. The words and
phrases that are displayed in recency buttons are predicted
according to frequency of use.
The Tools palette provides several tools for adding the different types
of buttons to a communication page or popup. When any kind of
button is created, its attributes are dependent on the default settings
that have been established on the Buttons tab pane (page 3-41) that
is available in the Default Properties group box (Show Object
Properties) of the Preferences menu. The default settings in the
Preferences menu affect the creation of each new button in the
Series 4 software.
The characteristics of individual buttons can also be modified in the
3-102
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
Properties menu affect only the button that is selected in the page
editor.
Draw a Single Button
The Tools palette offers a variety of tools for drawing buttons for
different purposes. If you are creating or customizing a
communication page, you will likely use the Button tool, the Symbol
Button tool or the Folder Button tool (see Button Tool on page 3-22).
Use the basic Button tool to draw a button that has (if your device’s
default settings are being used) a label property but not a symbol
property. When your device’s default settings are in effect, the
Symbol Button tool can be used to create a button with both label and
symbol properties, and an Insert Label behavior. The Folder Button
tool can be used to create folder-shaped buttons. If your device’s
default settings are being used, folder buttons will include label and
symbol properties and a Go To Page behavior. All of these default
button characteristics can be changed in the Preferences menu.
Three other tools, the Predictor Button tool, the Character Button tool
and the Recency Button tool (see Predictor Button Tool on
page 3-24), are intended for use during the creation of keyboard
pages. These types of buttons are used to incorporate the Series 4
word prediction features into keyboard pages.
2 Note:
When you use any of the various button-creation tools to draw a
new button, remember that the attributes of the new button will be
affected by the settings in the Buttons tab pane (page 3-41) in the
Preferences menu.
If you want to create a new button, follow these steps:
1. Select one of the button-creation tools in the Tools palette
(page 3-22).
3-103
Create New Pages
2. Select the area on the page or popup where you want to draw a
button. Do not release the selection.
3. Continue to maintain the selection while you drag the cursor out to
draw a button. An outline of the button you are drawing will appear
on the touch screen. You may move the cursor adjust the size or
shape of the button you are drawing, but do not release the
selection until the button is the desired size and shape. When you
release the selection, the new button will be added to the screen.
4. If the Preferences menu (page 3-41) is set to automatically ask for
label text, a system keyboard popup will open and you should
complete the rest of this step. If the device is not set to ask for label
text, continue with step 5.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter a label for the new button.
b. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup and
add the label to the button.
5. If the Preferences menu is set to automatically add a Go to Page
behavior to the kind of button you have drawn, a Select Pages
menu will open and you should complete the rest of this step. If the
device is not set to add this behavior, continue with step 6.
The Select Pages menu should be used to select a page for the Go
to Page behavior. To find a page in the Select Pages menu, you
can use the Search feature to locate a specific page by name or
you can use the scroll buttons to look through the viewports. If you
want to use the Search feature, continue with step 5a. If you want
to scroll through the viewports, continue with step 5d.
a. To search for a page by name, select the Search text box. A
system keyboard popup will open.
b. Use the system keyboard to enter the page name.
c. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup. The
appropriate page name will be highlighted in the right viewport.
Continue with step 4g.
3-104
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
d. To scroll through the viewports, use the up and down scroll
buttons beside the left viewport to find the folder for appropriate
page set.
e. Select the folder name. The right viewport will fill with the names
of the pages that are stored in the selected folder.
f. Select the appropriate page name in the right viewport.
g. Select the OK button to close the Select Pages menu. The
name of the page you selected will be added to the button’s Go
to Page behavior.
6. If the Preferences menu is set to automatically add a symbol
property to the kind of button you have drawn and the label you
entered is associated with one symbol, the appropriate symbol will
be automatically added to the button and no further steps are
necessary.
If a symbol property was automatically added but no symbol is
associated with the label you entered, the symbol property will be
left empty and no further steps are necessary.
If a symbol property was automatically and more than one symbol
is associated with the label you entered, a Select a Symbol menu
will open and you should complete the rest of this step.
a. Select the symbol that you want to add to the new button.
b. Select the OK button to close the Select a Symbol button and
add the symbol to the button.
The new button and its contents are now in place on the
Draw a Grid of Buttons
The Tools palette in the Series 4 page editor also offers a Button Grid
tool (page 3-23) that can be used to draw several buttons at once.
When the grid tool is used, the buttons are drawn out in a uniform grid
of rows and columns. If the default settings are still in place in your
3-105
Create New Pages
Series 4 software, buttons in a new grid will automatically be given
labels and symbols. These default button characteristics can be
changed in the Preferences menu (page 3-41).
2 Note:
When you use the Button Grid tool to create a new grid of buttons,
remember that the attributes of the buttons in the grid will be
affected by the settings in the Buttons tab pane in the Preferences
menu (page 3-41). The size of these buttons and the amount of
spacing between them are also determined by settings in the
Preferences menu.
To draw multiple buttons with the Button Grid tool, follow these steps:
1. Select the Button Grid tool (page 3-23) in the Tools palette (About
the Page Edit Tool Palette on page 3-19).
2. Select an area on the page or popup to be a corner of the grid. Do
not release the selection.
draw a grid of buttons. The buttons you are drawing will be outlined
on the touch screen. You may move the cursor adjust the number
of button rows and columns you are drawing, but do not release
the selection until the grid is complete. When the selection is
released, the buttons will be placed on the page.
4. If the Preferences menu is set to automatically add a label and
symbol to each button in the grid, an Enter Label window will open
and you should complete the rest of this step. If the device is not
set to add a label to the new buttons, no further steps are
necessary.
a. Select the Enter Label text box. A system keyboard popup will
open.
b. Use the system keyboard to enter a label for the first button.
3-106
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
label will be added to the button.
2 Note:
If the Preferences menu is set to automatically add symbols to the
new buttons, and a single symbol is associated with the label you
entered, the symbol will also be added to the button. If more than
one symbol is associated with the label you added, you will be
asked to select one symbol. A Select a Symbol menu will open to
display the symbol choices. Select one symbol and then select the
OK button to close the Select a Symbol menu and add the symbol
to the button.
d. If there is another empty button, a new Enter Label window will
open. Start again at step 4a for each Enter Label window that is
presented or select one of the buttons at the bottom of the
window:
Skip to Next
Select this button if you do not want to a
label to one button but want to continue
adding labels to the remaining ones.
Stop Asking
Select this button if you want to stop adding
labels before all the buttons are filled.
The grid of new buttons and their contents are now in place on
the communication page or popup.
Swap Buttons
You may wish to change the location of a button on a communication
page. To move a button, exchange its location with another button on
the page.
3-107
Create New Pages
To exchange the placement of two buttons on a communication page
or popup, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector Plus tool (page 3-21) to select the two
buttons whose positions you want to swap.
touch screen.
3. Select Object in the main pull-down menu.
4. Select Buttons in the second pull-down menu.
5. Select Swap in the fourth pull-down menu. The two buttons will
change positions.
Fill Buttons from Text
If you use the page editor to create a number of empty buttons, you
can easily fill them all with vocabulary and symbols by adding a text
label to each one.
1. Use the Object Selector Plus tool (page 3-21) to select all the
buttons you want to fill. If you want to select all the buttons on the
page or popup, use the Magic Wand tool (page 3-21).
touch screen.
5. Select Fill From Text in the third pull-down menu. An Enter Label
window will open.
6. Select the Enter Label text box. A system keyboard popup will
open.
3-108
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
7. Use the system keyboard to enter a label for the first button.
8. Select OK to close the system keyboard popup.
• If the label has only one associated symbol, the symbol will be
automatically added to the button with the label, and an Enter
Label window will be presented for the next button. Continue
with step 10.
• If the label you entered has no associated symbol, the label will
be added to the button without a symbol and an Enter Label
window will also for the next button. Continue with step 10.
• If the label is associated with more than one symbol, a Select a
Symbol menu will open to display all the available symbols. If a
Select a Symbol menu is presented, continue with step 9.
9. Choose the appropriate symbol from the options in the Select a
Symbol menu and then select the OK button to add the symbol to
the button. An Enter Label window will be presented for the next
button.
10. Repeat steps 6 through 9 for each Enter Label window that is
presented or select one of the buttons at the bottom of the window:
Skip to Next
label to one button but want to continue
adding labels to the remaining ones.
Stop Asking
labels before all the buttons are filled.
The buttons will now be filled with text and symbols.
Fill Buttons from Search
If you use the page editor to create a number of empty buttons, you
can easily fill them all with vocabulary by using the Fill from Search
feature to find vocabulary that falls into a specific category.
3-109
Create New Pages
buttons you want to fill. If you want to select all the buttons on the
page or popup, use the Magic Wand tool (page 3-21).
touch screen.
5. Select Fill from Search in the third pull-down menu. An Edit
Search menu (page 3-65) will open.
6. Select the New button in the Concepts group box. A Select
Concepts menu will open.
To find the concept you want to use for your search, you can use
the Search feature to locate a specific concept name or you can
use the scroll buttons to look through the viewport. If you want to
use the Search feature, continue with step 7. If you want to scroll
7. To use the Search feature, select the Search text box (a system
keyboard menu will open) and then complete the rest of this step:
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the name of the concept you
want to select. Be sure to use the exact name of the concept.
concept name will be highlighted in the viewport.
c. Select the check box beside the concept name.
d. If you want to add an additional concept to the search, repeat
step 7. If you have added all the concepts you want to search,
3-110
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
8. To find a concept in the viewport, select the expansion box beside
the Top Concept folder. The viewport will fill with a list of concept
folders. Complete the rest of this step.
a. You may select the check box beside a concept folder or you
may select the expansion box beside a folder name to see the
smaller concepts it contains. Select the check box next to each
concept you want to use.
9. Select the OK button to close the Select Concepts menu. The
name of the selected concept will be displayed in the Concepts
viewport in the Edit Search menu.
10. If you want to fill the buttons with specific parts of speech, select
the applicable check boxes in the Parts of Speech viewport. Use
the up and down scroll buttons to see all the available check
boxes.
11. If you want to fill the buttons with words that are derived from a
specific stem, select the Stem text box (a system keyboard popup
will open) and complete the rest of this step. If you do not want to
restrict the search to a specific word stem, continue with step 12.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the appropriate stem.
new stem will be displayed in the Stem text box.
12. If you want vocabulary to be presented in a specific order, select
the Sort pull-down menu and choose one of the available options:
Alphabetically
Vocabulary items are presented in
alphabetical order.
By Length
The shortest vocabulary items are
presented first.
By Frequency
The vocabulary items that are used most
often are presented first.
The pull-down menu will close and display only the selected
option.
3-111
Create New Pages
13. If you want to limit the number of vocabulary items that are
presented, select the Maximum # of Results button and then use
the Enter Number Of keypad to enter the number of items you want
to see.
14. If you want to see only vocabulary items that have symbols, select
the Only Words with Symbols check box.
15. Select the OK button to close the Edit Search button. A Select
Symbols menu will open to display all the items that matched your
search criteria.
16. Select the items you want to use to fill the buttons. Use the up and
down scroll buttons on the right side of the viewport to see all the
available items. As you select items, the menu will display the
number of items you have chosen and the number of items that
you still need to choose to fill the selected buttons.
17. Select the OK button to close the Select Symbols menu. The
selected buttons will be filled with the vocabulary and symbols that
you chose.
Pour the Contents of a Page or Popup
The Pour option in the page editor pull-down menu makes it easy to
use the contents of the buttons one page or popup to fill the buttons
on a new page or popup. When the contents of one page are poured
into another, every component of the buttons on the first page
(including labels, symbols, behaviors, audio cues and colors) are
copied to the buttons on the second page. Only a copy of the button
contents is poured; the page you are pouring from will remain
unchanged.
3-112
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
If you want to fill the buttons on a new page by pouring in the
contents of another page, follow these steps:
buttons you want to fill.
touch screen.
5. Select Pour in the third pull-down menu. A Select a Page to Pour
From menu will open.
To find the page you want to pour from, you can use the Search
feature to locate a specific page name or you can use the scroll
buttons to look through the viewports. If you want to use the
Search feature, continue with step 6. If you want to scroll through
the viewports, continue with step 7.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the name of the page you
want to use. Be sure to use the page’s exact name.
page name will be highlighted in the right viewport. Continue
with step 8.
beside the left viewport to find the page set folder in which the page
is stored.
with the names of the files that are stored in the selected page
set.
find the right page name.
c. Select the name of the page you want to use.
3-113
Create New Pages
8. Select the OK button to close the Select a Page to Pour From
menu. The contents of the buttons of the page from which you are
pouring will be copied to the page that is currently being edited.
Button contents will be poured from left to right and from top to
bottom. This means that the contents of the first button on the
pouring page will be copied to the first button on the new page, and
so on. If there are fewer buttons on the page to which you are
pouring, some content will not be poured. If there are more buttons
on the page to which you are pouring, some buttons at the bottom
of the page will be left empty.
Change the Shape of a Button
Buttons on a communication page or popup can be square with flat
edges, square with beveled edges or shaped like a folder. Your
choice for button shape is one of the default settings that can be
applied to all new buttons with the Preferences menu (page 3-41).
Once a button has been created, however, the Properties (page 3-57)
menu can be used to make its shape different from the standard that
is set in Preferences.
To change the shape of a button, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select a single button.
Use the Object Selector Plus tool to select more than one button.
Use the Magic Wand tool to select all the buttons on a page or
popup.
2. Select the Button Type pull-down menu in the Properties menu
(page 3-57). The pull-down menu will expand to display all the
available button shapes:
Beveled
3-114
The edges of the square button are shaded
to look three-dimensional.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
Folder
The button is shaped like a file folder with a
small tab in the upper left corner. This
button shape is often used to indicate that a
button has a Go to Page behavior.
Flat
The button has flat, square edges with no
shading.
3. Select one of the button shape options. The pull-down menu will
close and display only the chosen option. The selected button will
immediately be changed to the new shape.
Change the Color of a Button
Color is one of the button characteristics that are defined in the
Buttons tab pane in the Preferences menu (page 3-41). Each new
button is automatically filled with the color that has been chosen for
that type of button in the Preferences menu. If you decide not to use
the default color for a new button, you can use the Properties menu
(page 3-57) to customize each selected button.
To choose a new color for a button, follow these steps:
popup.
2. Select the Edit button in the Color group box of the Properties
menu. A Color Selector menu (page 4-165) will open.
3-115
Create New Pages
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the button, refer to Create a
selected button will automatically fill with the color you selected. In
Customize a Button Border (Color and
Width)
The width and color of a button’s border are both defined as default
settings in the Buttons tab pane (page 3-41) in the Preferences
menu. Once a button is created, however, tools in the Properties
menu (page 3-57) can be used to customize these characteristics in
the new button.
To change a button’s color and width, follow these steps:
popup.
2. If you want to change the button’s border color, select the Edit
button in the Border Color group box of the Properties menu
(page 3-57) (a Color Selector menu will open) and then complete
the rest of this step. If you do not want to select a new color,
a. To choose from a palette of available colors, select the
Swatches tab control or the My Swatches tab control (colors
3-116
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
will be available on this tab pane only if you have saved custom
colors). The selected tab pane will display a palette of available
colors.
b. Select the color you want to use. The display square on the right
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the button border, refer to
Create a Custom Color on page 4-167 .
c. Select the OK button to close the Color Selector menu. The
selected border will automatically fill with the color you selected.
In the Properties menu, a small box beside the Edit button in the
Border Color group box will also display the chosen color.
3. If you want to change the width of the button’s border, select the
Border Width pull-down menu in the Properties menu. The pulldown menu will expand to display all the available options for
border width: Very Narrow, Narrower, Narrow, Medium, Wide,
Wider and Very Wide.
4. Select the border width you want to use. The pull-down menu will
close and display only the chosen option. The border on the
selected button will be changed to match the new width setting.
Add a Behavior to a Button
Behaviors are actions that can be programmed into buttons. Each
button must have at least one behavior or nothing will happen when
the button is selected. Buttons can have more than one behavior so
that a series of actions is started when the button is selected. More
than 175 unique behaviors are available in the DynaVox Series 4
Behavior Editor (see Appendix A: Behavior Reference for a
complete list of behaviors).
3-117
Create New Pages
To add an behavior to a button, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (Appendix : Object Selector Tool)
to select the button to which you want to add a behavior.
2. Select the Behavior Editor button in the Properties menu
(page 3-57). A Behavior Editor menu will open.
BEHAVIOR EDITOR MENU
2 Note:
Appendix A: Behavior Reference. This Appendix also offers
3-118
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
2 Note:
steps 3 through 7.
Move Up
viewport list.
Edit
Delete
Move Down
viewport list.
3-119
Create New Pages
selected behaviors are now applied to the button.
Add a Behavior to a Group of Buttons
The Series 4 page editor makes page editing more efficient by
making it possible to add a behavior to multiple buttons.
If you want to add the same behavior to more than one button, follow
these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector Plus (page 3-21) tool to select the buttons
to which you want to add a behavior.
Use the Magic Wand tool if you want to select all the buttons on a
page or popup.
touch screen.
5. Select Add Behaviors in the third pull-down menu. A Behavior
Editor menu (page 3-118) will open.
2 Note:
3-120
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
2 Note:
steps 6 through 10.
Move Up
viewport list.
Edit
Delete
Move Down
viewport list.
3-121
Create New Pages
select the OK button to close the Behavior Editor menu. The new
behavior will be immediately added to all the selected buttons.
Add an Audio Cue to a Button
Audio cues are words or phrases that are spoken by the device to
identify items on the DV4/MT4 touch screen for an individual who
uses auditory feedback to make selections. Audio cues can be used
with selection methods like scanning, joystick and audio touch. The
word or phrase that makes up the audio cue will be spoken by the
device whenever the item is highlighted by the selection method.
To add an audio cue to a button, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select the button that
needs a new audio cue.
2. Select the button in the Audio Cue group box in the Properties
menu (page 3-57). A system keyboard popup will open.
3. Use the system keyboard to enter the audio cue text.
audio cue you entered will be added to the selected button. In the
Properties menu, the button in the Audio Cue group box will also
display the new audio cue text.
Create Active Areas
3-122
Active areas are one of the unique features of DynaVox Series 4
software. Active areas are similar to buttons in that they can have
assigned behaviors, but they have no borders or other defining
characteristics. In this way, active areas are like invisible buttons.
There are many applications for active areas, but they are most
commonly used with digital pictures. If a digital picture is used as the
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
background of a page or popup, these invisible buttons can be placed
over objects in the picture. When the individual using the device
selects the object with the active area, the selection can play a
sound, speak a message or trigger some other behavior.
The combination of active areas and digital pictures can have many
benefits for individuals who use DV4 and MT4 devices. This
combination can be used to make original pages that are appealing to
individuals because they are creative and dynamic. It can also be an
extremely beneficial page-creation technique for an individual who
may have trouble associating an abstract symbol with a vocabulary
word, but who will immediately recognize items in a picture of his or
her own surroundings. Active areas and digital pictures can also be
effectively used to create interactive educational pages.
The DynaVox Series 4 page editor can be used to create and modify
active areas. The Tools palette provides an Active Area tool for
drawing active areas on a communication page or popup. There are
no default settings that regulate the attributes of active areas. Each
active area can be individually customized with the tools in the
Properties menu that is available in the page editor.
Create an Active Area
Adding an active area to a communication page or popup is like
creating an invisible button. Use this feature when you want to assign
a behavior to a place on a page or popup without putting a button in
that spot. When the active area is selected, its assigned behavior will
be triggered.
When you add an active area to a page, you must first define the
area. Then you will need to use the Properties menu to assign one or
more behaviors to the active area.
To proceed with these two tasks, follow the steps below:
1. Select the Active Area tool (page 3-24) in the Tools palette.
3-123
Create New Pages
2. Select the area on the page or popup where you want to place one
corner of the active area. Do not release the selection.
3. Continue to maintain the selection while you drag the cursor to
draw out an active area. An outline of the box you are drawing will
appear on the touch screen. You may move the cursor adjust the
size or shape of the active area you are drawing, but do not release
the selection until the box is the desired size and shape. When you
release the selection, the active area will be placed on the page.
4. Select the Behavior Editor button in the Properties menu. A
Behavior Editor menu (page 3-118) will open.
2 Note:
3-124
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
2 Note:
steps 3 through 9.
have been added to the active area, select the behavior in the
Steps viewport and then select one of the following buttons:
Move Up
viewport list.
Edit
Delete
Move Down
viewport list.
selected behaviors are now applied to the new active area.
3-125
Create and Modify
Labels
Create New Pages
A label is text that can be placed on a button, box, tab control, page
or popup. Labels can be used as the title of a page or as an indication
of the contents of a button, box or tab control.
Labels can be created and modified in the DynaVox Series 4 page
editor. The Tools palette provides a Label tool for drawing labels on a
communication page or popup. When a label is drawn, its attributes
will be dependent on the default settings that have been established
on the Label tab pane (page 3-46) that is available in the Default
Properties group box (Show Object Properties) of the Preferences
menu. The default settings in the Preferences menu affect each label
in the Series 4 software.
The many characteristics of labels can also be modified in the
Properties menu that is available in the page editor. Unlike the
Preferences menu default settings, the settings in the Properties
menu affect only the divider that is selected in the page editor.
Create a New Label
Labels provide a way to place text on communication pages. The
addition of labels is the simplest way to clearly identify things like the
central subject of a page or tab control, or the vocabulary contents of
a button.
2 Note:
When you use the Label tool to create a new label property,
remember that its attributes will be affected by the settings in the
Label tab pane in the Preferences menu (page 3-46).
To add a new label, follow these steps:
1. Select the Label tool (page 3-22) in the Tools palette.
3-126
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
label property. Do not release the selection.
draw a label property. An outline of the property you are drawing
will appear on the touch screen. You may move the cursor adjust
the size or shape of the outline, but do not release the selection
until the label property is the desired size and shape. When the
selection is released, the label property is added to the page.
4. 4. If the Preferences menu is set to automatically ask for label text,
a system keyboard popup will open and you should complete the
rest of this step. If the device is not set to ask for label text, no
further steps are necessary.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter text for the new label.
add the text to the label.
The new label is now in place on the page or popup.
Change the Color of a Label Property
The label property is the square or rectangular area that surrounds
the label text. A standard color for all new labels is defined in the
Label tab pane (page 3-46) in the Preferences menu. The Properties
menu (page 3-57) also offers an option for changing the color of
individual label properties.
To choose a new color for a label property, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select a label property.
Use the Object Selector Plus tool to select more than one label
property.
Use the Magic Wand tool to select all the label properties on a
page or popup.
3-127
Create New Pages
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the label property, refer to
selected label property will automatically fill with the color you
Change the Color of Label Text
Text color is also a default setting that is defined for labels in the
Labels tab pane (page 3-46) in the Preferences menu. Once a label
has been created, the Properties menu (page 3-57) can be used to
change the color of the label text for a selected label. This change will
affect only the selected label.
To choose a new color for text in a label, follow these steps:
property.
page or popup.
3-128
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the label text, refer to
the label will automatically fill with the color you selected. In the
Properties menu, a small box beside the Edit button in the Text
Change the Alignment of Label Text
Although the alignment of text in all new labels is also defined in the
Labels tab pane (page 3-46) of the Preferences menu, the text in
individual labels can be realigned with the options in the Properties
menu (page 3-57).
If you want to customize the alignment of a selected label, follow
these steps:
property.
page or popup.
3-129
Create New Pages
2. Select the Alignment pull-down menu in the Properties menu
(page 3-57). The pull-down menu will expand to display the
available options:
Left
The text will be placed against the left side
of the label property.
Center
The text will be centered in the middle of the
label property.
Right
The text will be placed against the right side
of the label property.
3. Select the alignment option you want to use. The pull-down menu
will close and display only the option you chose. The text in the
selected label will move to reflect the new alignment setting.
Add Text to a Label Property/Change the
Text in a Label Property
The Properties menu provides DV4/MT4 users with the option to
update or change the text in a label.
3. Use the system keyboard to enter the label text.
new text will be added to the selected label. In the Properties
menu, the button in the Text group box will also display the edited
text.
3-130
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
Customize the Font in a Label
The font that is used in a label can be customized to make it easier
for an individual to see or to suit the design preferences of an
individual. When a new label is created, its text is displayed in a font
that corresponds with the settings in the Label tab pane (page 3-46)
of the Preferences menu. Tools in the Properties menu (page 3-57),
however, can be used to add new font styles to a selected label.
To adjust the font in a label, follow these steps:
property.
page or popup.
24, 26, 28, 36, 48 and 72.
settings will be applied to the text in the selected label. In the
3-131
Create and Modify
Active Labels
Create New Pages
used to place text on buttons, pages and popups. Instead of being
manually assigned with a system keyboard, the text in an active label
is automatically filled in and maintained by the Series 4 software. For
example, active labels are often used for buttons that display the time
and date. The time and date buttons are given active labels and the
Series 4 software automatically supplies the correct time and date.
Active labels can also be used to create pages that display the
current battery level or report the status (activated or deactivated) of
various software features such as flexible abbreviation and autoclear.
Active labels are also frequently used in conjunction with the Series 4
User Setup Wizard. This feature enables each individual to enter
personal data like names, addresses and family information into the
Series 4 software. Then the information is automatically added to
buttons with related active labels. The User Setup Wizard uses active
labels to provide a quick and easy way to customize communication
pages and popups.
active labels. The Tools palette provides an Active Label tool for
drawing active labels on a communication page or popup. There are
no default settings that regulate the attributes of active labels. Each
active label can be individually customized with the tools in the
Properties menu that is available in the page editor.
Create a New Active Label
Active labels can be used when you want the Series 4 software to
automatically supply information in a label on a page or popup. When
you add an active label to a page, you must first draw out the active
3-132
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
label. Then you will need to use the Properties menu to specify what
kind of information should be added to the label.
Follow these steps to create a new active label.
1. Select the Active Label tool (page 3-24) in the Tools palette.
2. Select the area in a button or on a page or popup where you want
to place one corner of the active label. Do not release the
selection.
draw a label property. An outline of the box you are drawing will
size or shape of the label property you are drawing, but do not
release the selection until the box is the desired size and shape.
When you release the selection, the active label will be placed in
the button or on the page or popup.
4. Select the Active Label Type pull-down menu in the Properties
menu (page 3-57). The pull-down menu will expand to display all
the available options:
Day
The active label will display the current day
of the week according to the date setting in
the System Settings menu.
Date
The active label will display the current date
as it is set in the System Settings menu.
Time
The active label will display the current time
as it is set in the System Settings menu.
Prediction
The active label will report whether the
Prediction check box is selected in the
Prediction Settings menu (yes or no).
Flexible AE
Flexible Abbreviation check box is selected
in the Prediction Settings menu (yes or no).
3-133
3-134
Create New Pages
Context
Prediction
Context Prediction check box is selected in
the Prediction Settings menu (yes or no).
Speak On Entry
Speak when Inserting Words check box is
selected in the Show Message Window
Settings group box of the Interface Features
menu (yes or no).
Autospacing
The active label will report whether the Add
Spaces Between Words check box is
menu (yes or no).
Autocapitalize
Capitalize Start of Sentence check box is
menu (yes or no).
Autoclear
Clear after Speaking check box is selected
in the Show Message Window Settings
group box of the Interface Features menu
(yes or no).
Auto Expand
Automatically Expand Abbreviations check
box is selected in the Show Message
Window Settings group box of the Interface
Features menu (yes or no).
Highlight as You
Speak
Highlight as You Speak check box is
menu (yes or no).
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
Mouse Pause
The active label will report the status of the
mouse pause selection method (enabled or
disabled) when a button with a Mouse
Pause On/Off behavior is being used to
switch between mouse pause and another
selection method.
Battery Level
The active label will display the percentage
of remaining battery power according to the
Battery Info menu that can be accessed
from the System Settings menu.
Keyboard Key
This type of active label should be used on
keyboard buttons that feature the Insert Key
behavior. The combination of the Keyboard
Key active label and the Insert Key behavior
enables the character on the keyboard
button to change when a keyboard
command button is selected. An example
would be a keyboard button with a lower
case letter that is capitalized when the Shift
button is selected.
Keyboard State
This type of active label should be used on
a keyboard page or popup. The active label
will provide a visual reminder if a special
command button is selected to change the
state of the keyboard. For example, if the
Caps Lock button is selected to change the
alphabet buttons to capital letters, the text in
the active label will be Caps. If no special
command button has been selected, the
text in the active label will be Normal.
Chat Mode
The active label will report the status of chat
mode (on or off) on a communication page
or popup that features a button with a Chat
Mode On/Off behavior.
3-135
Create New Pages
First Name / Middle Name / Last Name / Nickname / Age / Birth
Date / Hobby 1, 2, 3 / Facility Name 1, 2 / Address 1, 2 / City 1,
2 / State 1, 2 / Zip 1, 2 / Country 1, 2 / Mother / Father / Sister,
Sister 2 / Brother, Sister 2 / Children / Spouse / Pet, Pet 2 /
School / Work / Email / Home Phone / Cell Phone / Work Phone
The active label will display personal data that has been stored
in the Series 4 User Setup Wizard.
5. Select one of pull-down menu options. The pull-down menu will
close and display only the option you chose. The active label will
fill with the appropriate information.
2 Note:
Since active labels only contain the information that is supplied by
the Series 4 software, you may also want to create a secondary
label to clearly identify the information in the active label. For
example, if you create an active label and set the Active Label Type
pull-down menu to Flexible AE, the text in the active label will say
only Yes or No. A secondary label that says Flexible Abbreviation
Expansion will help an individual to recognize that the Yes or No
label refers to the status of the flexible abbreviation expansion
feature.
ACTIVE LABEL EXAMPLE
Change the Color of an Active Label
Property
The active label property is the square or rectangular area that
surrounds the active label text. You can customize the appearance of
a page or popup by choosing a new color for this area.
3-136
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
To do so, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select a single divider.
Use the Object Selector Plus tool to select more than one divider.
Use the Magic Wand tool to select all the dividers on a page or
popup.
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the selected area, refer to
5. Select the OK button to close the Color Selector menu. The active
label property will automatically fill with the color you selected.
Change the Color of the Text in an Active
Label
You can also customize the appearance of a page or popup by
changing the color of the label font in an active label.
To choose a new color for the active label text, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select an active label
property.
3-137
Create New Pages
Use the Object Selector Plus tool to select more than one active
label property.
Use the Magic Wand tool to select all the active label properties on
a page or popup.
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the selected text, refer to
5. Select the OK button to close the Color Selector menu. The active
label text will automatically fill with the color you selected.
Change the Alignment of Text in an Active
Label
The alignment of text in an active label may be changed.
If you want to change the way text is aligned in an active label, follow
these steps:
property.
label property.
3-138
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
a page or popup.
2. Select the Alignment pull-down menu in the Properties menu
(page 3-57). The pull-down menu will expand to display the
available options:
Left
The text will be placed against the left side
of the active label property.
Center
The text will be centered in the middle of the
active label property.
Right
The text will be placed against the right side
of the active label property.
3. Select the alignment option you want to use. The pull-down menu
will close and display only the option you chose. The text in any
selected active label properties will move to reflect the new
alignment setting.
Customize the Font in an Active Label
The font in an active label can be customized to make it easier for an
individual to see or to make suit the design preferences of an
individual.
To add new font styles to the text in an active label, follow these
steps:
property.
label property.
a page or popup.
3-139
Create New Pages
2. Select the button in Font group box of the Properties menu. A
Select Font menu will open.
24, 26, 28, 36, 48 and 72.
settings will be applied to the text in the selected active label. In the
Change the Active Label Type
An active label can display many different types of information.
2 Note:
For a complete list of the active label types, see Create a New
Active Label on page 3-132.
If you want to change the type of information t hat is displayed in an
active label, you can do so by following these steps:
property.
3-140
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
label property.
a page or popup.
2. Select the Active Label Type pull-down menu in the Properties
menu (page 3-57). The pull-down menu will expand to display all
the available options.
close and display only the option you chose. The active label will
fill with the appropriate information.
2 Note:
Create and Modify
Symbol Properties
If you created a secondary label to identify the information that is
being supplied by the active label, you should make the
appropriate changes to the secondary label.
Symbols are pictures that can be used to represent vocabulary. They
can be placed on buttons, tab controls, pages or popups. The
DynaVox Series 4 page editor can be used to add and modify
symbols. The Tools palette provides a Symbol tool for adding symbol
properties to a communication page or popup. A symbol property is
the square or rectangular area that surrounds the actual symbol.
When a symbol property is drawn, its attributes will be dependent on
the default settings that have been established on the Symbol tab
pane that is available in the Default Properties group box (Show
Object Properties) of the Preferences menu. The default settings in
the Preferences menu affect each symbol property in the Series 4
software.
The attributes of symbol properties can also be modified in the
Properties menu that is available in the page editor. Unlike the
3-141
Create New Pages
Preferences menu default settings, the settings in the Properties
menu affect only the symbol property that is selected in the page
editor.
Draw a Symbol Property
The Symbol tool in the Tools palette can be used to draw a new
symbol property that can then be filled with a symbol. Symbol
properties can be drawn directly on the background of a
communication page or popup, or they can be added to buttons, tab
controls or other object.
2 Note:
When you use the Symbol tool to create a new symbol property,
remember that its attributes will be affected by the settings in the
Symbol tab pane in the Preferences menu (page 3-52).
To add a symbol property to a communication page, follow these
steps:
1. Select the Symbol tool (page 3-22) in the Tools palette.
symbol property. Do not release the selection.
draw a symbol property. An outline of the property you are drawing
the size or shape of the outline, but do not release the selection
until the symbol property is the desired size and shape. When you
release the section, the symbol property will be placed on the
page.
4. If the Preferences menu is set to automatically ask for a symbol, a
Select a Symbol menu will open and you should complete the rest
3-142
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
of this step. If the device is not set to ask for a symbol, no further
steps are necessary.
To find a symbol in the Select a Symbol menu, you can use the
Search feature to locate a specific symbol by name or you can use
the Search feature, continue with step 4a. If you want to scroll
through the viewports, continue with step 4d.
a. To search for a symbol by name, select the Search text box. A
b. Use the system keyboard to enter the symbol name.
c. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup. All
the symbols that are associated with the name you entered will
be displayed in the viewport on the right side of the Select a
Symbol menu. Continue with step 4g.
d. To scroll through the viewports, use the up and down scroll
buttons beside the left viewport to find the folder in which the
symbol is stored.
e. Select the folder name. The right viewport will fill with the names
of the symbols that are stored in the selected folder.
2 Note:
If you want to see a smaller list of symbols, you may select the
expansion box beside the folder name in the left viewport. The
folder will expand to display a number of smaller categories. Select
the name of the category that includes the symbol you are looking
for.
f. Use the scroll buttons beside the right viewport in the Select a
g. Select the symbol in the right viewport.
h. Select the OK button to close the Select a Symbol menu. The
symbol you chose will be placed inside the symbol property.
The new symbol is now in place on the page or popup.
3-143
Create New Pages
Change the Color of a Symbol Property
The symbol property is the square or rectangular area that surrounds
the actual symbol. A standard color for all new symbol properties is
defined in the Symbol tab pane in the Preferences menu (page 3-52).
The Properties menu (page 3-57) also offers an option for changing
the color of individual symbol properties. This option can be used
when you want to change the color of only a selected symbol
property.
To choose a new color for a symbol property, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select a symbol
property.
Use the Object Selector Plus tool to select more than one symbol
property.
Use the Magic Wand tool to select all the symbol properties on a
page or popup.
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the symbol property, refer to
selected symbol property will automatically fill with the color you
3-144
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
Customize the Way a Symbol is Displayed in
a Symbol Property
When a symbol is placed in a symbol property, the symbol can either
be scaled to fill the entire symbol property or it can be centered within
the symbol property at its original size. One of these two styles can
be chosen in the Preferences menu (page 3-52) as a default style for
all new symbols. Once a symbol has been created, though, you can
use the Properties menu (page 3-57) to change the symbol if you
want it to be different than the default.
To change the way a symbol is displayed in a symbol property, follow
these steps:
property.
Use the Object Selector Plus tool to select more than one symbol
property.
Use the Magic Wand tool to select all the symbol properties on a
page or popup.
2. Select the Image Display Style pull-down menu in the Properties
menu (page 3-57). The menu will expand to display both of the
available options.
Scale to Fit
The symbol will be automatically resized
(scaled so it retains the proper proportions)
to fill the entire symbol property.
Center
The symbol will be kept at its original size
and placed in the middle of the symbol
property.
3. Select one of the two options. The pull-down menu will close and
display only the chosen option. The symbol in the selected symbol
property will be changed to reflect the new style.
3-145
Create New Pages
Change the Symbol in a Symbol Property
You may want to replace the symbol in a symbol property.
property.
2. Select the Edit button in the Symbol group box of the Properties
menu (page 3-57). A Select a Symbol menu will open.
To find a symbol in the Select a Symbol menu, you can use the
Search feature to locate a specific symbol by name or you can use
the Search feature, continue with step 3. If you want to scroll
3. To search for a symbol by name, select the Search text box (a
system keyboard popup will open) and then complete the rest of
this step.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the symbol name.
b. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup. All
the symbols that are associated with the name you entered will
be displayed in the viewport on the right side of the Select a
Symbol menu. Continue with step 5.
beside the left viewport to find the folder in which the symbol is
stored and then complete the rest of this step.
a. Select the folder name. The right viewport will fill with the names
of the pages that are stored in the selected folder.
2 Note:
3-146
If you want to see a smaller list of symbols, you may select the
expansion box beside the folder name in the left viewport. The
folder will expand to display a number of smaller categories. Select
the name of the category that includes the symbol you are looking
for.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
b. Use the scroll buttons beside the right viewport in the Select a
5. Select the symbol in the right viewport.
6. Select the OK button to close the Select a Symbol menu. The
newly selected symbol will replace the old symbol inside the
symbol property.
Create Message
Windows
The Message Window is an area on a page or popup where a text or
symbol message can be composed. When the Message Window is
selected, the DV4/MT4 device will speak the message it contains.
The size and location of the Message Window may vary, but moving
from page to page will not delete or alter its contents.
The Message Window is a customizable element of page creation. Its
attributes can be customized to suit the needs of each individual user.
The tools for creating default settings that will govern the behavior of
Message Windows can be found in the Interface Features menu
(page 5-62). The default settings in the Interface Features menu
affect each Message Window in the Series 4 software.
The Properties (page 3-57) menu that is available in the page editor
offers another behavior choice for Message Windows. This menu
allows you to decide what will happen when the Message Window is
selected. Unlike the Interface Features menu default settings, the
settings in the Properties menu affect only the Message Window that
is selected in the page editor.
3-147
Create New Pages
Create a New Message Window
2 Note:
2 Note:
The behavior of the new Message Window will depend on the
default Message Window settings that have been established in
the Interface Features menu. These settings universally affect all
the Message Windows that are available on your device. If you
want to customize these behaviors, refer to Create Default
Settings for the Message Window on page 5-66.
You can also customize the behavior of the new Message Window
in the page editor by choosing one of two available behaviors in the
Properties menu for Message Windows. To do this, see Customize
the Behavior of a Message Window on page 3-149.
To add a Message Window to a communication page or popup, follow
these steps:
1. Select the Message Window tool (page 3-24) in the Tools palette.
corner of the Message Window. Do not release the selection.
draw a Message Window. An outline of the box you are drawing
the size or shape of the Message Window you are drawing, but do
not release the selection until the box is the desired size and
shape. When you release the selection, the Message Window will
be placed on the page or popup.
3-148
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
Customize the Behavior of a Message
Window
You can customize the behavior of the new Message Window in the
page editor by choosing one of two available behaviors in the
Properties menu for Message Windows. This option enables you to
choose whether selecting the Message Window will cause the
message to be spoken or move the position of the cursor. Unlike the
default Message Window settings in the Interface Features menu,
this setting will affect only the Message Window that is selected in the
page editor.
2 Note:
The other behaviors of the new Message Window will depend on
the default Message Window settings that have been established
in the Interface Features menu. These settings universally affect all
the Message Windows that are available on your device. If you
want to customize these behaviors, refer to Create Default
Settings for the Message Window on page 5-66.
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select the Message
Window
2. Select the When Selected pull-down menu in the Properties menu
(page 3-57). The menu will expand to display two options:
Speak
The DV4/MT4 device will speak the text in
the Message Window when the Message
Window is selected.
Move Cursor
Selecting the Message Window will move
the cursor to whatever area of the Message
Window has been touched. When this
feature is active, selecting the Message
Window and then dragging the selection
without releasing it will highlight text.
3-149
Create New Pages
3. Select one of the available options. The pull-down menu will close
to display only the chosen option.
Create and Modify Tab
Controls
Tab controls are used to navigate between multiple layers of buttons
on a page. These layers are called panes. The top of each pane
features a tab. A pane is displayed whenever its tab is selected.
There can be up to six panes on a page. The tab controls feature can
be very useful to individuals because it allows the placement of many
buttons (or vocabulary for several topics) on one page, limiting the
amount of page navigation a user will have to do to find vocabulary.
Tab controls can be created and modified in the DynaVox Series 4
page editor. The Tools palette provides a Tab Control tool for drawing
tab controls on a communication page or popup. When a new tab
control is drawn, its attributes will be dependent on the default
settings that have been established on the Tab Controls tab pane that
is available in the Default Properties group box (Show Object
Properties) of the Preferences menu. The default settings in the
Preferences menu affect each tab control in the Series 4 software.
Individual tab controls can be modified in the Properties menu that is
available in the page editor. Unlike the Preferences menu default
settings, the settings in the Properties menu affect only the tab
control that is selected in the page editor.
3-150
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
Draw a Set of Tab Controls
Add layered panes of buttons to a communication page or popup by
creating a set of tab controls.
2 Note:
When you use the Tab Control tool to create a new set of tab
controls, remember that the attributes of the tab controls will be
affected by the settings in the Tab Controls tab pane (page 3-54) in
the Preferences menu.
Follow these steps to create a new set of tab controls.
1. Select the Tab Control tool (page 3-26) in the Tools palette.
2. Select the area on the page or popup where you want to draw the
set of tab controls. Do not release the selection.
draw a set of tab controls. An outline of the area you are drawing
the size or shape of the tab controls you are drawing, but do not
release the selection until the set of tab controls is the desired size
and shape.
4. If the Preferences menu is set to automatically add a label or a
symbol to each tab control, an Enter Label window will open and
you should complete the rest of this step. If the device is not set to
add a label or a symbol to a new tab pane, no further steps are
necessary.
a. Select the Enter Label text box. A system keyboard popup will
open.
b. Use the system keyboard to enter a label for the first tab control.
3-151
Create New Pages
label text or the symbol that corresponds to the label will be
added to the tab control.
2 Note:
If you are adding symbols to the tab controls and more than one
symbol is associated with the label you added, you will be asked to
select one symbol. A Select a Symbol menu will open to display the
symbol choices. Select one symbol and then select the OK button
to close the Select a Symbol menu and add the symbol to the tab
control.
d. If there is another empty tab control, a new Enter Label window
will open. Start again at step 4a for each Enter Label window
that is presented or select one of the buttons at the bottom of
the window:
Skip to Next
label to one tab control but want to continue
adding labels to the remaining tabs.
Stop Asking
labels before all the tabs are filled.
The new set of tab controls is now in place on the page or popup.
Adjust the Height of Tab Controls
The size of the tab-shaped controls at the top of a set of tab panes
can be adjusted to suit the needs of an individual user.
To make adjustments to the height of a set of tab controls, follow
these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select a set of tab
controls. Be sure to select the entire set of tab controls.
3-152
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
2. Select the Tab Height pull-down menu in the Properties menu
available options for tab height: Very Small, Small, Medium, Big,
Bigger and Extra Large.
3. Select one of the pull-down menu options. The pull-down menu will
close and display only the chosen option. The new tab height will
be immediately applied to the selected tab controls.
Adjust the Number of Tab Panes in a Set of
Tab Controls
You can edit the content in a set of tab controls by adding or deleting
tab panes.
To adjust the number of panes in a set of tab controls, follow these
steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select a set of tab
controls. Be sure to select the entire set of tab controls.
2. Select the Number of Tab Panes pull-down menu in the
Properties menu (page 3-57). The pull-down menu will expand to
display all the available options: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
close and display only the option you chose. The selected set of
tab controls will be adjusted to feature the new number of tab
panes.
2 Note:
Use caution when reducing the number of tab panes. When you
reduce the number of tab panes, the Series 4 software will delete
the appropriate number of panes, beginning with the bottom tab
pane (the tab control that is the farthest to the right). Any buttons
on this tab pane will also be deleted.
3-153
Create New Pages
Change the Color of a Tab Control
You can customize a page or popup by choosing a new color for a tab
control and its tab pane.
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select a single tab
control.
menu (page 3-57). A Color Selector menu (page 4-165) will open.
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for this tab, refer to Create a
5. Select the OK button to close the Color Selector menu. The tab
control and the tab pane will automatically fill with the color you
selected.
Swap Two Tab Controls
You may want to move the position of a tab control. You do this by
exchanging its position with another tab control.
3-154
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
1. Use the Object Selector Plus tool (page 3-22) to select the two tab
control panes that you want to swap.
touch screen.
4. Select Tab Controls in the second pull-down menu.
5. Select Swap Panes in the third pull-down menu. The two selected
tab panes and the tab controls above them will exchange
positions.
Add Tab Control Labels
The page editor pull-down menu also provides an option for adding
labels to tab controls.
If you want to add a label to a tab control, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select the tab control
that you want to label.
Use the Object Selector Plus tool to select more than one tab
control.
Use the Magic Wand tool to select all the tab controls on a page or
popup.
touch screen.
4. Select Tab Controls in the second pull-down menu.
5. Select Insert Labels in the third pull-down menu. An Enter Label
window will open.
3-155
Create New Pages
6. Select the Enter Label text box. A system keyboard popup will
open.
7. Use the system keyboard to enter a label for the tab control.
label will be added to the tab control.
9. If you have selected more than one tab control, another Enter
Label window will open. Repeat steps 6 through 8 until labels have
been added to all the panes in the tab control.
Create and Modify
Search Boxes
The search box is an extremely changeable feature of the DynaVox
Series 4 software. Search boxes are designed to work with the Go to
Page & Search behavior. When a Go to Page & Search behavior is
assigned to a button on a communication page, criteria for a
vocabulary search are defined and a page with a search box is
selected. Then, when the button with the Go to Page & Search
behavior is selected, the page with the search box will open and the
search box will fill with buttons with vocabulary that meets the search
criteria. Many buttons with Go to Page & Search behaviors can be
linked to one search box. Each of these buttons can have unique
criteria for the vocabulary search. The content of the buttons in the
search box will depend on the search criteria of the button that was
used to open the page. Because of this, search boxes make it easy to
provide vocabulary on many different topics without requiring a user
to navigate between a page for each topic.
search boxes. The Tools palette provides a Search Box tool for
drawing search boxes on a communication page or popup. There are
no default settings that regulate the attributes of search boxes. Each
3-156
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
search box can be individually customized with the tools in the
Properties menu.
Create a New Search Box
You may want to add a new search box to a page or popup in the
page editor.
To to this, follow these steps:
1. Select the Search Box tool (page 3-26) in the Tools palette.
2. Select the area on the page or popup where you want to draw the
search box. Do not release the selection.
draw out a search box. An outline of the box you are drawing will
size or shape of the box, but do not release the selection until the
search box is the desired size and shape. When you release the
selection, the search box will be placed on the page.
The search box is now available on the page or popup. Unless you
want to customize the search box to add unique characteristics, no
further steps are necessary. An Insert Label behavior is
automatically added to the buttons that will fill the search box
(select the Behavior Editor button in the Properties menu to see).
This ensures that the search box will work properly when it is
opened by the selection of a button with a Go to Page & Search
behavior. For step-by-step information on using a button with this
behavior to open the new search box, see Common Behaviors:
Add a Go to Page & Search Behavior on page 4-177.
3-157
Create New Pages
Change the Color of a Search Box
You may want to choose a new color for a search box.
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select the search box
you want to change.
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the search box, refer to
selected search box will automatically fill with the color you
Add a Local Search to a Search Box
The contents of the buttons in a search box are usually defined by
search criteria that are assigned to a button (on another page) with a
Go to Page & Search behavior. When this button is used to open the
page with the search box, the search box buttons are automatically
filled according to the search criteria. If the page with the search box
3-158
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
is opened without the use of a Go to Page & Search behavior (like
when the Page Browser menu is used to open the page directly),
there will be no outside search criteria to direct the search box to fill
with buttons. A local search can be used in this case to provide
search criteria that will fill the search box with vocabulary.
To add a local search to a search box, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select the search box.
2. Select the Edit button in the Local Search group box in the
Properties menu (page 3-57). An Edit Search menu (page 3-65)
will open.
d. If you want to add an additional concept to the search, go back
to step 4. If you have added all the concepts you want to search,
3-159
Create New Pages
boxes.
Alphabetically
alphabetical order.
By Length
presented first.
By Frequency
option.
to see.
3-160
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
12. Select the OK button to close the Edit Search button. The new
search criteria will now be used to fill the search box will
vocabulary when it is opened directly from the Page Browser menu
or the Page Navigator menu.
Add an Audio Cue to a Search Box
Audio cues are words or phrases that are spoken by the device to
identify items on the DV4/MT4 touch screen for an individual who
uses auditory feedback to make selections. Audio cues can be used
with selection methods like scanning, joystick and audio touch. The
audio cue will be announced by the device whenever the item is
highlighted by the selection method.
To add an audio cue that will identify a search box, follow these steps:
2. Select the button in the Auditory Scan Cue group box in the
Properties menu (page 3-57). A system keyboard popup will open.
3. Use the system keyboard to enter the audio cue text.
audio cue you entered will be added to the search box. In the
Properties menu, the button in the Auditory Scan Cue group box
will also display the new audio cue text.
3-161
Create New Pages
Change the Behaviors of Buttons in a
Search Box
Because of the default setting in the Properties menu, buttons in a
new search box are automatically assigned an Insert Label behavior.
This means that when a button with a Go to Page & Search behavior
is used to access the page with the search box, the device will speak
the label in any search box button that is selected. You can change
this default behavior to another behavior, or assign any additional
behaviors to the search box buttons by following these steps:
2 Note:
Remember that the behaviors you select here will be assigned to
every button that is ever placed in the search box.
To change the behavior of a buttons in a search box, follow these
steps:
2. Select the Behavior Editor button in the Properties menu. A
Behavior Editor menu (page 3-118) will open.
2 Note:
3-162
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create New Pages
2 Note:
steps 3 through 7.
have been selected, select the behavior in the Steps viewport and
then select one of the following buttons:
Move Up
viewport list.
Edit
Delete
Move Down
viewport list.
selected behaviors will now be applied to any buttons that are
displayed in the search box.
3-163
Page Layout Basics
PAGE LAYOUT BASICS
The DynaVox Series 4 page editor offers basic tools for working with
objects on a communication page or popup. Objects on a page can
be selected individually or as part of a group with all the other objects
on the open page. Once selected, an object can easily be cut or
copied and then pasted into a new location. Selected objects can also
be deleted. In addition, any changes to the objects on a page or
popup can be automatically undone or redone.
This section provides step-by-steps for accomplishing all these basic
tasks.
Editing Functions
The step-by-step instructions in this section offer information on using
the DynaVox Series 4 page editor to edit the objects on a
communication page or popup. Each selected item can be cut or
copied, and then pasted into a new location. Items can also be
deleted.
Step-by-step instructions for simultaneously selecting every object on
a page, and for undoing and redoing changes are also offered.
Cut and Paste an Object
When the Cut option is chosen, a selected object is removed from the
screen and stored on a hidden clipboard. The clipboard object can
then be placed (pasted) in a new location.
3-164
DynaVox Systems LLC
Page Layout Basics
If you want to remove an object from one area of the page and paste
it into another spot, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select the item you
want to cut.
touch screen.
3. Select Edit in the main pull-down menu.
4. Select Cut in the second pull-down menu. The selected object will
be removed from the page and added to an invisible clipboard.
5. Select the pull-down menu button again.
7. Select Paste in the second pull-down menu. The item you cut will
reappear on the page, highlighted with handles (small white
boxes) on its border. A Move Selection box with OK and Cancel
buttons will appear in the title bar at the top of the touch screen.
The OK button is a circular button with a checkmark inside it. The
Cancel button is a circular button with a slashed circle inside it.
8. Move the pasted item into its new position by selecting one of the
handles on the item’s border and dragging it into place (maintain
the selection while you are moving the item).
9. Once the item is positioned correctly, select the OK button in the
Move Selection box.
Copy and Paste an Object
When the Copy option is chosen, the software will make a duplicate
of a selected object. This copy is stored on a hidden clipboard. The
clipboard object can then be placed (pasted) in a new location. The
original item will remain unchanged.
3-165
Page Layout Basics
If you want to make a copy of an object and paste it into a new
location, follow these steps:
want to copy.
touch screen.
4. Select Copy in the second pull-down menu. A copy of the selected
object will be added to an invisible clipboard.
5. Select the pull-down menu button again.
7. Select Paste in the second pull-down menu. The item you cut will
reappear on the page, highlighted with handles (small white
boxes) on its border. A Move Selection box with OK and Cancel
buttons will appear in the title bar at the top of the touch screen.
The OK button is a circular button with a checkmark inside it. The
Cancel button is a circular button with a slashed circle inside it.
8. Move the pasted item into its new position by selecting one of the
handles on the item’s border and dragging it into place (maintain
the selection while you are moving the item).
Move Selection box.
Delete an Object
You may want to permanently remove an object from a
3-166
DynaVox Systems LLC
Page Layout Basics
want to delete.
touch screen.
4. Select Delete in the second pull-down menu. The selected object
will be removed from the page or popup.
Select all the Items on a Page or Popup
You may want to select every object on a communication page or
popup in order to make a change that will apply to each object.
To select all the objects, follow these steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Select All in the second pull-down menu. Every item on the
page will be selected.
Undo a Change in Page Edit Mode
You may want to undo the last change that was made in the page
editor.
touch screen.
3-167
Page Layout Basics
3. Select Undo in the second pull-down menu. The last change you
made to the page or popup will be undone.
Redo a Change in Page Edit Mode
The Redo option will override the last thing that was changed by the
Undo option.
If you use the Undo option to cancel a change, and then decide that
you want to restore the change, follow these steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Redo in the second pull-down menu. The last change that
was deleted by the Undo option will be replaced.
Lay Out Buttons
The Series 4 page editor can be used to reorganize and change
buttons on a communication page or popup. This section includes
step-by-step instructions for organizing buttons according to their
label content, changing button types and clearing the contents of
buttons.
Alphabetize Selected Buttons
You may want to rearrange the buttons on a page so that their labels
are in alphabetical order.
3-168
DynaVox Systems LLC
Page Layout Basics
buttons you want to alphabetize.
touch screen.
5. Select Alphabetize in the third pull-down menu. The buttons will
be automatically rearranged into alphabetical order, according to
the vocabulary in their labels.
Change the Button Type
You may want to choose a new button type for the selected button.
1. Use the Object Selector Plus tool to select all the buttons you want
to change.
touch screen.
5. Select Change Type in the third pull-down menu. A Button Style
menu will open.
6. Select the button that represents the type of button you want to
use. The selected buttons will automatically change to the new
type.
3-169
Page Layout Basics
Clear Button Contents
If you like the layout of a page or popup but want to replace the
labels, symbols, behaviors and other features of the buttons, you can
do this easily by clearing the buttons.
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select a single button
popup.
touch screen.
5. Select Clear in the third pull-down menu. The contents of the
selected buttons (including the label, symbol and associated
behaviors) will be removed.
Use the Layout Grid
The DynaVox Series 4 page editor includes an optional page layout
grid that can be helpful when buttons and other objects are being
aligned on a page. Use the step-by-step instructions in this section to
learn about working with the layout grid.
Display a Background Grid
Remove the Background Grid
Activate the Snap to Grid Option
Deactivate the Snap to Grid Option
3-170
DynaVox Systems LLC
Page Layout Basics
Display a Background Grid
Sometimes a background grid can be useful when you are creating a
new page or popup. Its lines can be used to help you regulate the
placement of objects. The grid lines will not be seen when the page or
popup is not in edit mode.
To display a background grid in the Series 4 page editor, follow these
steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Grid Lines in the second pull-down menu. A blue check
mark will appear next to the Grid Lines option.
Remove the Background Grid
You may not want to see the grid lines displayed anymore.
touch screen.
3. Select Grid Lines in the second pull-down menu to remove the
3-171
Page Layout Basics
Activate the Snap to Grid Option
When the Snap to Grid feature is being used, each new object that is
added to a page or popup will be automatically lined up with the
background grid.
If you want to activate this option, follow these steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Snap to Grid in the second pull-down menu. A blue check
mark will appear next to the Snap to Grid option.
Deactivate the Snap to Grid Option
You may not want to use the Snap to Grid option anymore.
touch screen.
3. Select Snap to Grid in the second pull-down menu to remove the
Object Positioning
3-172
This section provides information on positioning objects on a page or
popup. The DynaVox Series 4 page editor provides tools for creating
uniform alignments for buttons and other objects. Objects can also be
placed on different layers, so some objects can overlap or be hidden
DynaVox Systems LLC
Page Layout Basics
by other objects. Follow the step-by-step instructions in this section to
learn about working with layers and alignment tools.
Align Objects on a Page
You may want objects on a page to be lined up evenly on one side.
1. Use the Object Selector Plus tool (page 3-21) to select the objects
you want to align.
touch screen.
4. Select Align in the second pull-down menu.
5. In the third pull down menu, select one of the available alignment
options:
Align Top
The selected objects will be aligned so that
the topmost point of each object is at the
same vertical level on the page or popup.
The DynaVox Series 4 software will find the
point in the existing group that is highest on
objects will not be moved to the top of the
page or popup.
object that is highest on the page or popup.
3-173
3-174
Page Layout Basics
Align Left
The selected objects will be aligned at their
left side. The DynaVox Series 4 software will
farthest left on the page or popup and then
The objects will not be moved to the left side
that is the farthest to the left.
Align Right
The selected objects will be aligned at their
right side. The DynaVox Series 4 software
will find the point in the existing group that is
the farthest right on the page or popup and
then align the selected objects along an
unseen vertical line that extends from that
point. The objects will not be moved to the
right side of the page or popup.
that is the farthest to the right.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Page Layout Basics
Align Bottom
The selected objects will be aligned so that
the lowest point of each object is at the
same vertical level on the page or popup.
The DynaVox Series 4 software will find the
point in the existing group that is lowest on
objects will not be moved to the bottom of
the page or popup.
object that is lowest on the page or popup.
The selected objects will be automatically aligned.
Center Objects on a Page or Popup
If you want selected objects on a page or popup to be lined up along
a central point.
1. Use the Object Selector Plus tool (page 3-21) to select the objects
you want to center.
touch screen.
4. Select Align in the second pull-down menu.
3-175
Page Layout Basics
5. In the third pull down menu, select one of the options for centering:
Center Vertically
The selected objects will be centered
between the top and bottom of the page or
popup.
Center
Horizontally
The selected objects will be centered
between the left and right sides of the page
or popup.
The selected objects will be automatically centered.
Bring an Item to the Front
layered and can overlap.
If the item you have selected is being hidden by another item, you
can bring the item to the top layer by following these steps:
want to bring to the front.
touch screen.
4. Select Bring to Front in the second pull-down menu. The selected
object will be moved to the top layer of items on the page or popup.
Keep in mind that the object may now be hiding objects that are on
lower layers.
3-176
DynaVox Systems LLC
Page Layout Basics
Send an Item to the Back
layered and can overlap.
If the item you have selected is in front of another item, you can send
the selected item to the bottom layer by following these steps:
want to send to the back.
touch screen.
4. Select Send to the Back in the second pull-down menu. The
selected object will be moved to the bottom layer of items on the
page or popup. Keep in mind that objects on the top layer may now
be hiding the object.
Move an Object on a Page or Popup
You can adjust the position of an item on a communication page or
popup by using the Move option in the page editor pull-down menu.
want to move.
touch screen.
4. Select Move in the second pull-down menu. The object you
selected will be highlighted with handles (small white boxes) on its
border. A Move Selection box with OK and Cancel buttons will
3-177
Page Layout Basics
appear in the title bar at the top of the touch screen. The OK button
is a circular button with a checkmark inside it. The Cancel button
is a circular button with a slashed circle inside it.
5. Move the object into a new position by selecting one of the handles
on the item’s border and dragging it into place (maintain the
selection while you are moving the item).
Move Selection box.
Resize an Object and its Contents
When you use the Resize option in the page editor pull-down menu,
you can change the size of an object and its contents at the same
time. For example, if you use the Resize option to increase the size of
a button, the button’s label and symbol will be automatically scaled to
take up as much room as they did in the smaller button.
If you want the contents of an object to be proportionally resized
when you change the size of an object, follow these steps:
want to resize.
touch screen.
4. Select Resize in the second pull-down menu. The object you
border. A Resize Selection box with OK and Cancel buttons will
3-178
DynaVox Systems LLC
Page Layout Basics
the selection as you drag the object into a new size. To maintain
the object’s proportion while resizing, use one of the corner
handles. Using the handles in the center of the top or bottom
border will resize the item vertically. The handles in the center of
the left or right border will resize the item horizontally.
6. When you are finished resizing the selected object(s), select the
OK button in the Resize Selection box in the title bar at the top of
the touch screen.
Resize an Object without Changing the Size
of its Contents
When you use the Free Resize option in the page editor pull-down
menu, you can change the size of an object without affecting the size
of its contents. For example, if you use the Free Resize option to
increase the size of a button, the size of the button’s label and symbol
will not be changed.
If you want to resize an object without affecting its contents, follow
these steps:
want to resize.
touch screen.
4. Select Free Resize in the second pull-down menu. The object you
border. A Resize Selection box with OK and Cancel buttons will
3-179
Page Layout Basics
the selection as you drag the object(s) into a new size. To maintain
the object’s proportion while resizing, use one of the corner
handles. Using the handles in the center of the top or bottom
border will resize the item vertically. The handles in the center of
the left or right border will resize the item horizontally.
6. When you are finished resizing the selected object(s), select the
OK button in the Resize Selection box in the title bar at the top of
the touch screen.
3-180
DynaVox Systems LLC
Organize Page Objects
ORGANIZE PAGE OBJECTS
Boxes and dividers are graphic objects that are placed on pages and
popups to visually define a group of items by grouping or separating
them. Drawing a square box around several buttons that have similar
vocabulary or behaviors, for example, will distinguish those buttons
as a group. Likewise, a thick divider line drawn between two columns
of buttons with distinctly different vocabulary or behaviors will
emphasize the difference between the two columns.
drawing and customizing the appearance of boxes and dividers.
Create and Modify
Boxes
The DynaVox Series 4 software provides a tool for drawing a box
around objects on a communication page or popup. This is usually
done to visually define a group of buttons or other items. Boxes can
be created and modified in the DynaVox Series 4 page editor. When a
box is created, its attributes will be dependent on the default settings
that have been established on the Boxes/Dividers tab pane
(page 3-49) that is available in the Default Properties group box
(Show Object Properties) of the Preferences menu. The default
settings in the Preferences menu affect each box in the Series 4
software.
These default features can be changed for individual boxes in the
Properties menu affect only the box that is selected in the page
editor.
3-181
Draw a Box
Boxes can be used to visually group items on a communication page
or popup.
2 Note:
When you use the Box tool to create a new box, remember that the
attributes of the box will be affected by the settings in the
Boxes/Dividers tab pane in the Preferences menu.
If you want to draw a box, follow these steps:
1. Select the Box tool (page 3-26) in the Tools palette.
box. Do not release the selection.
draw out a box. An outline of the box you are drawing will appear
on the touch screen. You may move the cursor adjust the size or
shape of the box you are drawing, but do not release the selection
until the box is the desired size and shape. When you release the
selection, the box will be placed on the page.
4. If the Preferences menu is set to automatically add a label to the
box, a system keyboard popup will open and you should complete
the rest of this step. If the device is not set to add a label new box,
no further steps are necessary.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter a label for the new box.
add the label to the box.
The new box is now in place on the page or popup.
3-182
DynaVox Systems LLC
Change the Color of a Box
Although a standard color for all new boxes is defined in the
Boxes/Dividers tab pane in the Preferences menu, the Properties
menu offers an option for changing the color of individual boxes.
To choose a new color for a box, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select a single box.
Use the Object Selector Plus tool to select more than one box.
Use the Magic Wand tool to select all the boxes on a page or
popup.
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the box, refer to Create a
selected box will automatically fill with the color you selected. In
3-183
Select a New Box Style (Labeled or
Unlabeled)
Box style is one of the default settings that are established in the
Boxes/Dividers tab pane in the Preferences menu. Depending on the
setting that has been chosen in this menu, all new boxes are either
labeled or unlabeled when they are created. Once a box has been
created, the Properties menu can be used to change its style.
To select a new box style, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool to (page 3-21) select a single box.
popup.
2. Select the Box Style pull-down menu in the Properties menu
available box styles: Labeled and Unlabeled.
3. Select one of the two options. The pull-down menu will close again,
displaying only the style you choose. The new style will be
automatically applied to the selected box or boxes.
2 Note:
Use caution when switching from the labeled style to the unlabeled
style, as the existing text label will be deleted.
Create a Box Border / Change the Color of a
Box Border
Although a standard border color for all new boxes is defined in the
Boxes/Dividers tab pane in the Preferences menu, the Properties
menu offers an option for changing the border color of an individual
box.
3-184
DynaVox Systems LLC
popup.
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the label text, refer to
the box label will automatically fill with the color you selected. In
TextColor group box will also display the chosen color.
Customize the Label Font in a Box
The font that is used in a box label can be customized to make it
easier for an individual to see or to suit the design preferences of an
individual.
To add new font styles to the text in a box, follow these steps:
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select a box.
popup.
3-186
DynaVox Systems LLC
24, 26, 28, 36, 48 and 72.
settings will be applied to the text in the selected box label. In the
Change the Text in a Box Label
The Properties menu provides DV4/MT4 users with the option to
update or change the text in a box label.
1. Use the Object Selector tool (page 3-21) to select a box.
3. Use the system keyboard to enter the label text.
new text will be added to the label in the selected box. In the
3-187
Properties menu, the button in the Text group box will also display
the edited text.
Create Dividers
Dividers are simple options for organizing information on a page.
They are simple horizontal or vertical lines that are frequently used to
visually separate a group of buttons with particular behaviors or
functions from another group of buttons with different behaviors.
Dividers can be created and modified in the DynaVox Series 4 page
editor. The Tools palette provides a Divider tool for drawing dividers
on a communication page or popup. When a divider is drawn, its
attributes will be dependent on the default settings that have been
established on the Boxes/Dividers tab pane that is available in the
Default Properties group box (Show Object Properties) of the
Preferences menu. The default settings in the Preferences menu
affect each divider in the Series 4 software.
These divider features can also be modified in the Properties menu
that is available in the page editor. Unlike the Preferences menu
default settings, the settings in the Properties menu affect only the
divider that is selected in the page editor.
Draw a Divider
Horizontal or vertical divider can be used to visually separate groups
of objects on a page or popup.
2 Note:
3-188
When the Divider tool is used to create a new divider line,
remember that the divider’s attributes will be affected by the default
settings in the Boxes/Dividers tab pane (page 3-49) in the
Preferences menu.
DynaVox Systems LLC
To draw a new divider, follow these steps:
1. Select the Divider tool (page 3-22) in the Tools palette.
end of the divider line. Do not release the selection.
draw a line. An outline of the button you are drawing will appear on
the touch screen. You may move the cursor adjust the length or
direction of the line you are drawing, but do not release the
selection until the divider is the desired length. When you release
the selection, the divider will be placed on the touch screen.
Change the Color of a Divider
To change the color of a divider line, follow these steps:
popup.
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for this divider line, refer to
3-189
selected divider will automatically fill with the color you selected. In
Adjust the Width of a Divider
Divider lines can be very thick or very thin, depending on how
prominent you want the divider to be.
To adjust the width of a divider, follow these steps:
popup.
2. Select the Width pull-down menu in the Properties menu
available width options: Very Small, Small, Medium, Big, Bigger
and Extra Large.
3. Select the width you want to apply to the divider. The pull-down
menu will close and display only the chosen width. The selected
divider will be resized immediately.
Customize Scanning
3-190
The Scanning selection method offers a number of different scanning
patterns. Scanning patterns set the order in which buttons on the
page are highlighted while scanning. For example, in the
Row/Column scan pattern, first the buttons are highlighted row-byrow from top to bottom, and then, when a row is selected, the buttons
are highlighted one-by-one from left to right.
DynaVox Systems LLC
For customized pages, however, you may wish to specify the
groupings and order by which buttons are scanned. The group
scanning features available in Page Edit mode allow you to do so.
When you are using group scanning, each group on a page is
highlighted in an order you specify. When a group is selected, each
button or other object within it is highlighted in an order you specify.
To set up group scanning, first you will group buttons and other
objects together by drawing group boxes to contain them. Then you
will specify the order in which the groups and buttons are scanned.
For group scanning to function, you must use the Scanning selection
method and enable the Group Scanning option. See Activate and
Customize the Scanning Selection Method on page 5-8 for more
information.
Group Buttons with a Group Box
Buttons are grouped together using group boxes. You can draw a
group box around any rectangular group of buttons on a page.
You do not need to put all the buttons on a page inside groups. If you
leave some buttons outside groups, they will still be scanned.
You define scanning groups explicitly with group boxes. Objects such
as boxes (page 3-181), tabs (page 3-150), and search boxes
(page 3-156) also form groups for scanning without drawing a group
box.
You can surround group boxes with larger group boxes. This can be
used to implement scanning patterns similar to the Left/Right, Six
Zones, and others, in which several areas of the page are
highlighted, the area is highlighted row-by-row, and the buttons in the
row are highlighted one by one. (See Activate and Customize the
Scanning Selection Method on page 5-8 for more details on these
3-191
scanning patterns.) Scanning begins with the largest group box on
the outside and proceeds inward to smaller groups.
To draw a group box, complete the following steps:
1. Select the Group Box tool (page 3-26) in the Tools palette.
2. Select on the page where you want one corner of the rectangle to
be. Do not release the selection.
3. Maintain the selection and drag the cursor to draw a box around
the buttons you wish to be grouped together. An outline of the
group box you are drawing will appear on the touch screen. You
may move the cursor to adjust the size or shape of the box you are
drawing, but do not release the selection until the box is the
desired size and shape. When you release the selection, the box
will be placed on the page.
4. If the Properties menu is not already visible, display it by
completing the following steps:
a. Select the pull-down menu button in the title bar at the top of the
touch screen.
b. Select View in the main pull-down menu. A secondary pulldown menu expands to the right.
c. Select Properties in the secondary pull-down menu. A check
mark will appear next to Properties, the pull-down menu will
close, and the Properties menu (page 3-57) will be displayed.
The Properties menu will display two options for the new group
box:
3-192
Keep Scanning
Inside
Determines whether scanning starts over
from the beginning or within the group.
Audio Cue
Sets a word or phrase to be spoken when
the group is highlighted during scanning, if
audio cues are enabled.
DynaVox Systems LLC
5. To specify where to restart scanning when the end is reached,
select the Keep Scanning Inside pull-down menu in the
Properties menu.
Select On to start over within the group or Off to start over from the
beginning of the page. The pull-down menu will close and display
only the selected option.
6. To set up an audio cue to be played when the group is highlighted
during scanning, complete the following steps:
a. Select Audio Cue in the Properties menu. A system keyboard
popup will open.
b. Using the system keyboard popup, type in the audio cue.
c. Select the OK button to save the audio cue and close the
system keyboard popup. The new audio cue will appear in the
Properties menu.
You can draw as many group boxes as desired to contain the buttons
on a page. You can also draw larger group boxes surrounding other
groups. Once you are satisfied with the groupings of objects on the
page, you can set the order in which the objects are scanned.
Set Scanning Orders
On a page, you can set the order in which group boxes are scanned.
Within a group box, you can set the order in which buttons should be
scanned.
To set a scanning order, complete the following steps:
1. To set the order in which group boxes, buttons, and the Message
Window are scanned on a page, select the page background using
the Object Selector tool (page 3-21). The page background will be
highlighted.
3-193
To set the order in which buttons or group boxes are scanned
within a group box, select the group box using the Object Selector
tool (page 3-21). The group box will be highlighted.
2 Note:
When a group box is not selected, only its corners are shown on
the page. The group box has no visible borders. Select a corner or
edge of the group box to highlight it.
touch screen.
3. Select Object in the main pull-down menu. A secondary pull-down
menu expands to the right.
4. Select Group Scanning from the secondary pull-down menu.
Another pull-down menu opens to the right. It contains the
following options:
Clear Scan
Order
Clear a previously entered scan order.
Set Scan Order
Specify a new scan order.
5. Select Set Scan Order.
A Select Items in Order box with OK and Cancel buttons will be
displayed in the title bar at the top of the touch screen. The OK
button is a circular button with a checkmark inside it. The Cancel
button is a circular button with a slashed circle inside it.
The objects on the page or in the group box will display numbers
in their lower left corner indicating their current position in the
scanning order, beginning with 0 and continuing so that each
object has a number.
6. Select the object that you wish to be first in the scanning order. The
number displayed on the button will change to 0.
7. Continue selecting objects in the order in which you want them to
be scanned.
3-194
DynaVox Systems LLC
If you make a mistake, select the Cancel button in the Select Items
in Order box in the title bar and begin again with step 1.
8. When you are finished setting the scan order, select the OK button
in the Select Items in Order box in the title bar at the top of the
touch screen. The title bar will resume its normal appearance.
After you have set a scan order for the page and within each group
box on the page, the page is ready to be used with group scanning.
Exit the Page Editor
When you are finished creating and editing pages, you can exit the
page editor.
To exit the page editor, follow these steps:
touch screen.
2. Select Exit Page Editor in the main pull-down menu.
3. If you made changes to the open page after the last time you saved
information, you will be asked if you want to save changes to the
page. Select one of the following options:
Yes
New information will be saved before the
page editor closes.
No
New information will not be saved before
the page editor closes. Any new, unsaved
information will be removed from the open
page.
Cancel
The information will not be saved and the
page editor will not be closed.
4. If it has been a while since you saved your new information to the
DV4/MT4 data storage card, you will be asked if you want to save
3-195
your new pages to the flash card. It is highly recommended that
you save new information to the data card as this can prevent the
loss of information in the event of a device failure. Select one of the
two following options:
3-196
Yes
New information will be saved to the data
storage card. An hourglass icon will appear
while the information is being saved. This
process may take a moment. Once the new
information is saved to the card, the page
editor will close.
No
The page editor will close without saving
any information to the data storage card.
DynaVox Systems LLC
DV4/MT4 Advanced Features
While the communication page is always the key component to
accessing language with a DV4 or MT4 device, various other features
are offered to enhance the device’s effectiveness as a
communication tool.
Some of these features, like the menus for managing files, pages and
symbols, enable a DynaVox user to branch out by sharing pages,
files and information with other individuals. Other features, including
the ability to record speech, sing songs and play MP3 files, provide
access to a more creative range of expression. There are even some
features that enable individuals to take charge of their surroundings
by using the DynaVox Series 4 device as a remote control to access
electronic appliances and interface with computers.
This chapter addresses these unique features of the DynaVox Series
4 software. It also covers other unique features like reminders,
4-1
Chapter 4: DV4/MT4 Advanced Features
macros, the Color Selector menu and the Behavior Editor menu. A
general summary of each feature is given, followed by an overview of
the menu that is used to manage it and the step-by-step instructions
for using the tools in the menu.
4-2
DynaVox Systems LLC
Rate Enhancement Tools
RATE ENHANCEMENT TOOLS
DynaVox Series 4 devices offer rate enhancement features that can
help you communicate more quickly and efficiently. Rate
enhancement includes word prediction, context prediction, flexible
abbreviation and abbreviation expansion. These features all work to
reduce the number of selections that are needed to perform a task.
When fewer selections are required, your communication rate will be
faster and more efficient.
This section offers general information about rate enhancement for
DynaVox Series 4 devices and includes step-by-step instructions for
selecting and working with the various features.
Prediction
Prediction can be used with keyboard pages/popups that include
predictor buttons. As you use the keyboard buttons to compose a
message, the prediction feature anticipates your word choices and
displayed in predictor buttons. If the software predicts the word you
are trying to compose, you can save time by selecting the predictor
button that features the correct word. This will immediately send the
word to the Message Window, allowing you to simply move on to the
next word.
Prediction draws its selections from the device’s dictionary. You can
choose to make your own personal vocabulary (including names,
single words, multiple word phrases and full sentences) available for
word prediction by adding these items to the dictionary. To make the
most of DynaVox Series 4 word prediction, be sure to create
dictionary entries for the names of family, friends, businesses, towns,
hobbies, foods, movies or other things that you talk about often.
When you create these dictionary entries, be sure to give them fairly
high frequencies. Frequency is an assigned number (1-100) that
4-3
reflects the number of times a word is used in your normal
conversation. Words with low frequencies are seldom used. Words
with high frequencies tend to be used often. Because of this, items
with high frequencies are predicted more quickly. You may want to try
giving a dictionary entry that you will use every day a frequency of 75
to 100.
Context Prediction
Flexible Abbreviation
4-4
The word prediction feature can be further enhanced with context
prediction. When this feature is active, the software anticipates word
selections based on the grammatical structure of the sentence you
are typing. For context prediction to function efficiently, all dictionary
entries must be assigned the correct part of speech.
Flexible abbreviation is a rate enhancement feature that is especially
helpful for names and long phrases. If dictionary entries are created
for vocabulary that you use often (including words, names, sentences
and phrases), those items can be automatically predicted by this
feature. When you use a keyboard page to type a few letters, the
flexible abbreviation expansion feature will search the dictionary and
present items that include the given letters in the same sequence.
You then can quickly choose the predicted items rather than
continuing to type. Flexible abbreviation expansion is especially
simple to use, as no specifically defined abbreviations are required.
You may type abbreviations without needing to memorize one
specific abbreviation. Flexible abbreviation expansion can accelerate
your communication if you include frequently used greetings,
farewells and questions in your device’s dictionary.
DynaVox Systems LLC
About Prediction
Settings
You can select and deselect the prediction features you want to use
in the Prediction Settings menu.
PREDICTION SETTINGS MENU
This menu contains the following tools:
Prediction
Settings Group
Box
Use the check boxes in this group box to
activate and deactivate the various
prediction features.
Presentation
Settings Group
Box
The tools in this group box can be used to
specify how the predictor buttons are filled.
OK/Cancel
Buttons
Select the OK button to save any changes
to the prediction settings before
automatically closing the Prediction Settings
menu. Select the Cancel button to close the
Prediction Settings menu without saving any
new settings.
4-5
Continue reading this section to review step-by-step instructions for
customizing your selected prediction settings.
Create Prediction Settings
When you first turn on your DV4 or MT4 device, the prediction
settings are all selected as defaults. As you become more familiar
with your device, you may decide that you want to make changes to
the prediction feature selections in this menu.
To review and change your current prediction settings, follow these
steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4. Select the Prediction Settings button. The Prediction Settings
5. Use the check boxes in the Prediction Settings group box to select
or deselect various prediction features:
4-6
Prediction
When this check box is selected, basic
prediction will be active. When this check
box is not selected, prediction will be
inactive.
Flexible
Abbreviation
When this check box is selected, the flexible
abbreviation feature will be active. When
this check box is not selected, flexible
abbreviation will be inactive.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Don’t Predict
Words Already
on Buttons
When this check box is selected, the
prediction features will not predict a word
that is already on a button on the page or
popup. Only words that do not appear
anywhere on the page will be predicted.
When this check box is not selected, a word
may be presented in a predictor button even
if it appears in another button on a page.
Context
Prediction
context prediction feature will be active.
When this check box is not selected,
context prediction will be inactive.
Only Words with
Symbols
When this check box is selected, only
vocabulary items that have assigned
symbols will be predicted. Any vocabulary
items that do not have symbols will not be
predicted. When this check box is not
selected, all vocabulary items are eligible
for prediction, regardless of whether they
have assigned symbols.
Predict Items
Only Once
When this check box is selected, you are
given only one chance to select a word in a
predictor button. If you are entering letters
into a keyboard page and you do not select
a word that is presented in a predictor
button, that word will not be predicted again
until after you complete the entry you are
typing (by entering end punctuation or a
space). When this check box is not
selected, you may be given more than one
opportunity to select a predicted word.
6. If you want the selected prediction features to predict vocabulary
after you have typed a specific number of letters, select the
Predict After _ Letters pull-down menu and select one of the
4-7
available options: 0, 1, 2 and 3. The pull-down menu will close and
display only the chosen option.
2 Note:
When 0 is the selected option, the prediction features will begin to
prediction common vocabulary before you even begin to type.
7. To specify the order in which vocabulary should be presented in
the prediction boxes, select the Prediction Order pull-down menu
and select one of the three available options:
Alphabetical
alphabetical order.
Frequency
Length
presented first.
The pull-down menu will close and display only the chosen option.
8. If you want symbols to be presented with vocabulary in the
predictor buttons, select the Symbol Prediction check box. If you
want only text to be presented in the predictor buttons, make sure
the check box is deselected.
9. Select the OK button to close the Prediction Settings menu.
Define and Use
Abbreviations
4-8
DynaVox Series 4 devices offer rate enhancement features that can
help you speed your communication process by decreasing the
amount of selections it takes to compose a message on a keyboard
page with predictor buttons. One of these features is abbreviation
DynaVox Systems LLC
expansion. This feature allows you to define specific abbreviations for
longer words and phrases, thereby reducing the number of keyboard
buttons you must select to compose a message. Once you have
defined a specific abbreviation in the software, the device will
automatically expand the abbreviation into the full word or phrase
whenever the abbreviation is entered on a keyboard page or popup.
For example, you may define “INY” as an abbreviation for “It’s nice to
see you.” If the abbreviation expansion feature is active, “It’s nice to
see you” will be added to the Message Window when you enter “INY”
and then select a space on a keyboard page.
With the abbreviation expansion feature, you can send things you say
often (greetings, introductions and questions, for example) to the
Message Window with just a few selections. Since the abbreviation
expansion feature is an active default setting when you receive your
device, all you need to do to use this feature is create and save your
own unique abbreviations.
Abbreviation expansions are created and edited in the Abbreviation
Browser menu. This menu features the following tools:
Viewport
The viewport in the Abbreviation Browser
menu displays a list of every abbreviation
expansion that is stored in the Series 4
software. Scroll bars on the sides of the
viewport enable you to look through the
entire list.
New Button
Select this button when you want to create a
new abbreviation expansion.
Delete Button
Select this button to permanently remove an
abbreviation expansion from the viewport in
the Abbreviation Browser menu.
Edit
Abbreviation
Button
Select this button to make changes to the
abbreviation. This button will not present
tools for changing the vocabulary item that
the abbreviation represents.
4-9
Edit Expansion
Button
Select this button to change the word, name
or phrase that an abbreviation expansion
represents. This button will not present tools
for changing the abbreviation itself.
Import Button
Select this button to add an abbreviation
expansion to the viewport from another
source, such as a computer, another Series
4 device, a removable USB storage device
or a secondary storage card.
Export Button
Select this button to share one of your
abbreviation expansions with a computer,
another Series 4 device, a removable USB
storage device or a secondary storage card.
OK Button
Select this button to close the Abbreviation
Browser menu. Selecting this button will
also save any new changes to the menu.
creating and editing original abbreviation expansions.
Create an Abbreviation Expansion
To create a unique abbreviation expansion for a word, name or
phrase, use the following steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Tools Menu in the second pull-down menu. The Tools
menu will open.
4. Select the Abbreviation Browser button. The Abbreviation
Browser menu will open.
4-10
DynaVox Systems LLC
5. Select the New button. An Enter Abbreviation system keyboard
popup will open.
6. Use the system keyboard to enter the abbreviation.
8. An Enter Expansion system keyboard popup will open.
9. Use the system keyboard to enter the expansion text.
11. Select the OK button to close the Abbreviation Browser menu.
12. Select the OK button to close the Tools menu.
Delete an Abbreviation Expansion
Follow these steps to permanently remove an abbreviation expansion
from the viewport at the top of the Abbreviation Browser menu:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the check box beside the abbreviation expansion you want
to delete. If you have a large list of abbreviation expansions in the
viewport, use the scroll buttons to look through the list.
2 Note:
You can delete more than one abbreviation expansion at the same
time by selecting the check boxes beside the name of each
abbreviation expansion you want to delete.
4-11
6. Select the Delete button.
7. Select the OK button to confirm that you want to delete the
selected abbreviation expansion. Be careful, as you will not be
able to retrieve the file once it is deleted.
Edit an Abbreviation Expansion
Once an abbreviation expansion has been saved, you can go back
and change the abbreviation and/or the word, name or phrase that
the abbreviation represents.
To make changes to an abbreviation expansion, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
to edit. If you have a large list of abbreviation expansions in the
6. If you want to edit the abbreviation, select the Edit Abbreviation
button (a system keyboard popup will open) and complete the rest
of this step. If you do not want to edit the abbreviation, continue
with step 7.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the new abbreviation text.
4-12
DynaVox Systems LLC
edited abbreviation will be displayed in the Abbreviation
Browser menu.
7. If you want to edit the expansion, select the Edit Expansion button
(a system keyboard popup will open) and complete the rest of this
step. If you do not want to edit the expansion, continue with step 8.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the new expansion text.
edited expansion will be displayed in the Abbreviation Browser
menu.
Export an Abbreviation Expansion to the
User Files Folder
Sending a copy of an abbreviation expansion to a Windows or
Macintosh computer will enable you to share the abbreviation
expansion with other DV4/MT4 devices. Before it can be sent to the
computer, though, a copy of the selected abbreviation expansion
must be sent to the Exports folder inside the User Files folder on your
device’s main data storage card.
touch screen.
menu will open.
4-13
to export. If you have a large list of abbreviation expansions in the
2 Note:
You can export more than one abbreviation expansion at the same
time by selecting the check box beside the name of each
abbreviation expansion that you want to export.
6. Select the Export button. An Enter File Name menu will open.
7. Select the expansion box beside the User Files folder in the left
viewport. The folder will expand.
8. Select the Exports folder.
9. Select the Name text box. A system keyboard popup will open.
10. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the abbreviation
expansion file that will be exported.
2 Note:
The DynaVox Series 4 software automatically assigns an extension
(.abs) to the abbreviation expansion file name.
11. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard.
12. Select the OK button when the abbreviation expansion has been
successfully exported.
A copy of the selected abbreviation expansion (.abs) file can now be
found in the Exports folder within the User Files folder. If you want to
send this file to a computer, see the following sections:
• Share Exported Files with a Windows Computer on page 4-50
• Import a File from a Macintosh Computer on page 4-62
4-14
DynaVox Systems LLC
Export an Abbreviation Expansion to a USB
Storage Device or Secondary Storage Card
Exporting a copy of an abbreviation expansion file to a removable
USB storage device or a secondary data card will enable you to
share the abbreviation expansion with other DV4/MT4 devices.
Abbreviation expansion files can be exported directly from the
Abbreviation Browser menu to the card or storage device.
2 Note:
2 Note:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4-15
to export. If you have a large list of abbreviation expansions in the
2 Note:
You can export more than one abbreviation expansion at the same
abbreviation expansion that you want to export.
7. Select the Show All Directories check box.
8. Select the appropriate folder (or the expansion box beside the
appropriate folder) in the left viewport:
Card2.
10. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the abbreviation
expansion file that will be exported.
2 Note:
(.abs) to the abbreviation expansion file name.
A copy of the selected abbreviation expansion (.abs) file can now be
found on your USB device or second storage card. If you want use
your card or storage device to share the abbreviation expansion with
4-16
DynaVox Systems LLC
another DynaVox Series 4 device, see Import an Abbreviation
Expansion with a USB Storage Device or Second Data Card on
page 4-19.
Share an Abbreviation Expansion with a
Windows Computer
A USB connection between a Series 4 device and a Windows
computer can be used to send a copy of an abbreviation expansion to
the computer. Once the abbreviation expansion is loaded on the
computer, it can be used with the DynaVox Series 4 page editing
software, sent to another computer or shared with another DV4 or
MT4 device.
The process of sending an abbreviation expansion (.abs) file to a
Windows computer involves two stages. First you must follow the
steps Export an Abbreviation Expansion to the User Files Folder
on page 4-13, and then you can continue with Share Exported Files
with a Windows Computer on page 4-50.
Share an Abbreviation Expansion with a
Macintosh Computer
A USB connection between a Series 4 device and a Macintosh
computer can be used to send an abbreviation expansion to the
computer. Once the abbreviation expansion is loaded on the
computer, it can be sent to another computer or shared with another
DV4 or MT4 device.
The process of sending an abbreviation expansion (.abs) file to a
Macintosh computer involves two stages. First you must follow the
steps Export an Abbreviation Expansion to the User Files Folder
4-17
on page 4-13, and then you can continue with Share Exported Files
with a Macintosh Computer on page 4-55.
Import an Abbreviation Expansion from the
User Files Folder
A USB cable connection can be used to send a new abbreviation
expansion (one shared from another DV4/MT4 device, for example)
to your device. This involves a two-step process, as the abbreviation
expansion file cannot be transferred directly from the computer to the
Abbreviation Browser menu. The USB cable connection with the
computer is used to add the abbreviation expansion file to the
storage card.
2 Note:
The abbreviation expansion (.abs) file must be available in the
Exports folder before these steps can be started. If you have not
yet added the .abs file to the Exports folder, begin with the following
steps:
• Import a File from a Windows Computer on page 4-58
The abbreviation expansion is then imported to the Abbreviation
Browser menu with the following steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4-18
DynaVox Systems LLC
5. Select the Import button. The User Files menu will open.
7. Select the Exports folder. Any available abbreviation expansion
files will be listed in the right viewport.
8. Select the check box beside the name of the abbreviation
expansion you want to import.
9. Select the OK button to close the User Files menu.
successfully imported.
The new abbreviation expansion is now available in the Abbreviation
Browser menu.
Import an Abbreviation Expansion with a
USB Storage Device or Second Data Card
Abbreviation expansions can be shared between DV4/MT4 users. If
an abbreviation expansion file is loaded onto a USB storage device or
a secondary data card, this peripheral device can be used to import
the abbreviation expansion directly to the Abbreviation Browser menu
on your DV4/MT4 device.
2 Note:
4-19
2 Note:
touch screen.
menu will open.
Card2.
Any available abbreviation expansion (.abs) files will be displayed
in the right viewport.
8. In the right viewport, select the name of the abbreviation
expansion you want to import.
4-20
DynaVox Systems LLC
The new abbreviation expansion is now available in the Abbreviation
Browser menu.
Import an Abbreviation Expansion from a
Windows Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of an abbreviation expansion
from the computer to the DV4 or MT4 device. The process of
importing an abbreviation expansion file from a Windows computer to
a Series 4 device involves two stages. First you must follow the steps
in Import a File from a Windows Computer on page 4-58. These
steps will transfer the file from the computer to the device. Then you
can continue with Import an Abbreviation Expansion from the
User Files Folder on page 4-18. These steps will add the
abbreviation expansion to the Abbreviation Browser menu.
Import an Abbreviation Expansion from a
Macintosh Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of an abbreviation expansion
importing an abbreviation expansion file from a Macintosh computer
to a Series 4 device involves two stages. First you must follow the
steps in Import a File from a Macintosh Computer on page 4-62.
These steps will transfer the file from the computer to the device.
Then you can continue with Import an Abbreviation Expansion
from the User Files Folder on page 4-18. These steps will add the
abbreviation expansion to the Abbreviation Browser menu.
4-21
Activate the Abbreviation Expansions
Feature
If the abbreviation expansion feature has been turned off on your
DV4/MT4 device, you can reactivate it by following these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
menu will open.
5. Select the Show Message Window Settings button. A Show
Message Window Settings group box will open.
6. Select the Automatically Expand Abbreviations checkbox.
The abbreviation expansion feature is now active.
Create and Use
Dictionary Entries
4-22
The Series 4 dictionary is an alphabetized catalog of every word,
name and phrase that is stored within the device’s vocabulary
database. This dictionary can be customized easily and since rate
enhancement on the DV4/MT4 devices is based on dictionary
vocabulary, it is essential that you add your own dictionary entries. Be
sure that names, questions and statement you use often are added
as dictionary entries. This ensures that these words and phrases are
DynaVox Systems LLC
available for rate enhancement features like word prediction, helping
you to create messages more quickly on system keyboard pages.
Dictionary entries can be created and edited in the Dictionary
Browser menu.
DICTIONARY BROWSER MENU
The Dictionary Browser menu includes these tools:
Viewport
The viewport in the Dictionary Browser
menu displays a list of every word, name or
phrase that is stored in the Series 4
software dictionary. Scroll bars on the sides
of the viewport enable you to look through
the entire list.
Up/Down
Buttons
Use the Up and Down buttons to move the
highlight up or down one item at a time in
the Dictionary Browser viewport.
4-23
4-24
Scroll Up/Scroll
Down Buttons
Use the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons
to move the highlight up or down four items
at a time in the Dictionary Browser viewport.
Search Text Box
Use the Search feature to look for a
dictionary entry by name. The Search
feature is the most efficient way to find an
item in the Dictionary Browser viewport.
New Button
Select this button to add a new word, name
or phrase to the Series 4 dictionary.
Edit Button
Select this button to make changes to a
dictionary entry.
Delete Button
Select the Delete button to permanently
remove a dictionary entry from the viewport
in the Dictionary Browser menu.
Concept Tag
Button
Use this button to add a concept tag to a
selected dictionary entry. Concept tags are
used to make vocabulary items available for
searches.
Import Button
Use the Import button to add a dictionary
entry from the User Files folder on the
device’s main data storage card to the
Dictionary Browser menu. Dictionary entries
can also be imported directly from a USB
storage device or a secondary data card.
Export Button
Use the Export button to send a copy of a
selected dictionary item (or items) to the
User Files folder on the device’s main data
storage card. Dictionary entries can also be
exported directly to a USB storage device or
a secondary data card.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Learn Button
The Learn button can be used to access the
software’s Learn Language feature. This
feature can be used to quickly scan a text
file for words and phrases that are not
included in the Series 4 dictionary. The user
can then opt to enhance the dictionary by
adding the words and phrases that are
presented.
Clear Marks
Selecting the Clear Marks button will
remove any check marks from the check
boxes beside the dictionary entries in the
viewport.
All Words/User
Words PullDown Menu
This pull-down menu enables the user to
decide if every dictionary entry should be
displayed in the viewport, or if only the
dictionary entries that were created by the
user should be displayed.
OK Button
Select this button to close the Dictionary
Browser menu. Selecting this button will
also save any new changes to the menu.
Create a New Dictionary Entry
Follow these steps to add a word, name or phrase to the Series 4
dictionary:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4. Select the Dictionary Browser button. The Dictionary Browser
(page 4-23) menu will open.
5. Select the New button. The Edit Word menu will open.
4-25
6. Select the Word text box. A system keyboard popup will open.
7. Use the system keyboard to enter the word, name or phrase you
want to add to the dictionary.
8. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup. Your
new dictionary entry will be displayed in the Word text box.
9. Select the Part of Speech pull-down menu and then select the
option that best applies to the new dictionary entry.
10. If the Kind of pull-down menu is available, complete this step. If the
Kind of pull-down menu is not available, continue with step 11.
The setting of the Kind of pull-down menu adds a more specific
definition to the part of speech that has been assigned to your new
dictionary entry. For example, an entry that has been categorized
as a noun may be further defined as a proper noun. To adjust this
setting, select the Kind of pull-down menu and then select one of
11. If the items in the Word Forms group box are available, complete
the remaining parts of this step. If the Word Forms group box is not
available, continue with step 12.
The items in the Word Forms group box offer a chance to review
any word form variations that apply to the new dictionary entry (for
example, “colder” and “coldest” for the adjective “cold”). The
Variant pull-down menu offers a list of variation types that are
associated with the part of speech that is assigned to the new
vocabulary item. The Word Form text box displays an example of
the dictionary entry when the variant form that is selected in the
Variant pull-down menu is applied. If one of the word forms
presented in this text box must be corrected:
a. Select the Word Form text box. A system keyboard popup will
open.
b. Use the system keyboard to enter the corrected form of the
dictionary entry.
change will be displayed in the Word Form text box.
4-26
DynaVox Systems LLC
12. If you want to assign a frequency to the new dictionary entry, select
the Frequency button and then complete the rest of this step. If
you want to use the default frequency (10), continue with step 13.
The frequency that is assigned to a dictionary item affects the way
the item is predicted by rate enhancement. Frequency numbers
range between one and 100, with 100 being reserved for items that
will be used the most often. Ten is the default frequency for new
dictionary entries.
a. Use the keypad to enter a new frequency number.
b. Select the OK button to close the Frequency keypad. The new
frequency will be displayed in the Frequency button.
13. If you want to add a concept to the dictionary entry, select the Add
button in the Concepts group box and continue with the rest of this
step. If you do not want to choose a concept, continue with step 14.
Adding a concept tag to your new dictionary entry will associate
the item with a group of similar vocabulary items. Concept tags
make vocabulary items available for concept searches.
a. Select the expansion box next to the Top Concept folder. The
folder will expand.
b. Use the scroll buttons to find an appropriate concept category
and then select the expansion box next to the category name.
The concept category will expand to display the individual
concepts.
c. Use the scroll buttons to find an appropriate concept within the
selected category, and then select the check box next to the
concept name.
2 Note:
You can select more than one concept tag for your entry by
selecting the check box beside each concept you want to use.
d. Select the OK button to close the Select Concepts menu. The
concepts you selected will be added to the Concepts group box
in the Edit Word menu.
4-27
14. Select the OK to save the new dictionary entry and close the Edit
Word menu. The new dictionary entry will be added to the viewport
in the Dictionary Browser menu.
15. Select the OK button to close the Dictionary Browser menu.
Delete a Dictionary Entry
Follow these steps to permanently remove an item from the
Dictionary Browser menu:
touch screen.
menu will open.
6. Use the system keyboard to type in the dictionary entry you want
to delete.
item you searched for will be highlighted in the viewport of the
Dictionary Browser menu.
8. Select the check box beside the item.
2 Note:
You can delete more than one dictionary entry at the same time by
selecting the check box beside each entry that you want to delete.
4-28
DynaVox Systems LLC
10. Select the Yes button to confirm that you want to delete the
vocabulary item. Be careful, as you will not be able to retrieve a
dictionary item after you have deleted it.
Edit a Dictionary Entry
Follow these steps to make changes to a selected dictionary entry:
touch screen.
3. Select Tools Menu in the second pull-down menu.
6. Use the system keyboard to type in the dictionary entry you want
to edit.
appropriate dictionary entry will be highlighted in the viewport in
the Dictionary Browser menu.
8. Select the Edit button. The Edit Word menu will open.
9. If you want to change the name of the dictionary entry, select the
Word text box (a system keyboard popup will open) and complete
the rest of this step. If you do not want to change the dictionary
entry name, continue with step 10.
a. Use the system keyboard to make changes to the dictionary
item.
4-29
b. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup. Your
new changes will be displayed in the Word text box.
10. If you want to change the other attributes of the dictionary item,
refer to steps 9 through 19 in Create a New Dictionary Entry on
page 4-25 (for more information on customizing a dictionary entry).
If you do not want to edit any other attributes of the selected
dictionary entry, continue with step 11.
11. Select the OK button to close the Edit Word menu. If you made
changes to the Word text box, these changes will be displayed in
the viewport of the Dictionary Browser menu.
Export a Dictionary Entry to the User Files
Folder
Sending a copy of a dictionary entry to a Windows or Macintosh
computer will enable you to share the dictionary entry with other
DV4/MT4 devices. Before the dictionary entry can be sent to the
computer, though, a copy of the selected dictionary entry must be
sent to the Exports folder inside the User Files folder on your device’s
main data storage card.
touch screen.
menu will open.
4-30
DynaVox Systems LLC
6. Use the system keyboard to type out the name of the dictionary
entry.
dictionary entry will be highlighted in the viewport in the Dictionary
Browser menu.
8. Select the check box beside the highlighted dictionary entry.
2 Note:
You can export more than one dictionary entry at the same time by
selecting the check box beside the name of each dictionary entry
that you want to export.
13. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the dictionary entry
file that will be exported.
2 Note:
(.lex) to the dictionary entry file name.
A copy of the selected dictionary entry (.lex) file can now be found
in the Exports folder within the User Files folder. If you want to
send this file to a computer, see the following steps:
4-31
• Share Exported Files with a Windows Computer on
page 4-50
• Share Exported Files with a Macintosh Computer on
page 4-55
Export a Dictionary Entry to a USB Storage
Device or Secondary Storage Card
Exporting a copy of a dictionary entry file to a removable USB storage
device or a secondary data card will enable you to share the
dictionary entry with other DV4/MT4 devices. Dictionary files can be
exported directly from the Dictionary Browser menu to the card or
storage device.
2 Note:
2 Note:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4-32
DynaVox Systems LLC
6. Use the system keyboard to type out the name of the dictionary
entry.
dictionary entry will be highlighted in the viewport in the Dictionary
Browser menu.
8. Select the check box beside the highlighted dictionary entry.
2 Note:
You can export more than one dictionary entry at the same time by
selecting the check box beside the name of each dictionary entry
that you want to export.
If you are using a USB storage device, select UMS_FOLDER.
If you are using a second data storage card, select Storage
Card2.
13. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the dictionary entry
file that will be exported.
2 Note:
The DynaVox Series 4 software automatically assigns a .lex
extension to the dictionary entry file name.
4-33
A copy of the selected dictionary entry (.lex) file can now be found
on your USB device or second storage card. If you want use your
card or storage device to share the dictionary entry with another
DynaVox Series 4 device, see Import a Dictionary Entry with a
USB Storage Device or Second Data Card on page 4-36.
Share a Dictionary Entry with a Windows
Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a dictionary entry to the
computer. Once the dictionary entry is loaded on the computer, it can
be used with the DynaVox Series 4 page editing software, sent to
another computer or shared with another DV4 or MT4 device.
The process of sending a dictionary entry (.lex) file to a Windows
computer involves two stages. First you must follow the steps in
Export a Dictionary Entry to the User Files Folder on page 4-30,
and then you can continue with Share Exported Files with a
Windows Computer on page 4-50.
Share a Dictionary Entry with a Macintosh
Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a dictionary entry to the
computer. Once the dictionary entry is loaded on the computer, it can
be sent to another computer or shared with another DV4 or MT4
device.
4-34
DynaVox Systems LLC
The process of sending a dictionary entry (.lex) file to a Macintosh
computer involves two stages. First you must follow the steps in
Export a Dictionary Entry to the User Files Folder on page 4-30,
and then you can continue with Share Exported Files with a
Macintosh Computer on page 4-55.
Import a Dictionary Entry from the User
Files Folder
A USB cable connection can be used to send a new dictionary entry
(one shared from another DV4/MT4 device, for example) to your
device. This involves a two-step process, as the dictionary entry file
cannot be transferred directly from the computer to the Dictionary
Browser menu. The USB cable connection with the computer is used
to add the dictionary entry file to the Exports folder inside the User
Files folder on your device’s main data storage card.
2 Note:
The dictionary entry (.lex) file must be available in the Exports
folder before these steps can be started. If you have not yet added
the .lex file to the Exports folder, begin with the following steps:
The dictionary entry is then imported to the Dictionary Browser menu
with the following steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4-35
7. Select the Exports folder. Any available dictionary entry files will
be listed in the right viewport.
8. Select the name of the dictionary entry you want to import.
10. Select the OK button when the dictionary entry has been
The new dictionary entry is now available in the Dictionary Browser
menu.
Import a Dictionary Entry with a USB
Storage Device or Second Data Card
Dictionary entries can be shared between DV4/MT4 users. If a
dictionary entry file is loaded onto a USB storage device or a
secondary data card, this peripheral device can be used to import the
dictionary entry directly to the Dictionary Browser menu on your
DV4/MT4 device.
2 Note:
4-36
DynaVox Systems LLC
2 Note:
touch screen.
menu will open.
Card2.
Any available dictionary entry (.lex) files will be displayed in the
right viewport.
8. In the right viewport, select the name of the dictionary entry you
want to import.
10. Select the OK button when the dictionary entry has been
11. Select the OK button to close the Dictionary Entry menu.
4-37
The new dictionary entry is now available in the Dictionary Browser
menu.
Import a Dictionary Entry from a Windows
Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a dictionary entry from the
computer to the DV4 or MT4 device. The process of importing a
dictionary entry file from a Windows computer to a Series 4 device
involves two stages. First you must follow the steps in Import a File
from a Windows Computer on page 4-58. These steps will transfer
the file from the computer to the device. Then you can continue with
Import a Dictionary Entry from the User Files Folder on
page 4-35. These steps will add the dictionary entry to the Dictionary
Browser menu.
Import a Dictionary Entry from a Macintosh
Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a dictionary entry from the
computer to the DV4 or MT4 device. The process of importing a
dictionary entry file from a Macintosh computer to a Series 4 device
from a Macintosh Computer on page 4-62. These steps will transfer
Import a Dictionary Entry from the User Files Folder on
page 4-35. These steps will add the dictionary entry to the Dictionary
Browser menu.
4-38
DynaVox Systems LLC
Learn Vocabulary from a Text File
When a text file is added to your DV4/MT4 device, the Learn
Language feature can be used to quickly scan the text for words and
phrases that are not included in the Series 4 dictionary. You may then
opt to enhance the dictionary by adding the words and phrases that
are presented.
To use the Learn Language feature to look for new vocabulary in a
text file, follow these steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Tools in the second pull-down menu. The Tools menu will
open.
5. Select the Learn button. A Learn Language menu will open.
6. If you want the Series 4 software to search the selected text for
new words that can be added to the Dictionary Browser, make sure
the Learn New Words check box is selected. If you do not want to
use this feature, make sure the check box is deselected.
7. If you want the Series 4 software to analyze the ways new words
are used in sentences in the selected text, make sure the Learn
Grammar check box is selected. Using this feature will help the
software predict words when context prediction is being used. If
you do not want to use this feature, make sure the check box is
deselected.
8. If you want the Series 4 software to search the selected text for
phrases that can be added to the Dictionary Browser, make sure
the Suggest New Phrases check box is selected. Adding phrases
to the dictionary browser makes them eligible for word prediction.
4-39
If you do not want to use this feature, make sure the check box is
deselected.
9. Select the Choose File button. A Select File menu will open.
the text (.txt) file you want to import or you may search for the file
by name. If you want to scroll to the file, complete step 10. If you
want to use the Search feature, complete step 11.
2 Note:
If the text file you want to import is not in the User Files folder,
select the Show All Directories check box. Then select the
appropriate folder in the left viewport (UMS_FOLDER for a USB
storage device or Storage Card 2 for a second data storage card)
before continuing with the next step.
10. To find the text file in the viewports, select the name of the
appropriate folder in the left viewport. If the folder you want to see
is part of a larger folder, select the expansion box beside the toplevel folder. You may need to use the scroll buttons to the right of
the viewport to look through all the available options.
a. Select the name of the text file in the right viewport. Use the
scroll buttons to the right of the viewport to look through all the
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the name of the text file. You
do not need to use the .txt extension.
the next step.
12. Select the OK button to close the Select File menu. The name of
the file you selected will be displayed on the Choose File button.
4-40
DynaVox Systems LLC
13. Select the OK button to close the Learn Language menu. It may
take a few minutes for the software to learn the file. An hourglass
icon will appear during the process.
14. When the text has been learned, a Select Words to Add menu will
open. Use the scroll bar to the right of the viewport in this menu to
look through the listed words and phrases. Select the check box
beside any word or phrase you want to add to the dictionary.
15. Select the OK button to close the Select Words to Add menu.
16. A window will open to display the total number of items that were
added to the dictionary. Select the OK button to close this window.
Find an Item in the Dictionary
Follow these steps to quickly locate a word or phrase in the
Dictionary Browser menu:
touch screen.
open.
6. Use the system keyboard to enter the word or phrase you are
looking for.
4-41
appropriate word or phrase will be highlighted in the viewport of the
View All the Dictionary Entries
The Series 4 dictionary allows you to use the Dictionary Browser
menu to view either the full dictionary or a smaller user dictionary.
The full dictionary includes every word, name and phrase that has
been saved to the dictionary. The user dictionary consists of only the
vocabulary items that have been saved by the person who is using
the device. These items are also saved as part of the full dictionary,
but the user dictionary provides an easier way to find and customize
your own personal vocabulary.
If you want to view the full dictionary in the Dictionary Browser menu,
follow these steps:
touch screen.
open.
5. Set the pull-down menu in the lower right corner of the menu to All
Words. The Dictionary Browser viewport will display every word
and phrase in the dictionary.
4-42
DynaVox Systems LLC
View Only the User Dictionary
The Series 4 dictionary allows you to use the Dictionary Browser
menu to view either the full dictionary or a smaller user dictionary.
The full dictionary includes every word, name and phrase that has
been saved to the dictionary. The user dictionary consists of only the
vocabulary items that have been saved by the person who is using
the device. These items are also saved as part of the full dictionary,
but the user dictionary provides an easier way to find and customize
your own personal vocabulary.
If you want to view the smaller user dictionary in the Dictionary
Browser menu, follow these steps:
touch screen.
open.
5. Set the pull-down menu in the lower right corner of the menu to
User Words. The Dictionary Browser viewport will display only
words and phrases that were added to the dictionary by the user.
4-43
Add a Concept Tag to a Dictionary Entry
Concept tags are used to make vocabulary items available for
searches.
To add a concept tag to a word, name or phrase in the dictionary,
follow these steps:
touch screen.
open.
6. Use the system keyboard to enter the word or phrase to which you
want to add a concept tag.
appropriate word or phrase will be highlighted in the viewport of the
8. Select the check box beside the highlighted dictionary item.
9. Select the Concept Tag button. A Select Concepts menu will
open.
10. Select the expansion box next to the Top Concept folder. The
folder will expand.
11. Use the scroll buttons to find an appropriate concept category and
then select the expansion box next to the category name. The
concept category will expand to display the individual concepts.
4-44
DynaVox Systems LLC
12. Use the scroll buttons to find an appropriate concept within the
selected category, and then select the check box next to the
concept name.
2 Note:
You can select more than one concept tag for your entry by
selecting the check box beside each concept you want to use.
13. Select the OK button to close the Select Concepts menu.
4-45
Find Files, Pages, and Symbols
FIND FILES, PAGES, AND SYMBOLS
The DynaVox Series 4 software includes several menus for storing,
managing and sharing files of information. Symbol files are stored in
the Symbol Browser menu. Communication pages and popups are
stored in the Page Browser menu. Every other type of file can be
found in the File Browser menu.
The components of each of these browser menus are explained in
this section. In addition, this section also features step-by-step
instructions for using the tools in these menus to manage and share
individual files.
Find Files Using the
File Browser
Each piece of information that you create or store on your DV4/MT4
device is saved as a file. DynaVox Series 4 software supports and
creates several types of files, depending on what kind of information
is being stored. Each type of file is identified by its own unique
extension (the letters that follow the file name). For example, macro
files have a .mac extension (macro.mac) and pronunciation
exceptions are saved with a .pe extension (pronunciation.pe).
All the files that you create on your DV4 or MT4 device (except for
communication pages, which are stored in the Page Browser menu)
are stored in the File Browser menu. This menu provides you with
tools for managing and organizing your files. It also offers tools for
sharing files (including pages) with computers, other Series 4 devices
4-46
DynaVox Systems LLC
and various storage devices. The File Browser menu features the
following components:
Left Viewport
The left viewport displays folder-shaped icons. These folders (or
directories) contain individual files. They may also contain smaller
folders that hold more files. An expansion box will be displayed to the
left of any folder that contains a smaller sub-folder. The expansion
box contains a plus sign (+) or a minus sign (-). A plus sign indicates
that the folder is closed and can be expanded to show the folders that
it contains. When an expansion box with a plus sign is selected, the
sub-folders inside the selected folder are displayed below the folder
in the viewport and the symbol in the expansion box will change to a
minus sign. If the expansion box with the minus sign is selected, the
folder will close again.
The two folders are always presented in the left viewport of the File
Browser menu:
4-47
4-48
Storage Card
This folder contains all the information on
your device’s main data storage card. When
you start using your device, the Storage
Card folder will contain five sub-folders. The
first one, 4100, contains the software that
runs your device. Nothing should be added
to or deleted from this folder unless you are
otherwise instructed by DynaVox Systems
Technical Support. The second sub-folder,
Images, contains the picture files that are
used in the software. The Symbol Sets subfolder contains all the symbols on your
device. The User Files sub-folder contains
all the files that you create or customize.
The last sub-folder, Windows, is a storage
place for system files. This folder is
currently empty and should not be used.
User Files
The User Files folder is a copy of the User
Files sub-folder that is in the Storage Card
folder. Any changes to this folder will be
automatically applied to the User Files
folder on the main data storage card. The
User Files folder includes sub-folders for
Exports, MP3s, Songs and Sounds. The
Exports folder contains files that were
exported from other menus (such as the
Page Browser menu or the Macro Editor
menu) in preparation for information sharing
procedures. The MP3 folder contains any
MP3 song files that are stored on your
device. The Songs folder holds files that
were created in the Song Editor menu.
Lastly, the Sounds folder is used to store
any recordings that were created in the
Sound Browser menu.
DynaVox Systems LLC
If you have added a second storage card to your device, a Storage
Card2 folder will also be displayed in the left viewport of the File
Browser menu. If a USB storage device is plugged into the USB port,
a UMS_FOLDER folder will be displayed.
Right Viewport
The right viewport displays the name of all the files stored inside the
folder that is selected in the left viewport. Each file has a check box
next to its name. The check boxes can be used to select individual
files. If the folder that is selected in the left viewport contains subfolders, these folders will also be displayed in the right viewport.
Search Text Box
Select this text box to find an individual file or a folder by name. The
Search feature is the most efficient method for finding an item in the
two File Browser viewports.
Select All Check
Box
Use the Select All check box to automatically select the check box
beside every item in the right viewport.
Pull-Down Menu
The unnamed pull-down menu in the lower left corner of the File
Browser menu can be used to specify which types of files are
displayed in the viewports. If the pull-down menu is set to All Files,
every available file will be displayed. If the pull-down menu is set to
User Files, only the files in the User Files folder will be displayed.
New Folder
Button
Use this button to create a new sub-folder within the folder that is
currently selected in the left viewport.
Properties
Button
Select this button to view the properties of a selected file or folder. A
window will open to present the size of the selected item, as well as
the dates it was created and last modified. This window will also
display the total memory and available memory space on your
device.
Rename Button
Use this button to assign a new name to a selected file or folder.
Edit Operations
Button
Use this button to access an Edit Operations menu. This menu offers
tools for copying, pasting, cutting and deleting selected files or
folders.
OK Button
Select the OK button to save all your work in the File Browser menu.
Selecting this button will automatically close the menu.
4-49
Create a New Folder in the File Browser
To add a new folder to the File Browser menu, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4. Select the File Browser button. The File Browser menu will open.
5. In the left viewport, choose where you want to create a new folder.
The new folder will be placed within the folder that is selected in
the left viewport of the File Browser menu.
6. Select the New Folder button. A system keyboard popup will
open.
7. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new folder.
new folder will be added in the specified location.
Share Exported Files with a Windows
Computer
If files that have been created or modified on your DV4/MT4 device
are exported to a folder in the File Browser menu, a USB cable
connection can be used to send any of these exported files to a
Windows computer. Once the exported file is loaded on the computer,
it can be used with the DynaVox Series 4 page editing software, sent
to another computer or shared with another DV4 or MT4 device.
4-50
DynaVox Systems LLC
The process of sending an exported file to a Windows computer
involves two stages. First you must follow the steps for exporting the
selected type of file to the File Browser menu:
• Export an Abbreviation Expansion to the User Files Folder on
page 4-13
• Export a Dictionary Entry to the User Files Folder on page 4-30
• Create a Package in the User Files Folder on page 4-79
• Export a Page, Popup or Template to the User Files Folder on
page 4-90
• Export a Symbol to the User Files Folder on page 4-117
• Export a Macro to the User Files Folder on page 4-226
• Export a Pronunciation Exception to the User Files Folder on
page 5-54
Picture, song, sound, and MP3 files are already stored in the User
Files folder and do not need to be exported to that location.
2 Note:
2 Note:
Before beginning these steps, make sure that the DV4 or MT4 is
properly connected to the computer with a USB cable. Plug the
square connector on the USB cable into the USB device port, and
the flat connector in the USB port on the computer.
If you have not already created a directory for storing DynaVox
Series 4 files on your computer, you may want to do so before
beginning the steps below. To do this, double-click on the Local
Disk (C:) drive. Select File in the title bar at the top of the window,
select New and then select Folder. A highlighted folder will be
added to this drive. Type a name (such as Series 4 Files) for the
new directory and then select the Enter key on your keyboard. This
series of steps will add a new directory folder to the main drive of
your Windows computer.
4-51
Once the selected item is available in the File Browser menu, you can
send it to a Windows computer by following the steps below:
1. On your computer, double-click on the My Computer icon on your
desktop. A My Computer window will open.
2. On your DV4 or MT4 device, select the pull-down menu button in
the title bar at the top of the touch screen.
4. Select Be USB Storage in the second pull-down menu.
5. If your device has one data storage card, you will be asked if you
want to enter USB storage mode. Select the Yes button.
If your device has two data storage cards, you will be asked to
select the one you want to share with the computer. Select the
Card 1 button if the file is on the main data storage card. Select the
Card 2 button if the file is on a second data storage card.
2 Note:
The DV4 or MT4 device will now be in USB storage mode and a
new Removable Disk icon will be added to the My Computer
window on the computer. Be sure to note the drive letter (E: or F:)
of this icon.
6. On your computer, double-click on the new Removable Disk icon
to see the contents of the selected storage card.
7. Open the folder that contains the type of file you want to send to
the computer:
4-52
Abbreviation
Expansions
If you are sending an abbreviation
expansion (.abs) file, double-click on the
User Files folder and then double-click on
the Exports folder.
Dictionary
Entries
If you are sending a dictionary entry (.lex)
file, double-click on the User Files folder
and then double-click on the Exports folder.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Macros
If you are sending a macro (.mac) file,
double-click on the User Files folder and
then double-click on the Exports folder.
MP3s
If you are sending an MP3 song (.mp3) file,
then double-click on the MP3 folder.
Packages
If you are sending a package, double-click
on the User Files folder and then doubleclick on the Exports folder.
Pages/Popups/
Templates
If you are sending a page (.epg), popup
(.epg) or template (.tpl) file, double-click on
the User Files folder and then double-click
on the Exports folder.
Pictures
If you are sending a picture file, double-click
on the Images folder.
Pronunciation
Exceptions
If you are sending a pronunciation exception
(.pe), double-click on the User Files folder
Songs
If you are sending a song file, double-click
on the User Files folder and then doubleclick on the Songs folder.
Sounds
If you are sending a sound file, double-click
on the User Files folder and then doubleclick on the Sounds folder.
Symbols
If you are sending a symbol file, double click
8. Select the name of the file you want to send to your computer.
9. Select Edit in the title bar at the top of the window. A small-pull
down window will open.
10. Select Copy in the pull-down menu.
4-53
11. Navigate through the window to find the directory where you want
to store the exported file. Double-click on the directory to open it.
2 Note:
If you added a Series 4 Files directory to the main drive of your
computer, select the Back button until you have returned to the
original My Computer window. Then double-click on Local Disk
(C:) and double-click on Series 4 Files.
12. Select Edit in the title bar at the top of the window. A small pulldown menu will open.
13. Select Paste in the pull-down menu. A copy of the exported file will
be added to the open directory.
14. After the file is copied to your computer, double-click on the Unplug
or Eject Hardware icon (looks like a green arrow above a piece of
paper) in the bottom right corner of your desktop.
15. Double-click on USB Mass Storage Device in the Unplug or Eject
Hardware window.
16. Select the OK button.
17. When the computer tells you that it is safe to remove the USB
Mass Storage Device, you may select the OK button.
18. On your DV4 or MT4 device, select the OK button to exit USB
storage mode.
19. You may now disconnect the USB cable connection.
The file you selected is now available on the Windows computer
and may be used with the Series 4 page editing software, sent to
another computer or (if the USB cable is used to connect the
computer to another Series 4 device) shared with another DV4 or
MT4 device. To share the exported file with another device, begin
by following the steps in Import a File from a Windows
Computer on page 4-58.
4-54
DynaVox Systems LLC
Share Exported Files with a Macintosh
Computer
If files that have been created or modified on your DV4/MT4 device
are exported to a folder in the File Browser menu, a USB cable
connection can be used to send any of these exported files to a
Macintosh computer. Once the exported file is loaded on the
MT4 device.
The process of sending an exported file to a Macintosh computer
involves two stages. First you must follow the steps for exporting the
selected type of file to the File Browser menu:
• Export an Abbreviation Expansion to the User Files Folder on
page 4-13
• Export a Dictionary Entry to the User Files Folder on page 4-30
• Create a Package in the User Files Folder on page 4-79
• Export a Page, Popup or Template to the User Files Folder on
page 4-90
• Export a Symbol to the User Files Folder on page 4-117
• Export a Macro to the User Files Folder on page 4-226
• Export a Pronunciation Exception to the User Files Folder on
page 5-54
Picture, song, sound, and MP3 files are already stored in the User
Files folder and do not need to be exported to that location.
2 Note:
properly connected to the computer with a USB cable.
4-55
2 Note:
beginning the steps below. To do this, double-click on the
Documents icon on your desktop. Select File in the title bar at the
top of the screen and select New Folder in the pull-down menu. A
highlighted folder will be added to the Documents directory. Type a
name (such as Series 4 Files) for the new directory and then select
the Enter key on your keyboard.
Once the selected item is available in the File Browser menu, you can
send it to a Macintosh computer by following the steps below:
2 Note:
The DV4 or MT4 device will now be in USB storage mode and the
DV4/MT4 storage card will appear on the desktop as an icon that is
either untitled or uses the name of the storage card in your device.
Be sure to note the name of this icon.
5. On the Macintosh computer, double-click on the icon that
represents the DV4/MT4 storage card.
4-56
DynaVox Systems LLC
6. Open the folder that contains the type of file you want to send to
the computer:
Abbreviation
Expansions
the Exports folder.
Dictionary
Entries
Macros
MP3s
Packages
Pages/Popups/T
emplates
Pictures
Pronunciation
Exceptions
Songs
Sounds
Symbols
4-57
7. Select the name of the file you want to send to your computer and
do not release the selection. Maintain the selection of the file and
drag it into the directory where it should be stored. To drag a file,
select it and hold down on the mouse button until it has been
moved to the right place. When the mouse button is released, a
copy of the exported file will be added.
2 Note:
If you added a Series 4 Files directory to the Documents folder on
your desktop, double-click the Documents icon to open the
directory before dragging the file.
8. After the file is copied to your computer, click on File in the title bar
at the top of the window. A small pull-down menu will expand.
9. Select Eject in the pull-down menu.
storage mode.
The file you selected is now available on the Macintosh computer
and may be sent to another computer or (if the USB cable is used
to connect the computer to another Series 4 device) shared with
another DV4 or MT4 device. To share the exported file with
another device, begin by following the steps in Import a File from
a Macintosh Computer on page 4-62.
Import a File from a Windows Computer
If files that were created or edited on a DynaVox Series 4 device,
such as pages, sounds, songs and macros, are sent to a Windows
computer, a USB cable connection can be used to send them to the
File Browser menu on a DV4 or MT4 device. This cable connection
can also be used to import MP3 and picture files. The USB
connection provides an efficient way to share files between a
4-58
DynaVox Systems LLC
DV4/MT4 device and a computer (especially one with Series 4 page
editing software), or between two Series 4 devices.
The process of importing a file from a Windows computer involves
two stages. First you must import the selected file to the File Browser
on the DV4/MT4 device. Once the selected item is available in the
File Browser menu, you can import it into the system menu that is
specific to the file type.
2 Note:
2 Note:
beginning the steps below. To do this, double-click on the Local
Disk (C:) drive. Select File in the title bar at the top of the window,
select New and then select Folder. A highlighted folder will be
added to this drive. Type a name (such as Series 4 Files) for the
new directory and then select the Enter key on your keyboard. This
series of steps will add a new directory folder to the main drive of
your Windows computer.
Follow these steps to import a file from a Windows computer:
1. On your computer, double-click on the My Computer icon on your
desktop. A My Computer window will open.
4-59
2 Note:
of this icon.
6. In the My Computer window, locate the file you want to send to the
DV4/MT4 device.
2 Note:
If you added a Series 4 Files directory to the main drive of your
computer, double-click on Local Disk (C:) and then double-click on
Series 4 Files to open the directory.
7. Select the name of the file you want to send to the DV4/MT4
device.
8. Select Edit in the title bar at the top of the window. A small-pull
down window will open.
10. Select the Back button at the top of the window until you have
returned to the main My Computer window.
11. Double-click on the new Removable Disk icon that represents the
DV4/MT4 storage card.
12. Open the folder to which the selected file should be imported:
Abbreviation
Expansions
4-60
the Exports folder.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Dictionary
Entries
Macros
MP3s
Packages
Pages/Popups/T
emplates
Pictures
Pronunciation
Exceptions
Songs
Sounds
Symbols
14. Select Paste in the pull-down menu. A copy of the exported file will
be added to the open directory.
4-61
15. After the file is copied to the DV4/MT4 data storage card, doubleclick on the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon (looks like a green
arrow above a piece of paper) in the bottom right corner of your
desktop.
Hardware window.
storage mode.
The file you selected is now available in the File Browser menu on
your Series 4 device. You should now continue by importing the file
into the system menu that is specific to the file type.
Import a File from a Macintosh Computer
If files that were created or edited on a DynaVox Series 4 device,
such as pages, sounds, songs and macros, are sent to a Macintosh
computer, a USB cable connection can be used to send them to the
File Browser menu on a DV4 or MT4 device. This cable connection
can also be used to import MP3 and picture files. The USB
connection provides an efficient way to share files between a
DV4/MT4 device and a computer, or between two Series 4 devices.
The process of importing a file from a Macintosh computer involves
two stages. First you must import the selected file to the File Browser
on the DV4/MT4 device. Once the selected item is available in the
4-62
DynaVox Systems LLC
File Browser menu, you can import it into the system menu that is
specific to the file type.
2 Note:
2 Note:
properly connected to the computer with a USB cable.
beginning the steps below. To do this, double-click on the
Documents icon on your desktop. Select File in the title bar at the
top of the screen and select New Folder in the pull-down menu. A
highlighted folder will be added to the Documents directory. Type a
name (such as Series 4 Files) for the new directory and then select
the Enter key on your keyboard.
Follow these steps to import a file from a Macintosh computer:
2 Note:
The DV4 or MT4 device will now be in USB storage mode and the
DV4/MT4 storage card will appear on the desktop as an icon that is
either untitled or uses the name of the storage card in your device.
Be sure to note the name of this icon.
4-63
5. On the Macintosh computer, double-click on the icon that
represents the DV4/MT4 storage card.
6. Open the folder into which the selected file should be imported:
4-64
Abbreviation
Expansions
the Exports folder.
Dictionary
Entries
Macros
MP3s
Packages
Pages/Popups/T
emplates
Pictures
Pronunciation
Exceptions
Songs
Sounds
DynaVox Systems LLC
Symbols
7. Locate the file you want to send to the DV4/MT4 device.
2 Note:
If you added a Series 4 Files directory to the Documents folder on
your desktop, double-click the Documents icon to open the
directory before dragging the file.
8. Select the name of the file you want to send to your computer and
do not release the selection. Maintain the selection of the file and
drag it into the open folder on the DV4/MT4 storage card. To drag
a file, select it and hold down on the mouse button until it has been
moved to the right place. When the mouse button is released, a
copy of the exported file will be added.
9. After the file is copied to the DV4/MT4 storage card, click on File
in the title bar at the top of the window. A small pull-down menu will
expand.
storage mode.
The file you selected is now available in the File Browser menu on
your Series 4 device. You should now continue by importing the file
into the system menu that is specific to the file type.
4-65
Copy a Picture File onto a USB Storage
Device or Secondary Data Card
When a picture is saved on the DV4/MT4 device, the picture should
be stored in the Images folder on the DV4/MT4 main data storage
card. Adding a copy of a picture file to a removable USB storage
device or a secondary data card will enable you to share the file with
other DV4/MT4 devices.
2 Note:
2 Note:
To copy a picture file to a USB device or second data card, follow the
steps below:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. In the left viewport, select the expansion box beside the Storage
Card folder.
6. Select the Images folder. A list of available picture files will fill the
right viewport.
4-66
DynaVox Systems LLC
7. In the right viewport, select the check box beside the name of the
picture you want to share.
2 Note:
Multiple pictures can be shared at one time. To do this, select the
check box beside the name of each picture that should be shared.
8. Select the Modify button. The Edit Operations menu will open.
9. Select the Copy button. The Edit Operations menu will close
automatically.
10. In the left viewport, select the folder (or the expansion box beside
the folder) to which the picture file should be added:
Card2.
11. Select the Modify button. The Edit Operations menu will open
again.
12. Select the Paste button. The Edit Operations menu will close and
an hourglass icon will appear while the picture is being copied to
the USB device or second data card.
13. Select the OK button to close the File Browser menu.
A copy of the selected picture file can now be found on your USB
device or second storage card. If you want use your card or
storage device to share the picture file with another DynaVox
Series 4 device, see the steps in Import a Picture File with a USB
Storage Device or Secondary Data Card on page 4-69.
4-67
Share a Picture File with a Windows
Computer
When an MP3 file is saved on the DV4/MT4 device, the file should be
stored in the Images folder on the DV4/MT4 main data storage card.
computer can be used to send a copy of a picture file from the
Images folder to the computer. Once the picture file is loaded on the
MT4 device.
If you have added a picture file to your DV4 or MT4 device, you can
easily send it to a Windows computer by following the steps in Share
Exported Files with a Windows Computer on page 4-50.
Share a Picture File with a Macintosh
Computer
When an MP3 file is saved on the DV4/MT4 device, the file should be
stored in the Images folder on the DV4/MT4 main data storage card.
computer can be used to send a copy of a picture file from the
Images folder to the computer. Once the picture file is loaded on the
DV4 or MT4 device.
If you have added a picture file to your DV4 or MT4 device, you can
easily send it to a Macintosh computer by following the steps in
Share Exported Files with a Macintosh Computer on page 4-55.
4-68
DynaVox Systems LLC
Import a Picture File with a USB Storage
If a picture file is loaded onto a USB storage device or a secondary
data card, this peripheral device can be used to import the picture file
to the File Browser menu on your DV4/MT4 device.
2 Note:
2 Note:
2 Note:
Before beginning these steps, make sure the picture file is scaled
with a maximum width of 800 pixels and a maximum height of 600
pixels. If the picture is larger than 800 x 600, an error will occur
during the import process.
touch screen.
menu will open.
the folder) that contains the picture file you want to import:
4-69
Card2.
picture file you want to import.
2 Note:
Multiple picture files can be imported at one time. To do this, select
the check box beside the name of each picture file that should be
imported.
automatically.
9. In the left viewport, select the expansion box beside the Storage
Card folder.
10. Select the Images folder.
an hourglass icon will appear while the picture file is being copied
to the Images folder.
The imported picture file is now available in the Images folder on
the DV4/MT4 device’s main data storage card. The sound file is
also accessible to be used as a symbol or as the background for a
page or popup.
4-70
DynaVox Systems LLC
Import a Picture File from a Windows
Computer
If a picture file has been loaded onto a Windows computer, a USB
connection between a Series 4 device and the computer can be used
to send a copy of the picture file from the computer to the Images
folder on the DV4/MT4 device. To do this, simply follow the steps in
Import a File from a Windows Computer on page 4-58.
Import a Picture File from a Macintosh
Computer
If a picture file has been loaded onto a Macintosh computer, a USB
to send a copy of the picture file from the computer to the Images
Import a File from a Macintosh Computer on page 4-62.
Find Pages Using the
Page Browser
Communication pages and popups (and templates for building new
pages and popups) are stored in the Page Browser menu. The tools
4-71
in this menu provide the individual who is programming the system
with ways to manage, edit and share these page files.
PAGE BROWSER MENU
The Page Browser menu offers the following tools:
Left Viewport
4-72
Page, popup and template files are stored
within folders (or directories) in the Page
Browser menu. The folders that exist in the
left viewport of the Page Browser menu
when you receive your device are for the
DynaVox Language Applications Page Sets.
Each folder represents one page set and
contains all of the pages, popups and/or
templates in that page set. You can add
your own folders to the individual page set
folders, or to the <toplevel> folder in the left
viewport.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Right Viewport
The right viewport displays a list of all the
pages, popups and/or templates that are
inside the folder that is selected in the left
viewport. If the selected folder contains subfolders, these will also be displayed in the
right viewport. Scroll bars on the sides of
the viewport can be used to look through all
Search Text Box
Use the Search text box to look for an item
by name. The Search feature is the most
efficient way to find an item in the Page
Browser viewports.
Select All Check
Box
The Select All check box enables you to
automatically select every item in the right
viewport.
New Folder
Button
Use the New Folder button to create a new
folder in the left viewport. The new folder
will be added to the folder that is selected in
the left viewport.
Go To Page
Button
Selecting the Go to Page button will close
the Page Browser menu (and any other
open menus) and open the page, popup or
template that is selected in the right
viewport.
Rename Button
Use the Rename button to change the name
of the item that is selected in the right
viewport.
Edit Operations
Button
Selecting the Edit Operations button will
open an Edit Operations menu with Delete,
Cut, Copy and Paste buttons. These
buttons enable you to delete or reorganize
pages, popups, templates and folders that
have been selected in the Page Browser
viewports.
4-73
Modify Pages
Button
Selecting this button will open a Modify
Pages button with tools for customizing the
pages, popups or templates that are
selected in the right viewport.
Sharing
Operations
Button
Selecting this button will open a Sharing
Operations menu with tools for importing
and exporting pages, popups and
templates.
Search by
Content Button
Use the Search by Content button to search
the Page Browser menu for pages and
popups that contain a specific vocabulary
item.
OK Button
Select this button to close the Page Browser
menu. Selecting this button will also save
any new changes to the menu.
Delete a Page
Follow these steps to permanently remove a selected page from the
Page Browser menu:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4. Select the Page Browser button. The Page Browser menu
(page 4-72) will open.
the page file you want to delete or you may search for the file by
name. If you want to scroll to the file, complete step 5. If you want
to use the Search feature, complete step 6.
4-74
DynaVox Systems LLC
5. To find a file in the viewports, select the name of the appropriate
folder in the left viewport. If the folder you want to see is part of a
larger folder, select the expansion box beside the larger folder.
You may need to use the scroll buttons to the right of the viewport
to look through all the available options.
a. Select the check box beside the page name in the right
viewport. Use the scroll buttons to the right of the viewport to
look through all the available options. Continue with step 7.
want to delete.
page name will be highlighted in the right viewport.
c. Select the check box beside the page name and then continue
with the next step.
7. Select the Edit Operations button. An Edit Operations menu will
open.
8. Select the Delete button. The Edit Operations menu will close
automatically.
9. Select the Yes button to confirm that you want to delete the page.
Be careful, as the page cannot be retrieved after it is deleted.
10. Select the OK button to close the Page Browser menu.
4-75
Copy a Page and Paste the Copy in a New
Location
Following these steps to add a copy of a page to another folder
without moving or deleting the original page.
touch screen.
menu will open.
the page you want to copy or you may search for the file by name.
want to copy.
4-76
DynaVox Systems LLC
with the next step.
open.
automatically.
9. In the left viewport, select the folder where you want to place the
copied page. If the folder you want is part of a larger folder, select
the expansion box beside the larger folder. You may need to use
the scroll buttons to the right of the viewport to look through all the
available options.
open again.
11. Select the Paste button. The Edit Operations menu will close
automatically and the page copy will be added to the selected
folder.
Cut a Page and Paste it in a New Location
Following these steps will permanently remove a page from one
location and place it in a new spot.
touch screen.
menu will open.
the page you want to cut or you may search for the file by name. If
4-77
you want to scroll to the file, complete step 5. If you want to use the
Search feature, complete step 6.
want to cut.
with the next step.
open.
8. Select the Cut button. The Edit Operations menu button will close
automatically.
9. In the left viewport, select the folder where you want to place the
page that was cut. If the folder you want is part of a larger folder,
select the expansion box beside the larger folder. You may need
to use the scroll buttons to the right of the viewport to look through
all the available options.
open again.
11. Select the Paste button. The Edit Operations menu will close
automatically and the page will be added to the selected folder.
4-78
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create a New Folder in the Page Browser
Menu
To add a new folder to the left viewport of the Page Browser menu,
follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. In the left viewport, select the folder to which you want to add a
new folder. If the new folder should be on the top level, select the
<toplevel> folder. If the new folder should be placed within an
existing folder, select the appropriate folder.
6. Select the New Folder button. A system keyboard popup will
open.
7. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new folder.
new folder will be added to the left viewport.
Create a Package in the User Files Folder
Packages are groups of selected communication pages, popups
and/or templates gathered into one single file to streamline the
process of page sharing. When multiple page, popup and/or template
files are grouped into a package, you can share the package without
having to select each of the individual files. It is especially easy to
4-79
share a page set if all the applicable pages are grouped into one
package.
Sending a package to a Windows or Macintosh computer is an
effective way to share communication pages. Once a package has
been transferred to a computer, it can be opened with the DynaVox
Series 4 page editing software (for Windows computers only), sent to
another computer or shared with another DV4 or MT4 device. Before
a package can be shared with a computer, though, it must be created
in the Exports folder that is inside the User Files folder on your
2 Note:
2 Note:
Before beginning these steps, be sure that each page, popup
and/or template that will be included in the package has been
added to the Exports folder inside the User Files folder on your
device’s main data storage card. If you have not yet exported the
selected pages/popups, follow the steps in Export a Page, Popup
or Template to the User Files Folder on page 4-90.
While this set of steps applies to pages, popups and templates,
only the term “pages” will be used throughout the steps. When
directed to select a page file, simply select the type of file (page,
popup or template) you want to use.
To create a package of communication pages, popups and/or
templates in the User Files folder, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4-80
DynaVox Systems LLC
5. Select the Sharing Operations button. The Sharing Operations
menu will open.
6. Select the Create Package button. An Enter Package Name menu
will open.
8. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new package.
Select Files for Package menu will open.
10. In the right viewport, select the check box beside each of the pages
that you want to include in the package.
11. Select the OK button to create the package and close the Select
Files for Package menu.
12. Select OK button to close the Page Browser menu.
The new package can now be found in the Exports folder within the
User Files folder. If you want to send the contents of the package
to a computer, see the following steps:
page 4-50
page 4-55
Create a Package with a USB Storage
Device or Secondary Storage Card
Packages are groups of selected pages, popups and/or templates
gathered into one single file to streamline the process of page
sharing. When multiple page, popup and/or template files are
grouped into a package, you can share the package without having to
4-81
select each of the individual files. It is especially easy to share a page
set if all the applicable pages are grouped into one package.
A removable USB storage device or secondary data card provides an
efficient means of sharing communication pages with other DV4 or
MT4 devices. The Page Browser menu can be used to create
packages of pages, popups and/or templates directly on the USB
device or storage card. The device or card can then be plugged into
another Series 4 device to share the package contents.
2 Note:
2 Note:
2 Note:
To create a package this way, follow the steps below:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4-82
DynaVox Systems LLC
menu will open.
6. Select the Create Package button. An Enter Package Name menu
will open.
Card2.
10. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new package.
Select Files for Package menu will open.
12. In the right viewport, select the check box beside each of the pages
that you want to include in the package.
13. Select the OK button to create the package and close the Select
Files for Package menu.
14. Select OK button to close the Page Browser menu.
The new package can now be found on your USB device or
secondary storage card. If you want to use your card or storage
device to share the contents of the package with another DynaVox
Series 4 device, follow the steps in Import a Package with a USB
4-83
Share a Package with a Windows Computer
computer can be used to send a package of page, popup and/or
template files to the computer. Once the package is loaded on the
computer, it can be opened with the DynaVox Series 4 page editing
MT4 device.
The process of sending a package to a Windows computer involves
two stages. First you must follow the steps in Create a Package in
the User Files Folder on page 4-79, and then you can continue with
Share Exported Files with a Windows Computer on page 4-50.
Share a Package with a Macintosh
Computer
computer can be used to send a package of page, popup and/or
template files to the computer. Once the package is loaded on the
DV4 or MT4 device.
The process of sending a package to a Macintosh computer involves
two stages. First you must follow the steps in Create a Package in
the User Files Folder on page 4-79, and then you can continue with
Import a Package from the User Files Folder
A USB cable connection can be used to add a package of
communication pages, popups and/or templates to your device. This
4-84
DynaVox Systems LLC
involves a two-step process, as the package cannot be transferred
directly from the computer to the Page Browser menu. The USB
cable connection with the computer is used to add the package to the
storage card.
2 Note:
The package must be available in the Exports folder before these
steps can be started. If you have not yet added the file to the
Exports folder, begin with the following steps:
The package is then imported to the Page Browser menu with the
following steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
The pages, popups and/or templates that make up the package
can be added to an existing page set or a new folder can be
created to keep them separate from your other communication
pages. If you want to add the package to an existing page set,
continue with step 5. If you would prefer to import the package into
a new folder, continue with step 6.
5. If the package contents should be added to an existing page set,
scroll through the left viewport and select the folder with the
appropriate page set name. If the page set folder you want to use
is located within another page set, you may first need to select the
4-85
expansion box beside the name of the larger page set folder.
Continue with step 7.
6. If you are creating a new folder for the package contents, scroll
through the left viewport and select the folder in which you want to
create a new folder. If the new folder should be on the top level,
select the <toplevel> folder. If the new folder should be placed
within an existing folder, select the appropriate folder.
a. Select the New Folder button. A system keyboard popup will
open.
b. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new folder.
new folder will be highlighted in the left viewport. Continue with
step 7.
menu will open.
SHARING OPERATIONS MENU
8. Select the Import Package button. A Select Package menu will
open.
9. In the right viewport, select the name of the package you want to
import.
10. Select the OK button to close the Select Package menu. An
hourglass icon will be displayed while the pages are being
imported. This process may take a moment.
4-86
DynaVox Systems LLC
11. Select the OK button when the package has been successfully
imported.
The communication pages, popups and/or templates that were
contained in the package are now available in the designated page
set folder in the Page Browser menu.
Import a Package with a USB Storage
Packages of communication pages, popups and/or templates can be
easily shared between DV4/MT4 users. If a package is loaded onto a
USB storage device or a secondary data card, this peripheral device
can be used to import the package directly to the Page Browser menu
on your DV4/MT4 device.
2 Note:
2 Note:
touch screen.
4-87
menu will open.
The pages, popups and/or templates that make up the package
can be added to an existing page set or a new folder can be
created to keep them separate from your other communication
pages. If you want to add the package contents to an existing page
set, continue with step 5. If you would prefer to import the package
contents into a new folder, continue with step 6.
5. If the package contents should be added to an existing page set,
scroll through the left viewport and select the folder with the
appropriate page set name. If the page set folder you want to use
is located within another page set, you may first need to select the
expansion box beside the name of the larger page set folder.
6. If you are creating a new folder for the package contents, scroll
open.
step 7.
7. Select the Sharing Operations button. A Sharing Operations
8. Select the Import Package button. A Select Package menu will
open.
4-88
DynaVox Systems LLC
Card2.
11. Select the name of the package in the right viewport. If necessary,
options.
12. Select the OK button to close the Select Package menu. An
hourglass icon will be displayed while the pages are being
imported. This process may take a moment.
13. Select the OK button when the pages have been successfully
loaded.
The communication pages, popups and/or templates that were
contained in the package are now available in the designated page
set folder in the Page Browser menu.
Import a Package from a Windows
Computer
computer can be used to send a package of communication pages,
popups and/or templates from the computer to the DV4 or MT4
device. The process of importing a package from a Windows
computer to a Series 4 device involves two stages. First you must
follow the steps in Import a File from a Windows Computer on
page 4-58. These steps will transfer the package from the computer
to the device. Then you can continue with Import a Package from
4-89
the User Files Folder on page 4-84. These steps will add the
contents of the package to the Page Browser menu.
Import a Package from a Macintosh
Computer
computer can be used to send a package of communication pages,
popups and/or templates from the computer to the DV4 or MT4
device. The process of importing a package from a Macintosh
follow the steps in Import a File from a Macintosh Computer on
page 4-62. These steps will transfer the package from the computer
to the device. Then you can continue with Import a Package from
the User Files Folder on page 4-84. These steps will add the
contents of the package to the Page Browser menu.
Export a Page, Popup or Template to the
User Files Folder
Sending a copy of a communication page, popup or template to a
Windows or Macintosh computer will enable you to share the file with
other DV4/MT4 devices. Before the page, popup, or template can be
sent to the computer, though, a copy of the file must be sent to the
storage card.
2 Note:
4-90
DynaVox Systems LLC
touch screen.
menu will open.
the page file you want to export or you may search for the file by
2 Note:
Multiple pages can be exported at one time. To do this, select the
check box beside the name of each page file that should be
exported.
5. To find a page in the viewports, scroll through the left viewport and
select the folder with the name of the page set where the page is
stored. If the page set folder you want to use is located within
another page set, you may first need to select the expansion box
beside the name of the larger page set folder. You may need to
use the scroll buttons to the right of the viewport to look through all
a. Select the check box beside the desired file in the right viewport.
Use the scroll buttons to the right of the viewport to look through
all the available options. Continue with step 7.
want to export.
4-91
file name will be highlighted in the right viewport.
c. Select the check box beside the file name and then continue
with the next step.
8. Select the Export Pages or Templates button. A Select a
Directory menu will open.
9. Select the Exports folder in the right viewport.
10. Select the OK button to close the Select a Directory menu.
11. Select the OK button when the device reports the number of pages
that were exported.
A copy of the selected page, popup or template can now be found
in the Exports folder within the User Files folder. Note that the
DynaVox Series 4 software automatically assigns an extension
(.epg) to the name of the exported page or popup file. Template
files are given a different extension (.tpl). If you want to send this
file to a computer, see the following steps:
page 4-50
page 4-55
Export a Page, Popup or Template to a USB
Storage Device or Secondary Data Card
Exporting a copy of a communication page, popup or template to a
removable USB storage device or a secondary data card will enable
4-92
DynaVox Systems LLC
you to share the file with other DV4/MT4 devices. Page, popup and
template files can be exported directly from the Page Browser menu
to the card or storage device.
2 Note:
2 Note:
2 Note:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4-93
2 Note:
exported.
select the folder with the name of the page set where the page is
want to export.
file name will be highlighted in the right viewport.
c. Select the check box beside the file name and then continue
with the next step.
8. Select the Export Pages or Templates button. A Select a
Directory menu will open.
4-94
DynaVox Systems LLC
Card2.
11. Select the OK button to close the Select a Directory menu.
12. Select the OK button when the device reports the number of pages
that were exported.
A copy of the selected page, popup or template file can now be
found on your USB device or second storage card. Note that the
DynaVox Series 4 software automatically assigns an extension
(.epg) to the name of the exported page or popup file. Template
files are given a different extension (.tpl). If you want use your card
or storage device to share the page, popup or template with
another DynaVox Series 4 device, see the steps in Import a Page,
Popup or Template with a USB Storage Device on page 4-99.
Share a Page, Popup or Template with a
Windows Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a communication page,
popup or template to the computer. Once the page, popup or
template is loaded on the computer, it can be opened with the
DynaVox Series 4 page editing software, sent to another computer or
shared with another DV4 or MT4 device.
The process of sending a communication page (.epg), popup (.epg)
or template (.tpl) file to a Windows computer involves two stages.
First you must follow the steps in Export a Page, Popup or
Template to the User Files Folder on page 4-90, and then you can
4-95
continue with Import a File from a Windows Computer on
page 4-58.
Share a Page, Popup or Template with a
Macintosh Computer
popup or template to the computer. Once the page, popup or
template is loaded on the computer, it can be sent to another
computer or shared with another DV4 or MT4 device.
The process of sending a communication page (.epg), popup (.epg)
or template (.tpl) file to a Macintosh computer involves two stages.
First you must follow the steps in Export a Page, Popup or
Template to the User Files Folder on page 4-90, and then you can
continue with Share Exported Files with a Macintosh Computer on
page 4-55.
Import a Page, Popup or Template from the
User Files Folder
A USB cable connection can be used to send a communication page,
popup or template (one shared from another DV4/MT4 device, for
example) to your device. This involves a two-step process, as the
page, popup or template file cannot be transferred directly from the
computer to the Page Browser menu. The USB cable connection with
4-96
DynaVox Systems LLC
the computer is used to add the file to the Exports folder inside the
User Files folder on your device’s main data storage card.
2 Note:
The page (.epg), popup (.epg) or template (.tpl) file must be
available in the Exports folder before these steps can be started. If
you have not yet added the file to the Exports folder, begin with the
following steps:
2 Note:
The page, popup or template is then imported to the Page Browser
menu with the following steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
The imported page can be added to an existing page set or a folder
can be created to keep the new page separate from your other
communication pages. If you want to add the page to an existing
page set, continue with step 5. If you would prefer to import the
page into a new folder, continue with step 6.
5. If the page should be added to an existing page set, scroll through
the left viewport and select the folder with the appropriate page set
4-97
name. If the page set folder you want to use is located within
beside the name of the larger page set folder. Continue with step
7.
6. If you are creating a new folder for the imported page, scroll
open.
step 7.
8. Select the Import Pages or Templates button. A Select Page
page file you want to import.
2 Note:
Multiple pages can be imported together. To do this, select the
check box beside the name of every page that should be imported.
10. Select the OK button to close the Select Page File(s) menu.
imported.
4-98
DynaVox Systems LLC
The imported page, popup or template is now available in the
designated page set folder in the Page Browser menu.
Import a Page, Popup or Template with a
USB Storage Device
Communication pages, popups and templates can be shared
between DV4/MT4 users. If a page, popup or template file is loaded
onto a USB storage device or a secondary data card, this peripheral
device can be used to import the file directly to the Page Browser
menu on your DV4/MT4 device.
2 Note:
2 Note:
2 Note:
touch screen.
4-99
menu will open.
An imported page can be added to an existing page set or a new
folder. If you want to add the page to an existing page set, continue
with step 5. If you would prefer to import the page into a new folder,
5. If the page should be added to an existing page set, scroll through
the left viewport and select the folder with the appropriate page set
name. If the page set folder you want to use is located within
beside the name of the larger page set folder. Continue with step
7.
6. If you are creating a new folder for the imported page, scroll
open.
new folder will be added to the left viewport. Continue with step
7.
8. Select the Import Pages or Templates button. A Select Page
4-100
DynaVox Systems LLC
Card2.
page file you want to import.
2 Note:
Multiple pages can be imported together. To do this, select the
check box beside the name of every page that should be imported.
12. Select the OK button to close the Select Page File(s) menu.
imported.
The imported page, popup or template is now available in the
designated page set folder in the Page Browser menu.
Import a Page, Popup or Template from a
Windows Computer
popup or template from the computer to the DV4 or MT4 device. The
process of importing a communication page (.epg), popup (.epg) or
template (.tpl) file from a Windows computer to a Series 4 device
from a Windows Computer on page 4-58. These steps will transfer
Import a Page, Popup or Template from the User Files Folder on
4-101
page 4-96. These steps will add the page, popup or template to the
Page Browser menu.
Import a Page, Popup or Template from a
Macintosh Computer
popup or template from the computer to the DV4 or MT4 device. The
process of importing a communication page (.epg), popup (.epg) or
template (.tpl) file from a Macintosh computer to a Series 4 device
from a Macintosh Computer on page 4-62. These steps will transfer
Import a Page, Popup or Template from the User Files Folder on
page 4-96. These steps will add the page, popup or template to the
Page Browser menu.
Create and Modify
Symbols and Symbol
Sets
4-102
For some users of augmentative communication symbols, using
symbols to represent words, names, phrases, sentences and other
messages provides a communication environment in which
vocabulary choices can be made more effectively and independently.
Symbols provide an opportunity for people who are not literate or who
are still developing literacy skills to have an effective representation
of words and thoughts for speech or written communication.
DynaVox Systems LLC
The DynaVox Series 4 software features two different versions of
DynaSyms, the visual language system developed by Faith Carlson,
M.A., CCC-SLP:
DynaSyms
The DynaSyms symbol set features thousands of new symbols that
were developed exclusively for DynaVox Series 4 software. These
symbols feature more elaborate drawings than the classic
DynaSyms, and they may be more appealing to people with fine
visual acuity.
DynaSyms
Classic
These symbols feature simple line drawings and may be easier to
read for individuals with limited visual acuity. The DynaSyms Classic
symbols may also be more familiar for individuals who have used
DynaVox 3100 products.
The third symbol set that is included in the DynaVox Series 4
software is the system symbols set. System symbols are used to
illustrate the buttons in menus, and are limited in number and kind.
All of the symbols within these three symbol sets can be managed
and customized within the Symbol Browser menu.
4-103
SYMBOL BROWSER MENU
This menu offers the following features:
Left Viewport
4-104
To make it easy to find symbols, each symbol is assigned to a
concept (or category). These concepts are presented in the left
viewport as an expanding tree of folder-shaped icons. The top level
of this tree is the Top Concept folder, which holds all the concepts
and symbols. The next level of the tree is made of main concept
folders. These folders hold all the symbols for a very broad category.
They also contain a number of smaller concepts (each represented
by a large, gray button), which contain symbols that are related to a
smaller theme within the overall category.
An expansion box will be displayed to the left of any folder that
contains a smaller sub-folder. The expansion box contains a plus sign
(+) or a minus sign (-). A plus sign indicates that the folder is closed
and can be expanded to show the folders that it contains. When an
expansion box with a plus sign is selected, the sub-folders inside the
selected folder are displayed below the folder in the viewport and the
symbol in the expansion box will change to a minus sign. If the
expansion box with the minus sign is selected, the folder will close
again.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Right Viewport
The right viewport displays all of the symbols that are assigned to the
concept that is selected in the left viewport.
Search Text Box
Select this text box to find an individual concept by name. The Search
feature is the most efficient method for finding an item in the Symbol
Browser menu.
Add Button
Use this button if you want to import a symbol into one of the
available symbol sets, or if you want to create a symbol from an
imported picture file.
Edit Button
Selecting this button will open the Symbol Editor menu, which offers
tools for customizing the symbol that is selected in the left viewport.
Sets Button
Selecting this button will open the Symbol Set Browser menu, which
offers tools for creating new symbol sets and editing the available
symbol sets.
Copy Button
Use this button to make a copy of the selected symbol and then add
the copy to a different symbol set.
Delete Button
Use this button to permanently remove a selected symbol from the
Symbol Browser menu.
OK Button
When the OK button is selected, the Series 4 software will save any
changes to the Symbol Browser menu and then close the menu.
Create a New Symbol Set
If you create unique symbols by using imported pictures or by
customizing the existing symbols, you may choose to store them in a
separate symbol set.
To add a new symbol set to the Symbol Browser menu, follow these
steps:
touch screen.
4-105
menu will open.
4. Select the Symbol Browser button. The Symbol Browser menu
5. Select the Sets button. The Symbol Set Browser will open.
6. Select the New button. A system keyboard popup will open.
7. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new symbol set.
new symbol set will be added to the viewport in the Symbol Set
Browser menu.
9. Select the OK button to close the Symbol Set Browser menu.
10. Select the OK button to close the Symbol Browser menu.
Add a Copy of a Symbol to a New Symbol
Set
The Symbol Preferences pull-down menu in the Interface Features
menu enables individuals who use DV4/MT4 devices to specify that
their devices should present symbols from only one selected symbol
set. If you decide that you want your device to present symbols from
only one symbol set, but you would still like to use a few selected
symbols from another set, you can copy those symbols and add them
to the symbol set you are using.
To copy a symbol and add it to a new symbol set, follow these steps:
touch screen.
4-106
DynaVox Systems LLC
menu will open.
5. Select the Sets button. The Symbol Set Browser menu will open.
6. Make sure the check box is selected beside the symbol set that
features the symbol you want to copy.
You can use the scroll buttons beside the viewports in this menu
to look for the symbol you want to copy, or you can search for the
symbol by name. If you want to use the scroll buttons, continue
with step 8. If you want to use the Search feature, proceed to step
9.
8. To find the symbol by scrolling through the viewports, select the
expansion box beside the Top Concept folder in the left viewport.
a. Select the expansion box beside the category folder that
contains the symbol you are looking for. The category will
expand to display the names of several sub-categories. You
may need to use the up and down scroll buttons to look through
all the available folders in the left viewport.
b. Select the name of the sub-category that includes the symbol
you want to copy. You may need to use the up and down scroll
buttons to look through all the available categories in the left
viewport.
c. In the right viewport, select the symbol you want to copy. You
all the symbols. Continue with step 10.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the name of the symbol you
are looking for.
4-107
b. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup. Any
displayed in the right viewport of the Select a Symbol menu.
c. Select the appropriate symbol in the right viewport. Continue
with step 10.
10. Select the Copy button. A Select a Symbol Set menu will open.
11. Select the symbol set to which you want to add the copy of the
symbol.
12. Select the OK button to close the Select a Symbol Set menu. The
copy of the symbol will be added to the selected symbol set.
Delete a Symbol
Follow these steps to permanently delete a selected symbol from the
Symbol Browser menu:
touch screen.
menu will open.
features the symbol you want to delete.
4-108
DynaVox Systems LLC
to look for the symbol you want to delete, or you can search for the
9.
you want to delete. You may need to use the up and down scroll
viewport.
c. In the right viewport, select the symbol you want to delete. You
are looking for.
with step 10.
symbol. Be careful, as you will not be able to retrieve the symbol
after it is deleted.
4-109
Customize a Symbol
You can customize a symbol’s appearance and signification in
several ways. You can make simple changes to the symbol’s
appearance by coloring areas of the symbol. You can change the
words and meaning related to the symbol by assigning or changing
the symbol’s part of speech, associated labels, and associated
concepts.
To customize a symbol, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
features the symbol you want to customize.
to look for the symbol you want to customize, or you can search for
the symbol by name. If you want to use the scroll buttons, continue
9.
4-110
DynaVox Systems LLC
you want to customize. You may need to use the up and down
scroll buttons to look through all the available categories in the
left viewport.
c. In the right viewport, select the symbol you want to customize.
You may need to use the up and down scroll buttons to look
through all the symbols. Continue with step 10.
are looking for.
with step 10.
4-111
10. Select the Edit button. The Symbol Editor menu will open.
SYMBOL EDITOR MENU
11. If you want to change the color of the symbol, select the symbol in
the Bitmaps viewport and then complete the rest of this step. If you
do not want to change the color of the symbol, continue with step
12.
a. Select the Fill button. A new window with a color palette will
open.
b. Select a color button.
2 Note:
4-112
If you want to use a color that is not displayed in the available
palette, select the Pick Another Color button to open the Color
Selector menu.
DynaVox Systems LLC
c. Select an area of the symbol. The selected area will fill with the
color that was selected in the previous step.
2 Note:
2 Note:
To make it easier to select small areas of a symbol, select the
Zoom In button until the symbol has reached an accessible size.
Transparent areas always appear to be purple in this window.
d. Repeat steps 11a through 11d until the symbol contains all the
colors you want.
e. Select the Save button to save the new color choices and return
to the Symbol Editor menu. Then continue with step 12.
12. If you want to associate the symbol with a specific part of speech
(or change the part of speech that is currently assigned) select the
Part of Speech pull-down menu and then select the most
appropriate option. If you do not want to customize the symbol’s
part of speech, continue with step 13.
13. If you want to add a new label to the symbol, select the New button
in the Labels group box and then complete the rest of this step. If
you do not want to add a new label, continue with step 14.
a. Use the open system keyboard popup to enter the new label.
b. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard. The new
label will be listed in the Labels viewport. Continue with step 14.
14. If you want to delete a label that is assigned to the symbol, select
the label in the Labels viewport and then complete the rest of this
step. If you do not want to delete a label, continue with step 15.
a. Select the Delete button.
b. Select the OK button to confirm that you want to delete the
label. Continue with step 15.
4-113
15. If you want to add a new concept to the symbol, select the New
button in the Concepts group box and then complete the rest of this
step. If you do not want to add a new concept, continue with step
16.
You can use the scroll buttons beside the viewport in this menu to
look for the appropriate concept, or you can search for the concept
by name. If you want to use the scroll buttons, continue with step
15a. If you want to use the Search feature, proceed to step 15b.
a. To find a concept by looking through the viewport, select the
expansion box beside the Top Concept folder. The folder will
expand to display all the top-level concepts. Select the check
box beside the name of a top-level concept (you may need to
use the scroll buttons to see all the available items) or select the
expansion box beside a top-level concept to access check
boxes for smaller concepts. Select the check box beside the
name of each concept you want to assign to the symbol and
then continue with step 15c.
b. To use the Search feature, select the Search text box. A system
keyboard popup will open. Use the system keyboard to select
the entire name of the concept you are looking for, then select
the OK button to close the system keyboard popup. The
concept you searched for will be highlighted in the Select
Concepts viewport. Continue with step 15c.
c. Select the check box beside the highlighted concept name.
d. Select the OK button to close the Select Concepts menu. The
new concept will be added to the Concepts viewport. Continue
with step 16.
16. If you want to delete a concept that is assigned to the symbol,
select the concept in the Concepts viewport and then complete the
rest of this step. If you do not want to delete a concept, continue
with step 17.
a. Select the Delete button.
b. Select the OK button to confirm that you want to delete the
concept. Continue with step 17.
4-114
DynaVox Systems LLC
17. Select the OK button to close the Symbol Editor menu.
Save a Picture as a Symbol
With the DynaVox Series 4 software, you can use pictures to make
your own custom symbols.
2 Note:
Before beginning these steps, make sure the picture file you want
to use is accessible to the Series 4 software. If the picture is stored
on a removable USB storage device, be sure that the device is
plugged into the dual USB host port on the side of your DV4/MT4. If
the picture is stored on a secondary data storage card, be sure that
the card is correctly installed in your device (see Installing a
Second Data Storage Card on page 6-8). If the picture is normally
stored on a computer, begin by using the following steps:
• Import a Picture File from a Windows Computer on
page 4-71
• Import a Package from a Macintosh Computer on page 4-90
To create a symbol from a picture, follow the steps below:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the Add button. A Select a Symbol Set menu will open.
4-115
6. Select the symbol set that should be used to store the new symbol.
2 Note:
If you want to create a separate symbol set for symbols that you
have customized, follow the steps in Create a New Symbol Set on
page 4-105.
7. Select the OK button to close the Select a Symbol Set menu. A
Symbol Editor menu (page 4-112) will open.
8. Select the Import button. A Select File menu will open.
9. If the picture is stored in the Images folder, select the name of the
picture file in the right viewport and then continue with step 10.
If the picture is stored on a USB stored device or a secondary data
card, select the Show All Directories check box and then
complete this step.
a. In the left viewport, select the folder (or the expansion box
beside the folder) where the picture file is stored:
Card2.
b. In the right viewport, select the name of the picture you want to
use.
10. Select the OK button to close the Select File menu.
11. The picture will be added to the Bitmaps viewport in the Symbol
Editor menu.
12. At least one label must be added to the new symbol. To add a
label, select the New button in the Labels group box (a system
keyboard popup will open) and then complete the rest of this step.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the new label.
new label will be listed in the Labels viewport.
c. Repeat step 12 to add another label or continue with step 13.
4-116
DynaVox Systems LLC
13. If you want to add a concept to the new symbol, complete steps 9
through 11 under adding a concept to a symbol. If you do not want
to add a concept, continue with step 14.
14. If you want to assign a part of speech to the new symbol, select the
Part of Speech pull-down menu and then select one of the
available options. If you do not want to assign a part of speech,
Your new picture symbol is now saved as part of the designated
symbol set. Once a picture has been saved as a symbol, the
picture no longer needs to be stored in the Images folder. If you
used a picture from the Images folder to complete these steps, you
may want to store the picture on a USB storage device or a
computer before deleting the picture from the Images folder in the
File Browser menu. Deleting unnecessary pictures from the
Images folder will conserve device memory space.
Export a Symbol to the User Files Folder
Sending a copy of a symbol to a Windows or Macintosh computer will
enable you to share the symbol with other DV4/MT4 devices. Before
the symbol can be sent to the computer, though, a copy of the
selected symbol must be sent to the Images folder inside the User
Files folder on your device’s main data storage card.
To export a symbol to this folder, follow the steps below:
touch screen.
4-117
menu will open.
features the symbol you want to export.
to look for the symbol you want to export, or you can search for the
9.
you want to export. You may need to use the up and down scroll
viewport.
c. In the right viewport, select the symbol you want to export. You
are looking for.
4-118
DynaVox Systems LLC
with step 10.
10. Select the Edit button. The Symbol Editor menu (page 4-112) will
open.
11. Select the symbol in the Bitmaps viewport.
14. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the symbol.
Enter File Name menu will close automatically.
A copy of the selected symbol file can now be found in the Images
folder within the User Files folder. If you want to send this file to a
computer, see the following steps:
• Share Exported Files with a Windows Computer on page 4-50
• Share Exported Files with a Macintosh Computer on page 4-55
Export a Symbol to a USB Storage Device or
Secondary Storage Card
Exporting a copy of a symbol file to a removable USB storage device
or a secondary data card will enable you to share the symbol with
4-119
other DV4/MT4 devices. Symbol files can be exported directly from
the Symbol Browser menu to the card or storage device.
2 Note:
2 Note:
To export a copy of a symbol file, follow the steps below:
touch screen.
menu will open.
features the symbol you want to export.
to look for the symbol you want to export, or you can search for the
9.
4-120
DynaVox Systems LLC
you want to export. You may need to use the up and down scroll
viewport.
c. In the right viewport, select the symbol you want to export. You
are looking for.
with step 10.
10. Select the Edit button. The Symbol Editor menu (page 4-112) will
open.
11. Select the symbol in the Bitmaps viewport.
4-121
Card2.
16. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the symbol.
Enter File Name menu will close automatically.
A copy of the selected symbol file can now be found on your USB
device or second storage card. If you want use your card or storage
device to share the symbol with another DynaVox Series 4 device,
see the steps in Import a Symbol with a USB Storage Device or
Second Data Card on page 4-125.
Share a Symbol with a Windows Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a symbol to the computer.
Once the symbol is loaded on the computer, it can be used with the
The process of sending a symbol file to a Windows computer involves
two stages. First you must follow the steps in Export a Symbol to
the User Files Folder on page 4-117 folder, and then you can
continue with Share Exported Files with a Windows Computer on
page 4-50.
4-122
DynaVox Systems LLC
Share a Symbol with a Macintosh Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a symbol to the computer.
Once the symbol is loaded on the computer, it can be sent to another
computer or shared with another DV4 or MT4 device.
The process of sending a symbol file to a Macintosh computer
involves two stages. First you must follow the steps in Export a
Symbol to the User Files Folder on page 4-117, and then you can
page 4-55.
Import a Symbol from the User Files Folder
A USB cable connection can be used to send a new symbol (one
shared from another DV4/MT4 device, for example) to your device.
This involves a two-step process, as the symbol file cannot be
transferred directly from the computer to the Symbol Browser menu.
The USB cable connection with the computer is used to add the
symbol file to the Images folder inside the User Files folder on your
2 Note:
The symbol file must be available in the Images folder before these
steps can be started. If you have not yet added the symbol file to
the Images folder, begin with the following steps:
4-123
To import a symbol from the User Files folder to the Symbol Browser
menu, use the following steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the Add button. The Select a Symbol Set menu will open.
6. Select the name of the symbol set to which you want to add the
imported symbol.
8. Select the Import button. A Select File menu will open and any
available symbols will be displayed in the right viewport.
9. In the right viewport, select the name of the symbol you want to
import.
10. Select the OK button to close the Select File button. The imported
symbol will be displayed in the Bitmaps viewport.
11. Since you must add a label for the new symbol, select the New
button in the Labels group box. A system keyboard popup will
open.
12. Use the system keyboard to enter a label for the symbol.
label will be displayed in the Labels viewport.
2 Note:
4-124
If you want to customize the imported symbol in any way, follow the
steps in Customize a Symbol on page 4-110.
DynaVox Systems LLC
The new symbol is now available in the Symbol Browser menu.
Import a Symbol with a USB Storage Device
or Second Data Card
Symbols can be shared between DV4/MT4 users. If a symbol file is
loaded onto a USB storage device or a secondary data card, this
peripheral device can be used to import the symbol directly to the
Symbol Browser menu on your DV4/MT4 device.
2 Note:
2 Note:
To import a symbol from a USB storage device or a secondary data
card, follow the steps below:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4-125
5. Select the Add button. The Select a Symbol Set menu will open.
6. Select the name of the symbol set to which you want to add the
imported symbol.
8. Select the Import button. A Select File menu will open and any
available symbols will be displayed in the right viewport.
Card2.
Any available symbol files will be displayed in the right viewport.
11. In the right viewport, select the name of the symbol you want to
import.
12. Select the OK button to close the Select File button. The imported
symbol will be displayed in the Bitmaps viewport.
13. Since you must add a label for the new symbol, select the New
button in the Labels group box. A system keyboard popup will
open.
14. Use the system keyboard to enter a label for the symbol.
label will be displayed in the Labels viewport.
2 Note:
4-126
If you want to customize the imported symbol in any way, follow the
steps in Customize a Symbol on page 4-110.
DynaVox Systems LLC
The new symbol is now available in the Symbol Browser menu.
Import a Symbol from a Windows Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a symbol from the computer
to the DV4 or MT4 device. The process of importing a symbol file
from a Windows computer to a Series 4 device involves two stages.
First you must follow the steps in Import a File from a Windows
Computer on page 4-58. These steps will transfer the file from the
computer to the device. Then you can continue with Import a
Symbol from the User Files Folder on page 4-123. These steps will
add the symbol to the Symbol Browser menu.
Import a Symbol from a Macintosh
Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a symbol from the computer
to the DV4 or MT4 device. The process of importing a symbol file
from a Macintosh computer to a Series 4 device involves two stages.
First you must follow the steps in Import a File from a Macintosh
computer to the device. Then you can continue with Import a
Symbol from the User Files Folder on page 4-123. These steps will
add the symbol to the Symbol Browser menu.
4-127
Record Sounds and Songs
RECORD SOUNDS AND SONGS
Among the most unique features of the DV4 and MT4 devices are
tools for composing and singing songs, and the ability to record and
play speech. This section explains both of these features and offers
step-by-step instructions for making use of them.
Create and Modify
Songs
The Song Editor menu can be used to compose original songs.
Individuals may opt to use either a palette of note buttons or a group
of buttons that resembles a piano keyboard. Once a song is created,
it can be sung in the Song Editor menu or added as part of a behavior
to a button on a communication page or popup. When a button with a
Sing behavior is selected, the chosen song is automatically sung
without requiring access to the Song Editor menu.
SONG EDITOR MENU
4-128
DynaVox Systems LLC
The DynaVox Series 4 software provides tools for composing sheet
music and lyrics to create songs that can be sung by the DV4 or MT4
device. These tools are available in the Song Editor menu:
Viewport
The Song Editor menu includes a special viewport that features a
musical staff for notes and lyrics. Songs are composed and displayed
on this staff. A scroll bar on the right side of the viewport can be used
to see all the lines of a song that is too long to fit into the viewport.
Note Palette Tab
Pane
Use the buttons on the Note Palette tab pane to add notes to the staff
in the viewport. Each time you add a note to the open song, you will
be prompted to add a lyric.
Piano Keyboard
Tab Pane
The Piano Keyboard tab pane presents buttons that are designed to
look like a piano keyboard. Like the buttons on the Note Palette tab
pane, these keyboard buttons can be used to add notes to the staff in
the viewport. Each time you add a note to the open song, you will be
prompted to add a lyric.
Selection Tab
Pane
The buttons on the Selection tab pane can be used to manage the
song that is currently on display in the viewport. Use these buttons to
highlight, play, delete and rearrange all or parts of the selected song.
File Options Tab
Pane
The buttons on the File Options tab pane can be used to manage
song files. Use these buttons to load a song file to the Song Editor
viewport, sing a selected song, save a song file or clear the viewport
of notes and lyrics. This tab pane also includes buttons for selecting a
singing voice and changing the title of the selected song. A Tempo
pull-down menu on this tab pane can be used to set the pace at which
the song is sung by the device.
Next Note Button
Use this button to move the highlight one note to the right in the
viewport.
Previous Note
Button
Use this button to move the highlight one note to the left in the
viewport.
Beginning of
Song Button
Use this button to move the highlight to the first note in the viewport.
End of Song
Button
Use this button to move the highlight to the last note in the viewport.
Sharp Button
The Sharp button places a # symbol next to the selected note. A
sharp raises the note by half a step.
4-129
Flat Button
The Flat button places a b symbol next to the selected note. A flat
lowers the note by half a step.
Natural Button
The Natural button removes a dot, flat (b) or sharp (#) from the
current note.
Dot It! Button
The Dot It! button places a dot next to the selected note. A dot adds
emphasis to the note when it is sung.
Raise Pitch
Button
Use the Raise Pitch button to move the selected note up one half line
on the staff.
Lower Pitch
Button
Use the Lower Pitch button to move the selected note down one half
line on the staff.
Edit Lyric Button
Use the Edit Lyric button to make changes to the lyric that is
associated with the selected note.
Delete Note
Button
Use the Delete Note button to permanently remove the selected note
from the viewport.
OK Button
Selecting the OK button will save all the changes to the Song Editor
menu and then close the menu.
Read the step-by-step instructions in this section for information on
creating, editing and playing songs on your DV4 or MT4 device.
Use the Note Palette to Create a Song
When you use the buttons on the Note Palette tab pane to compose a
song, each note must be entered and then adjusted for the correct
timing and pitch.
To use the Note Palette buttons to compose a new song, follow these
steps:
touch screen.
4-130
DynaVox Systems LLC
menu will open.
4. Select the Song Editor button. The Song Editor menu
5. Select a note or rest button in the Note Palette tab pane. A system
6. Use the system keyboard to enter a lyric for the note. The lyric may
be a complete word or a single syllable, depending on the song.
new note and lyric will be displayed on the staff in the viewport.
8. Select buttons on the right side of the Song Editor menu to adjust
the note:
Sharp
Select the Sharp button to raise the note by
half a step. A # symbol will be placed next to
the note.
Flat
Select the Flat button to lower the note by
half a step. A b symbol will be placed next to
the note.
Natural
Select the Natural button to remove a sharp
or flat from the note.
Dot It!
Select the Dot It! button to add emphasis on
the note. A dot will be placed next to the
note.
Raise Pitch
Select the Raise Pitch button to move the
selected note up one half line on the staff.
Lower Pitch
Select the Lower Pitch button to move the
selected note down one half line on the
staff.
9. If you want to add more notes and lyrics to the song, repeat steps
5 through 8. If the song is complete, select the File Options tab
control. The buttons on the File Options tab pane will be displayed.
4-131
10. If you want to adjust the speed at which the device will sing the
song, select the Tempo pull-down menu and then select one of the
three available options:
Lento
The song will be sung slowly.
Moderato
The song will be sung at a medium speed.
Allegro
The song will be sung quickly.
11. If you want to play the new song, select the Sing It! button. Note
that the Sing It! button becomes a Stop button while the device is
singing. Selecting the Stop button will end the singing. When the
song is finished, the Stop button will become a Sing It! button
again.
12. To save the new song, select the Save Song button. A system
13. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new song.
new name will be displayed at the top of the viewport in the Song
Editor menu.
15. Select the OK button to close the Song Editor menu.
4-132
DynaVox Systems LLC
Use the Piano Keyboard to Create a Song
When you use the buttons on the Piano Keyboard tab pane to
compose a song, notes are added to the scale according to the piano
key you selected and the length of time the selection is maintained.
PIANO KEYBOARD
To use the Piano Keyboard buttons to compose a new song, follow
these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4. Select the Song Editor button. The Song Editor menu will open.
5. Select the Piano Keyboard tab control.
4-133
6. Select a piano key button on the Piano Keyboard tab pane. You
can select natural notes (white keys), as well as sharp and flat
notes (black keys). The note’s value will depend upon the length of
time you maintain the selection of the key. The longer you maintain
the selection, the longer the note will be. When the piano key
selection is released, a system keyboard popup will open.
7. Use the system keyboard to enter a lyric for the note. The lyric may
be a complete word or a single syllable, depending on the song.
new note and lyric will be displayed on the staff in the viewport.
9. If you want to make further adjustments to the new note, select
buttons on the right side of the Song Editor menu:
Sharp
Select the Sharp button to raise the note by
half a step. A # symbol will be placed next to
the note.
Flat
Select the Flat button to lower the note by
half a step. A b symbol will be placed next to
the note.
Natural
Select the Natural button to remove a sharp
or flat from the note.
Dot It!
Select the Dot It! button to add emphasis on
the note. A dot will be placed next to the
note.
Raise Pitch
Select the Raise Pitch button to move the
selected note up one half line on the staff.
Lower Pitch
Select the Lower Pitch button to move the
selected note down one half line on the
staff.
10. If you want to add more notes and lyrics to the song, repeat steps
6 through 9. If the song is complete, select the File Options tab
control. The buttons on the File Options tab pane will be displayed.
4-134
DynaVox Systems LLC
11. If you want to adjust the speed at which the device will sing the
song, select the Tempo pull-down menu and then select one of the
three available options:
Lento
The song will be sung slowly.
Moderato
The song will be sung at a medium speed.
Allegro
The song will be sung quickly.
12. If you want to play the new song, select the Sing It! button. Note
that the Sing It! button becomes a Stop button while the device is
singing. Selecting the Stop button will end the singing. When the
song is finished, the Stop button will become a Sing It! button
again.
13. To save the new song, select the Save Song button. A system
14. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new song.
new name will be displayed at the top of the viewport in the Song
Editor menu.
Sing a Song in the Song Editor Menu
Follow these steps to open a song in the Song Editor menu and then
sing it:
touch screen.
4-135
menu will open.
5. Select the File Options tab control.
6. Select the Load Song File button on the File Options tab pane. A
Load Song File menu will open.
7. Select the name of the song you want to sing. If necessary, use the
scroll buttons beside the viewport to help you find the song.
8. Select the OK button to close the Load Song File menu. The
song’s notes and lyrics will be displayed in the Song Editor
viewport.
9. Select the Sing It! button on the File Options tab pane. The device
will sing the selected song.
Add a Sing Behavior to a Button
Songs can be attached to buttons through the Sing behavior.
Whenever a button with this behavior is selected, the device will
automatically sing a selected song.
To add a Sing behavior to a button, follow these steps:
screen. The button will turn red when it is selected.
2. Select the button you want to use to sing the song. A Modify Button
menu will open.
4-136
DynaVox Systems LLC
3. Select the Behaviors button. A Behavior Editor menu
2 Note:
If you are using the advanced page editing features, select a button
for the behavior and then access the Behavior Editor menu by
selecting the Behavior Editor button in the Properties menu.
will expand to display all the behavior categories.
5. Select the Miscellaneous option. The pull-down menu will close
and display only this category.
6. Select the Sing behavior in the Behaviors viewport.
7. Select the Add button. A Load Song File menu will open.
8. Select the name of the song you want the button to sing.
9. Select the OK button to close the Load Song File menu. The Sing
behavior and the name of the selected song will be displayed in the
Steps viewport.
10. Select the OK button to close the Behavior Editor menu.
The device will now sing the selected song whenever the button with
the Sing behavior is selected. If you want to use the Modify button to
customize any of the button’s other attributes (its label, symbol or
color, for example), please refer to steps in the Modify button section.
4-137
Edit a Song
To make changes to a song that has already been saved in the Song
Editor menu, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
6. Select the Load Song File button in the File Options tab pane. A
7. Select the name of the song you want to edit. If the viewport
presents a long list of songs, use the scroll buttons beside the
viewport to look for the appropriate song.
8. Select the OK button to close the Load Song File menu. The notes
and lyrics of the selected song will be displayed in the Song Editor
viewport.
9. Select the first note/lyric you want to edit by selecting any
combination of these buttons:
4-138
Next Note
The highlight one note to the right in the
viewport.
Previous Note
The highlight one note to the left in the
viewport.
Beginning of
Song
The first note in the song will be highlighted.
End of Song
The last note in the song will be highlighted.
DynaVox Systems LLC
10. If you want to delete the highlighted note/lyric, select the Delete
Note button. The highlighted note and lyric will be removed from
the staff. If you do not want to delete the note, continue with the
next step.
11. If you want to change the highlighted lyric (but not the note), select
the Edit Lyric button and complete this step. If you do not want to
change the lyric, continue with step 12.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter a new lyric for the note.
b. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard.
12. If you want to add a note/lyric to the right of the highlighted
note/lyric, select the Note Palette tab control or the Piano
Keyboard tab control. Use the tools on the tab pane to add a new
note and lyric. The highlight in the viewport will move to the new
note once it is added to the staff. If you do not want to add a new
note/lyric, continue with the next step.
13. If you want to move or delete several notes at once, select the
Selection tab control and complete this step. If you do not want to
edit multiple notes at one time, continue with step 14.
a. Select the Start Selection button to begin the group at the note
you highlighted in step 9.
b. Select the Next Note button until all of the notes you want to
move or delete are highlighted.
c. Move or delete the selected notes by using the following
buttons:
Copy Selection
Select this button to make a copy of the
highlighted group of notes. The copy can be
pasted in another part of the viewport.
Cut Selection
Select this button to remove the highlighted
group of notes from the staff. The notes that
are cut can be pasted in another part of the
viewport.
4-139
Paste Selection
Select this button to place a copy of a group
of buttons or a group of buttons that were
cut from the viewport into a new position.
Items are pasted to the right of the highlight
in the viewport, so the notes/lyrics will be
pasted to the right of the selected group of
notes unless the navigation buttons (Next
Note, Previous Note, Beginning of Song and
End of Song) are used to create a new
highlight.
Delete Selection
Select this button to permanently remove
the selected notes/lyrics from the viewport.
Use caution when selecting the Delete
button since the notes/lyrics cannot be
retrieved after they are deleted.
15. Select the OK button to save the song with the new changes.
Managing Song Files
The Song Editor menu also provides tools for managing and sharing
the song files that have been created. Review the following sets of
step-by-step instructions to learn about renaming, copying and
sharing the songs that you compose.
Delete a Song
To permanently delete a song, follow these steps:
touch screen.
4-140
DynaVox Systems LLC
menu will open.
7. Select the name of the song you want to delete. If the viewport
8. Select the Delete Selection button.
selected file. Be careful, as you will not be able to retrieve the file
once it is deleted.
10. Select the OK button to close the Load Song File menu.
Change the Title of a Song
To change the title of a song that has already been saved in the Song
Editor menu, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4-141
7. Select the name of the song you want to edit. If the viewport
8. Select the OK button to close the Load Song File menu. The notes
and lyrics of the selected song will be displayed in the Song Editor
viewport.
9. Select the Change the Title button in the File Options tab pane. A
10. Use the system keyboard to enter a new name for the song.
new song title will be displayed in the viewport in the Song Editor
menu.
13. Select the OK button to save the song with the new title.
Copy a Song File onto a USB Storage
When a song is recorded and saved in the Song Editor menu, the
song file is automatically stored in the Songs folder within the User
Files folder on the DV4/MT4 main data storage card. Adding a copy
4-142
DynaVox Systems LLC
of a song file to a removable USB storage device or a secondary data
card will enable you to share the file with other DV4/MT4 devices.
2 Note:
2 Note:
To copy a song file to a USB device or second data card, follow the
steps below:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. In the left viewport, select the expansion box beside the User Files
folder.
6. Select the Songs folder. A list of available song files will fill the
right viewport.
song file you want to share.
2 Note:
Multiple song files can be shared at one time. To do this, select the
check box beside the name of each song file that should be
included.
4-143
automatically.
the folder) to which the song file should be added:
Card2.
again.
an hourglass icon will appear while the song file is being copied to
A copy of the selected song file can now be found on your USB
device to share the song file with another DynaVox Series 4 device,
see Import a Song File with a USB Storage Device or
Secondary Data Card on page 4-145.
Share a Song File with a Windows Computer
When a song is created and saved in the Song Editor menu, the song
file is automatically stored in the Songs folder within the User Files
folder on the DV4/MT4 main data storage card. A USB connection
between a Series 4 device and a Windows computer can be used to
send a copy of a song file from the User Files folder to the computer.
Once the song file is loaded on the computer, it can be used with the
4-144
DynaVox Systems LLC
If you have created and saved a song file in the Song Editor menu,
you can easily send it to a Windows computer by following the steps
in Share Exported Files with a Windows Computer on page 4-50.
Share a Song File with a Macintosh
Computer
When a song is created and saved in the Song Editor menu, the song
file is automatically stored in the Songs folder within the User Files
folder on the DV4/MT4 main data storage card. A USB connection
between a Series 4 device and a Macintosh computer can be used to
send a copy of a song file from the User Files folder to the computer.
Once the song file is loaded on the computer, it can be sent to
If you have created and saved a song file in the Song Editor menu,
you can easily send it to a Macintosh computer by following the steps
in Share Exported Files with a Macintosh Computer on page 4-55.
Import a Song File with a USB Storage
Song files that were recorded and saved on a DV4/MT4 device can
be shared with other DynaVox Series 4 devices. If a song file is
4-145
peripheral device can be used to import the file to the File Browser
2 Note:
2 Note:
To import a song file, follow the steps below:
touch screen.
menu will open.
the folder) that contains the song file you want to import:
Card2.
song file you want to import.
2 Note:
4-146
Multiple song files can be imported at one time. To do this, select
the check box beside the name of each song file that should be
imported.
DynaVox Systems LLC
automatically.
folder.
10. Select the Songs folder.
an hourglass icon will appear while the song file is being copied to
the Songs folder.
The imported song file is now available in the Songs folder within the
User Files folder in the File Browser menu. The song file is also
accessible to be played or edited in the Song Editor menu.
Import a Song File from a Windows
Computer
Song files that were created and saved on a DV4/MT4 device can be
shared with other DynaVox Series 4 devices. If a DynaVox Series 4
song file has been loaded onto a Windows computer, a USB
to send a copy of a song file from the computer to the User Files
4-147
Import a Song File from a Macintosh
Computer
Song files that were created and saved on a DV4/MT4 device can be
shared with other DynaVox Series 4 devices. If a DynaVox Series 4
song file has been loaded onto a Macintosh computer, a USB
to send a copy of a song file from the computer to the User Files
Create and Modify
Sounds
4-148
One of the unique features of the DynaVox Series 4 device is the
Sound Browser menu. The tools in this menu, combined with the
microphone on the front of the DV4/MT4 device, enable you to record
and play personalized digital speech recordings.
DynaVox Systems LLC
SOUND BROWSER MENU
The Sound Browser menu features the following options:
Viewport
The viewport at the top of the menu displays
a list of all the available sound files. If the
entire list cannot be displayed in the
viewport at one time, the viewport will
feature a scroll bar that can be used to look
through the list.
Search Text Box
Use the Search feature to find a sound file
by name.
New Button
Select this button to create a new sound file.
When this button is selected, you will be
prompted to enter a name for the file and to
record a new message.
Rename Button
Use this button to edit the name assigned to
a sound file.
Delete Button
Use this button to permanently erase the
sound file that is selected in the viewport.
4-149
Play Sound
Button
Use this button to play the sound file that is
selected in the viewport.
Record Button
Select this button to use the device’s
microphone to record a new sound file.
Sound
Properties
Button
Use this button to view the properties of the
sound file that is selected in the viewport. A
window will open to display the date the
sound file was created, the date it was last
modified and its size.
OK Button
Select the OK button to save your work in
the Sound Browser before closing the
menu.
Create a New Sound File
Follow these steps to use the Sound Browser menu to create a digital
recording:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4. Select the Sound Browser button. The Sound Browser menu
6. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new sound file.
4-150
DynaVox Systems LLC
8. Select the OK button to begin recording. Begin to speak as soon
as the window notifies you that the device is recording.
2 Note:
2 Note:
Speak your message clearly into the microphone, which is the
small, oval indentation just above the device’s touch screen.
Select the Cancel button to stop recording and delete anything you
have recorded so far. You will be returned to the Sound Browser
menu. To try the recording again, start over with step 5.
9. When you have finished speaking, select the OK button to close
the Recording window. The new sound file will be listed in the
viewport of the Sound Browser menu.
10. To listen to the new recording, select the name of the sound file in
the viewport and then select the Play Sound button.
11. Select the OK button to close the Sound Browser menu.
Add a Play a Sound Behavior to a Button
The Play a Sound behavior provides a way to use digital recordings
as part of your communication pages and popups. If the Play a Sound
behavior is assigned to a button, the device will automatically play a
selected digital recording when the button is selected.
To add the Play a Sound behavior to a button, follow these steps:
2. Select the button to which you want to add the sound. The Modify
Button menu will open.
4-151
3. Select the Behaviors button. The Behavior Editor menu
2 Note:
5. Select the Miscellaneous option. The pull-down menu will close
and display only the selected option.
6. Select the Play a Sound behavior.
7. Select the Add button. A Play Sound menu will open.
8. Select the sound you want the button to play from the list in the
menu’s viewport.
9. Select the OK button to close the Play Sound menu. The Play a
Sound behavior and the name of the sound you selected will now
be displayed in the Steps viewport.
10. Select the OK button to close the Behavior Editor menu. The Play
a Sound behavior will be displayed beside the Behaviors button in
the Modify Button menu.
The selected sound will now be played whenever the button with the
Play a Sound behavior is selected. If you want to use the Modify
button to customize any of the button’s other attributes (its label,
symbol or color, for example), please refer to steps in the Modify
button section.
4-152
DynaVox Systems LLC
Delete a Sound File
Follow these steps to permanently remove a digital recording from
the Sound Browser menu:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the check box beside the name of the sound file that you
want to delete. If the viewport features a large list of sound files,
use the scroll buttons to help you find the right file.
2 Note:
You can delete more than one sound file at the one time by
selecting the check box beside the name of each file you want to
delete.
selected file. Be careful, as you will not be able to retrieve the
sound file once it has been deleted.
4-153
Play a Sound File
Follow these steps to play a digital recording in the Sound Browser
menu:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the name of the sound file that you want to play. If the
viewport features a large list of sound files, use the scroll buttons
to find the right file.
6. Select the Play Sound button. The selected file will begin to play.
2 Note:
When the Play Sound button is selected, it will be replaced with the
Stop button until the recording has finished playing. To stop the
sound file before it is done playing, select the Stop button.
Rename a Sound File
Follow these steps to give a new name to a digital recording that is
stored in the Sound Browser menu:
touch screen.
4-154
DynaVox Systems LLC
menu will open.
5. Select check box beside the sound file that you want to rename. If
the viewport features a large list of sound files, use the scroll
buttons to find the right file.
6. Select the Rename button. A system keyboard popup will open.
7. Use the system keyboard to enter a new name for the file.
new name will be featured in the viewport of the Sound Browser
menu.
Record Over a Sound File
Follow these steps to replace an existing digital sound file with a new
recording:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4-155
5. Select the sound file that you want to re-record. If the viewport
features a large list of sound files, use the scroll buttons to find the
right file.
6. Select the Record button.
7. Select the OK button to confirm that you want to replace the old
recording.
8. Select the OK button to begin recording. Begin to speak as soon
as the window notifies you that the device is recording.
2 Note:
2 Note:
Speak your message clearly into the microphone, which is the
small, oval indentation just above the device’s touch screen.
Select the Cancel button to stop recording and delete anything you
have recorded so far. You will be returned to the Sound Browser
menu. To try the recording again, start with step 5.
9. Select the OK button to stop recording when you finish speaking.
10. To listen to the new recording, select the name of the sound file in
the viewport and then select the Play Sound button.
View the Properties of a Sound File
The Series 4 software maintains a record of the date each sound file
is created, the date of the last changes to each sound file and the
size of each sound file.
4-156
DynaVox Systems LLC
To view this information for a selected digital recording, follow these
steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select a sound file. If the viewport features a large list of sound
files, use the scroll buttons to find the right file.
6. Select the Sound Properties button. The size of the selected file
and the dates that it was created and last modified will be
displayed in a window.
7. Select the OK button to close the sound properties window.
Copy a Sound File onto a USB Storage
When a sound is recorded and saved in the Sound Browser menu,
the sound file is automatically stored in the Sounds folder within the
User Files folder on the DV4/MT4 main data storage card. Adding a
copy of a sound file to a removable USB storage device or a
4-157
secondary data card will enable you to share the file with other
DV4/MT4 devices.
2 Note:
2 Note:
To copy a sound file to a USB device or second data card, follow the
steps below:
touch screen.
menu will open.
folder.
6. Select the Sounds folder. A list of available sound files will fill the
right viewport.
sound file you want to share.
2 Note:
4-158
Multiple sound files can be shared at one time. To do this, select
the check box beside the name of each sound file that should be
included.
DynaVox Systems LLC
automatically.
the folder) to which the sound file should be added:
Card2.
again.
an hourglass icon will appear while the sound file is being copied
to the USB device or second data card.
A copy of the selected sound file can now be found on your USB
device to share the sound file with another DynaVox Series 4 device,
see the steps in Import a Sound File with a USB Storage Device or
Secondary Data Card on page 4-160.
Share a Sound File with a Windows
Computer
User Files folder on the DV4/MT4 main data storage card. A USB
connection between a Series 4 device and a Windows computer can
be used to send a copy of a sound file from the User Files folder to
the computer. Once the sound file is loaded on the computer, it can
4-159
be used with the DynaVox Series 4 page editing software, sent to
If you have created and saved a sound file in the Sound Browser
menu, you can easily send it to a Windows computer by following the
steps in Share Exported Files with a Windows Computer on
page 4-50.
Share a Sound File with a Macintosh
Computer
User Files folder on the DV4/MT4 main data storage card. A USB
connection between a Series 4 device and a Macintosh computer can
be used to send a copy of a sound file from the User Files folder to
the computer. Once the sound file is loaded on the computer, it can
be sent to another computer or shared with another DV4 or MT4
device.
If you have created and saved a sound file in the Sound Browser
menu, you can easily send it to a Macintosh computer by following
the steps in Share Exported Files with a Macintosh Computer on
page 4-55.
Import a Sound File with a USB Storage
Sound files that were recorded and saved on a DV4/MT4 device can
be shared with other DynaVox Series 4 devices. If a sound file is
4-160
DynaVox Systems LLC
peripheral device can be used to import the file to the File Browser
2 Note:
2 Note:
To import the sound file, follow the steps below:
1.
Select the pull-down menu button in the title bar at the top of the
touch screen.
menu will open.
the folder) that contains the sound file you want to import:
Card2.
sound file you want to import.
2 Note:
Multiple sound files can be imported at one time. To do this, select
the check box beside the name of each sound file that should be
imported.
4-161
automatically.
folder.
10. Select the Sounds folder.
an hourglass icon will appear while the sound file is being copied
to the Sounds folder.
The imported sound file is now available in the Sounds folder within
the User Files folder in the File Browser menu. If the Sound Browser
menu is opened, the new sound file will also be listed in its main
viewport.
Import a Sound File from a Windows
Computer
be shared with other DynaVox Series 4 devices. If a DynaVox Series
4 sound file has been loaded onto a Windows computer, a USB
to send a copy of a sound file from the computer to the User Files
4-162
DynaVox Systems LLC
Import a Sound File from a Macintosh
Computer
be shared with other DynaVox Series 4 devices. If a DynaVox Series
4 sound file has been loaded onto a Macintosh computer, a USB
to send a copy of a sound file from the computer to the User Files
4-163
Miscellaneous Features
MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES
DynaVox Series 4 software also offers several menus that can be
used to make use of many features on the DV4/MT4.
This section is dedicated to explaining these various features. It gives
an overview of the menus for these features and offers step-by-step
instructions for using the features.
Use the Color Selector
Menu
With the tools provided in the Series 4 software, color can be easily
used to create a unique look for the communication pages and
system menus that an individual is using on a DV4 or MT4 device.
Color can be used creatively to make pages and menus more
attractive to an individual’s personal tastes, and it can be used
practically to make objects easier to see and identify.
New colors can be applied to any item on the DV4/MT4 touch screen,
including symbols, buttons, text, tab controls, boxes and dividers,
page backgrounds and the system menus. The primary tool for
working with color in the Series 4 software is the Color Selector
menu. This menu provides a large palette of stock colors that can be
applied to objects on the touch screen. It also provides tools for
creating and saving custom colors.
This menu can be accessed from several different places. When the
Color Selector menu is being used to customize button colors, it can
be opened through either the Modify Button menu or the DynaVox
Series 4 page editor. The Color Selector menu can also be accessed
in the page editor, through the Properties menu for whatever
component of a page is being customized. If a symbol is being
customized with color, the Color Selector menu will be accessed
through the Symbol Editor menu. When new colors are being chosen
4-164
DynaVox Systems LLC
for the menus, the Interface Features menu provides access to the
Color Selector menu.
COLOR SELECTOR MENU
The Color Selector menu offers the following tools:
Swatches Tab
Control
The contents of the Swatches tab pane are automatically presented
whenever the Color Selector menu is opened. This tab pane offers a
palette of color buttons. When a color button is selected, the color will
fill the display square on the right square of the menu.
The three buttons at the bottom of the tab pane can also be selected
as color swatches. Select the Primary Color button to make the
selected item the same color as the system menu backgrounds. Use
the Secondary Color button to make the selected item the same color
as the system menu buttons and outlines. Use the Transparent button
to remove all solid color from the selected item.
4-165
RGB Tab
Control
Select this tab control to bring to the front a tab pane with three
sliders that can be used to create a customized color. Use the Red
slider to specify the amount of red in the new color. The Green slider
affects the amount of green in the new color. The Blue slider controls
the amount of blue in the color.
These sliders can be used alone or in combination with the sliders on
the HSV tab pane.
HSV Tab Control
Select this tab control to bring to the front a tab pane with three
sliders that can be used to create a customized color. Use the Hue
slider to specify the color family for the new family. The Saturation
slider affects the purity of a color. The Brightness slider controls the
intensity of the color.
These sliders can be used alone or in combination with the sliders on
the RGB tab pane.
My Swatches
Tab Control
Select this tab control to bring to the front a tab pane with an empty
palette of buttons. This palette can be filled with custom colors.
Unlabeled
Display Square
When you use the sliders to create a new color, the color will be
displayed in this square.
Add to My
Swatches
Button
Use this button if you want to save the color you have created in the
display square above this button. The color will be saved to the
palette of buttons on the My Swatches tab pane.
OK/Cancel
Button
Select the OK button to save your work in the Color Selector menu
and close the menu. The item that is selected on the touch screen will
be filled with the color in the display square on the right side of the
Color Selector menu. Select the Cancel button to close the menu
without saving any changes.
The following sets of step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to
use the Color Selector menu tools to choose and create colors.
4-166
DynaVox Systems LLC
Select a Color from the Color Palettes
If you have opened the Color Selector menu and want to use it to
apply an existing color to the selected object, follow these steps:
2 Note:
More specific instructions for selecting a new color for a specific
item are available in the sections on the Modify button and
advanced page editing.
1. Select the Swatches tab control or the My Swatches tab control
(colors will be available on this tab pane only if you have saved
custom colors). The selected tab pane will display a palette of
available colors.
selected object will automatically fill with the color you selected.
Create a Custom Color
If you have opened the Color Selector menu and want to use it to
create a unique color for a selected item, follow these steps:
1. Select the RGB tab control. A tab pane with three sliders (Red,
Green and Blue) will open.
2. Make adjustments to any (or all) of these sliders. To do this, select
the slider thumb and then maintain the selection as you drag the
4-167
slider thumb toward the top or bottom of the slider. You can make
the following adjustments:
Red
This slider affects the amount of red in the
new color. Drag the slider thumb toward the
bottom of the slider to increase the amount
of red. Drag the slider thumb toward the top
of the slider to decrease the amount of red
in the color.
Green
Use this slider to adjust the amount of green
that is in the new color. Drag the slider
thumb toward the bottom of the slider to
increase the amount of green. Drag the
slider thumb toward the top of the slider to
decrease the amount of green in the color.
Blue
The position of the slider thumb on this
slider controls the amount of blue in a color.
To increase the amount of blue in a color,
drag the slider thumb toward the bottom of
the slider. If there should be less blue in the
color, drag the slider thumb toward the top
of the slider.
As you make adjustments to these sliders, the color you are
creating will be displayed in the square display on the right side of
the Color Selector menu.
3. Select the HSV tab control. Another tab pane will open and display
Hue, Saturation and Brightness sliders.
4. Make adjustments to any (or all) of these sliders. To do this, select
the slider thumb and then maintain the selection as you drag the
4-168
DynaVox Systems LLC
slider thumb toward the top or bottom of the slider. You can make
the following adjustments:
Hue
Use the Hue slider to specify the color
family for the new family. As you drag the
slider thumb from the top of the slider to the
bottom, the color family that the color is
based on will change. For example, the
base color may go from yellow to green to
blue to purple.
Saturation
The Saturation slider affects the intensity of
a color. Dragging the slider thumb toward
the bottom of the slider will create a more
intense shade. Dragging the slider thumb
toward the top of the slider will result in a
color that appears to be faded.
Brightness
The Brightness slider controls the amount of
light in the color. Drag the slider thumb
toward the bottom of the slider to make the
color brighter. Drag the slider thumb toward
the top of the slider to make the color
darker.
As you make adjustments to these sliders, the color you are
creating will be displayed in the square display on the right side of
the Color Selector menu.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 until the color in the display square is the
color you want to use.
6. If you want to save the new color, complete this step. If you want
to use the new color once without saving it in the Color Selector
menu, continue with step 7.
a. Select the Add to My Swatches button.
4-169
b. Select the My Swatches tab control.
MY SWATCHES TAB PANE
c. Select any empty button on this tab pane. (If all the buttons are
filled with color, select a button with a color that you are willing
to overwrite.) The new color will be saved on the selected
button. Continue with step 7.
selected item on the touch screen will fill with the color you chose.
Add Behaviors to
Buttons
4-170
Behaviors are actions that can be added to buttons on a Series 4
communication page or popup. These actions are started when the
button is selected. For example, you may want the selection of a
particular button to automatically insert a message into the Message
Window, speak the message and then clear the Message Window.
This series of actions can be accomplished by adding behaviors to
DynaVox Systems LLC
the button. Behaviors can also be added directly to communication
pages and popups, and to page components such as tab controls and
active areas.
These behaviors are divided into behavior categories that group
behaviors with similar purposes. The individual behaviors within
these behavior categories are defined in Appendix A: Behavior
Reference.
The Behavior Editor menu is used to add new behaviors to a button.
This menu is primarily accessed through the Modify Button menu or
through the advanced editing tools. It can also be used to edit, delete
or reorganize behaviors that have already been added.
BEHAVIOR EDITOR MENU
4-171
The Behavior Editor menu always features the same options:
4-172
Behaviors
Group Box
The first feature of the Behaviors group box
is a pull-down menu. Use this pull-down
menu to choose one of the 12 available
behavior categories. The viewport below the
pull-down menu will display a list of the
individual behaviors that are included in the
selected category. If the entire list cannot be
displayed in the viewport at one time, use
the scroll bars on the right and bottom
edges of the viewport to look through the
list.
Steps Viewport
The Steps viewport features a list of the
behaviors that have been assigned to the
object that was selected on the touch
screen.
Add Button
If you select a single behavior in the
viewport in the Behaviors group box and
then select the Add button, the behavior will
be added to the Steps viewport. If the
selected behavior requires additional
information (such as text or the name of a
page), you will be prompted to enter this
information before the behavior is added to
the viewport.
Move Up Button
Use the Move Up button to move a selected
behavior up one position in a list of
behaviors in the Steps viewport. This means
that the behavior will exchange places with
the behavior immediately above it in the list.
Edit Button
If the behavior that is selected in the Steps
viewport includes additional information
(such as text or the name of a page), use
the Edit button to change this information.
Delete Button
Use this button to remove a selected
behavior from the Steps viewport.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Move Down
Button
Use the Move Down button to move a
selected behavior down one position in a list
of behaviors in the Steps viewport. This
means that the behavior will exchange
places with the behavior immediately below
it in the list.
OK/Cancel
Buttons
Use the OK button to save any changes to
the Behavior Editor menu. The menu will
close after the information is saved.
Selecting the Cancel button will close the
Behavior Editor menu without saving any
changes or new information.
The remainder of this section offers general steps for using the
Behavior Editor menu to add a behavior to an object on a
communication page (a button, a tab control, or the page itself). After
the general behavior steps, individual sets of steps offer
supplementary information for adding behaviors from the Common
Behaviors category that require additional information.
Use the Behavior Editor to Add a Behavior
If you are using the Modify Button menu to add a behavior to a
button, or if you are using the Series 4 advanced page editing
features to add a behavior to a button, a page or another object, you
will open the Behavior Editor menu (page 4-171).
4-173
Once this menu is open, you can follow these steps to add a behavior
or to edit an existing behavior:
1. Select the Behaviors pull-down menu. The menu will expand to
display a list of the available behavior categories.
2 Note:
Refer to Appendix A: Behavior Reference to learn more about
the various behaviors and their applications.
4. Select the Add button. If the device requires no other additional
information to complete the behavior, the selected behavior will be
immediately added to the Steps viewport.
steps 1 through 4.
Move Up
4-174
viewport list.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Edit
Delete
Move Down
viewport list.
select the OK button to close the Behavior Editor menu.
The button will now initiate the new behavior when it is selected.
Common Behaviors: Add an Activate a
Macro Behavior
One of the Common Behaviors that requires additional information
when it is added to a button is the Activate a Macro behavior. To work
properly, this behavior must have a selected macro file assigned to it
when it is added to a button. Once this is done, selecting the button
with the Activate a Macro behavior will immediately launch the steps
in the macro.
If you are using the Modify Button or the Series 4 advanced page
editing features to add this behavior to a button, you will open the
Once this menu is open, you can follow these steps to add the
Activate a Macro behavior:
1. Select Activate a Macro in the Behaviors viewport of the Behavior
Editor menu.
4-175
2. Select the Add button. An Activate a Macro menu will open. The
names of the available macros will be displayed in the viewport.
3. Select the name of the macro you want to assign to the button.
4. Select the OK button to close the Activate a Macro menu. The
Activate a Macro behavior and the name of the selected macro will
be displayed in the Steps viewport in the Behavior Editor menu.
The Activate a Macro behavior and the chosen behavior will now
be assigned to the selected button.
Common Behaviors: Add a Go to Page
Behavior
The Go to Page behavior is another Common Behavior that requires
additional information when it is assigned to a button. To work
properly, this behavior must have a selected page or popup name
assigned to it. Once this information is established, selecting the
button with the Go to Page behavior will immediately open the
selected page or popup.
Once this menu is open, you can follow these steps to add the Go to
Page behavior:
1. Select the Go to Page behavior in the left viewport of the Behavior
Editor menu.
2. Select the Add button. A Select Pages menu will open.
You can use the scroll buttons to find the appropriate page name
in the viewports, or you can search for a page by name. If you want
4-176
DynaVox Systems LLC
to look through the viewports, continue with step 3. If you want to
use the Search feature, continue with step 4.
3. To find the page in the viewports, select the name of the
appropriate page set folder in the left viewport. If the folder you
want to see is part of a larger folder, select the expansion box
beside the top-level folder. You may need to use the scroll buttons
to the right of the viewport to look through all the available options.
a. In the right viewport, select the name of the page or popup you
want to open. You may need to use the scroll buttons to the right
of the viewport to see all the available pages and popups.
popup you are looking for.
appropriate page or popup name will be highlighted in the right
viewport of the Select Page menu.
5. Select the OK button to close the Select Pages menu. The Go to
Page behavior and the name of the selected page or popup will be
displayed in the Steps viewport in the Behavior Editor menu.
The Go to Page behavior and the chosen page or popup will now
be assigned to the selected button.
Common Behaviors: Add a Go to Page &
Search Behavior
The Go to Page & Search behavior, also in the Common Behaviors
category, requires both a page assignment and the creation of search
criteria when it is assigned to a button. Once this information is
4-177
established, selecting the button with the Go to Page behavior will
immediately open a page with a search box. The search box will fill
with buttons with vocabulary that matches the search criteria
assigned to the behavior.
Page & Search behavior:
1. Select the Go to Page & Search behavior in the left viewport of
the Behavior Editor menu.
2. Select the Add button. A Select Pages menu will open.
You can use the scroll buttons to find the appropriate page name
in the viewports, or you can search for a page by name. If you want
to look through the viewports, continue with step 3. If you want to
use the Search feature, continue with step 4.
3. To find the page in the viewports, select the name of the
a. In the right viewport, select the name of the page or popup you
want to open. You may need to use the scroll buttons to the right
of the viewport to see all the available pages and popups.
popup you are looking for.
appropriate page or popup name will be highlighted in the right
viewport of the Select Page menu.
4-178
DynaVox Systems LLC
5. Select the OK button to close the Select Pages menu. An Edit
Search menu will open.
d. If you want to add an additional concept to the search, go back
to step 6. If you have added all the concepts you want to search,
4-179
boxes.
Alphabetically
alphabetical order.
By Length
presented first.
By Frequency
option.
to see.
2 Note:
4-180
Words without symbols greatly outnumber words with symbols.
Because of this, selecting this check box is a good way to limit the
number of vocabulary items that will be presented by your search.
DynaVox Systems LLC
15. Select the OK button to close the Edit Search button. The Go to
Page & Search behavior and the name of the selected page will be
displayed in the Steps viewport in the Behavior Editor menu.
The Go to Page & Search behavior, the chosen page and the
accompanying search criteria will now be assigned to the selected
button.
Common Behaviors: Add a Go to Sleep
Behavior
The Go to Sleep behavior will cause the device to shut down a
specified number of seconds after the button with this behavior is
selected. When you assign this Common Behavior to a button, you
must specify the number of minutes that should lapse between the
selection of the button and the shut down.
Sleep behavior:
1. Select the Go to Sleep behavior in the left viewport of the Behavior
Editor menu.
2. Select the Add button. An Enter Minutes keypad menu will open.
3. Use the number buttons on the keypad to select the number of
minutes you want the device to pause before going to sleep after
the button is selected. To make the device go to sleep as soon as
the button is selected, enter 0.
4-181
4. Select the OK button to close the Enter Minutes menu. The Go to
Sleep behavior will be displayed in the Steps viewport in the
Behavior Editor menu.
The Go to Sleep behavior will now be assigned to the selected
button.
Common Behaviors: Add an Open Popup
Exclusively Behavior
The Open Popup Exclusively behavior is another Common Behavior
that requires additional information when it is assigned to a button. To
work properly, this behavior must have a selected popup name
assigned to it. When a button with this behavior is selected, the
device will open a specified popup. Selections can be made on the
popup, but not on the page behind it. The page behind the popup will
be grayed out.
Once this menu is open, you can follow these steps to add the Open
Popup Exclusively behavior:
1. Select the Open Popup Exclusively behavior in the left viewport
of the Behavior Editor menu.
2. Select the Add button. A Select a Popup menu will open.
You can use the scroll buttons to find the appropriate popup name
in the viewports, or you can search for a popup by name. If you
want to look through the viewports, continue with step 3. If you
want to use the Search feature, continue with step 4.
4-182
DynaVox Systems LLC
3. To find the popup in the viewports, select the name of the
a. In the right viewport, select the name of the popup you want to
open. You may need to use the scroll buttons to the right of the
viewport to see all the available pages and popups. Continue
with step 5.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the name of the popup you
are looking for.
appropriate popup name will be highlighted in the right viewport
of the Select Page menu.
5. Select the OK button to close the Select a Popup menu. The Open
Popup Exclusively behavior and the name of the selected popup
will be displayed in the Steps viewport in the Behavior Editor
menu.
The Open Popup Exclusively behavior and the chosen popup will
now be assigned to the selected button.
Common Behaviors: Add a Pause Behavior
The Pause behavior (also one of the Common Behaviors) enables a
Series 4 user to specify that there should be breaks of a specified
number of seconds between behaviors that are assigned to one
button. For this behavior to work properly, the length of the pause
must be specified when the behavior is added.
4-183
Once this menu is open, you can follow these steps to add the Pause
behavior:
1. Select the Pause behavior in the left viewport of the Behavior
Editor menu.
2. Select the Add button. An Enter Seconds keypad menu will open.
3. Use the number buttons on the keypad to select the number of
seconds the device should pause before initiating the next
behavior in the list.
4. Select the OK button to close the Enter Seconds menu. The Pause
behavior will be displayed in the Steps viewport in the Behavior
Editor menu.
The Pause behavior will now be assigned to the selected button.
Common Behaviors: Add an Insert Text
Behavior
The Insert Text behavior is one of the Common Behaviors. Selecting
a button with an Insert Text behavior will send a text message to the
Message Window. The text can be spoken when the Message
Window is selected. For this behavior to work properly, a text
message must be assigned to the button when the Insert Text
behavior is selected.
4-184
DynaVox Systems LLC
Once this menu is open, you can follow these steps to add the Insert
Text behavior:
1. Select the Insert Text behavior in the left viewport of the Behavior
Editor menu.
2. Select the Add button. A system keyboard popup will open.
3. Use the system keyboard to enter the text you want the button to
send to the Message Window.
Insert Text behavior will be displayed in the Steps viewport in the
The Insert Text behavior will now be assigned to the selected
button.
Common Behaviors: Add a Speak Text
Behavior
The Speak Text behavior is one of the Common Behaviors. When a
button with this behavior is selected, the DV4/MT4 device will
automatically speak a text message that has been assigned to the
button. For this behavior to work properly, a text message must be
entered when the Speak Text behavior is selected.
Once this menu is open, you can follow these steps to add the Speak
Text behavior:
1. Select the Speak Text behavior in the left viewport of the Behavior
Editor menu.
4-185
2. Select the Add button. A system keyboard popup will open.
3. Use the system keyboard to enter the text that should be spoken
when the button is selected.
Speak Text behavior will be displayed in the Steps viewport in the
The Speak Text behavior will now be assigned to the selected
button.
Program and Use
Environmental
Controls
The infrared remote control and computer access capabilities that are
built into DV4 and MT4 devices provide convenience for the
individuals who use these devices. With DynaVox Series 4 devices,
individuals can use the same access method that they use to make
selections on their communication device to work with personal
computers, control an X-10 infrared system, or make phone calls with
a GEWA Jupiter phone or a TASH phone. The DV4/MT4 devices can
also be used to send various remote control commands to
commercial appliances like televisions and compact disc players.
The activation of an environmental control or computer access
command is a behavior that can be assigned to a button. When
environmental control behaviors or computer access behaviors are
programmed into a button, the individual who is using the DynaVox
device simply selects the button to activate the behavior. Several of
the DynaVox Language Applications page sets include pages that are
specifically designed to include buttons with environmental control
and computer access behaviors. The buttons on these are already
4-186
DynaVox Systems LLC
designed and organized an efficient layout. You need only to add the
specific codes for the appliance or computer that you want to use.
X-10 commands and the commands for GEWA Jupiter and Tash
phones are pre-programmed according to the device that is being
used. You will need to refer to the documentation that came with your
X-10 system or your phone to know which command codes to select.
For infrared remote control, however, you must create your own
commands by using a remote control to teach commands to your
device.
IR BROWSER MENU
This is done with the tools in the IR Browser menu:
Viewport
a list of all the infrared remote control
commands that are stored on your device. If
the entire list cannot be displayed in the
through the list.
4-187
New Button
Select the New button to create a name for
a new remote control command. The
command name will be added to the IR
Browser viewport.
Delete Button
Select the Delete button to permanently
remove a selected remote control command
from the IR Browser viewport.
Learn Button
The Learn button can be used to teach an
infrared signal to your device. The remote
control for the appliance you want to control
must be on hand for this IR learning to take
place.
Rename Button
Use the Rename button to change the name
of a selected infrared control command.
Test Button
Use this button to try out a new infrared
command. When this button is selected, the
device will send out the command that is
highlighted in the IR Browser viewport.
OK Button
Select this button to save any infrared
command changes and close the IR
Browser menu.
Create and Learn a New Infrared Remote
Control Command
Infrared (IR) is an invisible, low frequency light that is used for
wireless access to many home appliances such as televisions, VCRs
and stereos. The DynaVox Series 4 devices have the ability to learn
IR codes to send signals to any appliance that can be used with an
4-188
DynaVox Systems LLC
infrared remote control. To make use of DynaVox IR capabilities, you
must teach your device the IR commands you want to use.
2 Note:
To complete these steps, you will need the remote control unit that
is used for the command you want to add.
The steps for teaching your DV4 or MT4 an IR command are simple:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4. Select the IR Browser button. The IR Browser menu (page 4-187)
will open.
5. Select the New button. A system keyboard popup will be open.
6. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new infrared
command.
new command name will be displayed in the IR Browser viewport.
8. Select the check box beside the new command name.
9. Select the Learn button.
10. Aim the remote control at the dark plastic panel on the front edge
of the DV4 or MT4 device. Select the Start IR Learning button on
the device and then press the appropriate remote control button.
11. Select the Stop IR Learning button.
12. Select the OK button once the command learning is complete.
13. To test the new command, aim the front edge of the DV4 or MT4
at the appropriate appliance and select the Test button.
14. Select the OK button to close the IR Browser menu.
4-189
2 Note:
Once an infrared remote control command has been created and
learned, it should be assigned to a button with a Perform IR
Command behavior. To learn how to do this, complete the steps in
Add an Infrared Remote Control Command to a Button on
page 4-191.
Delete an Infrared Remote Control
Command
To permanently remove an infrared remote control command from the
IR Browser menu, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
will open.
5. Select the check box beside the name of the command you want
to delete.
command. Be careful, as you will not be able to retrieve the
command after it is deleted.
4-190
DynaVox Systems LLC
Rename an Infrared Remote Control
Command
To change the name of a selected infrared remote control command,
follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
will open.
5. Select the check box beside the name of the command you want
to rename.
6. Select the Rename button. An IR Command Name system
7. Use the system keyboard to enter a new name for the command.
new name will be displayed in the IR Browser viewport.
9. Select the OK button to close the IR Browser menu.
Add an Infrared Remote Control Command
to a Button
Once an infrared remote control command has been learned by your
DV4/MT4 device, a Perform IR Command behavior can be used to
assign the new command to a button on a communication page or
4-191
popup. When the button with this behavior is selected, the device will
automatically send the infrared command to the appropriate
appliance.
To add a Perform IR Command behavior to a button, follow these
steps:
2. Select the button you want to use for the infrared command. The
Modify Button menu will open.
2 Note:
for the command and then access the Behavior Editor menu by
5. Select the Environmental Control option. The pull-down menu
will close and display only this category.
6. Select Perform IR Command in the Behaviors viewport.
7. Select the Add button. The IR Browser menu (page 4-187) will
open.
8. Select the name of the command you want to add to the button.
9. Select the OK button to close the IR Browser menu. In the
Behavior Editor menu, the name of the command will appear next
to Perform IR Command in the Steps viewport.
10. Select the OK button to close the Behavior Editor menu. In the
Modify Button menu, Perform IR Command will be displayed
beside the Behaviors button.
4-192
DynaVox Systems LLC
12. You may want to test your new IR button. To do this, aim the front
edge of the DV4 or MT4 at the appropriate appliance and then
select the button with the Perform IR Command behavior. When
the button is selected, the remote control command will be sent to
the appliance.
2 Note:
If you want to use the Modify button to customize any of the
button’s other attributes (its label, symbol or color, for example),
please refer to steps in the Modify button section.
Selecting the modified button will now send an infrared command
to the remote-controlled device.
Add a New Infrared X-10 Command to a
Button
The X-10 environmental control method enables individuals to use a
remote control to operate appliances that do not typically have
infrared remote control capabilities. The X-10 signaling language
allows control signals to be transmitted over existing electrical lines.
An individual using a DynaVox Series 4 device can use X-10 to:
• Independently control any appliance that plugs into an electrical
outlet (lamps, kitchen appliances, air conditioners, etc.).
• Maintain privacy by opening and closing curtains or blinds.
• Lock and unlock doors for safety.
To use X-10 environmental control with your DV4 or MT4, you will
need an individual X-10 Appliance Module for each appliance that will
be controlled. The X-10 Appliance Module must be specifically
designed for the type of appliance for which it is intended. For
4-193
example, lamps and air conditioners each have their own unique X10 module.
You must also buy an X-10 Command Center for each of the rooms in
which you plan to use X-10. Each X-10 Command Center includes
specific codes that control the various X-10 Modules. You will not
need to program any X-10 signals into your DV4 or MT4 as the ability
to communicate with these codes is already programmed into your
device.
The Perform IR X10 Command behavior is used to add an X-10
command to a button on a DV4/MT4 page or popup. Whenever a
button with this behavior is selected, the device will automatically
send the assigned command to the appropriate X-10 Command
Center.
To add a Perform IR X10 Command behavior to a button, follow these
steps:
2. Select the button you want to use for the X-10 command. A Modify
2 Note:
6. Select Perform IR X10 Command in the Behaviors viewport.
4-194
DynaVox Systems LLC
7. Select the Add button. A Select X10 Command menu will open.
SELECT X10 COMMAND MENU
8. Select the Command Type pull-down menu. The menu will
expand to display all the available options.
9. Select one option. The pull-down menu will close and display only
the chosen option.
2 Note:
Refer to the documentation that was shipped with your X-10
Command Center to learn the correct code for each X-10
command.
10. Select the Number Code pull-down menu. The menu will expand
to display all the available options. You may need to use the scroll
buttons on the right side of the pull-down menu to view all the
options.
the chosen option.
12. Select the Alpha Code pull-down menu. The pull-down menu will
close and display only the chosen option. You may need to use the
scroll buttons on the right side of the pull-down menu to view all the
options.
the chosen option.
4-195
14. Select the OK button to close the Select X10 Command menu. In
the Behavior Editor menu, Perform IR X10 Command will be
displayed in the Steps viewport.
Modify Button menu, Perform IR X10 Command will be displayed
17. You may want to test your new X-10 command button. To do this,
aim the front edge of the DV4 or MT4 at the X-10 Command
Module and then select the button with the Perform IR X10
Command behavior. When the button is selected, the command
will be sent to the command module.
2 Note:
please refer to Using the Modify Button on page 2-37.
The DV4/MT4 device will now send out an X-10 command
whenever the modified button is selected.
Add a GEWA Jupiter Phone Command to a
Button
Your DV4/MT4 device can be used to wirelessly interface with a
GEWA Jupiter phone. You can program your device to work with this
type of phone by adding Perform GEWA Jupiter Command behaviors
to the buttons on a communication page or popup. When a button
with this behavior is selected, the phone command will be
automatically sent to the GEWA phone.
4-196
DynaVox Systems LLC
To add a Perform GEWA Jupiter Command behavior to a button,
follow these steps:
2. Select the button you want to use for the phone command. A
2 Note:
6. Select Perform GEWA Jupiter Command in the Behaviors
viewport.
7. Select the Add button. A Select GEWA Jupiter Command menu
will open.
expand to display the available options.
the chosen option.
2 Note:
Refer to the documentation that was shipped with your GEWA
phone to learn about the available commands.
4-197
10. Select the OK button to close the Select GEWA Jupiter
Command menu. In the Behavior Editor menu, Perform GEWA
Jupiter Command will be displayed in the Steps viewport.
Modify Button menu, Perform GEWA Jupiter Command will be
displayed beside the Behaviors button.
13. You may want to test your new GEWA phone command button. To
do this, aim the front edge of the DV4 or MT4 at the GEWA phone
and then select the button with the Perform GEWA Jupiter
Command behavior. When the button is selected, the command
will be sent to the phone module.
2 Note:
The DV4/MT4 device will now send out a GEWA phone command
Add a Tash Phone Command to a Button
Your DV4/MT4 device can be used to wirelessly interface with a Tash
telephone. You can program your device to work with this type of
phone by adding Perform Tash Phone Command behaviors to the
buttons on a communication page or popup. When a button with this
behavior is selected, the phone command will be automatically sent
to the Tash phone.
4-198
DynaVox Systems LLC
To add a Perform Tash Phone Command to a button, follow these
steps:
2. Select the button you want to use for the phone command. A
2 Note:
6. Select Perform Tash Phone Command in the Behaviors
viewport.
7. Select the Add button. A Select Tash Phone Command menu will
open.
expand to display the available options.
the chosen option.
2 Note:
Refer to the documentation that was shipped with your Tash phone
to learn about the available commands.
4-199
10. Select the OK button to close the Select Tash Phone Command
menu. In the Behavior Editor menu, Perform Tash Phone
Command will be displayed in the Steps viewport.
Modify Button menu, Perform Tash Phone Command will be
displayed beside the Behaviors button.
13. You may want to test your new Tash phone command button. To
do this, aim the front edge of the DV4 or MT4 at the Tash phone
and then select the button with the Perform Tash Phone Command
behavior. When the button is selected, the command will be sent
to the phone module.
2 Note:
The DV4/MT4 device will now send out a Tash phone command
Use Queueing Behaviors to Build Multi-Step
Commands
Sometimes an infrared remote control command is made up of
several small commands that need to be sent in rapid succession.
This is true, for example, when you use the remote control to select a
three-digit TV channel. If you are trying to select channel 501, you
need to select the commands for five, zero and one within a very
short span of time. Depending on the access method you use to
make selections on your Series 4 device, it may take too long to
accomplish this by selecting buttons with Perform IR Command
behaviors. If too much time lapses between the button selections, the
4-200
DynaVox Systems LLC
three command components won’t be recognized as part of a whole
command.
DynaVox Series 4 software offers queueing behaviors to resolve this
problem. A queue is a line or a sequence. When the Enqueue IR
Command behavior is used (instead of the Perform IR Command
behavior) to add IR commands to a button, selecting these buttons
will create a sequence of small commands. Then a button with a
Send IR Queue behavior can be selected to send the whole
sequence at one time.
To use the queueing behaviors, you must add infrared commands to
buttons with an Enqueue IR Command behavior. You must also add a
button with a Send IR Queue behavior. You may also want to add a
button with a Clear IR Queue behavior so that you can delete a
sequence of behaviors if you have made a wrong selection.
To add these behaviors to a series of buttons, follow these steps:
2. Select the button you want to use for the Enqueue IR Command
behavior. A Modify Button menu will open.
2 Note:
6. Select Enqueue IR Command in the Behaviors viewport.
4-201
7. Select the Add button. The IR Browser menu (page 4-187) will
open.
8. Select the name of the command you want to add to the button.
9. Select the OK button to close the IR Browser menu. In the
Behavior Editor menu, the name of the command will appear next
to Perform IR Command in the Steps viewport.
Modify Button menu, Enqueue IR Command will be displayed
2 Note:
12. If you want to add an Enqueue IR Command behavior to another
button, repeat steps 1 through 11. If you have finished adding
Enqueue IR Command behaviors to buttons, continue with step
13.
13. Select the Modify button again.
2 Note:
14. Select the button you want to use for the Send IR Queue behavior.
A Modify Button menu will open.
15. Select the Behaviors button. The Behavior Editor menu will open.
4-202
DynaVox Systems LLC
18. Select Send IR Queue in the Behaviors viewport.
19. Select the Add button. The Send IR Queue behavior will be added
to the Steps viewport.
Modify Button menu, Send IR Queue will be displayed beside the
Behaviors button.
22. Select the Modify button again.
2 Note:
23. Select the button you want to use for the Clear IR Queue behavior.
A Modify Button menu will open.
24. Select the Behaviors button. The Behavior Editor menu will open.
27. Select Clear IR Queue in the Behaviors viewport.
28. Select the Add button. The Clear IR Queue behavior will be added
to the Steps viewport.
Modify Button menu, Clear IR Queue will be displayed beside the
Behaviors button.
4-203
You can now use these buttons to create command sequences for
infrared remote control commands. When the button with the Send
IR Queue behavior is selected, the DV4 or MT4 device will
immediately send out the entire string of commands.
Use the MP3 Player
The DynaVox Series 4 devices can be used to play MP3 song files.
The MP3 format is a compression system for music. This format
helps to reduce the size of a digitized song without diminishing the
sound quality. Songs can be downloaded to your device, added to
customized lists of songs (playlists) and played through the device’s
speaker.
MP3 PLAYER MENU
4-204
DynaVox Systems LLC
This can all be done with the tools that are provided in the MP3
Player menu:
Viewport
the MP3 files in the playlist that is currently
open. If the entire list cannot be displayed in
the viewport at one time, the viewport will
through the list.
Play Button
Use the Play button to begin playing the
songs in the open playlist.
Stop Button
Select the Stop button to completely stop
playing the music in the playlist.
Pause Button
Select the Pause button to temporarily stop
the music. When Pause is selected, the
button will become a Resume button. Select
Resume to continue playing the MP3 file.
Next MP3
Button
Select the Next MP3 button to skip the
current song and play the next song in the
playlist.
Previous MP3
Button
Select the Previous MP3 button to skip the
current song and play the song that is listed
before it in the playlist.
Progress Bar
The progress bar is the long, unlabeled
slider under the viewport. The thumb on the
progress bar will move as a song is playing,
indicating how much of the MP3 file has
been played.
New Playlist
Button
Select the New Playlist button to create and
name a new playlist.
Delete Current
Playlist Button
Use the Delete Current Playlist button to
permanently erase the open playlist.
Open Playlist
Button
Use this button to select a playlist and add
its songs to the MP3 Player viewport.
Add to Playlist
Button
Use this button to add a song to a selected
playlist.
4-205
4-206
Delete from
Playlist Button
When this button is selected, the song that
is selected in the viewport will be removed
from the open playlist.
Track Info
Button
Select this button to view information about
the MP3 file that is selected in the viewport.
Track information must be imported to the
DV4/MT4 device with the MP3 file to be
available for this feature.
Volume Slider
The unlabeled slider to the right of the
viewport is the volume slider. To adjust the
volume as a song is playing, select the
slider thumb and drag it to the right (to
increase the volume) or to the left (to
decrease the volume).
OK Button
Use the OK button to save any changes to
your MP3 playlists and close the MP3
Player menu.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create an MP3 Playlist and Add Songs
Follow these steps to create a playlist in the MP3 Player menu. A
playlist is a group of one or more MP3 song files that will be played in
order by the MP3 Player menu.
2 Note:
A temporary playlist can be created from MP3 files that exist on an
external source such as a removable USB storage device. A
playlist that will be saved and stored indefinitely can include only
MP3 files that are stored in the MP3 folder in your User Files folder.
If you want to create a permanent playlist and you have not already
added your song files to this folder, begin by following these steps:
• Import an MP3 File with a USB Storage Device or
• Import an MP3 File from a Windows Computer on page 4-217
• Import an MP3 File from a Macintosh Computer on
page 4-218
touch screen.
menu will open.
4. Select the MP3 Player button. The MP3 Player menu (page 4-204)
will open.
5. Select the New Playlist button. A system keyboard popup will
open.
6. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new playlist.
new playlist name will be displayed in the MP3 Player menu below
the track positioning slider (in the lower left corner).
4-207
8. Select the Add to Playlist button. A Select a File menu will open.
2 Note:
If the MP3 files you want to add are not in the MP3 folder, select
the Show All Directories check box. Then select the appropriate
folder in the left viewport (UMS_FOLDER for a USB storage device
or Storage Card 2 for a second data storage card) before
continuing with the next step. Remember that songs on a USB
storage device will no longer be available for the playlist once the
USB device is removed.
9. In the right viewport, select the check box beside the name of each
MP3 file that should be added to the playlist. The files will be added
to the playlist in the same order they appear in the Select a File
menu.
10. Select the OK button to close the Select a File menu. An hourglass
icon will be presented while the files are copied to the playlist. The
names of the selected files will be displayed in the viewport in the
MP3 Player menu.
11. Select the OK button to close the MP3 Player menu.
Delete a Whole Playlist
Follow these steps to delete a selected playlist:
touch screen.
menu will open.
will open.
4-208
DynaVox Systems LLC
5. Select the Open Playlist button. An Open Playlist menu will open.
6. Select the name of the playlist in the viewport. If necessary, use
the scroll buttons beside the viewport to find the playlist.
7. Select the OK button to close the Open Playlist menu. The
selected playlist will be loaded into the MP3 Player menu.
8. Select the Delete Current Playlist button.
9. Select the OK button to confirm that you want to delete the playlist.
Be careful, as the playlist cannot be retrieved once it has been
deleted.
Play MP3 Files
To open a playlist and play the MP3 files it contains, follow these
steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
will open.
the scroll buttons beside the viewport to look through all the
playlists.
4-209
7. Select the OK button to close the Open Playlist menu. The songs
in the playlist will now be displayed in the viewport of the MP3
Player menu.
8. Select the Play button. The songs in the playlist will be played in
the order they appear in the viewport. You can control the order in
which the MP3 files are being played by selecting any of the
following buttons in the MP3 Player menu:
Stop
Select the Stop button to completely stop
playing the music in the playlist.
Pause
Select the Pause button to temporarily stop
the music. When Pause is selected, the
button will become a Resume button. Select
Resume to continue playing the MP3 file.
Next MP3
Select the Next MP3 button to skip the
current song and play the next song in the
playlist.
Previous MP3
Select the Previous MP3 button to skip the
current song and play the song that is listed
before it in the playlist.
9. When you have finished listening to the MP3 files, select the OK
button to close the MP3 Player menu.
Edit a Playlist
Follow these steps to open a playlist and add or delete MP3 files:
touch screen.
4-210
DynaVox Systems LLC
menu will open.
will open.
playlists.
7. Select the OK button to close the Open Playlist menu. The songs
in the playlist will now be displayed in the viewport of the MP3
Player menu.
8. If you want to remove a song from the playlist, select the check box
beside the song name in the viewport and then complete the
remaining parts of this step. If you do not want to remove a song,
a. Select the Delete from Playlist button.
b. Select the OK button to confirm that you want to remove the
selected song from the playlist.
9. If you want to add a song to the playlist, select the Add to Playlist
button and complete the remaining parts of this step. If you do not
want to add a song, continue with step 10.
a. In the right viewport of the Select a File menu, select the check
box beside the name of the MP3 file that should be added to the
playlist.
2 Note:
If the MP3 files you want to add are not in the MP3 folder, select
the Show All Directories check box. Then select the appropriate
folder in the left viewport (UMS_FOLDER for a USB storage device
or Storage Card 2 for a second data storage card) before
continuing with the next step. Remember that songs on a USB
storage device will no longer be available for the playlist once the
USB device is removed.
4-211
b. Select the OK button to close the Select a File menu. An
hourglass icon will be presented while the file is copied to the
playlist. Continue with step 10.
View Track Information
If track information is available for an MP3 file, you can view it by
following these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
will open.
playlists.
7. Select the check box beside the MP3 file for which you want to see
information.
8. Select the Track Info button. If information about the MP3 file is
available, it will be presented in the Track Info window.
9. Select the OK button to close the Track Info window.
4-212
DynaVox Systems LLC
Copy an MP3 File onto a USB Storage
When an MP3 is saved on the DV4/MT4 device, the file is stored in
the MP3 folder within the User Files folder on the DV4/MT4 main data
storage card. Adding a copy of an MP3 file to a removable USB
storage device or a secondary data card will enable you to share the
file with other DV4/MT4 devices.
2 Note:
2 Note:
To copy an MP3 file to a USB device or second data card, follow the
steps below:
touch screen.
menu will open.
folder.
6. Select the MP3 folder. A list of available MP3 files will fill the right
viewport.
4-213
MP3 file you want to share.
2 Note:
Multiple MP3 files can be shared at one time. To do this, select the
check box beside the name of each MP3 file that should be
included.
automatically.
the folder) to which the MP3 file should be added:
Card2.
again.
an hourglass icon will appear while the MP3 file is being copied to
A copy of the selected song file can now be found on your USB
device or second storage card. If you want use your card or
storage device to share the MP3 file with another DynaVox Series
4 device, see the steps in Import an MP3 File with a USB
4-214
DynaVox Systems LLC
Share an MP3 File with a Windows
Computer
When an MP3 file is saved on the DV4/MT4 device, the file is stored
in the MP3 folder within the User Files folder on the DV4/MT4 main
data storage card. A USB connection between a Series 4 device and
a Windows computer can be used to send a copy of an MP3 file from
the User Files folder to the computer. Once the MP3 file is loaded on
the computer, it can be used with the DynaVox Series 4 page editing
MT4 device.
If you have added an MP3 file to your DV4 or MT4 device, you can
easily send it to a Windows computer by following the steps in Share
Exported Files with a Windows Computer on page 4-50.
Share an MP3 File with a Macintosh
Computer
When an MP3 file is saved on the DV4/MT4 device, the file is stored
in the MP3 folder within the User Files folder on the DV4/MT4 main
data storage card. A USB connection between a Series 4 device and
a Macintosh computer can be used to send a copy of an MP3 file
from the User Files folder to the computer. Once the MP3 file is
loaded on the computer, it can be used with the DynaVox Series 4
page editing software, sent to another computer or shared with
another DV4 or MT4 device.
If you have added an MP3 file to your DV4 or MT4 device, you can
easily send it to a Macintosh computer by following the steps in
4-215
Import an MP3 File with a USB Storage
MP3 files that are saved on a DV4/MT4 device can be shared with
other DynaVox Series 4 devices. If an MP3 file is loaded onto a USB
storage device or a secondary data card, this peripheral device can
be used to import the MP3 file to the File Browser menu on your
DV4/MT4 device.
2 Note:
2 Note:
touch screen.
menu will open.
the folder) that contains the MP3 file you want to import:
Card2.
4-216
DynaVox Systems LLC
MP3 file you want to import.
2 Note:
Multiple MP3 files can be imported at one time. To do this, select
the check box beside the name of each MP3 file that should be
imported.
automatically.
folder.
10. Select the MP3 folder.
an hourglass icon will appear while the MP3 file is being copied to
the MP3 folder.
The imported MP3 file is now available in the MP3 folder within the
User Files folder in the File Browser menu. The MP3 file is also
accessible to be played in the MP3 Player menu.
Import an MP3 File from a Windows
Computer
other DynaVox Series 4 devices. If an MP3 file has been loaded onto
a Windows computer, a USB connection between a Series 4 device
and the computer can be used to send a copy of the MP3 file from the
4-217
computer to the User Files folder on the DV4/MT4 device. To do this,
simply follow the steps in Import a File from a Windows Computer
on page 4-58.
Import an MP3 File from a Macintosh
Computer
other DynaVox Series 4 devices. If an MP3 file has been loaded onto
a Macintosh computer, a USB connection between a Series 4 device
and the computer can be used to send a copy of the MP3 file from the
computer to the User Files folder on the DV4/MT4 device. To do this,
simply follow the steps in Import a File from a Macintosh Computer
on page 4-62.
Use Macros to
Automate Tasks
DynaVox Series 4 software includes a macro feature that lets
DynaVox users create customized operations that include all the
behaviors for completing a complex procedure. Macros promote
efficiency since the Activate a Macro behavior enables a device user
to launch all the steps in a macro with only one button selection.
Macros can be combined with other features of your DV4 or MT4
device, like the DynaVox Series 4 environmental control capabilities.
Create macros for activities you do often, like turning on the TV for
favorite programs. A single macro could turn on the living room light,
turn on the television, change the channel and speak the message
“My show is on.”
For the DV4 and MT4 devices, macros are most often used with the
reminders feature. Since a reminder can be set to activate a macro, it
4-218
DynaVox Systems LLC
is possible to program your device to perform a series of behaviors
when a reminder is presented. For example, you may want to attach
the macro for turning on your favorite TV show to a reminder. The
reminder will let you know when it’s time for the show, and then
automatically launch the behaviors for controlling the TV.
MACRO EDITOR MENU
Macros can be created and edited with the features of the Macro
Editor menu:
Viewport
The viewport at the top of the Macro Editor
menu displays a list of all the available
macro files. If the entire list cannot be
displayed in the viewport at one time, the
viewport will feature a scroll bar that can be
used to look through the list.
Search Text Box
Use the Search feature to find a macro file
by name.
New Button
Use this button to create an original macro.
4-219
Delete Button
Use this button to permanently remove a
selected macro from the Macro Editor
viewport.
Edit Button
Use this button to make changes to a
selected macro’s name or behaviors.
Import Button
Select this button to add a macro to the
viewport from another source, such as a
computer, another Series 4 device, a
removable USB storage device or a
secondary storage card.
Export Button
macros with a computer, another Series 4
device, a removable USB storage device or
a secondary storage card.
OK Button
Selecting the OK button will close the Macro
Editor menu and save all the changes that
have been made within it.
Create a New Macro
To create an original macro, follow these steps:
1. Select the pull-down menu button at the top of the touch screen.
menu will open.
4. Select the Macro Editor button. The Macro Editor (page 4-219)
will open.
5. Select the New button in the Macro Editor menu. The Edit menu
will open.
7. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new macro.
4-220
DynaVox Systems LLC
new macro name will be displayed in the Name text box in the Edit
menu.
10. Select the Behaviors pull-down menu and then choose one of the
11 behavior categories that are displayed. The Behaviors viewport
will fill with the names of behaviors within the selected category.
2 Note:
Refer toAppendix A: Behavior Reference to learn more about the
various behaviors and their applications.
11. Select one behavior in the Behaviors viewport. You may need to
use the scroll buttons on the right side of the viewport to see all the
listed behaviors.
12. Select the Add button. If no further information is needed to enact
the behavior, the behavior name will be added to the Steps
viewport. If further information, such as text or the name of a page
or other file is needed, a window will open and prompt you to enter
the necessary information. Use the tools that are presented in the
window to enter the information and then select the OK button to
return to the Behavior Editor menu.
2 Note:
For step-by-step instructions for adding frequently used behaviors,
see Add Behaviors to Buttons on page 4-170.
13. To add additional behaviors to the new macro, repeat steps 10
through 12.
2 Note:
You may want the device to pause for a specific amount of time
between the steps in a macro. The Pause behavior can be used to
create delays between the steps of a macro.
4-221
14. Select the OK button to close the Behavior Editor menu. The
behavior(s) you selected will be displayed in the viewport beside
the Behaviors button.
15. Select the OK button to close the Edit menu. The new macro will
be displayed in the viewport of the Macro Editor menu.
16. Select the OK button to close the Macro Editor menu.
To use a macro, you can add it to a reminder in the Reminder
Editor menu. You can also use an Activate a Macro behavior to
assign the macro to a button. This behavior will launch the steps
to the selected macro whenever the button is selected. To learn
how to add a macro to a button, see Common Behaviors: Add an
Activate a Macro Behavior on page 4-175.
Add an Activate a Macro Behavior to a
Button
Macros can be attached to buttons through the Activate a Macro
behavior. Whenever a button with this behavior is selected, a specific
macro will be launched.
To add an Activate a Macro behavior to a button, follow these steps:
2. Select the button you want to use to launch the macro. A Modify
4-222
DynaVox Systems LLC
3. Select the Behaviors button. A Behavior Editor menu
2 Note:
5. Select the Common Behaviors option.
6. Select Activate a Macro in the Behaviors viewport.
7. Select the Add button. An Activate a Macro window will open. The
names of the available macros will be displayed in the viewport.
8. Select the name of the macro you want to assign to the button.
9. Select the OK button to close the Activate a Macro window. The
Activate a Macro behavior and the name of the selected macro will
be displayed in the Steps viewport in the Behavior Editor menu.
10. Select the OK button to close the Behavior Editor menu. The
Activate a Macro behavior will be listed beside the Behaviors
button in the Modify Button menu.
The selected macro will now be launched whenever the button with
the Activate a Macro behavior is selected. If you want to use the
Modify button to customize any of the button’s other attributes (its
label, symbol or color, for example), please refer to steps in the
Modify button section.
4-223
Edit a Macro
If you want to open a macro and make changes to its name or steps,
follow these steps:
menu will open.
4. Select the Macro Editor button. The Macro Editor menu
5. Select the name of the macro that you want to edit. If you have a
large list of macros in the viewport, use the scroll buttons to find
the one you are looking for.
6. Select the Edit button. An Edit menu will open.
7. If you want to change the name of the macro, select the Name text
box and complete this step. If you don’t want to change the name
of the macro, continue with step 8.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter a new macro name.
new macro name will be displayed in the Name text box.
8. To make changes to the steps in the macro, select the Behaviors
button and continue with the next step. If you don’t want to change
the macro steps, continue with step 11.
9. If you want to edit, reposition or delete an existing step, select
the appropriate behavior in the Steps viewport and then complete
with this step. If you want to change an existing step, continue with
step 10.
a. To delete the highlighted step, select the Delete button. The
step will be instantly deleted from the Steps viewport.
4-224
DynaVox Systems LLC
b. To move a highlighted step up one position up a multi-step list,
select the Move Up button. Keep selecting this button until the
step is appropriately repositioned. (The first step in a macro is
always listed at the top.)
c. To move a highlighted step down one position down a multi-step
list, select the Move Down button. Keep selecting this button
until the step is appropriately repositioned.
d. To make other changes to the highlighted step, select the Edit
button. Make the appropriate changes to the window that
opens, and then select the OK button to return to the Behavior
Editor menu.
10. If you want to add a new step to the macro, select the Behaviors
pull-down menu and complete the rest of this step. If you don’t
want to add a new step, continue with step 11.
a. Select the Behaviors pull-down menu and then choose one of
the 11 behavior categories that are displayed. The Behaviors
viewport will fill with the names of behaviors within the selected
category.
b. Select one behavior in the Behaviors viewport. You may need
to use the scroll buttons on the right side of the viewport to see
all the listed behaviors.
c. Select the Add button. If no further information is needed to
enact the behavior, it will be added to the Steps viewport. If
further information, such as text or the name of a page or other
file is needed, a window will open and prompt you to enter the
necessary information. Use the tools that are presented in the
window to enter the information and then select the OK button
to return to the Behavior Editor menu.
11. Select the OK button and return to the Edit menu.
12. Select the OK button to close the Edit menu.
4-225
Delete a Macro
To permanently remove a selected macro from the Macro Editor
viewport, follow these steps:
menu will open.
5. Select the check box beside the name of the macro that you want
to delete. If you have a large list of macros in the viewport, use the
scroll buttons to help you find the macro you want to delete.
2 Note:
You can delete more than one macro at a time by selecting the
check boxes beside the names of each of the macros you want to
delete.
7. Select the Yes button to confirm that you want to delete the macro.
Be careful, as you will not be able to retrieve a macro once it is
deleted.
Export a Macro to the User Files Folder
Sending a copy of a macro to a Windows or Macintosh computer will
enable you to share the macro with other DV4/MT4 devices. Before it
4-226
DynaVox Systems LLC
can be sent to the computer, though, a copy of the selected macro
must be sent to the Exports folder inside the User Files folder on your
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the check box beside the macro you want to export. If you
have a large list of macros in the viewport, use the scroll buttons
to look through the list.
2 Note:
You can export more than one macro at the same time by selecting
the check box beside the name of each macro that you want to
export.
6. Select the Export button. An Enter a Name for This Exported
Macro menu will open.
10. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the macro file that
will be exported.
2 Note:
The DynaVox Series 4 software automatically assigns a .mac
extension to the macro file name.
4-227
A copy of the selected macro (.mac) file can now be found in the
Exports folder within the User Files folder. If you want to send this
file to a computer, see the following steps:
page 4-50
page 4-55
Export a Macro to a USB Storage Device or
Secondary Storage Card
Exporting a copy of a macro file to a removable USB storage device
or a secondary data card will enable you to share the macro with
other DV4/MT4 devices. Macro files can be exported directly from the
Macro Editor menu to the card or storage device.
2 Note:
2 Note:
4-228
DynaVox Systems LLC
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the check box beside the macro you want to export. If you
have a large list of macros in the viewport, use the scroll buttons
to look through the list.
2 Note:
You can export more than one macro at the same time by selecting
the check box beside the name of each macro that you want to
export.
6. Select the Export button. An Enter a Name for This Exported
Macro menu will open.
If you are using a USB storage device, select UMS_FOLDER.
If you are using a second data storage card, select Storage
Card2.
10. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the macro file that
will be exported.
2 Note:
The DynaVox Series 4 software automatically assigns a .mac
extension to the macro file name.
4-229
A copy of the selected macro (.mac) file can now be found on your
USB device or second storage card. If you want use your card or
storage device to share the macro with another DynaVox Series 4
device, see Import a Macro with a USB Storage Device or
Second Data Card on page 4-232.
Share a Macro with a Windows Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a macro to the computer.
Once the macro is loaded on the computer, it can be used with the
The process of sending a macro (.mac) file to a Windows computer
Macro to the User Files Folder on page 4-226, and then you can
continue with Share Exported Files with a Windows Computer on
page 4-50.
Share a Macro with a Macintosh Computer
computer can be used to send a macro to the computer. Once the
macro is loaded on the computer, it can be sent to another computer
or shared with another DV4 or MT4 device.
The process of sending a macro (.mac) file to a Macintosh computer
4-230
DynaVox Systems LLC
Macro to the User Files Folder on page 4-226, and then you can
page 4-55.
Import a Macro from the Exports Folder
A USB cable connection can be used to send a new macro (one
shared from another DV4/MT4 device, for example) to your device.
This involves a two-step process, as the macro file cannot be
transferred directly from the computer to the Macro Editor menu. The
USB cable connection with the computer is used to add the macro file
to the Exports folder inside the User Files folder on your device’s
main data storage card.
2 Note:
The macro (.mac) file must be available in the Exports folder before
these steps can be started. If you have not yet added the macro file
to the Exports folder, begin with the following steps:
The macro is then imported to the Macro Editor menu with the
following steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4-231
5. Select the Import button. The Select Macro to Import menu will
open.
7. Select the Exports folder. Any available macro files will be listed
in the right viewport.
8. Select the check box beside the name of the macro you want to
import.
9. Select the OK button to close the Select Macro to Import menu.
The macro will be added to the viewport in the Macro Editor menu.
The new macro is now available in the Macro Editor menu.
Import a Macro with a USB Storage Device
or Second Data Card
Macros can be shared between DV4/MT4 users. If a macro file is
peripheral device can be used to import the macro directly to the
Macro Editor menu on your DV4/MT4 device.
2 Note:
4-232
DynaVox Systems LLC
2 Note:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the Import button. The Select Macro to Import menu will
open.
Card2.
Any available macro (.mac) files will be displayed in the right
viewport.
8. In the right viewport, select the name of the macro you want to
import.
9. Select the OK button to close the Select Macro to Import menu.
The macro will be added to the viewport in the Macro Editor menu.
4-233
The new macro is now available in the Macro Editor menu.
Import a Macro from a Windows Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a macro from the computer
to the DV4 or MT4 device. The process of importing a macro file from
a Windows computer to a Series 4 device involves two stages. First
you must follow the steps in Import a File from a Windows
computer to the device. Then you can continue with Import a Macro
from the Exports Folder on page 4-231. These steps will add the
macro to the Macro Editor menu.
Import a Macro from a Macintosh Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a macro from the computer
to the DV4 or MT4 device. The process of importing a macro file from
a Macintosh computer to a Series 4 device involves two stages. First
you must follow the steps in Import a File from a Macintosh
computer to the device. Then you can continue with Import a Macro
from the Exports Folder on page 4-231. These steps will add the
macro to the Macro Editor menu.
Create Personal
Reminders
4-234
Your DV4/MT4 device can be programmed to automatically remind
you of important events in your daily schedule. Each reminder can be
DynaVox Systems LLC
presented with a text message, a sound and/or a macro. When the
reminder is presented at the scheduled date and time, a small
reminder window will open in the middle of the touch screen. If a text
message is assigned to the reminder, it will appear in the reminder
window. The device can also be programmed to automatically speak
this text message. If no text message has been added to the
reminder, the name of the reminder will be displayed at the top of the
window. When this reminder window is presented, the user should
select the OK button to acknowledge the reminder and close the
window.
Once the OK button has been selected, the device will automatically
play any sound file that was assigned to the reminder. If a macro was
assigned to the reminder, the device’s next action will be to launch
the macro steps. Selecting the Cancel button in the reminder window
will stop the reminder before a sound file or macro can be started.
Tools for creating and editing reminders are provided in the Reminder
Editor menu.
REMINDER EDITOR
4-235
The Reminder Editor menu features the following options:
Viewport
a list of all the available reminders. If the
entire list cannot be displayed in the
through the list.
Search Text Box
Use the Search feature to look for a
reminder by name.
New Button
Use the New button to create an original
reminder.
Delete Button
Use the Delete button to permanently
remove a selected reminder from the
viewport.
Edit Button
Use the Edit button to make changes to a
selected reminder.
Enable/Disable
Button
Use the Enable/Disable button to turn a
selected reminder on or off. This button can
be used to toggle between both settings. If
the selected reminder is already turned on,
the button will be labeled Disable. If the
selected reminder is already turned off, only
an Enable button will be available.
OK Button
Select the OK button to save your work in
the Reminder Editor before closing the
menu.
Create a New Reminder
Follow these steps to create an original reminder:
touch screen.
4-236
DynaVox Systems LLC
menu will open.
4. Select the Reminder Editor button. The Reminder Editor menu
5. Select the New button. The Edit menu will open.
7. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new reminder.
new name will be displayed in the Name text box in the Edit menu.
9. Select the Enter Time button. An Enter Time window will appear.
Use this window to specify the time that you want to receive the
reminder.
a. Set the hour, minute, and second digits individually. When you
select each one of these digits, a keypad window will open to let
you enter the appropriate number. After entering each number,
select the OK button in the keypad to return to the Enter Time
window.
b. Select the AM or PM setting. This setting toggles between both
options.
c. Select the OK button to close the Enter Time window. Your time
selection will be displayed to the right of the Enter Time button.
10. Select the Enter Date button. An Enter Date window will open. Use
this window to specify the date that you want to receive the
reminder.
a. Set the day, date and year digits individually. When you select
each one of these digits, a keypad window will open to let you
enter the appropriate number. After entering each number,
select the OK button in the keypad to return to the Enter Date
window.
b. Select the OK button to close the Enter Date window. Your date
selection will appear to the right of the Enter Date button.
4-237
11. Enable the reminder by selecting the Reminder Enabled check
box.
12. A reminder can automatically power up your DV4 or MT4 if the
device is in low power mode when it is time for the reminder. If you
want this to happen, select the Power Up Device check box. If you
do not want the reminder to power up the device, make sure this
check box is deselected.
13. If you want the reminder to automatically speak a text message
that has been assigned to the reminder, select the Speak
Message check box.
14. If you want to add a text message to your reminder, select the
Message text box (a system keyboard popup will open) and then
complete this step. If you do not want to add a message to the
reminder, continue with the next step.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter a message.
new message will be displayed in the Message text box.
15. If you want to add a sound to the reminder, select the Play
Sound… button and complete this step. If you do not want to add
a sound, continue with the next step.
a. In the Play Sound... menu viewport, select the name of a sound
file. If you have a large list of sounds in the viewport, use the
scroll buttons to help you find the sound file you want to use.
b. Select the OK button. The name of the sound file you selected
will be displayed to the right of the Play Sound… button in the
Edit menu.
16. If you want the reminder to launch the steps in a macro, select the
Activate Macro button and complete this step. If you do not want
to add a macro to the reminder, continue with the next step.
a. In the Activate Macro… menu viewport, select the name of a
macro. If you have a large list of sounds in the viewport, use the
scroll buttons to help you find the sound file you want to use.
4-238
DynaVox Systems LLC
b. Select the OK button. The name of the macro you selected will
be displayed to the right of the Activate Macro… button in the
Edit menu.
17. Specify the number of times you want the new reminder to appear
by selecting the Occurrence pull-down menu and then selecting
one of the three available options:
Only Once
The reminder will be presented on time only.
Daily
The reminder will be presented at the same
time each day.
Weekly
The reminder will be presented on the same
day every week.
18. Select the OK button to close the Edit menu.
19. Select the OK button to close the Reminder Editor menu.
Delete a Reminder
Follow these steps to permanently remove a reminder from the
Reminder Editor menu:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4-239
5. Select the check box beside the name of the reminder that you
want to delete. If there is a large list of reminders in the viewport,
use the scroll buttons to help you find the reminder.
2 Note:
You can delete more than one reminder at the same time by
selecting the check boxes beside the name of each reminder you
want to delete.
7. Select the OK button and to confirm that you want to delete the
selected reminder. Be careful, as you will not be able to retrieve a
reminder once it has been deleted.
Disable a Reminder
Follow these steps to turn a selected reminder off:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the name of the reminder that you want to disable. If there
is a large list of reminders in the viewport, use the scroll buttons to
find the one you want.
4-240
DynaVox Systems LLC
6. Select the Disable button. Once the reminder is disabled, this
button will become an Enable button.
Enable a Reminder
Follow these steps to turn a selected reminder on:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the name of the reminder that you want to enable. If there
is a large list of reminders in the viewport, use the scroll buttons to
find the one you want.
6. Select the Enable button. Once the reminder is enabled, this
button will become a Disable button.
4-241
Edit a Reminder
Follow these steps to make changes to a reminder that is stored in
the Reminder Editor menu:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the name of the reminder that you want to edit. If the
viewport features a large list of reminders, use the scroll buttons to
find the appropriate file.
6. Select the Edit button. The Edit menu will open.
7. Refer to steps 6 through 25 in Create a New Reminder on
page 4-236 for information about using the tools in the Edit menu.
8. Select the OK button to save the changes and close the Edit menu.
Create and Use User
Setups Reports
4-242
Periodically saving your device’s user setups can be an effective time
saving method. The various settings and options that a user has
chosen to customize his or her device can be collected and stored in
the form of a report. Once the report has been saved, the user can
load the report and revert to his or her stored settings at any time.
DynaVox Systems LLC
This feature is especially helpful for situations where multiple users
may be sharing one device. Each user can have a report of his or her
own individual settings, and the appropriate user setup report can be
quickly loaded whenever the device changes hands.
It is also recommended that each Series 4 user create a user setups
report so that any preferred device settings can be easily restored in
the event of a device crash.
USER SETUPS REPORT
A user setups report includes the following:
Selection Method
Settings
The user setups report records the user’s chosen selection method
(selected in the Selection Method pull-down menu in the Setup
menu). It also saves the options that are selected for each individual
selection method. These options can be customized in the Selection
Method Settings menu that is presented for each method. The user
setups report also preserves the settings in the Audio Feedback
menu.
Speech Options
This part of the user setups report reflects the user’s selections in the
Speech Controls menu.
4-243
4-244
Prediction
Settings
This section of the user setups report records the rate enhancement
settings that have been created in the Prediction Settings menu.
Interface Features
The user setups report also preserves the settings recorded in the
Interface Features menu. The items in this menu affect the basic
device features like system keyboards, symbol preferences and
system menu color.
Show Message
Window Settings
This section of the user setups report includes settings that affect the
way text is presented and composed in the Message Window. The
actual Message Window settings can be accessed through the Show
Message Window Settings button in the Interface Features menu.
System Settings
The user setups report records the user’s selections in the System
Settings menu. These settings include the brightness of the touch
screen and backlight timeout (low power mode).
Data Logging
This section of the user setups report include the selected options in
the Data Logging menu that can be accessed through the System
Settings menu.
Input/Output
Settings
The user setups report also saves the printer selections in the
Input/Output Settings menu.
Page Editing
Preferences
The settings in the Preferences menu that is featured in page edit
mode are also recorded in a user setups report. These settings affect
the way that tools are presented when the Series 4 device is in page
edit mode.
Default Properties
The user setups report preserves the default settings that can be
established to govern the creation of new communication pages in
page edit mode. An individual can access these settings by selecting
the Show Object Properties button in the Preferences menu in page
edit mode. These include default settings for pages, popups, buttons,
symbol buttons, folder buttons, button grids, labels, boxes, dividers,
symbols and tab controls.
Active Labels
This section of the user setups report saves the information that was
added to the Series 4 User Setup Wizard.
My Swatches
The user setups report also preserves the custom colors that are
stored in the My Swatches tab pane of the Color Selector menu.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Save User Setups
Creating a report will save your user settings to enable them to be
restored if multiple individuals use the same device or in case of a
system crash.
To create a report that preserves your user settings, follow these
steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4. Select the User Setups button. The User Setups menu
5. Select the Save Setups button. A Save Setups menu will open.
7. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the user setups file.
8. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard. The file will be
saved in the Setups folder in the User Files folder.
9. Select the OK button to close the User Setups menu.
Load User Setups
Loading a user setups report will automatically change your device
settings to reflect the options in the selected report.
4-245
To restore your device settings to the state that is recorded in a user
setups report, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the Load Setups button. A Load Setups menu will open.
6. In the right viewport, highlight the name of the setup file you want
to use.
7. Select the OK button to close the Load Setups menu. The device
settings will be automatically reset according to the selected setup
file.
Print User Setups Report
Printing a user setup report will produce a hard copy of the
information that appears in the viewport of the User Setups menu. It
may be helpful to have a printed copy of your user setup report filed
as a backup, so that the settings can be restored by hand if
necessary.
2 Note:
4-246
Before beginning these steps, be sure that your device is
connected to a printer.
DynaVox Systems LLC
To print a user setup report, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the Print Setups button. If you have already defined your
printer settings, the report will print and you may continue with step
9. If you have not yet defined your printer settings, a Printer
Selection menu will open and you can continue with step 6.
6. Select the kind of printer you are using in the Printer Selection
viewport. Use the up and down scroll buttons to the right of the
viewport to see all the available printers.
7. Select the port you are using to connect your DV4 or MT4 device
to the printer in the Select Port viewport. Use the up and down
scroll buttons to the right of the viewport to see all the available
options.
8. Select the OK button to close the Printer Selection menu.
4-247
Configuration
5: System Setup
6: Hardware
7: Backing Up, Restoring, and Upgrading User Data
System Setup
This chapter addresses the various ways that the DV4/MT4 system
can be customized to meet the needs and preferences of an
individual. First, there are seven different selection methods by which
an individual can access information on the device. Each of these
selection methods can be adjusted and customized to promote
optimal speed and efficiency for an individual user.
The device’s speaking voice can also be customized. DynaVox
Series 4 devices provide nine DECtalk voices. Once a voice is
selected, the voice’s volume, rate and pronunciation of words can be
customized to suit an individual’s preferences.
In addition, each individual user can select his or her own
preferences regarding the brightness of the touch screen, the
appearance of objects on the touch screen, the use of battery-saving
5-1
Chapter 5: System Setup
features, the use of password protection and the symbols that are
provided for use on communication pages.
Be sure to read through the menu descriptions and step-by-step
instructions in this chapter to learn the best practices for customizing
your device’s basic settings.
5-2
DynaVox Systems LLC
Set Selection Methods
SET SELECTION METHODS
Since the DynaVox Series 4 devices are designed to meet the varied
physical and cognitive needs of many individuals, both the DV4 and
the MT4 offer seven different ways to access information and send
input to the device. Each of these unique selection methods can be
customized to suit the specific needs and goals of an individual.
In addition to making selections by pressing the touch screen,
individuals can access DV4 and MT4 devices through scanning,
joysticks, audio touch, mouse pause and Morse code. Each of these
selection methods can be activated in the Selection Method pulldown menu that is at the top of the Setup menu. Once a selection
method has been chosen, it can be customized in the menu that is
presented when the Selection Method Settings button (also in the
Setup menu) is chosen. Since each selection method has its own
unique attributes, a different settings menu will be presented for each
one.
SELECTION METHODS MENU AND SETTINGS
The following sections offer a brief explanation of each selection
method. Step-by-step instructions for selecting and customizing each
selection method are also provided.
5-3
Activate and Customize the Touch Enter
Selection Method
The touch enter selection method relies on the device’s touch screen.
The individual using the device selects each item on the touch screen
by physically touching it with a finger or a pointing device, or by
selecting it with a mouse click. This is direct selection. With touch
enter direct selection, the selected object is activated as soon as the
touch is initiated. This selection method is ideal for individuals who
have the fine motor skills and visual/cognitive abilities that are
needed to recognize and select vocabulary items or symbols.
Touch enter is the default selection method for DynaVox Series 4
devices, so it is automatically active in new devices. If your device’s
selection method has been changed, use these steps to return to the
touch enter selection method:
menu will open.
4. Use the Selection Method pull-down menu to choose the Touch
Enter selection method.
5-4
DynaVox Systems LLC
5. Select the Selection Method Settings button. The Touch Settings
menu will open.
TOUCH SETTINGS MENU
6. Customize the behavior of the selection method by adjusting the
two sliders:
Hold Time
Select the Hold Time slider to define the
amount of time a user must maintain contact
with an item on the touch screen for the item
to be selected. To increase the hold time,
select the Hold Time slider thumb and drag
it to the right. To reduce the amount of hold
time required to make a selection, move the
slider thumb to the left.
Release Time
Select the Release Time slider to define the
amount of time that elapses between the
removal of contact from an item on the
touch screen and the item’s selection. If you
want to increase the required release time,
select the Release Time slider thumb and
drag it to the right. To make selections with
a shorter release time, move the slider
thumb to the left.
5-5
7. If you want the device to zoom in on an area of the touch screen
whenever a selection is made, select the Autozoom check box. If
you do not want to use the autozoom feature, make sure the
Autozoom check box is deselected.
8. Select the OK button to save the settings and close the Touch
Settings menu.
Activate and Customize the Touch Exit
Selection Method
This direct selection method is similar to touch enter, but the touch
exit option means that a selected object is activated when the
selection is released. This method allows the individual who is using
the device to maintain contact with the touch screen without
accidentally making a selection. This means that the individual using
the device may slide a finger or a pointer across the screen, or hold
down on a mouse button while moving the cursor. A selection will not
be made until the finger or pointer lifts off the screen, or when the
mouse button is released. This makes the touch exit selection
method ideal for a person who may find it easier drag a finger or a
pointer across the touch screen while moving from selection to
selection.
You can activate and customize the touch exit selection method by
following these steps:
menu will open.
5-6
DynaVox Systems LLC
4. Use the Selection Method pull-down menu to choose the Touch
Exit selection method.
5. Select the Selection Method Settings button. The Touch Settings
menu will open.
TOUCH SETTINGS MENU
6. Customize the behavior of the selection method by adjusting the
two sliders:
Hold Time
select the Hold Time slider thumb and drag
it to the right. To reduce the amount of hold
time required to make a selection, move the
5-7
Release Time
amount of time that lapses between the
thumb to the left.
7. If you want the device to highlight the area of the touch screen that
is being selected, select the Highlight Target check box. If you do
not want items on the screen to be highlighted, make sure the
Highlight Target check box is deselected.
8. Select the OK button to save the settings and close the Touch
Settings menu.
Activate and Customize the Scanning
Selection Method
Scanning is intended for individuals whose motor skills may prevent
them from effectively using direct selection. When scanning is the
active selection method, the DynaVox Series 4 software will highlight
objects on the DynaVox touch screen in a specific pattern. The
person who is using the device will use a switch or other device to
make a selection when the desired item is highlighted.
Scanning selection includes two primary methods: visual scanning
and auditory scanning. Individuals who are using visual scanning
must be able to identify the moving highlight and visually identify
items on the touch screen. Auditory scanning is an ideal selection
method for individuals whose visual abilities do not allow them to
5-8
DynaVox Systems LLC
visually identify choices on the touch screen. When auditory scanning
is being used, the DynaVox device will speak cues for the choices as
they are highlighted. The person using the device makes a selection
upon hearing the desired choice. Auditory scanning can also work
well for individuals who can see the touch screen but would benefit
from an auditory reinforcement of their vocabulary choices.
Follow these steps to activate and customize the scanning selection
method:
menu will open.
4. Use the Selection Method pull-down menu to choose the
Scanning selection method.
5. Select the Selection Method Settings button. The Scanning
Settings menu will open.
SCANNING SETTINGS MENU
5-9
6. Select the Scan Type pull-down menu and then select one of the
four available options:
Autoscanning
When the autoscan feature is being used,
the movement of the scanning highlight
begins automatically.
1 Switch
The one-switch scanning option requires the
connection of a single switch to one of the
device’s switch ports. The first activation of
the switch will start the scan. A second
activation of the switch will select a
highlighted object.
2 Switch
The two-switch scanning option requires
two switches connected to the device. One
switch is used to start the movement of the
scan highlight. The second switch is used to
make selections.
Inverse
An individual using inverse scanning will
activate a switch to move the scanning
highlight across the touch screen. When the
individual stops selecting the switch, the
highlighted object will be selected.
7. Select the Touch Screen pull-down menu and then select one of
the three available options:
Is a Switch
5-10
A physical selection on the touch screen
can be used to start the movement of the
scanning highlight or to select a highlighted
item. This option can be used if Autoscan or
Inverse is selected in the Scan Type pulldown menu.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Records
Position
A physical selection on the touch screen will
override the position of the scanning
highlight and make a selection. This option
may be useful for an individual who is
learning to use the system.
Is Disabled
The Series 4 software disregards physical
selections on the touch screen.
8. Select the Number of Passes pull-down menu and then select
one of the available options. The device can be set to scan
infinitely or to stop scanning if no selection has been made after
the touch screen has been scanned a set number of times.
2 Note:
If you want the device to stop scanning if a selection has not been
made after a certain number of passes, you must also select the
Scan After N Passes check box in step 13.
9. If you want the Message Window to be included in the scan
pattern, select the Scan Message Window check box. If the
Message Window should not be scanned, make sure the check
box is deselected.
10. If you want blank buttons to be included in the scan pattern, select
the Scan Blank Buttons check box. If blank buttons should not be
scanned, make sure the check box is deselected.
11. When a selection is made, scanning can start again at the location
of the selection or it can start again at the top of the page. If you
want to restart scanning where the selection was made, select the
Start from Last Selection check box. If you want to restart
scanning at the top of the page, make sure the check box is
deselected.
12. If you want scanning to automatically resume after a selection is
made, select the Scan after Selection check box. If the scan
5-11
pattern should wait for a cue to start again, make sure the check
box is deselected.
13. If you want to hear a click whenever the highlight moves from one
group or object to another, select the Click check box. If you do
not want to hear a click when the highlight moves, make sure the
14. If you want the device to stop scanning when no selection is made
after the screen has been scanned a certain number of times,
select the Scan After N Passes check box. When this check box
is selected, the device will stop scanning after the number of
passes that is set in the Number of Passes pull-down menu.
15. If you want the device to automatically increase the size of each
object as it is scanned, select the Zoom check box. If each item
should maintain its original size, make sure the check box is
deselected.
16. The “up a level” arrow can be used to move the scanning highlight
back one level. For example, if Row/Column scanning is in use,
selecting the “up a level” arrow would move the highlight back to
the previous row when it would normally continue to the next row.
If you want the “up a level” arrow to be presented when you are
scanning, select the ‘Up a Level’ Arrow check box. If you don’t
want to use the “up a level” arrow, make sure the check box is
deselected.
17. If you want to activate the group scanning feature so you can use
your own customized scan pattern, select the Scanning check
box. If you do not want to use group scanning, make sure the
2 Note:
Step-by-step instructions for setting up a group scanning pattern
are available in the advanced page editing section of this
documentation.
18. Select the Scan Pattern button. A Scan Pattern menu will open.
5-12
DynaVox Systems LLC
19. Select the pull-down menu at the top of the Scan Pattern menu and
then select one of the seven available scan pattern options:
2 Note:
The two grids below the Scan Pattern pull-down menu will illustrate
the behavior of the selected scan pattern.
Row/Column
The Row/Column scan pattern highlights
each row individually. When a row is
selected, the highlight then moves from left
to right across the buttons in the row.
Column/Row
The Column/Row scan pattern highlights
each column individually. When a column is
selected, the highlight then moves from top
to bottom over the buttons in the column.
Left/Right
The Left/Right scan pattern highlights the
left and right halves of the touch screen.
When one section is selected, then the scan
highlights the columns in the selected half.
Once a column is chosen, the highlight
moves from top to bottom over the buttons
in the column.
Left/Center/
Right
The Left/Center/Right scan pattern
highlights the far left, center and far right
thirds of the touch screen. When one
section is selected, then the scan highlights
the columns in the selected third of the
screen. Once a column is chosen, the
highlight moves from top to bottom over the
buttons in the column.
Six Zones
The Six Zones scan pattern highlights six
screen areas in a set order. When one
section is selected, then the scan highlights
the rows in the selected area of the screen.
Once a row is chosen, the highlight moves
from top to bottom across the buttons in the
row.
5-13
Linear
The Linear scan pattern highlights each row
on the touch screen button by button. This
scan pattern moves from top to bottom and
from left to right.
Top/Bottom
The Top/Bottom scan pattern highlights the
top and bottom halves of the screen. When
one half is selected, then the scan highlights
the rows in that half. Once a row is chosen,
the highlight moves from top to bottom
across the buttons in the row.
option.
20. Select the OK button to close the Scan Pattern menu.
21. Select the Audio Feedback button. An Audio Feedback menu will
open. Continue with Activate and Customize Audio Feedback
on page 5-29. Then return here.
22. Select the Scan Timing button. A Scan Timing menu will open.
SCAN TIMING MENU
5-14
DynaVox Systems LLC
23. Customize scan timing by adjusting the five sliders in this menu:
Scan Speed
The setting of the Scan Speed slider
determines the speed at which the scanning
highlight will move. To adjust the speed of
the scan pattern, select the slider thumb in
the Scan Speed slider and drag it to the
right or left. Moving the slider thumb to the
right will increase the speed at which the
highlight moves across the touch screen.
Moving the slider thumb to the left will slow
the scan speed.
Delay when
Changing Levels
The Delay when Changing Levels slider can
be used to adjust the amount of time the
device will pause between scanning two
levels (for example, between scanning rows
and scanning the buttons in a selected row).
To adjust the Delay when Changing Levels
slider, select the slider thumb and drag it to
the right or left. Moving the slider thumb to
the right will increase the length of the
pause. Moving the slider thumb to the left
will make the pause shorter.
Hold Time
The setting of the Hold Time slider
determines how long a switch must be
activated to make a selection. To adjust the
Hold Time slider, select the slider thumb
and drag it to the right or left. Moving the
slider thumb to the right will increase the
hold down time. Moving the slider thumb to
the left will reduce the amount of hold time
needed to make a selection.
5-15
Release Time
The setting of the Release Time slider
affects the amount of time the device will
pause before starting to scan again after a
selection is made. To adjust the Release
Time slider, select the slider thumb and drag
it to the right or left. Moving the slider thumb
to the right will increase the time between
the release of the switch and the start of
scanning. Moving the slider thumb to the left
will shorten the release time.
1-Switch Pause
Time
The 1-Switch Pause Time slider can be
used to specify the length of time a user
must maintain contact with the switch to
select an object when 1-switch scanning is
being used. To adjust the 1-Switch Pause
Time slider, select the slider thumb and drag
to the right will increase the activation time
and moving the slider thumb to the left will
reduce it.
24. Select the OK button to save the settings and close the Scan
Timing menu.
25. Select the OK button to save the settings and close the Scanning
Settings menu.
Activate and Customize the Joystick
Selection Method
The Joystick selection method is a form of direct selection that lets an
individual use a joystick to move a highlight across the touch screen,
highlighting each item individually. When the desired item is
highlighted, the joystick or a secondary switch is used to make the
5-16
DynaVox Systems LLC
selection. This selection method may be a good fit for individuals
whose motor skills do not allow them to successfully use the touch
enter or touch exit selection methods, but who can effectively use a
joystick to direct the movement of the highlight to the desired
location. Direct selection through a joystick will allow for quicker
spontaneous message composition than the scanning selection
method. Since auditory cues can be used with the joystick selection
method, this method is also applicable to individuals who may have
difficulty seeing items on the touch screen, or to individuals who
would benefit from auditory reinforcement of their selections.
2 Note:
The joystick selection method for DynaVox Series 4 devices will
work with USB joysticks that can be purchased at any computer
supply store. “Switch type” joysticks that can be connected to the
DynaVox devices with the help of a serial-to-USB adapter may also
be used. This type of switch joystick is available through DynaVox
Systems LLC.
Follow these steps to activate and customize the joystick selection
method:
menu will open.
4. Use the Selection Method pull-down menu to choose the Joystick
selection method.
5-17
5. Select the Selection Method Settings button. The Joystick
JOYSTICK SETTINGS MENU
6. If you want the highlight to automatically go back to the beginning
of a row of buttons when it reaches the end of a row, select the
Wrap Around check box. If you do not want to use this feature,
make sure the check box is deselected.
7. If you want the highlight to return to the center of the touch screen
after a selection is made, select the Joystick Center check box. If
you want the highlight to remain where the selection was made,
8. Select the Joystick Select pull-down menu and choose one of the
three available settings:
Fire
5-18
A Fire button on the joystick is activated to
select a highlighted item on the touch
screen.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Pause
If the movement of the highlight is stopped
for a specified amount of time, the
highlighted item is selected. The amount of
time the highlight must pause is determined
by the setting of the Pause Time slider in
step 11.
External Switch
The individual who is using the device uses
a joystick to move the highlight across the
touch screen and activates a separate
external switch to select a highlighted item.
9. If you want to use audio feedback, select the Audio Feedback
button. An Audio Feedback menu will open. Continue with
Activate and Customize Audio Feedback on page 5-29. Then
return here.
10. To adjust the speed at which the highlight will move across the
touch screen, select the slider thumb in the Joystick Speed slider
and drag it to the left or right. Moving the slider thumb to the right
will increase the speed of the highlight. Moving the slider thumb to
the left will slow the highlight.
11. If you have set the Joystick Select menu to Pause, select the slider
thumb in the Pause Time slider and drag it to the left or right.
Moving the slider thumb to the right will increase the length of time
the highlight must pause to make a selection. Moving the slider
thumb to the left will reduce the pause time.
12. Select the OK button to save the settings and close the Joystick
Settings menu.
5-19
Activate and Customize the Audio Touch
Selection Method
The audio touch selection method combines the speed of direct
selection with the auditory cues that are typically associated with
scanning. When audio touch is the active selection method, the
individual using the DynaVox device makes selections by touching
the touch screen. As the individual drags a finger (or a stylus, pointer
or other means of contact) across the screen, the device will speak
the options that are being passed.
This selection method is very effective for individuals who have the
motor skills to use a touch panel or a computer mouse, but who also
have limited vision and need to rely on auditory cues to make
selections. Audio touch can also be successfully applied to
individuals who have the visual ability to use the touch enter or touch
exit selection methods, but who would benefit from an auditory
reinforcement of their vocabulary choices.
To activate and customize the audio touch selection method, use the
following steps:
menu will open.
4. Use the Selection Method pull-down menu to choose the Audio
Touch selection method.
5-20
DynaVox Systems LLC
5. Select the Selection Method Settings button. The Audio Touch
AUDIO TOUCH SETTINGS MENU
6. Customize hold time and release time by adjusting the two sliders
at the top of the menu:
Hold Time
select the Hold Time slider thumb drag it to
the right. To reduce the amount of hold time
required to make a selection, move the
5-21
Release Time
amount of time that lapses between the
thumb to the left.
7. If you want the device to highlight the area of the touch screen that
is being selected, select the Highlight Target check box. If you do
not want items on the screen to be highlighted, make sure the
8. Select the Audio Feedback button. An Audio Feedback menu will
open. Continue with Activate and Customize Audio Feedback
on page 5-29. Then return here.
9. Select the OK button to save the settings and close the Audio
Touch Settings menu.
Activate and Customize the Mouse Pause
Selection Method
The mouse pause selection method is an excellent direct select
option for an individual who has the physical ability to maneuver a
mouse to direct a cursor on the DynaVox touch screen, but who lacks
the ability to press down on the mouse button to make selections.
When the mouse pause selection method is active, moving a
computer mouse or track ball connected to the DynaVox device will
control a cursor on the touch screen. An item will be selected when
the cursor pauses on it for a specified amount of time.
5-22
DynaVox Systems LLC
Follow these steps to activate and customize the mouse pause
selection method:
menu will open.
4. Use the Selection Method pull-down menu to choose the Mouse
Pause selection method.
5. Select the Selection Method Settings button. The Mouse Pause
MOUSE PAUSE SETTINGS
5-23
6. Select the Select With pull-down menu and then select one of the
two available options:
Pause
If the movement of the highlight is stopped
for a specified amount of time, the
highlighted item is selected. The amount of
time the highlight must pause is determined
by the setting of the Pause Time slider in
step 9.
External Switch
The individual who is using the device uses
a mouse to move the cursor across the
touch screen and activates a separate
external switch to select a highlighted item.
7. Customize the speed at which the cursor will move across the
screen by adjusting the two sliders at the top of the menu:
5-24
Mouse X Speed
Use the Mouse X Speed slider to adjust the
speed of the mouse cursor when it is
moving in a horizontal direction across the
touch screen. To adjust this slider, select the
slider thumb and maintain the selection
while you drag it to the right or left. Moving
the slider thumb to the right will increase the
speed at which the cursor moves across the
touch screen. Moving the slider thumb to
the left will slow the cursor.
Mouse Y Speed
Use the Mouse Y Speed slider to adjust the
speed of the mouse cursor when it is
moving in a vertical direction, up and down
the touch screen. To adjust this slider, select
the slider thumb and maintain the selection
while you drag it to the right or left. Moving
the slider thumb to the right will increase the
speed at which the cursor moves across the
touch screen. Moving the slider thumb to
the left will slow the cursor.
DynaVox Systems LLC
8. If you have set the Select With menu to Pause, select the slider
thumb in the Pause Time slider and drag it to the left or right.
Moving the slider thumb to the right will increase the length of time
the mouse must pause to make a selection. Moving the slider
thumb to the left will reduce the pause time.
9. Select the OK button to save the settings and close the Mouse
Pause Settings menu.
Activate and Customize the Morse Code
Selection Method
The use of Morse code as a selection method is one way to increase
speed and accuracy for individuals who need to use a switch input
device to access their DynaVox. When active, the Morse code
selection method adds a Morse code tag to every item on the touch
screen. The person using the device then uses one or two switches
to enter the Morse code for the item they want to select. Since the
Morse code tags are automatically supplied for any onscreen options,
it is not necessary for an individual to know Morse code before using
this selection method. This unique option allows individuals to make
direct switch selections instead of waiting for a scan to highlight the
individual items.
The Morse code used for this selection method is the Morse Code
Input System for Windows 2000. This is an enhanced version of
standard Morse code and includes Morse code tags for punctuation
and standard computer commands. With these expanded features,
individuals can use the Morse code selection method with the
computer access features of the DV4 and MT4.
5-25
To activate and customize the Morse code selection method, follow
these steps:
menu will open.
4. Use the Selection Method pull-down menu to choose the Morse
Code selection method.
5. Select the Selection Method Settings button. The Morse Code
MORSE CODE SETTINGS MENU
5-26
DynaVox Systems LLC
6. Select the Input pull-down menu and then select one of the two
available options:
1 Switch
One switch is connected to one of the
device’s switch ports. A longer selection of
the switch will produce a Morse code dash
and a shorter selection will produce a dot.
The required length of the selections is
determined by the setting of the Dot vs.
Dash Threshold slider.
2 Switch
Two switches are connected to the device’s
switch ports. One switch is used to create
Morse code dashes and the other switch is
used to create dots.
7. If you will be using visual feedback with this selection method,
select the Code Size pull-down menu and select one of the
available options: Small, Medium and Large. The pull-down menu
will close and display only the chosen option. Remember that the
Visual Feedback check box must be selected in step 9 for the
setting of this pull-down menu to be effective.
8. If you want to hear the Morse code dots and dashes, select the
Audio Feedback check box. If you do not want to use this feature,
9. If you want the Morse code dots and dashes to be presented on
the touch screen, select the Visual Feedback check box (and be
sure to select a size for the visual feedback in step 7). If you do not
want to use this feature, make sure the check box is deselected.
10. If you want an entry (a dot or a dash) to keep repeating when you
hold down on a selection, select the Autorepeat check box. If you
don’t want a prolonged selection to result in multiple dots or
dashes, make sure the check box is deselected.
5-27
11. Adjust the sliders at the bottom of the menu to further customize
the behavior of the Morse code selection method:
5-28
Dot vs. Dash
Threshold
The setting of the Dot vs. Dash Threshold
slider determines the how much longer a
switch selection must be maintained to
produce a dash instead of a dot. To adjust
this slider, select the slider thumb drag it to
the right or left. Moving the slider thumb to
the right will increase the amount of
selection time that is required to create a
dash. Moving the slider thumb to the left will
lessen the amount of time the user must
maintain a selection to create a dash.
Character End
Repeated switch selections are used to
create the dashes and dots that make up
letters in the Morse code alphabet. Because
several selections can be required to enter
one character, there must be a significant
pause between the end of one character
and the beginning of another. The required
length of this pause is determined by the
setting of the Character End slider. To adjust
this slider, select the slider thumb and drag
to the right will increase the amount of
pause time. Moving the slider thumb to the
left will reduce the amount of time a user
must pause before beginning to select
another character.
Hold Time
The setting of the Hold Time slider
determines the amount of time an individual
must maintain contact with a switch to make
a selection. To adjust this slider, select the
slider thumb and drag it to the right or left.
Moving the slider thumb to the right will
require a user to maintain contact with the
switch for a longer time before a selection is
accepted. Moving the slider thumb to the left
will shorten the hold time.
DynaVox Systems LLC
12. Select the OK button to save the settings and close the Morse
Code Settings menu.
Activate and Customize Audio Feedback
Audio feedback can be used to make a selection method more
effective for individuals who have a hard time visually identifying
choices on the touch screen or who would benefit from an auditory
reinforcement of their choices. This feature relies on audio cues,
which are short messages that are spoken by the device (through the
main speaker or a private headphone attached to the device’s
speaker jack) to identify each item on the touch screen.
AUDIO FEEDBACK MENU
Audio feedback can be used to enhance the scanning, joystick
selection, audio touch and Morse code selection methods. If you
select the Audio Feedback button while customizing one of these
5-29
selection methods, you can set up audio feedback by following these
steps:
1. Activate audio feedback by selecting the Audio Feedback check
box. If you do not want to use audio feedback, make sure the
2. If you want to send audio feedback through a private speaker,
select the Private Output check box. If audio feedback should
play through the main device speaker, make sure the check box is
deselected.
3. If you want the audio feedback voice to be different than the main
speaking voice, select the Voice pull-down menu and then select
one of the available voice options.
4. Select the Announce Using pull-down menu and then select one
of the two available options:
Label
The device will speak the button’s label as
audio feedback.
Audio Scan Cue
The device will speak audio scan cue text
as audio feedback. An audio scan cue is an
unseen bit of text that can be added when a
new button is created. Audio scan cues can
also be added to an existing button through
the Modify Button menu (page 2-37).
5-30
DynaVox Systems LLC
5. Continue to customize the way audio feedback is presented by
adjusting the two sliders at the bottom of the menu:
Volume
The Volume slider enables you to specify
the volume at which audio feedback will be
spoken by the device. To adjust this slider,
select the slider thumb and drag it to the
right or left. Moving the slider thumb to the
right will increase the volume of audio
feedback. Moving the slider thumb to the left
will make audio feedback quieter.
Rate
The Rate slider enables you to adjust the
speed at which audio cues are spoken by
the device. To adjust this slider, select the
slider thumb and drag it to the right or left.
Moving the slider thumb to the right will
increase the rate at which audio feedback is
spoken. Moving the slider thumb to the left
will make audio feedback slower.
6. Select the OK button to save the new settings and return to the
previous menu.
5-31
Set DV4/MT4 Preferences
SET DV4/MT4 PREFERENCES
The System Settings menu provides tools for customizing some
important features of your device. This menu can be used to activate
or deactivate a feature that will conserve battery power (backlight
timeout), adjust the brightness of the light behind the touch screen
and to set your device’s date and time.
SYSTEM SETTINGS MENU
This section includes and overview of the System Settings menu and
step-by-step instructions for the activities mentioned above.
Adjust the Brightness Setting
The amount of light behind the DV4/MT4 touch screen can be
adjusted to suit the visual needs of the individual who is using the
device and to use less battery power when the device is active. If the
5-32
DynaVox Systems LLC
light behind the touch screen is kept at a lower level, it will use less
power.
Use these steps to adjust the brightness of the screen:
1. Select the pull-down menu button.
open.
3. Select System Settings in the second pull-down menu. The
System Settings menu will open.
BRIGHTNESS SLIDER IN SYSTEMS SETTINGS MENU
4. Select the slider thumb on the Brightness slider. Maintain the
selection while you drag the slider thumb left or right. Sliding the
thumb toward the left of the slider will dim the screen. Sliding the
thumb toward the right will increase screen brightness.
5. Select the Demo Screen Settings button. The touch screen will
be automatically adjusted to reflect your new brightness setting.
5-33
6. If your brightness setting still needs adjustments, repeat steps 4
and 5.
7. Select the OK button to close the System Settings menu.
The amount of light behind the touch screen will immediately be
adjusted to match the new setting.
Set Backlight Timeout
You can conserve battery power by selecting a backlight timeout
setting for your device. When your device is on, the backlight timeout
feature will slightly dim the touch screen if no selections have been
for a specified period of time. The dimmed screen will use less
battery power than the normal brightness setting. When the device is
in backlight timeout mode, you need simply to make a selection
anywhere on the screen to return to the normal screen brightness.
To set the backlight timeout, follow these steps:
open.
5-34
DynaVox Systems LLC
BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT MENU
4. Select the Backlight Timeout pull-down menu and then select
one of the four available options:
1 Minute
The touch screen will dim if no selection is
made for one minute.
5 Minutes
made for five minutes.
30 Minutes
made for thirty minutes.
Off
The Backlight Timeout feature will be
inactive. The touch screen will never dim.
The new backlight timeout setting will be effective immediately.
5-35
Set Date
Once the date setting is correctly established, the DV4/MT4 device
can keep track of the current date. Active labels can be used to
display the date on a communication page. The date feature is also
necessary for reminders.
Set the correct date by following these steps:
open.
4. Select the Set Date button. An Enter Date menu will open.
ENTER DATE MENU
5. Select the month digits. An Enter Month menu will open.
6. Use the buttons in the number pad in the Enter Month menu to
enter the current month.
7. Select the OK button to return to the Enter Date menu.
8. Select the day digits. An Enter Day menu will open.
9. Use the buttons in the number pad in the Enter Day menu to enter
the current day.
5-36
DynaVox Systems LLC
11. Select the year digits. An Enter Year menu will open.
12. Use the buttons in the number pad in the Enter Year menu to enter
the current year.
14. Select the OK button to close the Enter Date menu.
The new date setting is now in effect.
Set Time
Once the time setting is correctly established, the DV4/MT4 device
can keep track of the current time. Active labels can be used to
display the time on a communication page. The time feature is also
necessary for reminders.
Set the correct time by following these steps:
open.
4. Select the Set Time button. An Enter Time menu will open.
ENTER TIME MENU
5-37
5. Select the hour digits. An Enter Hours menu will open.
6. Use the buttons in the number pad in the Enter Hours menu to
enter the current hour (1-12).
7. Select the OK button to return to the Enter Time menu.
8. Select the minute digits. An Enter Minutes menu will open.
9. Use the buttons in the number pad in the Enter Minutes menu to
enter the current minutes (00-59).
11. Select the seconds digits. An Enter Seconds menu will open.
12. Use the buttons in the number pad in the Enter Seconds menu to
enter the current seconds (00-59).
14. Select the AM/PM setting. This setting toggles between the two
options. For example, if you select the AM/PM setting when PM is
displayed, the setting will change to AM.
15. Select the OK button to close the Enter Time menu.
The new time setting is now in effect.
Setting Up Data Logging
The data logging feature on your DV4/MT4 device can be used to
keep a record of how often the device is used and which pages or
buttons are being frequently selected. Data logging can provide
information that is helpful in tailoring the device to the needs of an
individual.
To set up data logging, follow these steps:
5-38
DynaVox Systems LLC
open.
4. Select the Data Logging button. A Data Logging menu will open.
DATA LOGGING MENU
5. Specify the type of information that should be logged by selecting
any of the check boxes at the top of the menu:
Encrypt Text
The contents of the log file will be kept
private so unauthorized individuals cannot
easily view the log file.
Text Output
Text that was composed in the Message
Window will be added to the log file.
Page Names
The communication pages or popups that
the user selects will be recorded in the data
log.
5-39
Timestamp
A time and date for each selection will be
recorded in the log file.
Behavior
Information
The behaviors associated with the selected
buttons will be included in the log file.
Button Labels
The labels of the selected buttons will be
added to the log file.
6. Select the Start Logging button to begin compiling the log file.
Once the Start Logging button is selected, it is replaced with a Stop
Logging button that can be used to stop the compilation of the log
file.
7. Select the OK button to close the Data Logging menu.
5-40
DynaVox Systems LLC
Modify Speech Controls
MODIFY SPEECH CONTROLS
Your device’s speaking voice is a highly customizable part of the
DynaVox Series 4 software. The DV4 and MT4 devices provide a
range of voices that are suitable for men and women of all ages.
Once selected, each of these voices can be further adjusted to suit
the preferences of the individual who is using the device. Each
individual user can specify how loud and how fast his or her selected
voice will speak.
In addition, pronunciation exceptions can be used to customize the
synthetic voice’s pronunciation of familiar vocabulary. If the DV4/MT4
device mispronounces a word or name that is used often by an
individual, a pronunciation exception can be created to correct the
device’s pronunciation of the item.
This section of the documentation outlines the menu that can be used
to select and customize a voice, and the menu that can be used to
create and edit pronunciation exceptions. Step-by-step instructions
for all voice-related activities are included here.
Voices, Volume, and
Rate
The DV4 and MT4 devices offer a library of nine DECtalk voices.
Paul, Harry, Frank and Dennis are offered as adult male voices.
Betty, Ursula, Rita and Wendy are provided as adult female voices.
Kit is intended to be a non-gender-specific voice for a child. The
speech rate and volume of each voice can be adjusted to meet the
individual preferences of the person using the device. The DECtalk
voices can be selected and customized with the tools in the Speech
Controls menu.
5-41
Changes to the device’s speaking voice can be made in the Speech
Controls menu.
SPEECH CONTROLS MENU
This menu offers the following options:
5-42
Voice Pull-Down
Menu
Use this pull-down menu to select a
DECtalk voice for use as your main
speaking voice.
Text Voice
Button
This button provides a way to listen to your
speech settings without closing the Speech
Controls menu. When this button is
selected, the device will speak a sample
sentence using the currently selected voice,
volume and rate.
Pronunciation
Exceptions
Button
Select this button to access the
Pronunciation Exceptions menu. This menu
provides tools for creating, editing and
managing pronunciation exception files.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Volume Slider
Use this slider to adjust the volume of the
selected voice.
Rate Slider
Use this slider to adjust the speed at which
the device will speak.
Public Speaker
Check Box
Select this check box if messages should be
spoken through the main speaker on the
back of the DV4/MT4 case.
Private Speaker
Check Box
Select this check box if the DV4/MT4 should
speak through a external speaker (such as
a set of headphones) that is attached to the
speaker port on the side of the device.
OK/Cancel
Buttons
Select the OK button to save any new
Speech Control menu settings and then
close the menu. Select the Cancel button to
close the menu without saving any changes
to the settings.
Select and Customize a Voice
To select the DECtalk voice that best suits your needs, follow these
steps:
touch screen.
3. Select Speech Controls in the second pull-down menu. The
Speech Controls menu (page 5-42) will open.
4. Select the Voice pull-down menu. The menu will expand to display
all the available voice options.
5. Select one of the voice options. The menu will close and display
the selected voice.
5-43
6. Customize the attributes of the selected voice by adjusting one or
both of the Speech Controls menu sliders:
Volume
If you want to adjust the volume, select the
slider thumb on the Volume slider. Maintain
the selection while you drag the thumb
toward the left or right side of the slider.
Moving the thumb toward the left side will
make the voice quieter. Moving the thumb
toward the right side will make the voice
louder.
Rate
If you want to adjust the speed at which the
voice speaks, select the slider thumb on the
Rate slider. Maintain the selection while you
drag the thumb toward the left or right side
of the slider. If you move the thumb toward
the left, the voice will speak more slowly. If
you move the thumb toward the right, the
voice will speak more quickly.
7. Select the Test Voice button to check the voice settings. If more
adjustments are necessary, repeat the necessary steps.
8. Select the OK button to close the Speech Controls menu.
Choose a Speaker for Voice Output
To specify whether your device should speak through the device’s
main speaker or through an external speaker that is attached to the
speaker port, follow these steps:
touch screen.
5-44
DynaVox Systems LLC
4. Select one of the two available check boxes:
2 Note:
Public Speaker
If you want the device to speak through the
main speaker on the back of the device,
select this check box.
Private Speaker
If you want the device to speak through a
private speaker (an earphone, for example)
or an accessory speaker attached to the
speaker port, select this check box.
One of these two check boxes must be selected for the device to
speak. If neither of the check boxes is selected, the device will not
speak. If both check boxes are selected, the device will speak
through the main speaker and an accessory speaker.
Change the Volume
To adjust the volume at which messages will be spoken by your
device, follow these steps:
touch screen.
4. Select the slider thumb on the Volume slider. Maintain the
selection while you drag the thumb toward the left or right side of
the slider. Moving the thumb toward the left side will make the
voice quieter. Moving the thumb toward the right side will make the
voice louder.
5-45
5. Select the Test Voice button to check your new volume setting.
Repeat step 5 if necessary.
Change the Speech Rate
To program your device to speak faster or more slowly, follow these
steps:
touch screen.
4. Select the slider thumb on the Rate slider. Maintain the selection
while you drag the thumb toward the left or right side of the slider.
If you move the thumb toward the left, the voice will speak more
slowly. If you move the thumb toward the right, the voice will speak
more quickly.
5. Select the Test Voice button to check the new rate setting. Repeat
steps 4 and 5 if necessary.
5-46
DynaVox Systems LLC
Pronunciation
Exceptions
With the DynaVox Series 4 software, a unique phonemic (soundbased) spelling can be used to create a customized pronunciation for
any word that the software mispronounces. These special spellings
are called pronunciation exceptions. Once a pronunciation exception
has been created for a word, the Series 4 software will pronounce the
word according to its phonemic spelling (the word is presented in the
Message Window with its correct, original spelling).
PRONUNCIATION EXCEPTIONS MENU
5-47
Pronunciation exceptions are created and managed in the
Pronunciation Exceptions menu, which offers the following tools:
5-48
Viewport
a list of all the pronunciation exceptions that
are stored on your device. If the entire list
cannot be displayed in the viewport at one
time, the viewport will feature a scroll bar
that can be used to look through the list.
New Button
Use the New button to create an original
pronunciation exception.
Delete Button
Use the Delete button to permanently
remove a selected pronunciation from the
viewport in the Pronunciation Exceptions
menu.
Edit Word
Button
Use the Edit Word button to make changes
to the appearance of the word for which the
pronunciation exception is being created.
Edit
Pronunciation
Button
Use the Edit Pronunciation button to change
the phonemes that have been used for the
selected pronunciation exception.
Import Button
Select this button to add a pronunciation
exception to the viewport from another
source, such as a computer, another Series
4 device, a removable USB storage device
or a secondary storage card.
Export Button
pronunciation exceptions with a computer,
another Series 4 device, a removable USB
storage device or a secondary storage card.
OK Button
Select the OK button to save any new or
changed pronunciation exceptions and
close the Pronunciation Exceptions menu.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Create a Pronunciation Exception
Follow these steps to create a unique phonemic spelling to correct
the Series 4 device’s pronunciation of a word:
touch screen.
Speech Controls menu will open.
4. Select the Pronunciation Exceptions button. The Pronunciation
Exceptions menu (page 5-47) will open.
6. Use the system keyboard to enter the word for which you want a
customized pronunciation.
7. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup. You will
be presented with phonemes that can be used to create the new
pronunciation. The word for which you are creating a pronunciation
will be displayed at the top of this window.
5-49
PHONEME WINDOW
2 Note:
The phonemes are presented on small buttons. The letters at the
top of the button represent the phoneme. The letters inside the
parentheses in the word below represent the sound the phoneme
will make. The word is provided as an example of the phoneme’s
sound.
8. Select phonemes to create a new pronunciation for the word. The
selected phonemes will be displayed in the text box at the top of
the window.
2 Note:
When you are selecting phonemes in this window, you may want to
use these three buttons (at the bottom of the window):
Undo
5-50
Select the Undo button to delete the
phoneme in front of the cursor.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Clear
Select the Clear button to delete all the
phonemes entered in the text box.
Cancel
Select the Cancel button to delete all the
phonemes in the text box and return to the
Pronunciation Exceptions menu.
9. Select the Test button to hear your pronunciation exception. If
necessary, repeat steps 8 and 9 to adjust the sound by selecting
new phonemes.
10. Select the OK button to close the window of phonemes. Your new
pronunciation exception will be presented in the Pronunciation
Exceptions menu.
11. Select the OK button to close the Pronunciation Exceptions menu.
Delete a Pronunciation Exception
To permanently remove a selected pronunciation exception from the
Pronunciation Exceptions menu viewport, follow these steps:
touch screen.
5. Select the check box beside the name of the pronunciation
exception you want to delete. If there is a large list of pronunciation
5-51
exceptions in the viewport, use the scroll buttons to help you find
the appropriate file.
2 Note:
You can delete more than one pronunciation exception at the same
time by selecting the check box beside each pronunciation
exception that you want to delete.
pronunciation exception. Be careful, a pronunciation exception
cannot be retrieved after it is deleted.
Edit a Pronunciation Exception
When you edit a pronunciation exception, you can choose to edit only
the word that requires a new pronunciation, only the phonemes of the
new pronunciation or both.
Use these steps to make changes to a selected pronunciation
exception.
touch screen.
5-52
DynaVox Systems LLC
5. Select the name of the pronunciation exception that you want to
edit.
6. If you want to change the original word (the word for which a
pronunciation exception was created), select the Edit Word button
and complete the rest of this step. If you do not want to change the
original word, continue with step 7.
a. Use the system keyboard to enter the new word.
b. Select the OK button to close the system keyboard popup. A
window with phoneme buttons will open. The word you entered
with the system keyboard will appear in the top left corner of the
window.
c. If you want to make changes to the pronunciation of the word,
continue with step 7a. If the pronunciation should remain
unchanged, select the OK button to close the phonemes
window.
7. If you want to change the pronunciation of the word, select the Edit
Pronunciation button. You will be presented with phonemes that
can be used to revise the pronunciation. The word for which you
are creating a pronunciation will be displayed at the top of this
window.
2 Note:
The phonemes are presented on small buttons. The letters at the
top of the button represent the phoneme. The letters inside the
parentheses in the word below represent the sound the phoneme
will make.
a. Select phonemes to create a new pronunciation for the word.
The selected phonemes will be displayed in the text box at the
top of the window.
2 Note:
When you are selecting phonemes in this window, you may want to
use these three buttons (at the bottom of the window):
5-53
Undo
Select the Undo button to delete the
phoneme in front of the cursor.
Clear
Select the Clear button to delete all the
phonemes entered in the text box.
Cancel
Select the Cancel button to delete all the
phonemes in the text box and return to the
b. Select the Test button to hear your pronunciation exception. If
necessary, repeat step 7a to adjust the sound by selecting new
phonemes.
c. Select the OK button to close the phonemes window.
Export a Pronunciation Exception to the
User Files Folder
Sending a copy of a pronunciation exception to a Windows or
Macintosh computer will enable you to share the pronunciation
exception with other DV4/MT4 devices. Before the pronunciation
exception can be sent to the computer, though, a copy of the selected
pronunciation exception must be sent to the Exports folder inside the
User Files folder on your device’s main data storage card.
To sent the exception to the computer, follow the steps below:
touch screen.
Speech Controls menu will open.
5-54
DynaVox Systems LLC
exception that you want to export.
2 Note:
You can export more than one pronunciation exception at the same
pronunciation that you want to export.
10. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the pronunciation
exception file that will be exported.
2 Note:
(.pe) to the pronunciation exception file name.
12. Select the OK button when the pronunciation exception has been
A copy of the selected pronunciation (.pe) file can now be found in
the Exports folder within the User Files folder. If you want to send this
file to a computer, see:
• Share Exported Files with a Windows Computer on page 4-50.
5-55
page 4-55.
Export a Pronunciation Exception to a USB
Storage Device or Secondary Storage Card
Exporting a copy of a pronunciation exception file to a removable
USB storage device or a secondary data card will enable you to
share the pronunciation exception with other DV4/MT4 devices.
Pronunciation exception files can be exported directly from the
Pronunciation Exceptions menu to the card or storage device.
2 Note:
2 Note:
To export the pronunciation exception, follow the steps below:
touch screen.
5-56
DynaVox Systems LLC
exception that you want to export.
2 Note:
You can export more than one pronunciation exception at the same
pronunciation that you want to export.
Card2.
10. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the pronunciation
exception file that will be exported.
2 Note:
(.pe) to the pronunciation exception file name.
A copy of the selected pronunciation exception (.pe) file can now be
found on your USB device or second storage card. If you want use
your card or storage device to share the pronunciation exception with
5-57
another DynaVox Series 4 device, see Import a Pronunciation
Exception from the User Files Folder on page 5-59.
Share a Pronunciation Exception with a
Windows Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a pronunciation exception to
the computer. Once the pronunciation exception is loaded on the
MT4 device.
The process of sending a pronunciation exception (.pe) file to a
Windows computer involves two stages. First you must follow Export
a Pronunciation Exception to the User Files Folder on page 5-54,
and then you can continue with Share a Pronunciation Exception
with a Windows Computer on page 5-58.
Share a Pronunciation Exception with a
Macintosh Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a pronunciation exception to
the computer. Once the pronunciation exception is loaded on the
DV4 or MT4 device.
The process of sending a pronunciation exception (.pe) file to a
Macintosh computer involves two stages. First you must follow
Export a Pronunciation Exception to the User Files Folder on
5-58
DynaVox Systems LLC
page 5-54, and then you can continue with Share a Pronunciation
Exception with a Macintosh Computer on page 5-58.
Import a Pronunciation Exception from the
User Files Folder
A USB cable connection can be used to send a new pronunciation
exception (one shared from another DV4/MT4 device, for example) to
your device. This involves a two-step process, as the pronunciation
exception file cannot be transferred directly from the computer to the
Pronunciation Exceptions menu. The USB cable connection with the
computer is used to add the pronunciation exception file to the
storage card. The pronunciation is then imported to the Pronunciation
Exceptions menu
2 Note:
The pronunciation exception (.pe) file must be available in the
Exports folder before these steps can be started. If you have not
yet added the .pe file to the Exports folder, begin with:
• Import a Pronunciation Exception from a Windows
Computer on page 5-60
• Import a Pronunciation Exception from a Macintosh
Computer on page 5-61
To import the pronunciation, use the following steps:
touch screen.
5-59
7. Select the Exports folder. Any available pronunciation exception
files will be listed in the right viewport.
exception you want to import.
The new pronunciation exception is now available in the
Import a Pronunciation Exception from a
Windows Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a pronunciation exception
importing a pronunciation exception (.pe) file from a Windows
follow Import a File from a Windows Computer on page 4-58.
Then you can continue with Import a Pronunciation Exception
pronunciation exception to the Pronunciation Exceptions menu.
5-60
DynaVox Systems LLC
Import a Pronunciation Exception from a
Macintosh Computer
computer can be used to send a copy of a pronunciation exception
importing a pronunciation exception (.pe) file from a Macintosh
follow Import a File from a Macintosh Computer on page 4-62.
Then you can continue with Import a Pronunciation Exception
pronunciation exception to the Pronunciation Exceptions menu.
5-61
Customize Screen Objects
CUSTOMIZE SCREEN OBJECTS
The presentation of objects on the touch screen can be defined to
suit the visual and cognitive needs of an individual user.
Many of the features that affect the appearance and behavior of your
DV4/MT4 device can be adjusted in the Interface Features menu.
INTERFACE FEATURES MENU
The Interface Features menu offers the following tools:
System
Keyboard Group
Box
5-62
This group box provides tools for selecting
the keyboard that will be used to enter text
information. The pull-down menu enables
the user to specify whether text will be
entered with a system keyboard on the
touch screen, or with a standard computer
(physical) keyboard. If the user opts to use a
system keyboard popup, the Popup button
can be used to select the keyboard popup
that will be presented.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Highlight Group
Box
This group box offers tools for customizing
the highlight that is used with selection
methods like scanning or joystick selection.
The Type pull-down menu provides a choice
between an inverted highlight and a
highlighted outline. The two Outline buttons
access tools for customizing the color and
width of a highlighted outline.
Search Button
Size Pull-Down
Menu
Use this pull-down menu to set a default
size for the buttons that are presented in
search boxes.
Symbol
Preferences
Pull-Down Menu
Use this pull-down menu to specify which of
the available symbols set should be used
when the user is searching for symbols or
adding symbols to buttons.
Symbol Selector
Pull-Down Menu
Use this pull-down menu to customize the
way symbol concepts (categories) are
viewed in the left viewport of the Select a
Symbol menu.
Enhanced
Button Click
Check Box
Use this check box to activate or deactivate
the enhanced button click feature. When
active, this button inversely highlights an
object as it is being selected.
Quick Page
Template Check
Box
Select this check box to choose a default
template for the Quick Page feature.
Find Similar
Word: Button
Select this button to specify which page
should be used with the Find Similar Word
behavior.
Animation
Check Box
Use this check box to activate or deactivate
symbol animation.
Primary Color
Button
Use this button to access the Color Selector
menu and choose a new color for the
background of the system menus.
5-63
Customize Windows
and Menus
5-64
Secondary Color
Button
Use this button to access the Color Selector
menu and choose a new color for the
outlines and buttons that appear in the
system menus.
Show Message
Window Settings
Button
Select this button to access the Show
Message Window Settings group box and
define the default characteristics of the
Message Window.
Show Page
Editing Settings
Button
Select this button to access the Show Page
Editing Settings group box. This group box
provides tools for customizing the amount of
access a user has to page editing tools.
Scrollbar Size
Pull-Down Menu
Use this pull-down menu to adjust the size
of the scroll bars that appear beside
viewports.
OK/Cancel
Buttons
Selecting the OK button will accept any new
changes to the Interface Features menu
and then close the menu. Selecting the
Cancel button will close the menu without
saving any new changes.
The Interface Features menu can be used to customize the
appearance of the system menus and the behavior of the Message
Window. The following sets of step-by-steps offer instructions for
using the Interface Features menu to customize these important
aspects of the Series 4 software.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Customize the Menu Colors
The standard colors for the system menus in DynaVox Series 4
software are white and blue.
To change these colors to suit your personal preferences or to make
the menu options easier to see, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. If you want to change the background color of the menus, select
the Primary Color button (the Color Selector menu (page 4-165)
will open) and then complete the rest of this step. If you do not want
to change the background color of the menus, proceed to step 6.
colors.
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for menu backgrounds, refer to
Create a Custom Color on page 4-167
c. Select the OK button to close the Color Selector menu.
5-65
6. If you want to change the color used for menu outlines and buttons,
select the Secondary Color button (the Color Selector menu will
open) and then complete the rest of this step. If you do not want to
change the secondary color of the menus, proceed to step 7.
colors.
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for menu buttons and outlines,
refer to Create a Custom Color on page 4-167.
c. Select the OK button to close the Color Selector menu.
Create Default Settings for the Message
Window
The Interface Features menu offers a variety of settings that can be
applied to the Message Windows that appear on communication
pages and popups. These options allow each individual to customize
the functions of the Message Window to suit his or her own needs.
To create default settings for Message Windows, follow these steps:
touch screen.
5-66
DynaVox Systems LLC
menu will open.
5. Select the Show Message Window Settings button. The Show
Message Window Settings group box will open and cover the other
tools in the Interface Features menu.
MESSAGE WINDOW SETTINGS GROUP BOX
6. Customize the behavior of the Message Window by selecting or
deselecting any of the available check boxes:
Capitalize Start
of Sentence
When this check box is selected, the first
letter of the first word that is added to the
Message Window will automatically be
capitalized. The first letter of each
subsequent sentence will also be
capitalized.
5-67
Add Spaces
between Words
When this check box is selected, a space
will automatically be placed between each
word that is sent to the Message Window.
Clear After
Speaking
Message Window will automatically be
cleared after the message it contains is
spoken.
Automatically
Expand
Abbreviations
Message Window will automatically replace
an abbreviation with the text it represents.
For this feature to work, the abbreviation
must be saved as part of an abbreviation
expansion in the Abbreviation Browser
menu.
Use Symbols in
the Message
Window
When this check box is selected, selecting a
button that features a symbol and an Insert
Text/Insert Message behavior will cause the
symbol to be sent to the Message Window
with the text.
Highlight as You
Speak
When this check box is selected, each word
in the Message Window will be highlighted
as it is spoken.
Speak when
Inserting Words
DV4/MT4 device will speak each word as it
is being added to the Message Window.
Speak on
Punctuation
DV4/MT4 device will speak a sentence in
the Message Window as soon as
punctuation is used to close the sentence.
7. If you want to customize the font that is used in the Message
Window, select the Default Font button and complete this step. If
5-68
DynaVox Systems LLC
you do not want to customize the Message Window font, continue
with step 8.
a. To choose a new default font, select the Font pull-down menu
and then select one of the available fonts. The pull-down menu
will close and display only the font you selected.
b. To choose a new font size, select the Size pull-down menu and
then select one of the available font sizes. The pull-down menu
will close and display only the size you selected.
c. If you want all Message Window text to be bold, select the Bold
check box. If bold text should not be used in the Message
Window, make sure the Bold check box is deselected.
d. If you want all Message Window text to be in italics, select the
Italic check box. If italics should not be used in the Message
Window, make sure the Italic check box is deselected.
e. See the Example group box to look at your current font settings.
If the font still needs to be adjusted, repeat steps 7a through 7e.
(Selecting the Hide Message Window Settings button will close the
Show Message Window Settings group box and return you to the
standard Interface Features menu options.)
Customize Button Size
and Features
The Interface Features menu can also be used to customize the
highlight that is presented for scanning, the size of Search buttons
and the size of the scroll bars that are presented by menu viewports.
This menu can also be used to access an enhanced button click
feature that can be used to audibly reinforce a selection on the touch
screen. Use the following sets of step-by-step instructions to
complete these activities.
5-69
Customize the Scanning Highlight
If you are using a selection method (such as scanning or joystick
selection) that uses a moving highlight to make items on the touch
screen available for selection, you can customize the highlight to
make it easy to see.
Use the following steps to customize the highlight in the Interface
Features menu:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the Type pull-down menu and then select one of the two
available options:
Invert
An inverted highlight emphasizes the
highlighted object by inverting its color
scheme. For example, a white button will be
black when it is highlighted.
Outline
A colored outline is used to distinguish the
highlighted object.
The menu will close and display only the selected option.
6. If you chose the Outline option, complete this step to customize the
outline. If you chose the Invert option, continue with step 7.
a. Select the Outline button that is a small, colored squared. The
Color Selector (page 4-165) menu will open.
b. To choose from a palette of available colors, select the
5-70
DynaVox Systems LLC
colors.
c. Select the color you want to use. The display square on the right
2 Note:
If you want to make your own color for the outline, refer to Create a
d. Select the OK button to close the Color Selector menu.
e. Select the Outline button that features a number. An Outline
Width (1-10) menu will open.
f. Use the number pad buttons to enter a value for the width of the
outline. The value must be between 1 (the narrowest outline)
and 10 (the widest outline).
g. Select the OK button to close the Outline Width (1-10) menu.
Activate/Deactivate the Enhanced Button
Click Feature
When the enhanced button click feature is active, an inverse highlight
will be used to distinguish the selection of an item on the touch
screen. For example, a white button will briefly turn black as it is
being selected.
To activate or deactivate the enhanced button click feature, follow
these steps:
touch screen.
5-71
menu will open.
5. Select the Enhanced Button Click check box. If you are activating
the feature, a check mark will be added to the check box. If you are
deactivating the feature, a check mark will be removed from the
check box.
Select a Size for Search Buttons
The Interface Features menu can be used to set a default size for the
buttons that are presented in search boxes.
To select a default size for search buttons, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the Search Button Size pull-down menu and then select
one of the available options: Small, Medium, Large and Use
Preferences. (The Use Preferences option will base the size of the
buttons on the settings in the Spray/Button Grid Settings group box
5-72
DynaVox Systems LLC
in the Preferences menu that is available in the page editor). The
pull-down menu will close and display only the option you selected.
Select a Size for Scroll Buttons/Bars
Scroll bars are used to navigate through a long list of items in a
viewport. These vertical or horizontal bars have an arrow shaped
button (scroll button) at each end. Each time a scroll button is
selected, the list in the viewport will move one interval in the direction
of the button’s arrow (up, down, right or left). Scroll bars can also
work like a slider. A slider thumb on the bar indicates the position of
the cursor and can be slid along the bar to reposition the list in the
viewport.
To make the DV4/MT4 device easier for each individual to access,
the Interface Features menu provides an option that enables users to
customize the size of the scroll bars.
Follow these steps to adjust the size of the scroll bars on your device.
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the Scrollbar Size pull-down menu and then select one of
the three available options: Small, Medium and Large. The pulldown menu will close and display only the option you selected.
5-73
Customize Title Bar
Contents
This section of the documentation includes step-by-step instructions
for using the Interface Features menu to specify whether the Modify
button should be presented in the title bar at the top of the DV4/MT4
touch screen.
Remove/Add the Modify Button in the Title
Bar
The green Modify button can be removed from the title bar at the top
of the touch screen if you do not want to provide easy access to
button-editing tools. The Modify button can then be restored to the
title bar at any time.
To show or hide the Modify button, follow these steps.
touch screen.
menu will open.
5-74
DynaVox Systems LLC
5. Select the Show Page Editing Settings button. The Show Page
Editing Settings group box will open and cover the other tools in
the Interface Features menu.
PAGE EDITING SETTINGS GROUP BOX
6. Select the Modify Button check box. If you are adding the button
to the title bar, a check mark will be added to the check box. If you
are removing the button from the title bar, a check mark will be
removed from the check box.
(Selecting the Hide Page Editing Settings button will close the
Show Page Editing Settings group box and return you to the
5-75
Customize Symbol
Settings
The tools in the Interface Features menu can also be used to
customize the way symbols are presented on the DV4/MT4 device.
An option in this menu can be used to select one of several available
symbol sets for exclusive use, or to designate one symbol set as a
primary set while the others are used as less frequently. The
Interface Features menu can also be used to activate the animation
feature when it is applicable. In addition, this menu can be used to
specify how symbols should be presented in the Symbol Browser
menu.
Follow the step-by-step instructions in this section to learn about
using the Interface Features menu to customize the presentation of
symbols on your DV4/MT4 device.
Select a Symbol Set
DynaVox Series 4 devices are shipped with the new DynaSyms for
Series 4, DynaSyms Classic and a set of system symbols. Each
Series 4 user can then decide which of these symbol sets he or she
prefers to use. The Interface Features menu can be used to specify
which symbol set should be used when the user is searching for
symbols or adding symbols to buttons.
To choose a default symbol set, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5-76
DynaVox Systems LLC
5. Select the Symbol Preferences pull-down menu and then select
one of the available options:
DynaSyms
Classic Only
Only symbols from the DynaSyms Classic
symbol set will be presented by the Series 4
software.
DynaSyms Only
Only symbols from the new DynaSyms
symbol set will be presented by the Series 4
software.
System Symbols
Only
Only symbols from the system symbol set
will be presented by the Series 4 software.
DynaSyms
Classic
Preferred
Symbols from the DynaSyms Classic
symbol set will be presented first. Symbols
from the other symbol sets may also be
presented.
DynaSyms
Preferred
Symbols from the DynaSyms Preferred
symbol set will be presented first. Symbols
from the other symbol sets may also be
presented.
System Symbols
Preferred
Symbols from the system symbol set will be
presented first. Symbols from the other
symbol sets may also be presented.
option.
Customize the Appearance of Categories in
the Select a Symbol Menu
The Interface Features menu provides the Symbol Selector pull-down
menu to enable users to customize the way symbol concepts
5-77
(categories) are viewed in the left viewport of the Select a Symbol
menu. When searching for a symbol, the symbol categories can be
viewed either as a tree of folders with text labels or as a list of labeled
symbols.
To customize the way symbol categories are presented in this menu,
follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the Symbol Selector pull-down menu and then select one
of the two available options:
Concept-Based
Concepts in the left viewport of the Select a
Symbol menu will be displayed as a
directory tree of folders with text labels.
All Pictures
Concepts in the left viewport of the Select a
Symbol menu will be displayed as symbols
with text labels.
The pull-down menu will close and display the option that you
selected.
5-78
DynaVox Systems LLC
Activate/Deactivate the Symbol Animation
Feature
Some of the symbols that are available in the Series 4 software have
a built-in animation feature.
To activate or deactivate the symbol animation feature, follow these
steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Select the Animation check box. If you are activating the feature,
a check mark will be added to the check box. If you are
deactivating the feature, a check mark will be removed from the
check box.
5-79
Protecting System Settings
PROTECTING SYSTEM SETTINGS
The Interface Features menu offers a Show Page Editing Settings
group box with options for password protection. Password protection
can be used to prevent unauthorized users from gaining access to
your system menus and the DynaVox Series 4 page editor. This
section offers step-by-step instructions for setting up and managing
password protection on your device.
Set up Password Protection
Your DV4/MT4 device can be programmed with a password that will
prevent any unauthorized access of the system menus.
To set up password protection for the first time, follow these steps.
touch screen.
menu will open.
6. Select the Enable Password check box. A system keyboard
popup will open.
7. Use the system keyboard to enter a password.
8. Select the OK button. The system keyboard will request that you
verify the password.
5-80
DynaVox Systems LLC
9. Use the system keyboard to enter the password exactly as you did
the first time.
11. Select the OK button when the password is successfully verified.
If the password verification fails, return to step 6 and try again.
You will now need to enter your password into a system keyboard
popup any time you select the pull-down menu button in the title
bar.
Deactivate Password Protection
Turn password protection off by following these steps.
touch screen.
2 Note:
Password protection is on, so you will need to use the system
keyboard popup to enter your password and then select the OK
button to close the system keyboard.
menu will open.
5-81
6. Select the Enable Password check box to remove the check
mark.
Password protection has been removed from your device and your
password has been deleted. If you decide to reactivate password
protection, you will have to enter a new password.
Change Your Password
You can change your DV4/MT4 password at any time.
To replace your old password, follow these steps.
touch screen.
2 Note:
Password protection is on, so you will need to use the system
keyboard popup to enter your password and then select the OK
button to close the system keyboard.
menu will open.
5-82
DynaVox Systems LLC
6. Select the Change Password button. A system keyboard popup
will open.
7. Use the system keyboard to enter the password that you are using
now.
enter a new password.
9. Use the system keyboard to enter a new password.
verify the new password.
11. Use the system keyboard to enter the new password exactly as
you did in step 9.
13. Select the OK button when the password is successfully verified.
If the password verification fails, return to step 6 and try again.
Activate/Deactivate the Menu Hold Feature
You can opt to limit access to the system menus by activating the
menu hold feature. When this feature is active, a brief selection of the
pull-down menu button in the title bar will not open the main pull-
5-83
down menu. An individual must maintain the selection for several
seconds and then release it before the pull-down menu will open.
To turn the menu hold feature on or off, follow these steps.
touch screen.
menu will open.
6. Select the Menu Hold check box. If you are activating this feature,
a check mark will be added to the check box. If you are
deactivating this feature, a check mark will be removed from the
check box.
5-84
DynaVox Systems LLC
Hardware
The hardware section of this documentation offers an overview of the
hardware features of your DV4 or MT4 device. It also provides stepby-step instructions for hardware tasks working with data storage
cards, charging and replacing the battery, resetting and performing
system maintenance procedures.
6-1
Chapter 6: Hardware
DV4/MT4 Features
DV4/MT4 FEATURES
The primary feature of your DynaVox Series 4 device is a built-in
touch panel on top of an active matrix (TFT-LCD) color touch screen.
On the DV4 device, this touch panel offers a screen resolution of 800
by 600 pixels. On the MT4 device, the screen resolution is 640 by
480 pixels.
FRONT OF THE DEVICE
6-2
DynaVox Systems LLC
DV4/MT4 Features
Chapter 6: Hardware
Look at the plastic casing surrounding the touch screen on the front
of the device. Three important hardware features are located here:
n
Power Button
The circular power button is in the upper left
corner. This button is used to turn the device
on and off.
o
Microphone
The device’s built-in microphone is directly
above the touch screen, behind a small,
oval indentation. This omni-directional,
electret condenser microphone can be used
to record sound.
p
LED
A small light emitting diode (LED) can be
found to the right of the touch screen. This
amber LED will light up only when the
device is being charged.
Turn your DV4 or MT4 upside down and examine the bottom of the
device. You will find a support leg that can be extended when you
want to use your DV4 or MT4 as a tabletop device. This support leg
will hold your device at a convenient angle for use.
The bottom of your device also features several labels. These labels
display DynaVox Systems’ logo, website address, phone number and
mailing address. Pay special attention to the small, rectangular
sticker that can be seen when the support leg is extended. This label
features your device’s unique, nine-digit serial number. You will need
this number if you call DynaVox Systems’ Technical Support
department or if you need to arrange service for your device.
Holes for the DV4 or MT4 speaker can be found beside the support
leg on the bottom of the device. Immediately above the speaker
openings is a small, circular opening for the Reset button. This button
enables you to perform a hard reset of your device if you are directed
to do so by a DynaVox Systems Technical Support representative.
6-3
Chapter 6: Hardware
DV4/MT4 Features
The bottom of your device also features two sets of attachment points
for the carrying straps that were shipped with your device. See
Carrying Your Device on page 1-6 for more information.
DEVICE PORTS
6-4
DynaVox Systems LLC
DV4/MT4 Features
Chapter 6: Hardware
Look at the right side of your device. You will see eight ports that are
each labeled with a symbol.
n
USB Device
Port
The first port on the left is the USB device
port. This square port can be used to
connect the DV4 or MT4 device to a
computer.
o
Dual USB Host
Port
The next port is the dual USB host port. The
two USB connectors in this port enable your
device to host the connection of accessory
equipment such as a computer mouse, a
keyboard, a USB storage device or a USB
printer.
p
Charger Port
The charger port can be found to the right of
the USB ports. Use this port to plug in the
DC power adapter/charger that came with
your device.
connect any other power adapter to your DV4 or MT4 as it
! Caution: Never
could cause serious damage to your device.
q
Switch Jacks
r
s
Each of the two switch jacks beside the
charger port can be used to plug in a single
switch for scanning access.
Microphone Port
Next to the switch jacks is a small
microphone port. This port can be used to
connect a microphone to your DV4 or MT4
device.
&
6-5
Chapter 6: Hardware
DV4/MT4 Features
t
Stereo Jack
The next port is a round, 1/8-inch stereo
speaker jack that can be used for an
auditory scanning speaker or headset, or for
an extra speaker that will be used to
enhance the output of the communication
device’s built-in speakers.
u
Serial Port
The final port is an eight-pin mini-din serial
port. The serial port can be used to connect
your DV4 or MT4 device to a computer or
printer that does not have USB capabilities.
The front side of the unit is covered with dark plastic that encloses the
infrared device. The infrared device allows you to use your DV4 or
MT4 as a remote control for home appliances like TVs and stereos.
If you use a screwdriver to remove the two screws in the dark plastic
panel, you can lift the panel away from the device. Once the panel
has been removed, you will be able to locate the device’s memory
storage card. All DV4 and MT4 devices are shipped with a 128MB
Compact Flash storage card. This card is used to store all the files
and information you create and save on your device. An empty card
slot below the storage card provides room for the installation of a
secondary storage card. A second storage card provides additional
memory and room for file storage on your device.
6-6
DynaVox Systems LLC
Data Storage Cards
Chapter 6: Hardware
DATA STORAGE CARDS
All DV4 and MT4 devices are shipped with a 128MB Compact Flash
storage card. This card is used to store all the files and information
you create and save on your device. To prevent a loss of information
in the event of a device failure, it is extremely important to save
changes to your device’s data storage card after you have added
customized information to your device. This section provides step-bystep instructions on saving information to the main data storage card.
An empty card slot below the storage card provides room for the
installation of a secondary storage card. A second storage card
provides additional memory and room for file storage on your device,
and can be used to share information with other Series 4 devices.
Refer to the second set of step-by-steps in this section to learn how
to install a second data storage card.
Save Information to the Data Storage Card
Whenever you add new information (including new pages or popups,
changes to existing pages or popups, sounds, songs, reminders,
macros and ECU commands) to your DV4 or MT4, you should be
sure to save this information directly to your device’s Compact Flash
storage card. Saving information to the storage card will prevent a
loss of information in the event of a device failure.
touch screen.
2. Select Save to Card in the main pull-down menu.
3. Select the Yes button to confirm that you want to save your user
information to the storage card.
6-7
Chapter 6: Hardware
Data Storage Cards
It may take a few minutes for the software to save all your user
information to the storage card. An hourglass icon will be
presented while the information is being saved. When the
hourglass icon disappears, the information is saved and you can
continue to use your device.
Installing a Second Data Storage Card
All DV4 and MT4 devices feature an empty card slot below the
device’s 128MB Compact Flash storage card. This extra storage card
slot provides room for the installation of a secondary storage card. A
second storage card provides additional memory and room for file
storage on your device. Secondary storage cards can also be used to
share information with computers and other Series 4 device.
If you want to buy a second storage card, these devices are available
at most computer supply stores. To install a new storage card, follow
these steps:
1. Use the power button to turn the device off.
2. Use a screwdriver to loosen the two screws on the dark plastic
panel on the front of your device.
3. Remove the dark plastic panel.
4. Insert the new storage card into the empty card slot below the main
data storage card.
5. Replace the dark plastic panel and tighten the screws.
6. Turn your device back on.
6-8
DynaVox Systems LLC
Battery Information and Care
Chapter 6: Hardware
BATTERY INFORMATION AND CARE
Your DynaVox Series 4 device has a 7.4V Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) battery
pack. When fully charged, this battery pack will continuously power a
DV4 device for about 12 hours. The MT4 device can last for up to
eight hours of continuous use when the battery is fully charged. A DC
power adapter/charger was also provided with your device and can
be used to recharge the battery when the power level becomes low.
There are various ways to extend the daily run time of your battery.
First, the DC power adapter/charger can be used to plug the device
into an electrical outlet while you use the device. You can also
conserve battery power by adjusting the amount of light behind the
device’s touch screen. Setting the device to maintain lower screen
brightness will use less power. The backlight timeout feature is
another battery conservation method. Backlight timeout is a lowpower state that will cause the device’s touch screen to dim slightly.
You can program your device to automatically go into this low-power
mode if it has been inactive for a specific amount of time.
Your battery pack will need to be replaced when it will no longer
maintain a usable power level after being charged. With the DynaVox
Series 4, it is unnecessary to send your communication device in to
the repair department at DynaVox Systems to have the battery
replaced. The battery pack can easily be replaced at home.
Replacement batteries are available from DynaVox Systems LLC.
This remainder of this section includes steps for conserving battery
power, recharging a DV4/MT4 battery and installing a new battery.
Check Available Battery Power
The DV4 device has a 7.4V Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) battery pack. When
fully charged, this battery pack can run the device continuously for
about 12 hours. The MT4 device is also powered by a 7.4V Li-Ion
6-9
Chapter 6: Hardware
battery pack. The MT4 battery pack will support up to eight hours of
continuous use when it is fully charged. When the DV4/MT4 device is
being run on battery power, the appearance of a small, red battery
icon in the title bar at the top of the touch screen will indicate that the
device is running low on power. When this icon appears, the device
should be pluggedin and recharged as soon as possible.
Checking the battery power gauge periodically will make it easier to
anticipate when the device will need to be recharged.
To check the level of available battery power, follow these steps:
open.
System Settings menu (page 5-32) will open.
4. Select the Battery Info button. A Battery Info menu with a Battery
slider will open. The Battery slider indicates the amount of power
left in the battery.
5. Select the OK button to close the Battery Info menu.
Calibrate the Battery
If the battery slider in the Battery Info menu does not seem to be
accurately reflecting the actual amount of available battery power; it
may need to be calibrated.
To calibrate the battery, follow these steps:
open.
6-10
DynaVox Systems LLC
Chapter 6: Hardware
4. Select the Battery Info button. A Battery Info menu with a Battery
slider will open. The Battery slider indicates the amount of power
left in the battery.
5. Select the Calibrate Battery button.
2 Note:
There will be no visual confirmation of the battery calibration.
6. Select the OK button to close the Battery Info menu.
Plug the Device In
It is possible to extend the daily run time of the device’s battery pack
by adjusting the screen brightness. Setting the device to maintain
lower screen brightness will use less power. You can also conserve
battery power by using the backlight timeout feature. Backlight
timeout is a low-power state that will cause the device’s touch screen
to dim slightly. You can program your device to automatically go into
this low-power mode if it has been inactive for a specific amount of
time.
Another way to conserve battery power is to use the DC
adapter/charger that was shipped with your device. If you are near an
electrical outlet, you can use your DV4 or MT4 while it is plugged in.
To use the charger while you are programming your device or using it
to communicate, follow these steps:
1. Connect the two pieces of the DC adapter/charger.
2. Plug the adapter into an electrical outlet.
6-11
Chapter 6: Hardware
3. Shut down your device.
4. Plug the charger jack into the charger port on the right side of your
device.
5. Turn the device back on.
Charge the Battery
When your device’s battery begins to run out of power, a small, red
battery icon will appear in the title bar at the top of the touch screen.
This icon indicates that you should plug in your device to conserve
the remaining power. You should recharge the battery as soon as
possible. The icon will remain until the battery is recharged.
Shortly before the battery runs out of power, a message will appear to
tell you that your device is automatically shutting down. The device
will power down completely after this message is displayed. Any
unsaved programming will be automatically saved before the device
shuts down. You will need to fully recharge the battery before you can
turn the device on again.
To charge the device’s battery, follow these steps:
1. Connect the two pieces of the DC adapter/charger.
2. Plug the adapter into an electrical outlet.
3. Shut down your device.
4. Plug the charger jack into the charger port on the right side of your
device.
2 Note:
You can use the device while it is charging.
The amber LED to the right of the touch screen will light up while
the device is charging. The light will go out when the battery is fully
6-12
DynaVox Systems LLC
Chapter 6: Hardware
charged. It will take approximately nine hours for the DV4 battery
to fully charge. The MT4 battery can be fully charged in about six
hours. When the battery is completely charged, the LED will go
out. You cannot overcharge the battery so do not be concerned
about leaving the unit plugged in overnight.
Replace the MT4 Battery
If the battery in your MT4 device becomes unable to maintain power
after being charged, it probably needs to be replaced. You can order
a replacement battery by contacting DynaVox Systems at 1-800-3441778.
Once you receive your new battery, follow these steps to install it:
1. Turn off the device and, if necessary, disconnect the charger.
2. Locate the rectangular battery door on the bottom edge of the
MT4. This battery door is near the widest part of the device’s leg.
3. Use a screwdriver to remove the one screw that holds the battery
door in place.
4. Remove the battery door.
5. Four colored wires from the battery pack are attached to one white
plastic connector that is plugged into the device. Carefully unplug
this connector.
6. Pull that battery pack free of the device case.
7. Slide the new battery pack into place.
8. Plug in the connector.
9. Replace the battery door and the screw.
6-13
Chapter 6: Hardware
Replace the DV4 Battery
If the battery in your DV4 device becomes unable to maintain power
after being charged, it probably needs to be replaced. You can order
a replacement battery by contacting DynaVox Systems at 1-800-3441778.
Once you receive your new battery, follow these steps to install it:
1. Turn off the device and, if necessary, disconnect the charger.
2. Locate the battery door on the bottom of the device. The device’s
leg will have to be extended, as the wide bottom of the leg covers
the battery door. The battery door is the whole curved section of
plastic under the bottom of the leg. Two screws are deeply set into
this piece of plastic.
3. Use a screwdriver to remove the two screws that hold the battery
door in place.
4. Remove the battery door.
5. Four colored wires from the battery pack are attached to one white
plastic connector that is plugged into the device. Carefully unplug
this connector.
6. Pull that battery pack free of the device case.
7. Slide the new battery pack into place.
8. Plug in the connector.
6-14
DynaVox Systems LLC
Using External Devices with the DV4/MT4
Chapter 6: Hardware
USING EXTERNAL DEVICES WITH
THE
DV4/MT4
Use an External Switch to Turn on the
Device
Series 4 users who are unable to select the power button on the front
of the device can use an external switch to turn their devices on.
2 Note:
An external switch must be connected to the first switch port on
your DV4 or MT4 to successfully use this feature.
To set up this feature, use the following steps:
open.
4. Select the External Switch as Power On check box.
An external switch can now be used to turn on the device.
6-15
Chapter 6: Hardware
Customize the Behavior of the Power Button
The round power button on the front of the DV4/MT4 case can be
used several different ways.
2 Note:
This setting only affects the behavior of the power button when the
device is on. If the device is turned off, the power button can still be
used to turn the device back on, regardless of the setting that is
chosen here.
To specify the way you want to use the power button, follow these
steps:
open.
4. Select the Power Button pull-down menu and then select one of
the three available options:
Turn Off Device
Selecting the power button will initiate
device shutdown.
Open Setup
Menu
Selecting the power button will access the
Setup menu.
Disabled
Nothing will happen when the power button
is selected.
The power button will now behave according to the new setting.
6-16
DynaVox Systems LLC
Chapter 6: Hardware
Use a Computer Keyboard with Your Series
4 Device
A standard USB computer keyboard can be used with your DV4 or
MT4 device. In DynaVox terminology, this is known as using a
physical keyboard instead of a system keyboard popup that can be
presented on the touch screen. To set up the keyboard, simply plug it
into the dual USB host port on the side of your device.
Then follow these steps to select the physical keyboard as the default
keyboard for your Series 4 software:
touch screen.
2. Select Setup in the main menu.
menu will open.
5. Select the pull-down menu in the System Keyboard group box. The
menu will open to display the two available options: Popup and
Physical.
6. Select the Physical option. The pull-down menu will close and
display only the selected option.
Select a System Keyboard
The default system keyboard popup for the DynaVox Series 4
software is called System Keyboard. When you take your device out
6-17
Chapter 6: Hardware
of the box, this system keyboard popup will be automatically
presented whenever you are required to enter text information or
when a text box is selected.
If you would like to choose a different keyboard popup as the default,
you can do so by following these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
5. Make sure the pull-down menu in the System Keyboard group box
is set to Popup.
6. Select the Popup button. A Select a Popup menu will open. The
Keyboard Pages folder will be highlighted in the left viewport and
a list of available keyboard popups will be displayed in the right
viewport.
7. Select the name of a keyboard page (System Keyboard is the
default system keyboard popup) in the right viewport.
8. Select the OK button to close the Select a Popup menu.
6-18
DynaVox Systems LLC
DV4/MT4 Reset Procedures
Chapter 6: Hardware
DV4/MT4 RESET PROCEDURES
Perform a Soft Reset
Performing a soft reset on a DV4 or MT4 device will properly shut
down and restart the Series 4 software. A soft reset will not save any
new information to the data storage card. This type of reset should be
used to improve performance when the device seems to be lagging.
2 Note:
To improve the operation speed of your DV4 or MT4, you should be
sure to perform a daily soft reset. A soft reset may also be helpful
anytime the performance of your device seems to be slowing down.
2. Select Soft Reset in the main pull-down menu.
3. Select the Yes button to confirm that you want to start a soft reset.
The soft reset will take a few minutes. The touch screen will go
dark and then a splash screen will be presented as the device
restarts automatically (you will not need to select the power
button). When the reset is complete, you will be returned to the
page that was open when you started the soft reset process.
Perform a Power Button Reset
Using the power button to reset a DV4 or MT4 device will shut down
and restart the Series 4 software. This action will be perceived by the
software as an improper shutdown and will automatically end
whatever task was active. A power button reset will not automatically
6-19
Chapter 6: Hardware
clear new information on the device’s RAM memory, but new
changes will not be saved to the data storage card. When the device
restarts, you will be given an option to try to retrieve changes that
were made before the reset. A power button reset should be used
when the device is in a locked state.
1. Select and hold down on the power button on the front of the
device. After a moment, the screen will go dark.
2. When the device restarts, a Page Recovery window will ask if you
want to restore from a previous version. If you want to try to
retrieve changes that were made before the reset, select the No
button. Choosing this option may restore some or all of your
changes. If you select the Yes button, the device will be restored
to the information that was last saved to the data storage card. Any
changes that were not saved to the card will be lost.
The rest of the power button reset will take a few minutes. A splash
screen will be presented as the device restarts automatically (you
will not need to select the power button). When the reset is
complete, the device will start at the introductory page that was
presented the first time the device was turned on.
Perform a Hard Reset
Performing a hard reset on a DV4 or MT4 device will shut down the
Series 4 software and reload all information from the data storage
card. This type of reset will completely clear any RAM memory that
was not saved to the data storage card. A hard reset should be
performed as a last resort only if a power button reset does not work.
1. Turn your device face down and locate the hole in the plastic that
covers the reset button.
6-20
DynaVox Systems LLC
Chapter 6: Hardware
2. Insert a straightened paper clip into the hole until you select the
reset button. You will hear a soft click.
3. Turn the device right side up. The screen will be dark.
4. After a moment, a white screen will be presented and you will be
asked to recalibrate the touch screen. A small target will be
presented in the top left corner. Use your finger or a stylus to touch
the center of the target. Follow the target as it moves to the
remaining corners and the center of the screen. Select the center
of the target whenever it comes to a stop.
5. Select any area of the touch screen to save the new calibration.
The rest of the hard reset will take a few minutes. A splash screen
will be presented as the device restarts automatically (you will not
need to select the power button). When the reset is complete, the
device will start at the introductory page that was presented the
first time the device was turned on.
Maintaining the Device’s RAM Memory
The DV4/MT4 RAM is divided between two types of memory: storage
memory and program memory. Some of this memory (program
memory) is used to run the basic Series 4 software. More of this
memory (storage memory) is used to store the information you create
on your device, like pages, songs and sounds. It is important to
periodically check the amount of memory that remains since the
device may not operate as efficiently when the memory is almost full.
Three sequential messages are presented to alert a user that the
available system memory is running low. The first message is
presented when the available memory is 92 percent full. This
message suggests that the user should save any new information
and perform a soft reset. A soft reset will clean up the files that are
using available memory, freeing some system memory and making
the device run more efficiently. If the memory issue remains
6-21
Chapter 6: Hardware
uncorrected after the first message, and the available memory
reaches 94 percent full, a second message will ask the user to
perform a soft reset. If the user opts not to perform the reset at this
time and the system memory reaches 98 percent of its capacity, a
final message will be presented to inform the user that a soft reset will
be performed. When the user selects the OK button to acknowledge
this final message, the device will automatically perform a soft reset.
To check the available system memory, follow these steps:
open.
4. Select the System Memory button. A window with memory
information will be presented. To see how much memory is still
available for new pages and other information, look at the
percentage of full Program Memory at the top of the window.
5. Select the OK button to close the window.
Checking the Remaining Memory on a Data
Storage Card
Your device also features a 128 MB Compact Flash data storage
card, which is also used to store all the files and information you
create on your device.
To check the remaining memory on a data storage card, follow these
steps:
6-22
DynaVox Systems LLC
Chapter 6: Hardware
menu will open.
5. In the left viewport, select the Storage Card folder to check the
remaining memory on the main data storage card.
2 Note:
If you have added an extra data storage card to your device, you
may select the Storage Card2 folder to check the remaining
memory on the second card.
6. Select the Properties button. A window will appear. In this
window, the amount of total space represents the entire amount of
memory on the card. The amount of free space represents the
amount of memory that is currently unused.
7. Select the OK button to close the window.
6-23
Chapter 6: Hardware
DV4/MT4 Maintenance
DV4/MT4 MAINTENANCE
Screen calibration and system maintenance are brief procedures that
you may opt to do periodically to keep your DV4/MT4 system running
smoothly. Use the step-by-steps in this section to learn how do
complete both of these procedures.
Perform System Maintenance
Performing a system maintenance operation on your Series 4 device
optimizes the efficiency of the page set by cleaning up any
unnecessary links or information. DynaVox Systems recommends
that you take a few minutes to do a system maintenance after
deleting or renaming numerous pages.
To do a system maintenance, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4. Select the System Maintenance button.
5. Select the Yes button to confirm that you would like to continue
with the system maintenance.
6. Select the Yes button to confirm that you would like to restart the
software.
The restart will take a few minutes. The touch screen will go dark
and then a splash screen will be presented as the device restarts
automatically (you will not need to select the power button). When
the reset is complete, you will be returned to the page that was
open when you started the system maintenance.
6-24
DynaVox Systems LLC
DV4/MT4 Maintenance
Chapter 6: Hardware
Calibrate the Touch Screen
If you begin to have trouble making selections on your DV4/MT4
touch screen, the screen’s calibration may need to be adjusted.
Try recalibrating the touch screen by following these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4. Select the Input/Output Settings button. The Input/Output
5. Select the Calibrate Touch Screen button. A white screen with
instructions for calibrating the touch screen will open.
6. Use your finger or a stylus to touch the center of the target that is
presented in the top left corner of the white screen. Follow the
target as it moves to the remaining corners and the center of the
screen. Select the center of the target whenever it comes to a stop.
7. When no more targets are presented, select any area of the touch
screen to save the new calibration. The white calibration screen
will close.
8. Select the OK button to close the Input/Output Settings menu.
6-25
Backing Up, Restoring, and
Upgrading User Data
Saving an extra copy of your DV4/MT4 files in another location
(“backing up”) should be done regularly. This allows you to avoid
losing customized pages and other files in case there should ever be
a problem with the memory in your device.
Once the system files are backed up, if there is a problem with the
DV4/MT4, the saved files can be restored to make the device behave
as it did before the problem occurred. You can also restore files if you
have altered them and decide to return them to their previous state.
Also, from time to time, you may receive new software files from
DynaVox Systems, which you will install to update your DV4/MT4
device.
7-1
Chapter 7: Backing Up, Restoring, and Upgrading User Data
Backing Up and Restoring User Data
BACKING UP AND RESTORING USER DATA
Backing up the user data in your DV4/MT4 creates a backup file,
which you can store in a variety of locations. If your device
malfunctions or you wish to return it to a previous state, you can
restore the data from this backup file.
Back Up User Data
When you back up your DV4 or MT4 device, you create a copy of all
your user data in a backup file. This set of information includes any
files that you have changed or created, including pages, dictionary
entries, abbreviation expansions, macros and symbols.
It’s important to back up your DynaVox Series 4 device after you’ve
added new files or made changes to your user information. Backing
up regularly helps protect you from loss of information if a problem
should occur.
2 Note:
Backing up only protects the information already saved to your data
storage card. If you have made changes to pages or other files that
you have not saved to the card, see Save Information to the Data
Storage Card on page 6-7 to save them before you back up.
The backup file may be stored on any of the following devices:
• A removable USB storage device.
• A secondary data storage card.
• A Windows or Macintosh computer, using a USB cable connection.
7-2
DynaVox Systems LLC
Back Up with a Removable USB Storage
Device
Backing up to a removable USB storage device creates a backup file
stored on the USB device.
To back up user data to a removable USB storage device, complete
the following steps:
1. Plug the USB device into the USB host port on your DV4 or MT4
device.
2. Select the pull-down menu button in the title bar of the touch
screen.
4. Select Setup Menu in the next pull-down menu. The Setup menu
will open.
5. Select the Backup/Upgrade button. The Backup Upgrade menu
will open.
BACKUP UPGRADE MENU
6. Select the DynaVox Backup button.
7-3
7. Select the OK button to confirm that you want to back up your data.
A Select File menu will open.
8. Select the UMS_FOLDER directory in the left viewport.
2 Note:
If the UMS_FOLDER directory is not shown, select the Show All
Directories check box.
10. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new backup file.
window will open to note that the backup is in progress. The
backup process may take a few minutes.
12. When the backup is complete, select the OK button.
13. Select the OK button to close the Backup Upgrade menu.
Back Up to a Data Storage Card
You may back up data to a data storage card installed in your
DV4/MT4 device. This creates a backup file stored on the data
storage card.
2 Note:
7-4
If you are using a secondary storage card, the new card must be
installed before you begin these steps. To learn how to install a new
storage card, see Installing a Second Data Storage Card on
page 6-8.
DynaVox Systems LLC
To back up user data to a data storage card, complete the following
steps:
screen.
will open.
5. Select the DynaVox Backup button.
6. Select the OK button to confirm that you want to back up your data.
A Select File menu will open.
7-5
7. If you want to back up to your main data card, select the Storage
Card directory in the left viewport. If you want to use a secondary
data card, select the Storage Card 2 directory in the left viewport.
BACKUP TO STORAGE CARD 2
2 Note:
If the Storage Card 2 directory is not shown, select the Show All
9. Use the system keyboard to enter a name for the new backup file.
window will open to note that the backup is in progress. The
backup process may take a few minutes.
11. When the backup is complete, select the OK button.
12. Select the OK button to close the Backup Upgrade menu.
7-6
DynaVox Systems LLC
Back Up to a Windows Computer
Backing up user data to a computer involves first creating a backup
file on your DV4/MT4 device, then transferring the backup file to the
computer.
When you use a USB cable to connect your device to a computer, the
the computer views the DV4 or MT4 data storage card as a
removable USB device. You can place a copy of a backup file from
the device’s storage card onto the computer.
2 Note:
Before you begin this backup process, make sure that the DV4 or
MT4 is properly connected to the computer with a USB cable. Plug
the square connector on the USB cable into the USB device port,
and the flat connector in the USB port on the computer.
To back up user data to a Windows computer, complete the following
steps:
1. On the Windows computer, double-click on the My Computer icon
on the desktop. A My Computer window will open.
2. On your DV4 or MT4 device, follow Back Up to a Data Storage
Card on page 7-4. You may create a backup file on a second data
storage card or on your original card.
touch screen.
7-7
Card 1 button if the new backup file is on the main data storage
card. Select the Card 2 button if the new backup file is on a second
data storage card.
BACKUP TO WINDOWS
2 Note:
of this icon.
7. On the Windows computer, double-click the new Removable Disk
icon to see the contents of the selected storage card.
8. Select the backup file that you want to store on your computer. (If
the file is stored within a directory, you will have to double-click on
the name of the directory first.)
9. Select Edit in the title bar at the top of the window. A small pulldown menu will expand.
7-8
DynaVox Systems LLC
11. Select the Back button to return to the first My Computer window.
2 Note:
Series 4 backup files, you may want to do so at this time. To do
this, double-click on the Local Disk (C:) drive. Select File in the
title bar at the top of the window, select New and then select
Folder. A highlighted folder will be added to this drive. Type a
name (such as Series 4 Backups) for the new directory and then
select the Enter key on your keyboard. This series of steps will add
a new directory folder to the main drive of your Windows computer.
12. Find the directory where you want to store the backup file. Doubleclick on the directory name to open it.
13. Select Edit in the title bar at the top of the window. A small pulldown menu will expand.
14. Select Paste in the pull-down menu. A copy of the backup file will
be added to the selected directory.
2 Note:
Instead of copying and pasting files, you can also drag and drop
them between your computer’s hard drive and the data storage
card. Select the file and drag it to the intended location, then
release the selection.
15. After the backup file is copied to your computer, double-click on
the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon (looks like a green arrow above
a piece of paper) in the bottom right corner of your desktop.
Hardware window.
storage mode.
7-9
Back Up to a Macintosh Computer
Backing up user data to a computer involves first creating a backup
file on your DV4/MT4 device, then transferring the backup file to the
computer.
removable USB device. You can place a copy of a backup file from
the device’s storage card on the computer.
2 Note:
Before you begin this backup process, make sure that the DV4 or
MT4 is properly connected to the computer with a USB cable. Plug
the square connector on the USB cable into the USB device port,
and the flat connector in the USB port on the computer.
To back up user data to a Macintosh computer, complete the
following steps:
1. On your DV4 or MT4 device, follow the steps to back up to a data
storage card. You may create a backup file on a second data
storage card or on your original card.
Card 1 button if the new backup file is on the main data storage
card. Select the Card 2 button if the new backup file is on a second
data storage card.
7-10
DynaVox Systems LLC
5. On the Macintosh computer, your DV4 or MT4 storage card will
appear on the desktop as an icon that is either untitled or uses the
name of the storage card in your device. Double-click on this icon
to see the contents of the selected storage card.
6. Select the backup file that you want to store on your computer and
drag it into the directory that you want to use for DynaVox file
storage. A copy of the backup file will be placed in the new
directory.
2 Note:
You may want to create a special directory for DV4/MT4 backup
files on your computer.
7. After the backup file is copied to your computer, select Special in
the title bar at the top of your computer screen.
9. On your DV4 or MT4 device, select the OK button to exit Be USB
Storage mode.
10. You may now disconnect the USB cable connection. You may also
delete the backup file from your data storage card as it is
unnecessary to store the file on the card once it has been
transferred to a computer.
2 Note:
The first time you complete a procedure using a USB cable
connection to your Macintosh computer, the computer will deposit
several files onto your data card. These files will take up very little
memory on your device. The Macintosh files include the following:
Finder.DAT, Resource.FRK (a folder), Desktop DF, Desktop DB,
Appleshare.PDS, The VolumeSettingsFolder (a folder) and
_Move&Rename (a folder).
7-11
Restore User Data
If a problem occurs with the files in your DV4/MT4 device, or if you
wish to return the device to a previous state, you can restore the user
data from a backup file.
When you restore user information to a DynaVox Series 4 device, all
of the files that are stored in the selected backup file are copied to the
device. This process will overwrite any user information that is on the
DV4 or MT4 with the information in the backup file. Backing up
regularly helps ensure that you lose as little data as possible if a
problem occurs.
Restore with a Removable USB Storage
Device
You may restore user data from a backup file stored on a USB
storage device.
2 Note:
Restoring will overwrite all of the user data that is currently on your
device and replace it with the user data that is stored in the
selected backup file.
To restore user data using a USB storage device, complete the
following steps:
device.
screen.
will open.
7-12
DynaVox Systems LLC
6. Select the DynaVox Restore button.
7. Select the OK button to confirm that you want to proceed with the
restore process. A Select File menu will open.
2 Note:
9. In the right viewport, select the name of the backup file you want
to use.
10. Select the OK button. A window will open to note that the restore
is in progress. The process of restoring may take a few minutes.
11. When the restore is complete, a window will open to ask you if you
want to reboot your device to complete the restore process. Select
the Yes button.
The touch screen will go dark and the device will begin the reset
process. You will be prompted to recalibrate your touch screen by
following the instructions that appear on the screen. After a few
minutes, your device will automatically restart.
Restore with a Data Storage Card
You may restore user data from a backup file stored on a data
storage card. You may have backed up data to a secondary data
7-13
storage card, or you may have copied a backup file from a computer
to a data storage card.
2 Note:
2 Note:
page 6-8.
Restoring will overwrite all of the user data that is currently on your
device and replace it with the user data that is stored in the
selected backup file.
To restore user data from a data storage card, complete the following
steps:
screen.
will open.
5. Select the DynaVox Restore button.
6. A confirmation box will open. Select the OK button to continue with
the restore process.
7-14
DynaVox Systems LLC
7. Select the From File button. A Select File menu will open.
RESTORE FROM STORAGE CARD 2
8. If you want to restore from a backup file on your main data card,
select the Storage Card directory in the left viewport. If you want
to restore from a backup file on a secondary data card, select the
Storage Card 2 directory in the left viewport.
2 Note:
If the Storage Card 2 directory is not shown, select the Show All
9. In the right viewport, select the name of the backup file you want
to use.
10. Select the OK button. A window will open to note that the restore
is in progress.
7-15
11. When the restore is complete, a window will open to ask you if you
want to reboot your device to complete the restore process. Select
the Yes button.
Restore from a Windows Computer
To restore from a backup file stored on a computer, first you must
transfer the file from the computer to the device’s data storage card.
removable USB device. You can place a copy of a backup file directly
on the device’s data storage card. Then you can use the backup file
to restore user data.
2 Note:
Before you begin this process, make sure that the DV4 or MT4 is
To restore user data using a Windows computer, complete the
following steps:
1. On the Windows computer, double-click on the My Computer icon
on the desktop. A My Computer window will open.
7-16
DynaVox Systems LLC
Card 1 button if you want to restore from a file on the main data
storage card. Select the Card 2 button if you want to use a second
data storage card.
2 Note:
of this icon.
6. On the Windows computer, navigate through the My Computer
window to locate the directory with the DynaVox backup files.
Double-click on the directory name to see a list of the available
files.
7. Select the backup file that includes the data you want to restore.
10. Use the Back button to navigate back to the main My Computer
window.
11. Double-click on the Removable Disk directory that represents
your device’s storage card.
13. Select Paste in the pull-down menu. A copy of the selected backup
file will be added to the storage card.
14. After the backup file is copied to your computer, double-click on
7-17
Hardware window.
Storage mode.
19. Complete the restore process by following Restore with a Data
Storage Card on page 7-13. These steps will help you restore
your user data from the backup file that you copied to your data
card.
unnecessary to store the file on the card once it has been used to
restore the user data.
Restore from a Macintosh Computer
To restore from a backup file stored on a computer, first you must
removable USB device. You can place a copy of a backup file directly
on the device’s data storage card. Then you can use the backup file
to restore user data.
2 Note:
7-18
DynaVox Systems LLC
To restore user data from a Macintosh computer, complete the
following steps:
1. On your DV4 or MT4 device, select File in the main pull-down
menu.
data storage card.
name of your device’s storage card. Drag the backup file into this
directory. A copy of the backup file will be added to the directory.
5. After the backup file is copied to your device, select Special in the
title bar at the top of your computer screen.
Storage mode.
8. Complete the restore by following Restore with a Data Storage
Card on page 7-13. These steps will help you restore your user
data from the backup file that you copied to your data card.
2 Note:
Appleshare.PDS, TheVolumeSettings Folder (a folder) and
7-19
restore the user data.
7-20
DynaVox Systems LLC
Software Upgrades
SOFTWARE UPGRADES
From time to time, DynaVox Systems may provide a new version of
software that should be loaded into your device. The new version of
software will provide added features or fix system errors.
The software upgrade is distributed as a computer file that can be
transferred from any of the following storage devices:
• A removable USB storage device.
• A secondary data storage card.
• A Windows or Macintosh computer, using a USB cable connection.
You must have enough available storage space on any of these
devices to hold the upgrade file.
Upgrade with a Removable USB Storage
Device
You may load the software upgrade file on a removable USB storage
device to upgrade the DV4/MT4 software.
To upgrade from a removable USB storage device, complete the
following steps:
device.
screen.
will open.
will open.
7-21
Software Upgrades
6. Select the DynaVox Upgrade button.
the upgrade process. A Select File menu will open.
2 Note:
9. In the right viewport, select the name of the upgrade file you want
to use.
10. Select the OK button. A window will open to note that the upgrade
is in progress.
11. When the upgrade is complete, a window will open to ask you if
you want to reboot your device to complete the upgrade process.
Select the Yes button.
Upgrade with a Data Storage Card
You may load the software upgrade file on a data storage card to
upgrade the DV4/MT4 software.
2 Note:
7-22
page 6-8.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Software Upgrades
2 Note:
The upgrade file must be on the data storage card before
beginning these steps. One way to load the upgrade file on a data
storage card is to use a USB connection to transfer the file from a
computer. See Upgrade with a Windows Computer on page 7-24
or Upgrade with a Macintosh Computer on page 7-26 for more
information.
To upgrade from a data storage card, complete the following steps:
screen.
will open.
5. Select the DynaVox Upgrade button.
the upgrade process. A Select File menu will open.
7. If you want to use an upgrade file on your main data card, select
the Storage Card directory in the left viewport. If you want to use
an upgrade file on a secondary data card, select the Storage Card
2 directory in the left viewport.
8. In the right viewport, select the name of the upgrade file you want
to use.
9. Select the OK button. A window will open to note that the upgrade
is in progress.
10. When the upgrade is complete, a window will open to ask you if
you want to reboot your device to complete the upgrade process.
Select the Yes button.
7-23
Software Upgrades
Upgrade with a Windows Computer
To upgrade from an upgrade file stored on a computer, first you must
removable USB device. You can place a copy of an upgrade file
directly on the device’s storage card. Then you can use the file to
upgrade the software.
2 Note:
2 Note:
There must be enough free memory on the card to hold the
upgrade file.
1. On your Windows computer, double-click on the My Computer
icon on the desktop. A My Computer window will open.
menu.
3. Select Be USB Storage in the next pull-down menu.
7-24
DynaVox Systems LLC
Software Upgrades
data storage card.
2 Note:
of this icon.
5. On the Windows computer, select the upgrade file. The file will be
highlighted.
8. Double-click on the Removable Disk removable directory that
represents your device’s data storage card.
10. Select Paste in the pull-down menu. A copy of the upgrade file will
be added to the data storage card.
11. After the upgrade file is copied to your computer, double-click on
Hardware window.
7-25
Software Upgrades
Storage mode.
16. Complete the upgrade by following Upgrade with a Data Storage
Card on page 7-22. These steps will help you upgrade your
DynaVox Series 4 software.
delete the upgrade file from your data storage card as it is
upgrade your device software.
Upgrade with a Macintosh Computer
To upgrade from an upgrade file stored on a computer, first you must
removable USB device. You can place a copy of an upgrade file
directly on the device’s storage card. Then you can use the file to
upgrade the software.
2 Note:
2 Note:
7-26
There must be enough free memory on the card to hold the
upgrade file.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Software Upgrades
To upgrade from a Macintosh computer, complete the following steps:
menu.
2. Select Be USB Storage in the next pull-down menu.
data storage card.
name of your device’s storage card. Drag the upgrade file into this
directory. A copy of the upgrade file will be added to the directory.
5. After the upgrade file is copied to your device, select Special in the
title bar at the top of your computer screen.
Storage mode.
8. Complete the upgrade by followingUpgrade with a Data Storage
Card on page 7-22. These steps will help you upgrade your
DynaVox Series 4 software.
delete the upgrade file from your data storage card as it is
7-27
Software Upgrades
upgrade your device software.
2 Note:
7-28
Appleshare.PDS, TheVolumeSettings Folder (a folder) and
DynaVox Systems LLC
Appendices
A: Behavior Reference
B: Page Editing Software for Windows
C: Using DynaVox 3100 User Environments
G: Glossary
Behavior Reference
Behaviors are an extremely important feature of DynaVox Series 4
software. Without behaviors, none of the objects on a communication
page would have any function when selected. Assigning a behavior
to an item (a page or popup, a button, a tab control, an active area,
etc.) gives the item a specific task to perform when it is selected.
These individual behaviors are divided into 12 different categories.
The behaviors in each category are typically related to one general
topic or device feature.
This appendix provides a list of every available behavior and a
definition of the function of each behavior. The behaviors here are
presented according to category, as they are in the software.
A-1
Appendix A: Behavior Reference
Calculator Behaviors
(
On a calculator page or popup, a button with this behavior can be
used to place an open parenthesis in front of a value in an equation
that is being calculated.
)
used to place a close parenthesis behind a value in an equation that
is being calculated.
Add
On a calculator page or popup, a button with an Add behavior can be
used to add a number to the number that is in the Message Window.
Change Sign
On a calculator page or popup, a button with a Change Sign behavior
can be used to change a number from positive to negative, or from
negative to positive.
Cosine
On a calculator page or popup, selecting a button with a Cosine
behavior will find the cosine of the number in the Message Window.
Divide
On a calculator page or popup, a button with a Divide behavior can
be used to divide the number in the Message Window by another
number.
Equal
On a calculator page or popup, a button with an Equal behavior can
be used to find the total of the equation that is being calculated.
A-2
DynaVox Systems LLC
Multiply
On a calculator page or popup, a button with a Multiply behavior can
be used to multiply the number in the Message Window by another
number.
Percentage
On a calculator page or popup, a button with a Percentage behavior
can be used to find a specific percentage of the number in the
Message Window.
Reciprocal
On a calculator page or popup, selecting a button with a Reciprocal
behavior can be used to find the reciprocal of the number in the
Message Window.
Sin
On a calculator page or popup, selecting a button with a Sin behavior
will find the sin of the number in the Message Window.
Square Root
On a calculator page or popup, selecting a button with a Square Root
behavior will find the square root of the number in the Message
Window.
Squared
On a calculator page or popup, selecting a button with a Squared
behavior will multiply the number in the Message Window by itself.
Subtract
On a calculator page or popup, selecting a button with a Subtract
behavior will subtract a specified number from the number in the
Message Window.
A-3
Tangent
On a calculator page or popup, selecting a button with a Tangent
behavior will find the tangent of the number in the Message Window.
Y to the X
used to apply a Y to the X equation.
A-4
DynaVox Systems LLC
Common Behaviors
Activate a Macro
If the Activate a Macro behavior is assigned to a button, the steps in a
macro will be activated when the button is selected. The macro that
will be launched is selected when the behavior is added to the button.
Backspace
The Backspace behavior will delete one space behind the cursor in
the Message Window.
Clear
Selecting a button that features the Clear behavior will clear the
contents of the Message Window.
Close Popup
If the Close Popup behavior is assigned to a button on popup, the
popup will close when the button is selected.
Delete Word
The Delete Word behavior will delete the last word to be entered in
the Message Window.
Go to Page
If the Go to Page behavior is assigned to a button, the device will
open another page when the button is selected. The page that will be
opened is selected when the behavior is added to the button.
Go to Page and Search
If the Go to Page and Search behavior is assigned to a button,
selecting the button will cause the device to open a page with a
search box and conduct a search. The page that will be opened and
the search criteria are selected when the behavior is added to the
button.
A-5
Go to Sleep
The Go to Sleep behavior will cause the device to shut down a
specified number of seconds after the button with this behavior is
selected.
Insert Label
If an Insert Label behavior is assigned to a button, the text in the
button’s label will be sent to the Message Window when the button is
selected. The label text will be spoken when the Message Window is
selected.
Insert New Line
Add the Insert New Line behavior to a button if you want to use the
button to move down one line space in the Message Window.
Insert Text
Selecting a button with an Insert Text behavior will send a text
message to the Message Window. The text can be spoken when the
Message Window is selected. This text may be different than the text
in the button’s label. The text for this behavior is assigned to the
button when the behavior is added.
Open Popup Exclusively
When a button with this behavior is selected, the device will open a
specified popup. Selections can be made on the popup, but not on
the page behind it. The page behind the popup will be grayed out.
Page Back
Selecting a button with a Page Back behavior will close the current
page and reopen the previous page.
A-6
DynaVox Systems LLC
Page Forward
If a button with a Page Back behavior has been used to take the user
back one page, selecting a button with a Page Forward behavior will
take the user back to the next page (the page with the Page Back
button).
Pause
The Pause behavior enables a Series 4 user to specify that there
should be breaks of a specified number of seconds between actions
in a macro or behaviors assigned to a button.
Speak Label
If a Speak Label behavior is added to a button, selecting the button
will cause the Series 4 device to speak the text in the button’s label.
The label text will not be sent to the Message Window.
Speak Text
If a Speak Text behavior is added to a button, a text message will be
spoken when the button is selected. The text will not be sent to the
Message Window. The text that is spoken through this behavior may
be different than the text in the button’s label. The text for this
behavior is assigned to the button when the behavior is added.
A-7
Computer Access
Behaviors
Send Continuous Mouse Move
Buttons on the DV4 or MT4 device can be programmed to represent
continuous mouse moves when the device is being used for infrared
computer access. The direction and speed of the mouse move that is
assigned to a button is specified when the Send Continuous Mouse
Move behavior is added to the button. When a button that features
this behavior is selected, the DV4/MT4 device will continue to send
mouse move commands until you make a selection to stop it.
Send Key
an alphabetical or numerical key when the device is being used for
infrared computer access. The number or letter that the button will
represent will be specified when the Send Key behavior is added to
the button.
Send Key Press
Buttons on the DV4 or MT4 device can be programmed to simulate
the effect of pressing and holding down on an alphabetical or
numerical key on a computer keyboard. This behavior is useful if you
would need to hold down on one computer key while selecting
another in order to send a specific command. The number or letter
that the button will represent will be specified when the Send Key
Press behavior is added to the button.
Send Key Release
Buttons on the DV4 or MT4 device can be programmed to simulate
the effect of releasing the selection of an alphabetical or numerical
key on a computer keyboard. This behavior is commonly used to
release the selection of a button with a Send Key Press behavior. The
number or letter that the button will represent will be specified when
the Send Key Release behavior is added to the button.
A-8
DynaVox Systems LLC
Send Mouse Button Click
mouse button selections when the device is being used for infrared
computer access. The type of click (for example, click left or double
click right) that is assigned to a button is specified when the Send
Mouse Button Click behavior is added to the button. A Select Infrared
Mouse menu will open to provide a way to enter this information.
Send Mouse Move
mouse moves when the device is being used for infrared computer
access. The horizontal or vertical distance of the mouse move that is
assigned to a button is specified when the Send Mouse Move
behavior is added to the button.
Send SerialKeys Command
This behavior can be used to add special commands for SerialKeys
to buttons on a DV4/MT4 computer access page. When this behavior
is added to a button, you will need to enter the text of the command
(you do not need to add the ESC) into a system keyboard popup.
Send Special Key
computer command keys like Enter, Tab or Clear when the device is
being used for infrared computer access. When the Send Special Key
behavior is added to a button, a Select IR Special Key menu will
open. Use this menu to specify the type of key command and the type
of key selection (press, release or press and release) that should be
send when the button with the Send Special Key behavior is selected.
Send Text
The Send Text behavior can be used to send text from the DV4 or
MT4 device to a computer. When this behavior is added to a button, a
A-9
system keyboard popup will enable the individual who is
programming the device to compose a string of text. When the button
with this behavior is selected, the text will be sent to the computer.
A-10
DynaVox Systems LLC
Display System
Features Behaviors
Abbreviation Expansions
Selecting a button that features an Abbreviation Expansions behavior
will open the Abbreviation Browser menu.
Battery Information
If the Battery Information behavior is assigned to a button, selecting
that button will open a Battery Info window. This window displays a
battery power gauge and offers a Calibrate Battery button.
Concept Browser
Selecting a button that features a Concept Browser behavior will
open the Concept Browser menu.
Dictionary Browser
Selecting a button that features a Dictionary Browser behavior will
open the Dictionary Browser menu.
File Browser
Selecting a button that features a File Browser behavior will open the
File Browser menu.
Interface Features Menu
Selecting a button that features an Interface Features Menu behavior
will open the Interface Features menu.
IR Browser
Selecting a button that features an IR Browser behavior will open the
IR Browser menu.
A-11
Macro Editor
Selecting a button that features a Macro Editor behavior will open the
Macro Editor menu.
MP3 Player
Selecting a button that features an MP3 Player behavior will open the
MP3 Player menu.
Page Browser
Selecting a button that features a Page Browser behavior will open
the Page Browser menu.
Page Editing Preferences
Selecting a button that features a Page Editing Preferences behavior
will open the Preferences menu that is usually available only in page
edit mode.
Prediction Settings Menu
Selecting a button that features a Prediction Settings Menu behavior
will open the Prediction Settings menu.
Reminders Menu
Selecting a button that features a Reminders Menu behavior will
open the Reminders menu.
Reports Menu
Selecting a button that features a Reports Menu behavior will open
the Reports menu.
Setup Menu
Selecting a button that features a Setup Menu behavior will open the
Setup menu.
A-12
DynaVox Systems LLC
Speech Controls Menu
Selecting a button that features a Speech Controls Menu behavior
will open the Speech Controls menu.
Symbol Browser
Selecting a button that features a Symbol Browser behavior will open
the Symbol Browser menu.
System Settings
Selecting a button that features a System Settings behavior will open
the System Settings menu.
Tools
Selecting a button that features a Tools behavior will open the Tools
menu.
User Setup Wizard
Selecting a button that features a User Setup Wizard behavior will
access the User Setup Wizard.
A-13
Environmental Control
Behaviors
Clear IR Queue
This behavior works with the Enqueue IR Command behavior. If
buttons that feature the Enqueue IR Command behavior have been
used to create a queue (line) of infrared commands, selecting a
button with a Clear IR Queue behavior will remove all the commands
from the queue.
Enqueue IR Command
IF the DV4 or MT4 device has been taught the infrared commands for
controlling a household appliance, the Enqueue IR Command
behavior can be used to add the commands to buttons in such a way
that multiple commands can be sent as a group. When buttons with
the Enqueue IR Command behavior are selected, the commands are
lined up (queued) in the order that they are selected. They will not
actually be sent to the device that is being controlled until a button
with a Send IR Queue behavior is selected. The queuing behaviors
can be especially helpful for multiple-digit commands like TV
channels.
When this behavior is added to a button, the user must select a
specific command in the IR Browser menu.
Perform GEWA Jupiter Command
When the DV4 or MT4 device is connected to a GEWA phone,
selecting a button that has a Perform GEWA Jupiter Command
behavior will trigger one of the commands for using the phone. The
specific command that the button initiates is assigned in the Select
GEWA Jupiter Command window that is presented when the
behavior is added to the button.
A-14
DynaVox Systems LLC
Perform IR Command
If the DV4 and MT4 device has been taught the infrared commands
for controlling a household appliance, these commands can be added
to buttons on a communication page through the Perform IR
Command behavior. Selecting a button that has a Perform IR
Command behavior will send a selected infrared signal from the
device to the appliance. When this behavior is added to a button, the
user must select a specific command in the IR Browser menu.
Perform IR X10 Command
If the DV4 or MT4 device is being used for remote control with an X10 system, X-10 commands can be added to buttons on a
communication page through the Perform IR X10 Command
behavior. Selecting a button that has a Perform IR X10 Command
behavior will send a selected infrared signal from the device to the X10 module. When this behavior is added to a button, the user must
select a specific command in the Select X10 Command window.
Perform Tash Phone Command
When the DV4 or MT4 device is connected to a Tash phone,
selecting a button that has a Perform Tash Phone Command
behavior will trigger one of the commands for using the phone. The
specific command that the button initiates is assigned in the Select
Tash Phone Command window that is presented when the behavior
is added to the button.
Send IR Queue
This behavior works with the Enqueue IR Command behavior to allow
users to line up multiple IR commands (such as the digits for TV
channels) and send them to an electronic appliance at one time.
Selecting a button that features an Send IR Queue behavior will send
to the appliance the queue (line) of commands that was created by
selecting buttons with Enqueue IR Command behaviors.
A-15
Keyboard Behaviors
Alt Key
The Alt Key behavior can be used to add an Alt button to a system
keyboard page or popup. When a button with an Alt Key behavior is
selected, an Alt keyboard command will be initiated.
Cancel & Close System Keyboard
If a button that has Cancel & Close System Keyboard behavior is
added to a system keyboard popup, selecting the button will close the
keyboard popup without saving any of the text that has been entered.
Caps Lock Key
The Caps Lock Key behavior can be used to add a Caps Lock button
to a system keyboard page or popup. When a button with a Caps
Lock Key behavior is selected, a Caps Lock keyboard command will
be initiated.
Ctrl Key
The Ctrl Key behavior can be used to add a Ctrl button to a system
keyboard page or popup. When a button with a Ctrl Key behavior is
selected, a Ctrl keyboard command will be initiated.
Insert Key
The Insert Key behavior enables the person who is programming the
device to create a keyboard page or popup with buttons that work like
the keys on a standard keyboard. When an Insert Key behavior is
added to a keyboard button, the individual will specify what will be
sent to the Message Window when the button is selected in normal
mode, or after a Shift, Ctrl, Alt or Caps Lock button has been
selected.
Normal Key Mode
Selecting a button that features a Normal Key Mode behavior will
deactivate any buttons that have been selected in a keyboard page or
A-16
DynaVox Systems LLC
popup. For example, selecting a button with a Normal Key Mode
behavior will deselect the Caps Lock button if it was activated.
OK & Close System Keyboard
If a button that has an OK & Close System Keyboard behavior is
added to a system keyboard popup, selecting the button will save any
text that has been entered into the system keyboard and then close
the popup.
Shift Key
The Shift Key behavior can be used to add a Shift button to a system
keyboard page or popup. When a button with a Shift Key behavior is
selected, a Shift keyboard command will be initiated.
A-17
Miscellaneous
Behaviors
Calculator
Selecting a button that features a Calculator behavior will open a
Calculator window.
Edit Button
Selecting a button that features an Edit Button behavior will access
the green Modify button in the title bar at the top of the touch screen.
The Modify button will turn red to show that it has been selected.
Once the Modify button has been activated, selecting anther button
on the page or popup will open the Modify Button menu for that
button.
Edit Page
Selecting a button that features an Edit Page behavior will access the
Series 4 advanced page-editing features in page edit mode.
Find Similar Word
When a button that features a Find Similar Word behavior is selected,
a page with a search box will open and present words that are similar
to the one that is highlighted in the Message Window. The page that
will open must be designated in the Interface Features menu.
Learn Vocabulary
When a button that features a Learn Vocabulary behavior is selected,
the Learn Behavior menu will be presented.
Play a Sound
When a button that features a Play a Sound behavior is selected, the
device will play a selected sound file. The sound that will be played is
selected when the Play a Sound behavior is added to the button.
A-18
DynaVox Systems LLC
Print Screen
If the DV4 or MT4 device is connected to a printer, selecting a button
that features a Print Screen behavior will print out a hard copy of the
entire touch screen as it appears when the button is selected.
Save to Card
A button with a Save to Card behavior can be used to preserve any
new information by saving it directly to the DV4/MT4 data storage
card. When the button is selected, a confirmation window will be
presented to ask the user to confirm that any new data should be
saved to the card.
Set Scan Speed
Selecting a button with a Set Scan Speed behavior will reset the rate
at which the display is being scanned. The scan speed that is set by
this selection will be designated when the Set Scan Speed behavior
is added to the button.
Set Selection Method
Selecting a button with a Set Selection Method behavior will activate
a new selection method for the device. The selection method that is
activated by this selection will be designated when the Set Selection
Method behavior is added to the button.
Shut Down Device
This behavior can be used to shut down the device without selecting
the power button. When a button with this behavior is selected, the
device will immediately begin the process of shutting down. The user
will be asked to confirm the shutdown so that an accidental selection
of the button does not cause an inconvenience.
Sing
The DV4 or MT4 device will sing a song when a button that features a
Sing behavior is selected. When this behavior is added to a button, a
A-19
Load Song File menu will open so the user can select the name of the
song file that the button should sing.
Software Reset
Adding a Software Reset behavior to a button provides an easy way
for a DynaVox user to begin a soft reset of his or her device. When a
button that features this behavior is selected, a window will open to
ask the user to confirm that he or she wants to reset the system
memory. If the Yes button is selected, a soft reset will be started
immediately.
A-20
DynaVox Systems LLC
Message Window
Navigation Behaviors
Cursor Down
Selecting a button that features a Cursor Down behavior will move
the cursor down one line space in the Message Window.
Cursor Left
Selecting a button that features a Cursor Left behavior will move the
cursor one space or character to the left in the Message Window.
Cursor Right
Selecting a button that features a Cursor Right behavior will move the
cursor one space or character to the right in the Message Window.
Cursor Up
Selecting a button that features a Cursor Up behavior will move the
cursor up one line space in the Message Window.
Line Begin
Selecting a button that features a Line Begin behavior will move the
Message Window cursor to the beginning of the line it is on.
Line End
Selecting a button that features a Line End behavior will move the
Message Window cursor to the end of the line it is on.
Message Window End
Selecting a button that features a Message Window End behavior will
move the cursor to the right of the last character in the Message
Window.
A-21
Message Window Start
Selecting a button that features a Message Window Start behavior
will move the cursor to the left of the first character in the Message
Window.
Next Paragraph
Selecting a button that features a Next Paragraph behavior will move
the cursor to the beginning of the next paragraph in the Message
Window.
Next Sentence
Selecting a button that features a Next Sentence behavior will move
the cursor to the beginning of the next sentence in the Message
Window.
Next Word
Selecting a button that features a Next Word behavior will move the
cursor to the beginning of the next word in the Message Window.
Previous Paragraph
Selecting a button that features a Previous Paragraph behavior will
move the cursor to the beginning of the previous paragraph in the
Message Window.
Previous Sentence
Selecting a button that features a Previous Sentence behavior will
move the cursor to the beginning of the previous sentence in the
Message Window.
Previous Word
Selecting a button that features a Previous Word behavior will move
the cursor to the beginning of the previous word in the Message
Window.
A-22
DynaVox Systems LLC
Scroll Down
If the contents of the Message Window are larger than the available
window, selecting a button with a Scroll Down behavior will move the
visible contents of the Message Window up one line. This enables the
person using the device to see text that is hidden below the bottom of
the Message Window. Selecting a button with this behavior does not
move the cursor.
Scroll Up
If the contents of the Message Window are larger than the available
window, selecting a button with a Scroll Up behavior will move the
visible contents of the Message Window down one line. This enables
the person using the device to see text that is hidden above the top of
the Message Window. Selecting a button with this behavior does not
move the cursor.
Search Again for Text
The Search Again for Text behavior is intended for use in
combination with the Search for Text behavior. When a button with
the Search for Text behavior has been used to highlight the first
occurrence of a word or phrase in the Message Window, selecting a
button with a Search Again for Text behavior will highlight the next
occurrence of the same word or phrase.
Search for Text
The Search for Text behavior enables an individual who is using a
Series 4 device to search the contents of the Message Window for a
specific word or phrase. When a button with a Search for Text
behavior is selected, a system keyboard popup will be presented.
Once a word or phrase is typed into the system keyboard, the Series
4 software will search the text in the Message Window and highlight
the first occurrence of that word or phrase.
A-23
Message Window
Operations
Add Prefix
The Add Prefix behavior can be used to add a selected prefix to the
last word that was added to the Message Window. When the Add
Prefix behavior is added to a button, a Select a Prefix window will
open so a prefix can be chosen.
Add Suffix
The Add Suffix behavior can be used to add a selected suffix to the
last word that was added to the Message Window. When the Add
Suffix behavior is added to a button, a Select a Suffix window will
open so a suffix can be chosen.
Alternate Output
Selecting a button that features an Alternate Output behavior will
open an Alternate Output Options window. This window can be used
to launch an alternate output connection between a computer and the
DV4 or MT4.
Backspace
Selecting a button that features a Backspace behavior will delete one
space behind the cursor in the Message Window.
Change Font
When a button that features a Change Font behavior is selected, a
Select Font menu will be presented. This menu will provide options
for temporarily customizing the font used for text in the Message
Window. If a button with this behavior is used to change the font in
the Message Window, the font will revert to the default settings once
the Message Window is cleared.
A-24
DynaVox Systems LLC
Change Word Form
The Change Word Form behavior can be used to change the form of
the last word that was added to the Message Window. When the
Change Word Form behavior is added to a button, the user will be
asked to select the word form that the behavior should apply.
Chat Mode On/Off
If the device is not in Chat Mode, selecting a button that features a
Chat Mode On/Off behavior will activate Chat Mode and temporarily
present a clear Message Window. To deactivate Chat Mode and
return to the previous Message Window, select button with the Chat
Mode On/Off again.
Clear
Selecting a button that features a Clear behavior will clear the
contents of the Message Window.
Copy
Selecting a button that features a Copy behavior will make a copy of
the highlighted text in the Message Window. This copy is temporarily
stored on an invisible clipboard and can be pasted in another
location.
Copy to ‘Insert Text’
When a button that features a Copy to ‘Insert Text’ behavior is
selected, the device will make a copy of the text in the Message
Window. The person who is using the device will then be prompted to
select another button. The copied text will be pasted into this button
as part of an Insert Text behavior.
Copy to ‘Speak Text’
When a button that features a Copy to ‘Speak Text’ behavior is
selected, the device will make a copy of the text in the Message
Window. The person who is using the device will then be prompted to
A-25
select another button. The copied text will be pasted into this button
as part of a Speak Text behavior.
Cut
Selecting a button that features a Cut behavior will remove the
highlighted text in the Message Window and store it on an invisible
clipboard. The text that was cut can then be pasted in another
location.
Delete Character
Selecting a button that features a Delete Character behavior will
delete the character or space that is to the right of the cursor in the
Message Window.
Delete Word
Selecting a button that features a Delete Word behavior will delete
the last word that was added to the Message Window.
Deselect Text
Selecting a button that features a Deselect Text behavior will remove
the highlight from any text that is selected in the Message Window.
Desymbolate the Selection
When a button that features a Desymbolate the Selection behavior is
selected, the Series 4 software remove the symbols from the text that
is highlighted in the Message Window.
Expand Abbreviation
The Expand Abbreviation behavior enables a DynaVox user to make
use of abbreviation expansions even when the device is not set to
automatically expand abbreviations. If a registered abbreviation is
typed into the Message Window and then a button that features an
Expand Abbreviation behavior is selected, the abbreviation will be
expanded into the full word or phrase.
A-26
DynaVox Systems LLC
Insert Label
If an Insert Label behavior is assigned to a button, the text in the
button’s label will be sent to the Message Window when the button is
selected. The label text will be spoken when the Message Window is
selected.
Insert New Line
Add the Insert New Line behavior to a button if you want to use the
button to move down one line space in the Message Window.
Insert Text
Selecting a button with an Insert Text behavior will send a text
message to the Message Window. The text can be spoken when the
Message Window is selected. This text may be different than the text
in the button’s label. The text for this behavior is assigned to the
button when the behavior is added.
Load File
The Load File behavior enables a Series 4 user to fill the Message
Window with saved text. When a button that features a Load File
behavior is selected, a Select File menu will open. The Series 4
software will load the text file that is selected in this menu.
Load Text and Symbolate
The Load File and Symbolate behavior enables a Series 4 user to fill
the Message Window with text saved text. When the text is added to
the Message Window, this behavior will present symbols with any
words that have related symbols. When a button that features a Load
File and Symbolate behavior is selected, a Select File menu will
open. The Series 4 software will load and symbolate the text file that
is selected in this menu.
A-27
Paste
When a button that features a Paste behavior is selected, the last text
that was cut or copied to the invisible clipboard will be pasted in the
Message Window.
Prediction Insert
Selecting a predictor button that features a Prediction Insert behavior
will send the contents of the predictor button to the Message Window.
Print All
with a Print All behavior will print the entire contents of the Message
Window.
Print Selection
with a Print Selection behavior will print the highlighted contents of
the Message Window.
Print Text
with a Print Text behavior will print the text in the Message Window.
Symbols in the Message Window will not be printed.
Save Message Window
The Save Message Window behavior enables a Series 4 user to save
Message Window text in a file for future use. When a button that
features a Save Message Window behavior is selected, an Enter File
Name menu is presented. In this menu, the user can assign a name
to the file and decide where to store it.
A-28
DynaVox Systems LLC
Save Message Window As
The Save Message Window behavior enables a Series 4 user to save
Message Window text under a new name. When a button that
features a Save Message Window As behavior is selected, an Enter
File Name menu is presented. In this menu, the user can assign a
name to the file and decide where to store it.
Select All
Selecting a button that features a Select All behavior will highlight
everything in the Message Window.
Select Previous Word
Selecting a button that features a Select Previous Word behavior will
highlight the last word to be added to the Message Window. Selecting
the same button again will move the highlight one word to the left.
Set Default Font
When a button that features a Set Default Font behavior is selected,
a Select Font menu will be presented. This menu will provide options
for customizing the font used for text in the Message Window.
Show Word Forms
The Show Word Forms behavior enables a Series 4 user to replace
the last word in the Message Window with another form of the word.
When a button that features the Show Word Forms behavior is
selected, a Choose a Word window will open. This window will
display the available forms of the selected word. When a word form is
chosen, the last word in the Message Window will be automatically
replaced with the chosen form.
Spell Check
When a button with a Spell Check behavior is selected, the contents
of the Message Window will be checked for spelling errors.
A-29
Start Selecting
If arrow buttons are being used to move the cursor in the Message
Window, selecting a button with a Start Selecting behavior will create
the beginning of a highlight at the position of the cursor. Using the
arrow buttons to move across or up and down the Message Window.
An ending point for the highlight will be added when a button with a
Stop Selecting behavior is selected.
Stop Selecting
If arrow buttons are being used to highlight text after a button with a
Start Selecting behavior was selected, selecting a button with a Stop
Selecting behavior will create an end to the highlight.
Symbol Spell Check
When a button that features a Symbol Spell Check behavior is
selected, the Series 4 software will begin to check the label fields of
symbols in the Message Window for spelling errors.
Symbolate the Selected Text
When a button that features a Symbolate the Selected Text behavior
is selected, the Series 4 software will scan the highlighted text in
Message Window and add a symbol to any word that has a related
symbol.
A-30
DynaVox Systems LLC
Page Navigation
Behaviors
Close All Popups
Any open popups will be closed when a button with a Close All
Popups behavior is selected.
Close Popup
Selecting a button that features a Close Popup behavior will close the
popup on which the button is placed.
Go to Page
If the Go to Page behavior is assigned to a button, the device will
open another page when the button is selected. The page that will be
opened is selected when the behavior is added to the button.
Go to Page & Search
If the Go to Page and Search behavior is assigned to a button,
selecting the button will cause the device to open a page with a
search box and conduct a search. The page that will be opened and
the search criteria are selected when the behavior is added to the
button.
Minimize Popup
Selecting a button that features a Minimize Popup behavior will
minimize the popup on which the button is located. When a popup is
minimized, it is not closed but it is reduced to a small bar at the
bottom of the touch screen. This bar features the name of the popup
and a square expansion button. Select this expansion button to bring
the popup back to full size.
A-31
Open Popup Exclusively
When a button with this behavior is selected, the device will open a
specified popup. Selections can be made on the popup, but not on
the page behind it. The page behind the popup will be grayed out.
Page Back
Selecting a button with a Page Back behavior will close the current
page and reopen the previous page.
Page Forward
If a button with a Page Back behavior has been used to take the user
back one page, selecting a button with a Page Forward behavior will
take the user back to the next page (the page with the Page Back
button).
Page Navigator
Selecting a button that features a Page Navigator behavior will
automatically open the Page Navigator menu, enabling the DynaVox
user to quickly open another page or popup.
Search for a Page with Content
The Search for a Page with Content behavior enables DynaVox users
to quickly find pages and popups that feature a specific vocabulary
word or concept. When a button that features this behavior is
selected, a system keyboard popup will open. When a word or phrase
is entered in the keyboard, the Series 4 software will search the
system and present a list of pages and popups that include the word
or phrase. The device user can then select one of these pages or
popups and open it quickly.
A-32
DynaVox Systems LLC
Speech Behaviors
Change Voice
When a button that features a Change Voice behavior is selected, the
device’s speaking voice will change. The new voice is selected when
the behavior is assigned to the button.
Change Volume
When a button that features a Change Volume behavior is selected,
the volume at which the device speaks will increase or decrease. The
new volume is selected when the behavior is assigned to the button.
Speak Label
If a Speak Label behavior is added to a button, selecting the button
will cause the Series 4 device to speak the text in the button’s label.
The label text will not be sent to the Message Window.
Speak Message Window
The device will speak the contents of the Message Window whenever
a button with a Speak Message Window behavior is selected.
Speak Paragraph
When a button that features a Speak Paragraph behavior is selected,
the device will speak the paragraph that is on the same line as the
cursor in the Message Window.
Speak Random Text
The Speak Random Text behavior allows multiple vocabulary items to
be assigned to one button. When the button is selected, the Series 4
software will choose one of the items at random and speak it.
Selecting the button again will cause the device to choose and speak
a different item.
A-33
When this behavior is added to a button, a Speak Random Text
Editor menu will open. This menu can be used to create, edit and
arrange vocabulary for the behavior.
Speak Selection
When a button that features a Speak Selection behavior is selected,
the device will speak the highlighted text in the Message Window.
Speak Sentence
When a button that features a Speak Sentence behavior is selected,
the device will speak the sentence that follows the cursor in the
Message Window.
Speak Text
If a Speak Text behavior is added to a button, a text message will be
spoken when the button is selected. The text will not be sent to the
Message Window. The text that is spoken through this behavior may
be different than the text in the button’s label. The text for this
behavior is assigned to the button when the behavior is added.
Speak Word
When a button that features a Speak Word behavior is selected, the
device will speak the word that follows the cursor in the Message
Window.
Temporary Voice
Add the Temporary Voice behavior to use a voice that is different from
the normal device speaking voice for the actions of a specific button.
When a button that features a Temporary Voice behavior is selected,
the device will use a different voice for any speaking behaviors that
are assigned to the button. When the next button is selected, the
device will revert to the default speaking voice.
A-34
DynaVox Systems LLC
Temporary Volume
Add the Temporary Volume behavior to increase or decrease the
volume for the actions of a specific button. When a button that
features a Temporary Volume behavior is selected, the device will
use a different volume for any sound or speaking behaviors that are
assigned to the button. When the next button is selected, the device
will revert to the default volume.
Volume Down
When a button that features a Volume Down behavior is selected, the
device’s volume will be reduced by one interval.
Volume Setting
When a button that features a Volume Setting behavior is selected, a
Volume slider will be presented. The addition of this behavior to a
button allows a device user to access the Volume slider without
making the selections that are required to access the Speech
Controls menu.
Volume Up
When a button that features a Volume Up behavior is selected, the
device’s volume will be increased by one interval.
A-35
System Settings
Behaviors
Auto Expand On/Off
A button that features the Auto Expand On/Off behavior can be used
to select or deselect the Automatically Expand Abbreviations check
box without accessing the Show Message Window Settings group
box of the Interface Features menu
Autocapitalize On/Off
A button that features the Autocapitalize On/Off behavior can be used
to select or deselect the Capitalize Start of Sentence check box
without accessing the Show Message Window Settings group box of
Autoclear On/Off
A button that features the Autoclear On/Off behavior can be used to
select or deselect the Clear after Speaking check box without
accessing the Show Message Window Settings group box of the
Interface Features menu.
Autospacing On/Off
A button that features the Autospacing On/Off behavior can be used
to select or deselect the Add Spaces Between Words check box
without accessing the Show Message Window Settings group box of
Context Prediction On/Off
A button that features the Context Prediction On/Off behavior can be
used to select or deselect the Context Prediction check box without
accessing the Prediction Settings menu.
A-36
DynaVox Systems LLC
Flexible Abbreviation Expansion On/Off
A button that features the Flexible Abbreviation Expansion On/Off
behavior can be used to select or deselect the Flexible Abbreviation
check box without accessing the Prediction Settings menu.
Highlight as You Speak On/Off
A button that features the Highlight as You Speak On/Off behavior
can be used to select or deselect the Highlight as You Speak check
box without accessing the Show Message Window Settings group
box in the Interface Features menu.
Mouse Pause On/Off
A button that features a Mouse Pause On/Off behavior can be used
to switch between mouse pause and another selection method (this
second selection method should be selected with the Selection
Method pull-down menu in the Setup menu).
Speak on Entry On/Off
A button that features a Speak on Entry On/Off behavior can be used
to select or deselect the Speak when Inserting Words check box
without accessing the Show Message Window Settings group box in
Word Prediction On/Off
A button that features a Word Prediction On/Off behavior can be used
to select or deselect the Prediction check box without accessing the
Prediction Settings menu.
A-37
Page Editing Software for Windows
When you received your DV4 or MT4 device, you also received a CD
that contains the DynaVox Series 4 page editing software for
Windows computers. This non-speaking version of the DynaVox
Series 4 software will enable you to create and edit communication
pages on your Windows computer instead of on the DV4/MT4 device.
These pages can then be easily shared with a Series 4 device.
The quick customization tools (the User Setup Wizard, the Modify
button, Quick Page and the skeleton pages) and advanced page
editor are available on the software and work exactly as they do on a
Series 4 device. The instructions in this documentation for page
modification and other features can be applied to either the page
editing software or the software on a device.
B-1
Appendix B: Page Editing Software for Windows
Continue to read this section to see installation instructions for the
page editing software, as well as information about transferring pages
from the page editing software to a DV4/MT4 device.
2 Note:
To run successfully, the DynaVox Series 4 page editing software
must be installed on a Windows 2000 or XP computer.
Install Page Editing Software
To install the DynaVox Series 4 page editing software on your
Windows computer, follow these steps:
1. Place the CD in your computer’s CD drive. After a moment, a DV4
Page Editing (D) window will open.
2. Double-click on DynaVox_Page_Editing. A series of DynaVox
Series 4 Setup windows will open.
3. Select the Next button in the Welcome window.
4. Select the Next button in the Ready to Install window. The software
will be loaded onto your computer. This process may take a
moment.
5. Select the Close button when the Finished window is presented.
6. Close any open windows and then remove the CD. Be sure to store
the CD in a safe place.
This installation process will automatically add a DV4 Page Editing
icon to your computer’s desktop. To open the page editing
software, simply double-click on this icon.
B-2
DynaVox Systems LLC
Transfer Pages from Page Editing Software
to a DV4/MT4 Device with a USB Cable
Connection
If you use the page editing software to create and customize
communication pages and popups, these pages can easily be shared
with a DV4 or MT4 device. A USB cable connection can be used to
send pages directly from the Windows computer to the DV4/MT4
device.
If you are going to share a page that was created with the page
editing software, you must first export a copy of the page to the
Exports folder inside the User Files folder for your software. To do
this, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
2 Note:
exported.
select the folder with the name of the page set where the page
B-3
6. To use the Search feature, type the name of the page you want to
export into the text box beside the Search button and then
continue with the rest of this step.
a. Select the Search button. The appropriate file name will be
highlighted in the right viewport.
b. Select the check box beside the file name and then continue
with step 7.
menu will open.
8. Select the Export Pages or Templates button.
9. Select the OK button to acknowledge that the selected page was
exported.
A copy of the selected page can now be found in the Exports folder
within the User Files folder (in the File Browser menu). Note that
the DynaVox Series 4 software automatically assigns an extension
(.epg) to the name of the exported page file.
B-4
DynaVox Systems LLC
You can now use a USB cable connection to share a copy of this
file with a DV4 or MT4 device. To do this, continue with these
steps:
2 Note:
2 Note:
When you use a USB connection between your device and a
computer, your device’s storage card will appear as a lettered icon
(usually E:, F: or G:) in the left viewport of the File Browser menu in
the page editing software. You may want to look at the icons that
appear in this viewport before initiating the connection so that you
are better able to recognize the new icon.
16. On the computer, select the pull-down menu button in the title bar
of the page editing software.
menu will open.
B-5
20. Take note of the letter beside the new icon in the left viewport.
21. Select the pull-down menu that is below the Search button (This
pull-down menu should be currently set to All Files.) and then
select the User Files option.
folder.
page you want to add to the USB device.
25. Select the Copy button.
26. Select the pull-down menu that is below the Search button and
then select the All Files option.
27. In the left viewport, select the expansion box beside the icon that
represents your device’s storage card.
28. Select the expansion box beside the User Files folder.
30. Select the Paste button. A copy of the page you selected will be
added to the right viewport.
32. Select the OK button to close the Tools menu. (You can now close
the page editing software if you want to.)
33. After the file is copied to the DV4/MT4 data storage card, doubleclick on the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon (looks like a green
arrow above a piece of paper) in the bottom right corner of your
desktop.
Hardware window.
B-6
DynaVox Systems LLC
storage mode.
You may now disconnect the USB cable connection. The new
page file has been added to the User Files folder in the File
Browser menu on your DV4 or MT4 device. To make this page
available in the Page Browser menu, follow Import a Page, Popup
or Template from the User Files Folder on page 4-96.
Transfer Pages from Page Editing Software
to a DV4/MT4 Device with a USB Device
If you use the page editing software to create and customize
communication pages and popups, these pages can easily be shared
with a DV4 or MT4 device. You can do this by loading the pages onto
a removable USB storage device and then using the USB device to
import the files to the DV4/MT4 device.
If you are going to share a page that was created with the page
editing software, you must first export a copy of the page to the
Exports folder inside the User Files folder for your software. To do
this, follow these steps:
touch screen.
menu will open.
4. Select the Page Browser button. The Page Browser menu will
open.
B-7
2 Note:
exported.
select the folder with the name of the page set where the page
6. To use the Search feature, type the name of the page you want to
export into the text box beside the Search button and then
continue with the rest of this step.
a. Select the Search button. The appropriate file name will be
highlighted in the right viewport.
b. Select the check box beside the file name and then continue
with step 7.
menu will open.
8. Select the Export Pages or Templates button.
9. Select the OK button to acknowledge that the selected page was
exported.
B-8
DynaVox Systems LLC
A copy of the selected page can now be found in the Exports folder
within the User Files folder (in the File Browser menu). Note that
the DynaVox Series 4 software automatically assigns an extension
(.epg) to the name of the exported page file.
You can now load a copy of this page onto a USB device and then
use the device to share the page with a DV4 or MT4 device. To do
this, continue with these steps:
2 Note:
When you plug the USB device into the computer’s USB port, the
device will appear as a lettered icon (usually E:, F: or G:) in the left
viewport of the File Browser menu in the page editing software. You
may want to look at the icons that appear in this viewport before
plugging in the USB device so that you are better able to recognize
the new icon.
12. Plug the USB device into a USB port on the Windows computer.
13. Select the pull-down menu button in the title bar of the page editing
software.
menu will open.
17. Take note of the letter beside the new icon in the left viewport.
18. Select the pull-down menu that is below the Search button (This
pull-down menu should be currently set to All Files.) and then
select the User Files option.
folder.
page you want to add to the USB device.
B-9
22. Select the Copy button.
23. Select the pull-down menu that is below the Search button and
then select the All Files option.
24. In the left viewport, select the icon that represents the USB storage
device.
25. Select the Paste button. A copy of the page you selected will be
added to the right viewport.
27. Select the OK button to close the Tools menu. (You can now close
the page editing software if you want to.)
28. After the file is copied to the USB storage device, double-click on
Hardware window.
You may now unplug the USB device from the computer. To use
the USB device to add the page to a DV4 or MT4 device, follow the
step-by-step instructions for importing a page with a USB storage
device.
B-10
DynaVox Systems LLC
Using DynaVox 3100 User
Environments
You may have many customized pages and popups that you have
created for a DynaVox 3100 or DynaMyte 3100. Your new DV4/MT4
allows you to import this information from the 3100 devices so that
you can continue using your customized pages on the new device.
You may import this information in two ways:
• From a 3100 device to an DV4/MT4 device via a computer.
Use this method if the pages and popups are stored on a 3100
device. This method requires a computer (PC or Macintosh) with
DynaVox 3100 System Software or DynaVox 3100 Backup
software installed, as well as the appropriate cables and adapters
to connect both devices to the computer.
C-1
Appendix C: Using DynaVox 3100 User Environments
• From DynaVox 3100 System Software installed on a computer to
a DV4/MT4 device.
Use this method if the pages and popups are stored on a computer
using the DynaVox 3100 System Software. This method requires
a computer (PC or Macintosh) with DynaVox 3100 System
Software installed and the appropriate cables and adapters to
connect the DV4/MT4 device to the computer.
The following sections give step-by-step instructions for transferring
the pages and popups by either of these methods.
Import a 3100 User to a Series 4 Device from
a DynaVox 3100 or DynaMyte 3100 Device
Any DynaVox 3100 user environment can be transferred to a
DynaVox Series 4 device. This is helpful if you used to communicate
with a DynaVox 3100 or DynaMyte 3100 device, and you would like
to continue to use a user environment (a set of communication pages
and popups) from this device with your new Series 4 device. The
ability to transfer a user environment and use it with your new device
may be especially appealing if you invested time in adding
customized vocabulary to the pages in the DynaVox 3100 user.
2 Note:
C-2
The process of transferring a user environment from a DynaVox
3100 device to a DV4 or MT4 device requires both devices to be
connected to a computer with DynaVox 3100 System Software or
the DynaVox 3100 Backup Software. The Series 4 device can be
connected to the computer with a USB cable. The DynaVox 3100
device can be connected to the computer with the transfer cable
that was shipped with the DynaVox device.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Follow these steps to transfer a user environment from a
DynaVox/DynaMyte 3100 to a DV4 or MT4 device:
1. Attach the USB cable to the USB device port of the DV4 or MT4
device.
2. Attach the USB cable to the USB host port of the computer.
3. Attach the transfer cable to the serial port of the DynaVox 3100 or
DynaMyte 3100.
4. Attach the transfer cable to the computer. If you are using a PC,
attach the transfer cable to the serial port.
2 Note:
2 Note:
If you are using a newer PC, you may need to use a Tripp Lite
serial-to-USB adapter and connect the transfer cable to the USB
host port.
If you are using a Macintosh, attach the transfer cable to the printer
port. If you are using a newer Macintosh, you may need to use a
Keyspan ADB-to-USB adapter to connect the transfer cable to the
USB host port.
5. On the DV4 or MT4 device, select the pull-down menu button in the
title bar at the top of the touch screen.
C-3
Card 1 button to use the main data storage card. Select the Card
2 button to use a secondary data storage card.
2 Note:
If an error occurs because the computer does not recognize the
Series 4 device, you may need to restart your computer and begin
again with step 5.
9. On the DynaVox 3100 or DynaMyte 3100, access the Setup
menu.
10. Select the Input/Output Device Settings button.
11. Set the File Transfer option ring to Y Modem.
12. Select the Set File Transfer Port button.
13. Select the Serial Port 1 button.
14. Set the Serial 1 option ring to Baud Rate 19200.
16. Select the Tools button.
17. Select the File Browser button.
18. Expand the folder of the user you want to import to the Series 4
device. You may have to use the Up and Down arrow buttons to
find the correct folder in the viewport.
19. Select the Mark/Unmark Current Item button to highlight the files
you want to transfer.
C-4
DynaVox Systems LLC
IMPORTING 3100 USER FILES
2 Note:
Only .dvx files that contain customized information need to be
transferred.
20. Select the Transfer Marked Files button.
21. Select the Yes button to confirm that you want to transfer the files.
22. On the computer, open the DynaVox System Software or DynaVox
Backup Software.
23. If you are using DynaVox Backup Software, select the Comm.
Settings button. If you are using DynaVox System Software,
access the Setup menu and then select the Input/Output Device
Settings button.
24. Set the File Transfer option ring to Y Modem.
25. Select the Set File Transfer Port button.
26. Set the button for the port to which the transfer cable is attached.
C-5
27. Set the Transfer Port option ring to Baud Rate 19200.
29. If you are using DynaVox System Software, select the Tools
button and then select the File Browser button before continuing
with the next step. If you are using DynaVox Backup Software,
continue with the next step.
30. Set the Current Drive option ring, to the USB storage drive. On a
Windows computer, this setting is usually Drive E or Drive F. On a
Macintosh computer, this drive is usually listed as Unlabeled.
31. Select the Add Folder button.
32. Set the Add to: option ring to Top Level.
33. Select the Name New Folder button.
34. Use the system keyboard to type in a name for the new folder.
36. Highlight the new folder in the viewport of the File Browser menu.
37. Select the Receive File button.
38. Select the Current Folder button.
39. On the DynaVox 3100 or DynaMyte 3100, select the Start
Transfer button.
40. On the computer, select the Start Transfer button.
41. Once the transfer is complete, select the Done button on both the
computer and the DynaVox 3100 or DynaMyte 3100.
42. On the DV4 or MT4, select the OK button to exit USB storage
mode.
touch screen.
45. Select Tools in the second pull-down menu.
C-6
DynaVox Systems LLC
46. Select the Import 3100 User button.
48. Select the Storage Card (or Storage Card 2) directory in the left
viewport.
49. Select the new folder that contains the 3100 files in the right
viewport.
51. Disconnect the connection between your computer and the
DV4/MT4 and DynaVox 3100/DynaMyte 3100 devices.
Once the 3100 user environment has been successfully imported,
you can access the communication pages through the Page
Navigator menu by following the steps in Introduction to Page
Navigation on page 2-6.
Import a 3100 User to a Series 4 Device from
DynaVox System Software
Any DynaVox 3100 user environment (a set of communication pages
and popups) can be easily transferred to a DynaVox Series 4 device.
This is helpful if you have invested time in customizing a user
environment on a computer with DynaVox 3100 System Software,
and you would like to use these pages with your new Series 4 device.
2 Note:
This process requires the DV4 or MT4 device to be connected to
the computer with a USB cable.
Follow these steps to transfer a user environment from DynaVox
3100 System Software on a computer to a DV4 or MT4 device:
1. Attach the USB cable to the USB device port of the DV4 or MT4
device.
C-7
2. Attach the USB cable to the USB host port of the computer.
3. On the DV4 or MT4 device, select the pull-down menu button in the
title bar at the top of the touch screen.
Card 1 button to use the main data storage card. Select the Card
2 button to use a secondary data storage card.
2 Note:
If an error occurs because the computer does not recognize the
Series 4 device, you may need to restart your computer and begin
again with step 5.
7. On the computer, open the DynaVox Systems Software.
8. Access the Setup menu.
9. Select the Tools button.
10. Select the File Browser button.
12. Select the Add Folder button.
13. Set the Add to: option ring to Top Level.
14. Select the Name New Folder button.
15. Use the system keyboard to type in a name for the new folder.
C-8
DynaVox Systems LLC
17. Set the Current Drive option ring to the computer’s hard drive. On
a Windows computer, select the C drive. On a Macintosh
computer, select the Macintosh HD drive.
18. Highlight the DynaVox Systems Software folder in the left
viewport. You may need to use the Up and Down arrow buttons to
scroll through the files in the viewport. (See Importing 3100 User
Files on page C-5 for a picture of this menu.)
2 Note:
On a Windows this folder should be located in the Programs
directory.
19. Using the Right arrow button, expand the DynaVox Systems
Software folder.
20. Locate the folder for the user you want to import to the Series 4
device.
21. Using the Right arrow button, expand the user folder.
22. Mark the files you want to transfer by highlighting each file and
then selecting the Mark/Unmark Current Item button.
2 Note:
Only .dvx files that contain customized information need to be
transferred.
23. Select the Copy Marked Files button. A Select Folder menu will
open.
25. Highlight the new user folder.
C-9
27. On the DV4 or MT4, select the pull-down menu button at the top of
the touch screen.
29. Select Tools in the second pull-down menu.
30. Select the Import 3100 button.
32. Select the Storage Card (or Storage Card 2) directory in the left
viewport.
33. Select the new folder that contains the 3100 files in the right
viewport.
35. Disconnect the connection between your computer and the DV4 or
MT4 device.
Once the 3100 user environment has been successfully imported,
you can access the communication pages in the user through the
Page Navigator menu by following the steps in Introduction to Page
Navigation on page 2-6.
C-10
DynaVox Systems LLC
Glossary
A
Active Area
Active areas are like invisible buttons. They have no borders or
physical characteristics, but they can be assigned a behavior that will
initiate an action when the active area is selected.
Active Label
used to place text on buttons, pages and popups. Instead of being
manually assigned with a system keyboard, the text in an active label
is automatically filled in and maintained by the Series 4 software.
G-1
Appendix G: Glossary
B
Behavior
A behavior is an action or command that can be programmed into a
button. When the button is selected, the assigned behavior will be
launched automatically.
Browser
A browser is a type of menu that contains a viewport and buttons.
The buttons provide tools for customizing the item that is selected in
the viewport. Browsers are used to navigate through multiple options
and to customize user information like pages, popups, vocabulary
words and concepts, sounds and songs.
Button
with a touch, a mouse click or other input device. It may represent a
behavior, a word or even several sentences. A button may feature a
text label and/or a symbol, and can be programmed to enact specific
behaviors when it is selected. There are several different kinds of
buttons: symbol buttons, Go To buttons, predictor buttons, character
predictor buttons and recency buttons.
C
G-2
Character Predictor Button
Character Predictor buttons are found on a keyboard pages or
popups. These buttons will use the letters you select on the keyboard
page to predict and present letters that you may want to select next.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Check Box
A check box is used to enable and disable an option. A check box is a
small box beside a text label that identifies the option. When the
check box is selected, an X appears inside the box.
E
F
G
Expansion Box
Expansion boxes are small boxes that are used to expand and
compress folders (directories) within a viewport. These boxes appear
to the left of the folder name. When the folder is compressed, the box
will feature a plus (+) sign. Selecting the box once will expand the
folder. When the folder is expanded, the box will feature a minus (-)
sign. Selecting the box again will compress the folder.
Folder/Directory
A directory is a stored group of files, pages or other items. Directories
are displayed in the viewports of browser menus. Because a graphic
that is shaped like a small file folder is always displayed beside the
name of a directory, directories are often called folders.
Go To Button
category of behaviors. Go To buttons are used to navigate from one
communication page or popup to another. These buttons are usually
shaped like folders.
G-3
L
M
Label
A label is text that can be placed on a button, tab control, page or
popup. Labels can be used as the title of a page or as an indication of
the vocabulary in a button.
Menu
A menu is a group of tools with related functions that can be used to
customize and maintain your device. Menus can include buttons,
viewports, scroll buttons, sliders, check boxes and text boxes. Menus
are presented in windows.
Menu Button
Menus often include buttons that link to other windows or menus.
Selecting a menu button will usually take you to a window with
several options or to a menu with the same name as the button.
Message Window
The Message Window is an area on a page or popup where a text or
symbol message can be composed. When the Message Window is
selected, the device will speak the text inside it. The size and location
of the Message Window may vary, but moving from page to page will
not delete or alter its contents.
G-4
DynaVox Systems LLC
P
Page
A page contains a collection of buttons that represent words,
phrases, sentences, behaviors or links to other pages and popups. A
page covers the entire touch screen below the title bar.
Popup
A popup is a mini page that is displayed on top of a full size page. A
popup usually contains a group of buttons that are related to a
specific topic or activity. A popup can also contain a mini Message
Window.
Predictor Button
Predictor buttons are found on keyboard pages or popups. As you
use the keyboard buttons to compose a message, the DynaVox
Series 4 prediction feature anticipates your word choices and
displayed in predictor buttons.
Pull-Down Menu
A pull-down menu contains a list of options that is displayed only
when the menu is active. When it is inactive, this menu appears to be
a labeled bar. An arrow inside the bar indicates that the menu can be
opened. To see the pull-down menu options, select the menu and it
will expand to its full size. Select one of the options to close the
menu. When the menu is closed it will display only the selected
option.
G-5
R
S
Recency Button
Recency buttons are found on keyboard pages or popups that feature
predictor buttons. As you are typing, recency buttons predict only the
words and phrases that you have used recently.
Scroll Bar
Scroll bars are used to navigate through the options in a viewport.
These vertical or horizontal bars have an arrow shaped button (scroll
button) at each end. Each time a scroll button is selected, the list in
the viewport will move one interval in the direction of the button’s
arrow (up, down, right or left). Scroll bars can also work like a slider.
A slider thumb on the bar indicates the position of the cursor and can
be slid along the bar to reposition the list in the viewport.
Search Box
A search box is an area on a page that will fill with symbol buttons
when the page is opened by the selection of a button with a Go to
Page & Search behavior. When a Go to Page & Search behavior is
assigned to a button on a communication page, criteria for a
vocabulary search are defined and a page with a search box is
selected. Then, when the button with the Go to Page & Search
behavior is selected, the page with the search box will open and the
search box will fill with buttons with vocabulary that meets the search
criteria.
Slider
A slider is a vertical or horizontal bar that shows the current setting of
a function, such as volume or battery power, within a possible range
of settings. Slider settings are adjusted by moving a slider thumb
along the bar.
G-6
DynaVox Systems LLC
Symbol
Symbols are pictures that can be used to represent vocabulary. They
can be placed on buttons, tab controls, pages or popups. DynaVox
symbols are called DynaSyms.
Symbol Button
This basic button is usually a square button that features a symbol
and a label. It can be used for communication (with an Insert
Label/Insert Text or Speak Label/Insert Text behavior) or as a
command button. Many behaviors can be assigned to a symbol
button, including the commands to activate a macro or perform an
infrared command.
T
Tab Control
Tab controls are used to navigate between multiple layers of buttons
on a page. These layers are called panes. The top of each pane
features a tab. A pane is displayed whenever its tab is selected.
There can be up to six panes on a page.
Text Box
Text boxes provide an area where text can be entered. The person
using the device can enter text with a physical keyboard that is
connected to the device or with a special system keyboard popup.
Title Bar
The DynaVox title bar is always displayed at the top of the touch
screen. The title bar features a blue DynaVox logo, an arrow button
that can be used to open the main pull-down menu, the green Modify
button (see Section 5) and other active tools.
G-7
V
W
G-8
Viewport
A viewport is an area on some menus where a list of files or other
items is displayed. The viewport may sometimes be too small to
display the entire list. A scroll bar beside the viewport allows you to
move through the whole list.
Window
A window is a box that appears on the touch screen to inform you of
the status of an operation, provide a text box or request a
confirmation.
DynaVox Systems LLC
Symbols
Index
Index
Symbols
( behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
) behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
0–9
8 Button Preschool page set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
A
Abbreviation Browser menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
15 Button Teen page set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
abbreviation expansion(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13, 4-15
importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18, 4-19, 4-21
sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
30 Button Child page set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Abbreviation Expansions behavior . . . . . . . . . A-11
3100 device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Activate a Macro behavior . . . . . 4-175, 4-222, A-5
40 Button Conversation page set . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Active Area tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24, 3-123
8 Button Auditory Scanning page set . . . . . . . . 2-13
active area(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
12 Button Adult page set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
15 Button Auditory Scanning page set . . . . . . . 2-14
Mighty Mo/Mini Mo User’s Guide
Part # 11601-0001
I-1
Index
def. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123
Active Label tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22, 3-132
active label(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
def. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
background color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140
to a Macintosh computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
to a Windows computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
to data storage card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
with removable USB storage device . . . . . . 7-3
See also restoring files.
backlight timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Backspace behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5, A-24
Backup Upgrade menu . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-12, 7-21
Add Prefix behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
checking charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13, 6-14
Add Suffix behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
Battery Information behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Alt Key behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
behavior
( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Abbreviation Expansions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Activate a Macro . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175, 4-222, A-5
Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Add Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
Add Suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
Alt Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Alternate Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
Auto Expand On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Autocapitalize On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Autoclear On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Autospacing On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Backspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5, A-24
Battery Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Cancel & Close System Keyboard . . . . . . . A-16
Caps Lock Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Change Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
Change Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Change Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
Change Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
Change Word Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Chat Mode On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Add behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Alternate Output behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
audio cue(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38, 2-42, 3-122
search boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161
Audio Feedback menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
audio feedback. See also audio cue(s)
Audio Touch selection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Auditory Scanning selection method . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Auto Expand On/Off behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Autocapitalize On/Off behavior . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Autoclear On/Off behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Autospacing On/Off behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
B
backing up files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
I-2
B
DynaVox Systems LLC
B
Index
Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5, A-25
Clear IR Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Close All Popups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Close Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5, A-31
Concept Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Context Prediction On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Copy to ’Insert Text’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Copy to ’Speak Text’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Cosine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Ctrl Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Cursor Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Cursor Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Cursor Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Cursor Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
Delete Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
Delete Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5, A-26
Deselect Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
Desymbolate the Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
Dictionary Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Divide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Edit Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Edit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Enqueue IR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Equal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Expand Abbreviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
File Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Find Similar Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Flexible Abbreviation Expansion On/Off . . A-37
Go to Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176, A-5, A-31
Go to Page & Search . . 3-158, 4-177, A-5, A-31
Go to Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-181, A-6
Highlight as You Speak On/Off . . . . . . . . . A-37
Insert Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Insert Label . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 3-162, A-6, A-27
Insert New Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6, A-27
Insert Text . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 4-184, A-6, A-27
Interface Features Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
IR Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Learn Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Part # 11601-0001
Line Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Line End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Load File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Load Text and Symbolate . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Macro Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Message Window End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Message Window Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Minimize Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Mouse Pause On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37
MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Multiply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Next Paragraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Next Sentence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Next Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Normal Key Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
OK & Close System Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Open Popup Exclusively . . . . .4-182, A-6, A-32
Page Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6, A-32
Page Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Page Editing Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Page Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7, A-32
Page Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183, A-7
Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Perform GEWA Jupiter Command . 4-196, A-14
Perform IR Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-191, A-15
Perform IR X10 Command . . . . . . . 4-193, A-15
Perform Tash Phone Command . . . 4-198, A-15
Play a Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151, A-18
Prediction Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Prediction Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Previous Paragraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Previous Sentence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Previous Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Print All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Print Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Print Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Print Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Reciprocal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Reminders Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
I-3
Index
Reports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Save Message Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Save Message Window As . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
Save to Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Scroll Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
Scroll Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
Search Again for Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
Search for a Page with Content . . . . . . . . . A-32
Search for Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
Select Previous Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
Send Continuous Mouse Move . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Send IR Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Send Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Send Key Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Send Key Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Send Mouse Button Click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Send Mouse Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Send SerialKeys Command . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Send Special Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Send Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Set Default Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
Set Scan Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Set Selection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Shift Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Show Word Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
Shut Down Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Sine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Sing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136, A-19
Software Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Speak Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, A-7, A-33
Speak Message Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
Speak on Entry On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37
Speak Paragraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
Speak Random Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
Speak Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Speak Sentence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Speak Text . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 4-185, A-7, A-34
Speak Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Speech Controls Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
I-4
B
Spell Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
Square Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Squared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Start Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Stop Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Symbol Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Symbol Spell Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Symbolate the Selected Text . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Temporary Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Temporary Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
User Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Volume Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Volume Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Volume Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Word Prediction On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37
Y to the X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Behavior Editor menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45, 4-171
behavior(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-38, 4-170
def. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45, 4-173
adding to buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
adding to multiple buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
buttons in search boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
close page behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
combining with macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-218
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
infrared commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-191, 4-193
multiple See macro(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-218
open page behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-200
Box tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26, 3-182
box(es) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
border color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-181
3-184
3-184
3-183
3-182
DynaVox Systems LLC
C
Index
label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-184, 3-187
label color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-185
label font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-186
brightness setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
browser, def. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
button, def. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
Button Grid tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23, 3-105
Button tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22, 3-103
button(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
alphabetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-168
audio cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38, 2-42, 3-122
behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38, 2-45, 3-117
behaviors for multiple buttons . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
behaviors in search boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
border color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
border width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
button click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
clearing contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-170
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39, 2-47, 3-115
creating a grid of buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
creating in page edit mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
filling by pouring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
filling from search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
filling from text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39, 2-48
highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38, 2-41
scroll, size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
search, size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38, 2-43
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3, 2-38, 2-40, 3-169
Part # 11601-0001
C
Calculator behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Cancel & Close System Keyboard behavior . . A-16
Caps Lock Key behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
carryin

Note - Rehavista

Transcription

Similar documents

User Guide

View our Events Brochure

Untitled - CooGiE`s Cafe Santa Monica

Hotmail/Live/ MSN/Outlook.com

Disney Princess Magic Wand Laptop

- Saurashtra University

Time Sheet Reminder

Sirius Satellite Radio Operations

Alcatel FreeDesktop - Quick Guide

welcome to bell expressvu